JP7346035B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a change effect on a meter after the action of a role object, and the degree of change in the meter after the movement of the role object differs depending on whether or not a preview effect is executed before the movement of the role object. There is (
For example, see Patent Document 1. ).

JP 2018-7755 Publication

However, the game was not sufficiently interesting.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

(A) A gaming machine capable of playing games,
comprising a performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance and a changing performance corresponding to the specific performance,
The change effect includes a first change effect that changes the display mode of a predetermined display, and a second change effect that changes the display mode of a specific display different from the predetermined display,
The display mode of the predetermined display includes a first predetermined mode, a second predetermined mode, and a specific mode that are different from each other,
The performance execution means executes a special performance that notifies a first content advantageous to the player in response to the fact that the display mode of the predetermined display changes to the specific mode by executing the first change performance. death,
changing the display mode of the specific display by executing the second change effect to notify the player of a second content that is different from the first content and is advantageous to the player;
When the special effect is executed in response to the display mode of the predetermined display changing from the first predetermined mode to the specific mode due to the first change effect; When the special effect is executed in response to the display mode changing from the second predetermined mode to the specific mode, the effect period of the first change effect is the same, and the effect period is the same as when the special effect is executed in response to the change of the display mode from the second predetermined mode to the specific mode, and The degree of advantage of the first content is different,
A gaming machine characterized by:
In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine, etc.) that can play games, and has a specific performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-8). B), as shown in FIG. 13-9 (B), it is possible to perform a role effect that moves the movable body 026SH32), and also to perform a change effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-8) in response to the specific effect. The meter effect shown in FIG. 13-14 (left side), the background effect shown in FIG. 13-14 (left side), the active display effect shown in FIG. 13-14 (right side), etc.). In addition, the change effect is a first change effect (for example, the meter effect shown in FIG. 13-8, etc.) that changes the display mode of a predetermined display (for example, the meter value of the meter gauge section 026SHMTG, a background image, an active display, etc.). , the background effect shown in Figure 13-14 (left side), the active display effect shown in Figure 13-14 (right side), and specific displays different from the predetermined displays (for example, total prize pitch count display 026SH130, round A second change effect that changes the display mode of the number display (026SH106, etc.) (for example, a total award ball number update effect using the total award ball number update image 026SHKSEF shown in FIG. 13-9, etc., 026SH32EF02 shown in FIG. 13-16, etc.) The effect execution means changes the display mode of the predetermined display to a specific mode (for example, the meter value is "4 (MAX)", In response to the background image changing to red, the active display changing to red, etc.), a special effect is executed to notify the player of the first content that is advantageous to the player (for example, development of super reach, etc.), By executing the second change effect, the display mode of the specific display is changed to provide a second content (for example, the total number of prize balls (or total number of prize balls) that is different from the first content and is advantageous to the player). (increase), progress to the next round, etc.).
According to such a configuration, interest can be improved.
(1) A gaming machine according to another invention of the present application is a gaming machine that can play games (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, etc.), and is a performance execution means that can execute a performance (for example, performance control CPU 120, etc.), and the performance execution means controls the display mode of a predetermined display (for example, meter value of meter gauge section 026SHMTG, background image, active display, etc.) in a first situation (for example, reach fluctuation, etc.). (For example, the meter effect shown in Figure 13-8, the background effect shown in Figure 13-14 (left side), the active display effect shown in Figure 13-14 (right side), etc.) that changes the In response to the fact that the display mode of the predetermined display has changed to a specific mode (for example, the meter value is "4 (MAX)", the background image changes to red, the active display changes to red, etc.) A special performance that notifies the contents of the first item (for example, development to super reach, etc.) and a second situation that is different from the first situation (for example, a small winning prize during a small winning RUSH, an interval period of a jackpot game state, etc.) ), change the display mode of a specific display different from the predetermined display (for example, total prize ball number display 026SH130, round number display 026SH106, etc.) (for example, add the number of prize balls due to the small hit prize, add 1 to the number of rounds) etc.) and informs the player of a second content that is different from the first content and is advantageous to the player (for example, the total number of prize balls (or an increase in the total number of prize balls), progression to the next round, etc.). (For example, the total award pitch number update effect using the total award pitch number update image 026SHKSEF shown in FIG. 13-9, etc., the round number display update effect using 026SH32EF02 shown in FIG. 13-16, etc.) , at least a part of the production mode is common between when the change production (for example, meter production, etc.) is executed and when the predetermined production (for example, total award pitch update production, etc.) is executed; It is characterized in that a performance (for example, an accessory performance that moves the movable body 026SH32 shown in FIGS. 13-8(B) and 13-9(B), etc.) is executed.

According to such a configuration, interest can be improved.

(2) The gaming machine described in (1) above has an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state, etc.), a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small winning gaming state, etc.), and the special state. state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 1
03)), and the second situation is that the game medium passes through a predetermined area in response to being controlled to the special state in the special state (for example, a small win during a small win RUSH). winning a prize, etc.), and the performance execution means displays the specific display (for example, The second content (for example, the total number of prize balls) is notified by changing the display mode of the total prize ball number display (026SH130, etc.) (for example, adding the number of prize balls due to the winning of the small hit, etc.) Good too.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest in a gaming machine that can control an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, a special state different from the advantageous state, and a special state that is easily controlled by the special state. .

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the specific performance may include a movable body for performance (
For example, it may be an effect that moves a movable body 026SH32, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by using the movable body for presentation.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above, the performance execution means is capable of executing an effect performance that enhances the performance effect of the specific performance in response to the execution of the specific performance, The effect production that is executed in response to the execution of the specific production in the first situation and the effect production that is executed in response to the execution of the specific production in the second situation have different production modes. It may be something in common. As mentioned above, for example, in FIG. 13-9(C),
In place of the total award pitch count update image 026SHKSEF, use the oval image 026SH in Figure 13-8 (B).
32EF01 may be displayed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above, the performance execution means is capable of executing an effect performance that enhances the performance effect of the specific performance in response to the execution of the specific performance, The effect production that is executed in response to the execution of the specific production in the first situation and the effect production that is executed in response to the execution of the specific production in the second situation are different from each other in production mode. At least a portion may be different. For example, the oval image 0 in Figure 13-8(B)
26SH32EF01 and the total prize pitch count update image 026SHKSEF of FIG. 13-9(C) differ in at least a part of the presentation mode.

According to such a configuration, interest can be improved.

(6) Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine, etc.) that can play games, and is a performance execution means that can execute a performance (for example, a performance control CPU 120, etc.), and the effect execution means executes a change effect (for example, FIG. 13-8 etc.) that changes the display mode of a predetermined display (for example, the meter value of the meter gauge section 026SHMTG, the background image, the active display, etc.). 13-14 (left side), active display effect shown in FIG. 13-14 (right side)), and the display mode of the predetermined display is a specific mode (for example, the meter value 4 (MAX), the background image changes to red, the active display changes to red, etc.), the first content that is advantageous for the player (for example, development of super reach, etc.) A special display to be announced and a specific display different from the predetermined display (for example, total prize pitch number display 026SH130, round number display 026SH106
etc.) by changing the display mode (for example, adding the number of prize balls resulting from the small hit, adding 1 to the number of rounds, etc.) to create a second content that is advantageous for the player, which is different from the first content (for example, A predetermined effect (for example, a total prize ball number update effect using the total prize ball number update image 026SHKSEF shown in FIG. 13-9, etc.) 026SH32EF02 shown in 026SH32EF02 etc.) can be executed, and when the change effect (for example, meter effect, etc.) is executed, the predetermined effect (for example, the total number of prize balls) can be executed. When an update effect, etc.) is executed, a specific effect (for example, moving the movable body 026SH32 shown in FIGS. 13-8(B) and 13-9(B)) that has at least part of the same effect is executed. It is characterized by the fact that a special performance (e.g., a character effect that makes the user play) is performed.

According to such a configuration, interest can be improved.

(7) Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing games, and includes a production execution means (for example, production control CPU 1
20 etc.), and the change effect is provided with a predetermined display (for example, meter gauge section 026SHMT
The first change effect (G meter value, background image, active display, etc.) that changes the display mode (G meter value, background image, active display, etc.)
For example, the meter effect shown in Figure 13-8, the background effect shown in Figure 13-14 (left side),
A second change that changes the display mode of the active display effect shown in FIG. 13-14 (right side) and a specific display different from the predetermined display (for example, total prize pitch number display 026SH130, round number display 026SH106, etc.) Production (for example, total award pitch count update image 0 shown in Figure 13-9 etc.
26SHKSEF's total award ball count update production, 026SH32EF shown in Figure 13-16 etc.
02), and the effect execution means executes the first change effect to change the display mode of the predetermined display to a specific mode (for example, when the meter value is "4").
(MAX)", the background image changes to red, the active display changes to red, etc.), a special notification that notifies the first content that is advantageous to the player (for example, development of super reach, etc.) By executing the production and executing the second change production, the display mode of the specific display is changed to provide a second content different from the first content that is advantageous to the player (for example, the total number of prize balls ( or an increase in the total number of prize balls), progression to the next round, etc.).

According to such a configuration, interest can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 1st special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of accessory control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a payout control board. It is a rear view showing the pachinko game machine. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. (1) to (3) are explanatory diagrams showing the performance mode of the setting suggestion performance, and (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the performance mode of the setting suggestion performance. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing. FIG. 3 is a timing diagram showing the output period of a security signal. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of notification when a setting change flag is set when the power is turned on. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power outage occurs before the set value is determined, and (2) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power outage occurs after the set value is determined. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the configuration of the special variable winning ball device in the characteristic part 052IW. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards etc. in the characteristic part 052IW. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a big hit probability and a small hit probability for each set value. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a big hit probability and a small hit probability for each set value. It is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern (variation time) of special symbols and decorative symbols. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern (variation time) of special symbols and decorative symbols. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern (variation time) of special symbols and decorative symbols. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a small hit fluctuation pattern table. It is an explanatory view for explaining an opening pattern of a special variable winning ball device. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of a variable winning ball device and a special variable winning ball device in the KT state. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of a variable winning ball device and a special variable winning ball device in the KT state. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of a variable winning ball device and a special variable winning ball device in the KT state. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the production control command. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the production control command. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows accessory control normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows gate passage waiting processing. It is a flowchart showing processing during jackpot opening. It is a flowchart showing jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows small hit end processing. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the gaming state changes. It is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol process processing. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the normal electric accessory release pre-processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of command analysis processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of command analysis processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of command analysis processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect processing at the time of over-winning. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a suggestion performance determination table when over-winning. It is a flowchart showing the suggestion effect processing when winning a small hit. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a suggestion production determination table when winning a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows prize pitch number display suggestion production processing. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a prize pitch number display suggestion production determination table. It is a flowchart which shows prize pitch number emphasis production processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a prize pitch number emphasizing effect determination table. 12 is a flowchart showing variable display start waiting processing. 3 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a setting value suggestion performance determination table. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance determination table. It is a flowchart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows waiting processing per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows waiting processing per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows ending effect processing. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a performance mode of a setting value suggestion performance. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the performance aspect of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance. It is an explanatory view for explaining a display mode of right-handed hitting information. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the production mode of the over-winning suggestion performance, the small hit winning suggestion production, and the prize ball number display suggestion production. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the production mode of the over-winning suggestion performance, the small hit winning suggestion production, and the prize ball number display suggestion production. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation process in modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation process in modification 1. It is an explanatory view for explaining control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the variable display of one special symbol in Modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation process in modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation process in modification 2. It is an explanatory view for explaining control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while executing the variable display of one special symbol in Modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation process in modification 3. It is an explanatory view for explaining control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the variable display of one special symbol in Modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation process in modification 4. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation process in modification 4. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the game state and production mode after the jackpot game related to the characteristic part 020SH. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production mode setting processing concerning characteristic part 020SH. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display compatible display control processing related to the feature section 020SH. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an initial color determination table and a final color determination table of a variable display compatible display. It is a flowchart showing an example of a suggestion performance execution process performed by the performance control CPU 120 when the small winning game state is controlled. It is a flowchart showing an example of a suggestion performance execution process performed by the performance control CPU 120 when the small winning game state is controlled. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decision table of various suggestion productions. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the change production execution process of the display corresponding to variable display which CPU120 for production control performs during variable display. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of transition of a production screen in small hit RUSH mode. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the performance which changes the display mode of the pending display during chance time mode. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a transition of a fake effect of changing the display mode of the hold display during the chance time mode. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of setting value suggestion performance during chance time mode. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of probability change suggestion performance during chance time mode. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of small hit release timing and execution timing of various suggestion productions. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the gaming state and production mode after the jackpot game in the feature section 022SH. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the jackpot type determination table of the characteristic part 022SH. It is a flowchart showing an example of bonus rush icon control processing at the time of starting a jackpot. It is a flowchart showing an example of bonus rush icon control processing during a round game. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of bonus rush icon control processing during the ending period. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of transition of the performance screen from normal mode to small hit RUSH mode. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the performance screen from the small hit RUSH mode to the chance time mode. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the performance screen when the small hit RUSH mode continues. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of bonus rush icon control processing in variable display. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a bonus/rush icon display change determination table. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the performance screen when changing the display mode of the bonus rush icon during variable display. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of transition of the production screen according to Modification 1 when changing the display mode of the bonus rush icon. It is an explanatory diagram explaining the structure of a part of game board 2 of the game machine concerning characteristic part 026SH. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a meter performance executed in the gaming machine according to the feature section 026SH. It is an explanatory diagram explaining various timings. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern of special symbols and decorative symbols in the gaming machine according to the feature section 026SH. It is an explanatory diagram explaining meter production etc. It is an explanatory diagram explaining meter production etc. It is a flowchart showing an example of performance determination processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the feature section 026SH. It is a figure showing an example of performance operation concerning characteristic part 026SH. It is a figure showing an example of performance operation concerning characteristic part 026SH. It is an explanatory diagram explaining various timings. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating background effects and the like. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating active display effects and the like. It is a flowchart showing an example of performance determination processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the feature section 026SH. It is a figure showing an example of performance operation concerning characteristic part 026SH. It is an explanatory diagram explaining various timings. It is a figure showing an example of performance operation concerning characteristic part 026SH.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the gaming area), a variable display (also referred to as a special game) of special symbols (also referred to as special symbols) as multiple types of special identification information is provided. First thing to do
A special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. Special designs include numbers indicating "0" to "9" and "
It is represented by a lighting pattern such as "-". The special design may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

Further, below the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, a right strike indicator 26 is provided to encourage a right strike operation in which a firing operation is performed aiming at the right side of the game area. There is. The right-handed display 26 is composed of, for example, an LED, and its lighting is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11 (see FIG. 2).

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game,
A variable display of decorative patterns (designs indicating numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special patterns is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, "
Decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, vertically scrolled or updated) in the left, middle, and right decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a display area is provided for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending. In this example, a first hold display area 5A for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure, and a second hold display area 5A for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure. A region 5B is provided. Note that a display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 to display an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. The pending display and the active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible displays that correspond to variable displays.

Further, on the right side of the image display device 5, a right-handed hitting notification LED 37 is provided to encourage a right-handed hitting operation. In addition, the lighting of the right hit notification LED 37 is controlled by the performance control CPU 120 mounted on the performance control board 12 (see FIG. 2).

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. Further, the sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

Also, at a predetermined position on the game board 2, a first reservation display 25 including a plurality of LEDs is provided.
A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided, the first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit, and the second hold indicator 25B displays the number of hold memories according to the number of lit LEDs. Displays the second pending memory number.

A winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning opening is provided below the image display device 5. The game ball that entered the first starting prize opening is guided to the back of the game board 2, and the first starting opening switch 2
2A. When a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 22A, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on this detection information.

In addition, a row of nails 19 is provided on the right side of the first starting prize opening, and is configured to prevent game balls flowing down from the right side of the gaming area from entering the area where the first starting winning opening is provided. has been done.
In this way, by providing the row of nails 19 that prevents game balls flowing down from the right side of the game area from entering, it is possible to fire the game ball aiming at the left side of the game area (so-called left-handed shooting). The game ball is configured to be able to win a prize in the first starting prize opening only when the player performs the following operation.

In addition, this example shows a case in which the row of nails 19 is provided so that the game ball can be won in the first starting prize opening only when the left-handed operation is performed, but such a mode is not applicable. Not limited to. For example, the first starting winning hole may be provided on the left side of the gaming area so that a game ball can be won in the first starting winning hole only when a left-handed operation is performed, or the first starting winning hole may be configured such that a game ball can be won in the first starting winning hole. The opening may be provided on the left side of the gaming area, and the row of nails 19 may also be provided so that the game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when a left-handed operation is performed.

A passage gate 41 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.

A special variable winning ball device 7 that forms a big winning opening is provided below the passage gate 41. The special variable winning ball device 7 extends in the left and right direction in a slightly inclined state, and moves forward and backward in the front and back direction a plate-shaped bottom member that is formed as the bottom of the channel through which the game ball flows down.
A grand prize opening located below a bottom member is changed into an open state (also referred to as an open state) in which a game ball can win a prize and a closed state (also referred to as a closed state) in which a game ball cannot win a prize. Special variable winning ball device 7
moves the bottom member forward in a jackpot game state that occurs when a specific display result (jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. Opening control is executed to move the bottom member backward from the closed state and open the big prize opening, which is the winning area.

Below the special variable winning ball device 7, there are provided a special variable winning ball device 17 that forms a special winning hole for small winnings, and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning hole. As shown in , the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged adjacent to it on the right side. These special variable winning ball devices 17 and variable winning ball devices 6B
is located below the bottom member by moving forward and backward the plate-shaped bottom member that extends in the left and right direction in a slightly inclined state and is formed as the bottom of the channel through which the game ball flows down. A special prize opening or a second starting prize opening is changed into an open state (also referred to as an open state) in which a game ball can win a prize and a closed state (also referred to as a closed state) in which a game ball cannot win a prize. The special variable winning ball device 17 is
In the small winning game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small winning pattern) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, the bottom member is moved forward. Opening control is executed to move the bottom member backward from the closed state and open the special winning opening which becomes the winning area. In addition, the variable winning ball device 6B is the normal symbol display 2
When the symbol hits 0 and is displayed, the bottom member is moved forward from the closed state, and the bottom member is moved backward backwards to open the second start winning hole, which becomes the winning area. Executes opening control.

In addition, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6
B is formed to have a similar structure. In addition, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed in such a manner that the bottom member is slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right, so the game balls that fall onto the special variable winning ball device 7 If the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state, it moves on the special variable winning ball device 7 from the upper left to the lower right and falls onto the variable winning ball device 6B below.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. In addition, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed in such a manner that the bottom members are slightly inclined from the upper right to the lower left. If the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are in the closed state, the game balls on the winning ball device 6B move from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B. Go. In addition, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are arranged next to each other, the special variable winning ball device 7 does not win and the variable winning ball device 6B does not win. If the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting prize opening is in the open state, the game ball that has fallen into the second starting prize opening will enter the second starting prize opening and become the special variable winning ball. Game balls do not flow toward the device 17. On the other hand, if the second starting winning hole is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 17. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward and the special winning hole is in an open state, the game ball enters the special winning hole. Furthermore, if the special winning a prize opening is not also in an open state, the game ball will move on the bottom member of the special variable winning a prize ball device 17 and fall as it is toward the out opening.

In addition, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are provided with a plurality of regulating pieces that reduce the speed of the game balls flowing down on the bottom member. There is. In this example, the regulation piece is provided in the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B, so that the game flows downward from the upper left to the lower right or from the upper right to the lower left. The flowing direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanderes with a movement in the front-back direction component, and the time taken for the ball to flow down is delayed compared to when there is no regulating piece.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is placed on the left side, and the variable winning ball device 6B is placed on the right side. The bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed to be gently inclined from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the special variable winning ball device starts from the variable winning ball device 6B. Since the game balls are configured to flow toward the player 17, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side. It can be said that

A switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a game ball that has won a prize in the grand prize opening is provided in the grand prize opening. When game balls are detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to open and the big winning opening is in the open state,
This results in an advantageous situation for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to close and the grand prize opening is in a closed state, the game ball cannot pass through (enter) the grand prize opening and obtain a prize ball, so it is difficult for the player to be in a disadvantageous condition.

A switch (second count switch 24) that can detect a game ball that has won a prize in the special winning hole is provided in the special winning hole. When game balls are detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning hole that is in the open state in the special variable winning ball device 17, the number of prize balls is small compared to when the game ball enters the big winning hole. For example, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball passes (enters) other winning holes such as the first starting winning hole 1 and the second starting winning hole. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to open and the special winning hole is in the open state, it will be in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to close and the special winning hole is in the closed state, it is impossible for the player to get a prize ball by passing (entering) the game ball through the special winning hole. be in a disadvantageous condition.

In addition, a second starting opening switch 22B is provided in the second starting winning opening that can detect a game ball that has won a prize in the second starting winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 22B, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be collectively referred to as starting winning hole or starting opening.

In addition, this pachinko game machine 1 includes a passage gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole), a variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole), and a special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning hole). is provided on the right side of the gaming area, so when playing a jackpot game or in the KT state (so-called small winning time), the player can aim at the right side of the gaming area and perform a firing operation (so-called right-handed operation). )I do.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the left and right lower sides of the game area), general winning holes 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area), there is a normal symbol display 2.
0 is set. As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition, in this pachinko game machine 1, since the normal symbol fluctuation display is executed based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41, the passing gate 41 plays the role of a normal starting area. However, even when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the game enters the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, so the passage gate 41 also plays a role as an operating area. Therefore, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that serves as both a normal starting region and an operating region.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, there are speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects, etc.
is provided, and furthermore, a frame LED 9 for game effects is provided around the gaming area.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), which operates according to the performance.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. )
A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided. A batted ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided below the upper tray from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. stick controller 31
A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Summary of game progress)
In this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (so-called left-handed operation) aiming at the left side of the gaming area. Pachinko machine 1
When the player performs a left-handed batting operation by rotating the batting ball operation handle 30 provided by the player and the game ball enters the first starting prize opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol display device 4A displays 1. A special map game is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the first special symbol game, a specific special symbol (jackpot symbol, e.g. "
7”, the actual symbols differ depending on the jackpot type described below. ) is stopped and displayed, it becomes a “jackpot”. Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "losing" symbol. In addition, even in the first special pattern game, it may be configured such that the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed at an extremely low rate, resulting in a "small winning".

After the display result in the first special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player on the condition that the game ball passes through a passage gate 41.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, the opening mode of the big prize opening (
There are multiple types of game states (normal state, probability variable state (high probability state), KT state, high base state, etc.) after the jackpot game state (number of rounds and maximum opening period), and the jackpot type is set according to these. has been done. As a jackpot type, there is a jackpot type where you can get many prize balls,
There may be provided a jackpot type in which there are few prize balls or hardly any prize balls.

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a variable probability state, a KT state, or a high base state.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), probability variable control is executed in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

In the KT state, KT control is executed which makes it easier to get a small hit than in the normal state. In this pachinko game machine 1, it is possible to obtain a certain amount of prize balls even in the small winning game state, so it is an advantageous state for the player, although the number of prize balls obtained is smaller than in the jackpot playing state.

In the high base state, a control (time saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period of varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state (time saving state), and the "general symbol hit" in the regular symbol game is executed. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning hole is also executed by improving the probability that the game will occur more than the normal state. In the high base state, special symbols (especially the second
Since this is a state in which the variation efficiency of special symbols is improved, this is an advantageous state for the player.

The variable probability state, KT state, and high base state continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the special symbol game being executed a predetermined number of times and the next jackpot game state being started. do. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (number-cutting probability variation, etc.).

A normal state is a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a variable probability state, a KT state, or a high base state, and the display result in the special drawing game is a "jackpot" state. The probability that the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a predetermined recovery process is not executed after power is turned on, such as when a system reset is performed) It is a state where it is done.

When the jackpot game is finished and the gaming state is controlled to the variable probability state, KT state, or high base state,
It is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (right-handed firing operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. When the player performs a right-hand hitting operation by rotating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 and the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, a normal symbol game on the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a regular symbol other than the regular symbol per symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol will be "regular symbol losing".
becomes. When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In the second special pattern game, a specific special pattern (jackpot pattern, e.g. "
7”, the actual symbols differ depending on the jackpot type described below. ) is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "big hit", and when a predetermined special symbol (small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the second special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player on the condition that the game ball passes through a passage gate 41. After the display result in the second special figure game becomes "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the small winning game state, the special winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed).

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. In addition,
The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the frame LED 9
This may be done by turning on/off the light, moving the movable body 32, etc.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern )
is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example,"
The same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (
For example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C,
Decorative symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on a predetermined active line in 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. It's okay.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, an LED control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 2, for example. In addition,
Various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, a power supply board, etc. are arranged on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, and a solenoid circuit 111.
etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 and a RAM (Random A
ccess Memory) 102, CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, and random number circuit 10
4 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, ROM10
1 (data such as variation patterns to be described later, production control commands to be described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions to be described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). Controls (drives) the display 25A, second hold display 25B, regular hold display 25C, etc.
and an output port for transmitting the solenoid drive signal and solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 includes various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, starting port switches (first starting port switch 22A and second starting port switch 22B), count switches (first count switch 23 and second count switch 24). )) (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and a switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 receives a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81, solenoid 82, and solenoid 83) from the game control microcomputer 100, and converts it into a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory or a solenoid for a big prize opening door. It is transmitted to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is
It is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. ))
, the game status (for example, the start and end of variable display, the opening status of the big prize opening, the occurrence of a prize, the number of pending memories, the game state), the occurrence of an error, etc., and the like.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, the ROM
Various data (data such as various tables) stored in the RAM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The production control CPU 120 is a controller sensor unit 35A and a push sensor 35.
The display control unit 123 may be instructed to execute the performance based on a detection signal from B (a signal output when an operation by a player is detected, and appropriately indicates the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character G
ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays the effect image on the image display device 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed to the image display device 5 based on an instruction to execute the effect from the effect control CPU 120.
to be displayed. The display control unit 123 further performs audio control of a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the frame LED 9 and the right-hand hit notification LED 37. It supplies it to the board 13, and supplies an LED signal (a signal that specifies the lighting/extinguishing mode of the LED) to the LED control board 14. In addition, the display control unit 12
3 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The LED control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the frame LED 9 and right-handed hitting notification LED 37, and drives the frame LED 9 and right-handed hitting notification LED 37 based on the LED signal in the manner specified by the LED signal. The frame LED 9 and the right-handed hit notification LED 37 are turned on/off.
In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the LED.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of LED lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and LED signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 generates various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects.
Updatable numerical data indicating . The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, L
ED signal).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the LED control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3
). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (
Step S3; Yes), and initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, C
The PU 103 is an RA that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102.
Perform M clear processing and set initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command instructing initialization to the production control board 12 (step S9). When receiving the performance control command, the performance control CPU 120 displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), the RAM
It is determined whether or not backup data is stored in 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power outage), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes unable to operate due to the power supply stop. In this power supply stop processing, processing for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, data protection processing for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes adding error detection codes (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The backed up data includes various data for progressing the game (including various flags, various timer states, etc.)
In addition, the status of the backup flag and error detection code are also included. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. Backup flag is off and RAM1
If backup data is not stored in 02 (step S4; No), initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes),
The CPU 103 performs a data check on the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal or not (step S5). In step S5, it is determined whether the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, for example, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that these match, RAM10
2 is determined to be normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CP
U103 performs a recovery process (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the gaming state is restored to the state at the time of power supply stoppage, and if the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols will be restarted from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. That will happen.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command to the production control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S7). In line with this, a performance control command that specifies the backed-up gaming state before the power outage, or a performance control command that specifies the display result of the special game that is currently being executed if the special game is being executed. A command may also be sent. These commands can be the same as the commands that are set to be sent in the special design process described later. When the performance control CPU 120 receives a performance control command that specifies the time of recovery from a power outage, it notifies the image display device 5, for example, that recovery from a power outage has been completed or that recovery from a power outage is in progress. Display the screen to do so. The production control CPU 120 is
An appropriate screen display may be performed based on the performance control command.

After finishing the recovery process or initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (
Step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the gaming control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 10 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms).
3, and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 10
3, first, by executing a predetermined switch process, the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 are activated via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Information indicating the number of prizes, etc.)
, and outputs data such as probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variation state has occurred, etc.) (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process (step S25A). C
When the PU 103 executes the first special symbol process process every time the timer interrupts, management of execution and suspension of the first special symbol game is realized (details will be described later). Also, CPU103
executes the second special symbol process process (step S25B). By the CPU 103 executing the second special symbol process process every timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the second special symbol game is realized. In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol simultaneously and in parallel.

Following the first special symbol process and the second special symbol process, the CPU 103 executes the accessory control process (step S25C). When the CPU 103 executes the accessory control process for each timer interrupt, control of the jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of the gaming state, etc. are realized (details will be described later).

Following the accessory control process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26
). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, C
The PU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

Although not shown in FIG. 4, in the game control timer interrupt process, a test terminal is used to output a test signal so that the control status of the game machine can be checked from outside the game machine. Processing is also executed. In the test terminal process, the CPU 103 also performs control to output a test signal (right-handed test signal) that can specify that it is a period in which a right-handed operation is performed. Specifically, in the test terminal process, the CPU 103 performs control to output a right-handed test signal during the KT state, during a jackpot game, during a small win game based on the variable display of the second special symbol. On the other hand, in the test terminal process, the CPU 103 does not perform control to output the right-handed test signal during the small winning game based on the variable display of the first special symbol.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process process. In this first special symbol process, C
The PU 103 first executes a first start winning determination process (step S101A).

In the first starting winning determination process, the occurrence of a starting winning in the first starting winning opening is detected, and the RAM 10
A process of storing pending information in a predetermined area of No. 2 and updating the first pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize enters the first starting winning hole, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information in the first pending storage buffer provided in the RAM 102. be done. Furthermore, a process of pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the first pending memory number, a transmission is performed to send a production control command to the production control board 12 for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the first pending memory number, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. Settings are made. The performance control command at the time of starting winning that is set to be transmitted in this way is controlled by the main board 11 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the first special symbol process process is completed. The signal is transmitted to the board 12.

After executing the first starting winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110A to S113A according to the value of the first special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, each process of the first special symbol process process (step S
In 110A to S113A), transmission settings are made to transmit the production control command corresponding to each process to the production control board 12.

In the first special symbol normal process in step S110A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is “0”
(initial value). In this first special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the first special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, it is determined whether or not the display result of the first special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win", or whether it is a "jackpot". The type of jackpot in the case is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the first special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a loss symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. . After that, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the first special symbol normal process ends.

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

In the first fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111A, the value of the first special figure process flag is “
1". This first fluctuation pattern setting process includes a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or "small hit". This includes processing to determine one of multiple types of variation patterns using . In the first variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the first variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

In the first special symbol variation process in step S112A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is “2”.
is executed when This first special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, and measuring the elapsed time after the first special symbol starts varying. It includes processing to do. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the first special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the first special symbol variation process ends. do.

In addition, in this example, since the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the process moves to the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) and the first
While the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, a small win may occur in the variable display of the second special symbol and the game may be controlled to a small win game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the second special figure process flag is set before the small hit is released). Processing - Determine whether the value corresponds to the small winning end process), and if the small winning game is in progress, do not change the value of the first special symbol process flag from the value corresponding to the first special symbol variation processing. Thus, if the small winning game is not in progress, the value of the first special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop process. By performing such control, the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted during a small winning game based on the variable display of the second special symbol, and the variable display of the first special symbol is resumed after the small winning game is finished. controlled to do so. In addition to such control, for example, during a small winning game based on the fluctuating display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the first special symbol starts fluctuating may be interrupted (the timer may be The update may be suspended).

Further, for example, the small winning ending period as the small winning ending processing period may be configured to vary depending on the gaming state. For example, if the variable display of the first special symbol is configured to be interrupted in the normal state, the interruption period of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes longer, and the execution period of the variable display of the first special symbol and the interruption period become longer. If the difference becomes large, it is necessary to absorb the interruption period by stopping the swinging of the decorative symbols, resulting in a performance that gives the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, in the normal state, it is desirable to make the small winning ending period shorter than in the KT state (first KT state, second KT state). In this case, for example, the small winning ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the normal state, whereas the small winning ending period may be 3 seconds in the KT state.

In addition, in the case of the above configuration, for example, in the first KT state, it is practically difficult for the game ball to win in the small win control and no special effect is performed, so the small win ending period is shortened compared to the second KT state. It may be configured to do so. On the other hand, in the second KT state, since it is easy for the game ball to win in the small win control and an effect that emphasizes the small win control is executed, the small win ending period may be configured to be longer than in the first KT state. . In this case, for example, the small winning ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, while the small winning ending period may be 3 seconds in the second KT state.

Furthermore, the length of the small win fanfare period as the small win opening pre-processing period may be varied depending on the gaming state, similarly to the above small win ending period.

In the first special symbol stop process in step S113A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is “3”.
is executed when This first special symbol stopping process involves stopping the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, and stopping displaying the finalized special symbol that is the display result of the first special symbol (
This includes processing to perform settings for (derivation). Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", a setting process for starting a jackpot game is performed. On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is off and the display result is "small win", processing for starting a small win game is performed. Then, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is "Small hit" or "Loss", the game state is also updated if the number of times cut is completed when the game is controlled to a variable probability state, KT state, or high base state. . When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop process ends.

The process executed in the second special symbol process (step S25B) is the same as the process executed in the first special symbol process (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process described in FIG. 5, if "first" is replaced with "second", the second special symbol process will be explained. Further, each random number value extracted in the first starting winning determination process of the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is stored in the second pending storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as pending information.

In addition, in this example, since the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol can be executed by moving to the second special symbol fluctuation processing. While the first special symbol is being displayed, a small win may occur in the variable display of the first special symbol, and the game may be controlled as a small win game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103
) determines whether or not the small winning game is in progress (specifically, determines whether the value of the first special figure process flag is a value corresponding to the small winning opening preprocessing to the small winning ending process. If the small winning game is in progress, the value of the second special pattern process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the second special symbol fluctuation processing, and if the small winning game is not in progress, the second special pattern process flag is changed. The value of the flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop process. By performing such control, the first
During a small winning game based on the variable display of the special symbols, the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to be restarted after the small winning game is finished. In addition, the control is not limited to such control, for example, during a small winning game based on the fluctuating display of the first special symbol,
It may be configured to interrupt the process of measuring the elapsed time after the second special symbol starts changing (interrupting the update of the timer).

Regarding the small win control based on the variable display of the second special symbol, the length of the small win fanfare period and the small win ending period may also be configured to vary depending on the gaming state.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25C shown in FIG. 4 as the accessory control process process. In this accessory control process, the CPU 10
3 is executed in step S12 according to the value of the accessory control process flag provided in the RAM 102.
Select and execute any of the processes from 0 to S128. In addition, in each process of the accessory control process (steps S120 to S128), transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The accessory control normal process in step S120 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "0". In this accessory control normal processing, it is monitored whether or not the settings for starting the jackpot game have been made, and if the settings for starting the jackpot game have been made, the processing for starting the jackpot game is performed. , the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "1".

The gate passage waiting process in step S121 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "1". In this gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the passage gate 41. When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "2".

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S122 is executed when the accessory control process flag is "2". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start the round execution in the jackpot gaming state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the opening upper limit period for keeping the big winning hole open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S123 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "3". This jackpot opening processing includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a jackpot based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from an open state to a closed state. When returning the grand prize opening to the closed state, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "4" after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the grand prize opening door. , ends the jackpot opening process.

The jackpot release post-processing in step S124 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "4". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3". The value of the flag is updated to "5". When the value of the accessory control process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S125 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "5". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is performed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process that changes the probability in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state. It includes processing for making various settings for starting control, KT control, and high base control. When such settings are made, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot termination process ends.

The small win release preprocessing in step S126 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "6". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the special winning opening to be in an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "7", and the small win release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S127 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "7". This small hit opening process includes a process to measure the elapsed time since the special winning opening was opened, and a timing to return the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the special prize opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "8" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small winning end process in step S128 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "8". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73).
). The timer interrupt flag is set for a predetermined period of time (for example, 2
It is set to the on state every time milliseconds) elapse. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal turning on,
The production control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupts to be disabled, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt-prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt-disabled command (DI command). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Ye
s), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In command analysis processing, for example, main board 1
After reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of No. 1 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, settings and controls corresponding to the read production control commands are performed. be exposed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the contents specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing, etc.
22 is turned on. Further, when the production control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of decorative light emitters such as the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED, and the driving of the movable body 32. Controls such as actions are performed to operate various production devices. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 7 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 8, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 stores, for example, the RAM 12.
The following steps S170 to S1 are performed according to the value of the production process flag set in step 2.
Select and execute one of the 77 processes.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. Image display device 5
If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern will start, the value of the production process flag is set to “
1” and ends the variable display start waiting process.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance processing, the performance control CPU 120
By instructing the display control unit 123, the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 can be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, the movable body 32 can be driven, and the audio control board 13 The output of the command (sound effect signal) to the speakers 8L, 8
Various actions during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as outputting audio and sound effects from R, and lighting/extinguishing/blinking the frame LED 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting commands (illumination signals) to the LED control board 14. Execute production control. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state, if the command specifies the start of the jackpot gaming state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance control process flag is "4". In this small hit production process, the production control CPU 120,
For example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state is set, and various performance controls in the small win game state are executed based on the set content. In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. be"
5” and completes the small hit performance process.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120
For example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of a small winning game state is set, and various performance controls are executed at the end of the small winning gaming state based on the setting contents. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending production process, the production control CPU 120
For example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of a jackpot game state is set, and various performance controls of an ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state are executed based on the setting contents. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol is displayed during the variable display of special symbols (for example, a symbol indicating "-")
Alternatively, variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinguishing of the symbol. Furthermore, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).
.

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , Regular bonus, RT, AT, A
The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of RT and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device etc. The software may also be distributed by being installed on a storage device owned by the software. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of production ("high", "
Expressions such as "low", "different", etc.) may include that one is a percentage of "0%". For example, it also includes a ratio of "0%" on one side and a ratio of "100%" on the other hand or a ratio of less than "100%".

[Explanation regarding characteristic part 21TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 21TM will be explained. The pachinko game machine 1 includes, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a terminal board (information output board) 21TM01 as shown in FIG. 9-1.
Various control boards such as 6 are installed. In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a main board 1
Relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between 1 and the production control board 12
It is also equipped with. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a firing control board, an interface board, etc. are arranged on the back side of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko game machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2 described above, the main board 11 includes a first starting port switch 22A, a second starting port switch 22B, a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, etc. Various parts are connected to the production control board 12, speakers 8L, 8R, frame L
Although various production devices such as ED9 are connected, these are omitted in FIG. 9-1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and as shown in Figure 9-3, the main board 11 is a control board on the main side.
It is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1 while being housed in the M201, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are installed. The main board 11 mainly includes:
A function for setting random numbers used in special figure games, a function for inputting signals from switches arranged at predetermined positions, and an example of command information addressed to a sub-side control board consisting of the production control board 12, etc. It has functions such as outputting and transmitting control commands as control signals and outputting various information to the hall management computer. In addition, the main board 11 performs lighting/extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and controls the first special symbol and the second special symbol. , and control the variable display of normal symbols on the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting/extinguishing/coloring of the normal symbol display 20. It also has control functions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3, the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 that is visible from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and various winning information regarding winnings is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. It also has a display function. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029.
It is possible to switch the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 by operating the TM030.

The main board 11 is equipped with a microcomputer 100 for game control, which receives detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls, as well as various signals such as a power-off signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal. A switch circuit 110 for transmitting data to the terminal board 21TM016, and an information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as security signals from the terminal board 21TM016 are mounted.

The main board 11 shown in FIG. 9-1 is enclosed in a board case 21TM201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, as shown in FIG. 9-3, and a display monitor 21TM029 is placed in the center of the main board 11. (for example, 7 segments), and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewed visually. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 9-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided at the lower center of the back surface of the main board 11. Main board 11
is not visible when the gaming machine frame 3 is not open, so the front side when viewing the main board 11 is the front side when viewing the back side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 open. , which is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front side from which the main board 11 is viewed may be the same as the front side of the pachinko game machine 1.

In addition, the main board 11 (gaming control microcomputer 100) controls each winning opening (big winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning opening, hereinafter referred to as "entering area") The number of game balls entering the game ball is tallied, and various winning information such as consecutive ratios and hand ratios based on the tally is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and this winning information is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to check various winning information such as consecutive ratios and winning ratios after installation at the gaming hall. In other words, the manufacturer of the pachinko game machine 1 usually designs the game board surface so that the game ball enters the general winning hole at a predetermined frequency (so as to pass the test). Also,
When conducting the test, it is confirmed whether the game ball enters the general prize opening at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, even after the pachinko game machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustments have been made and whether the game balls are entering the general prize opening as frequently as designed as a result of the adjustments. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, it is possible to recognize what adjustments have been made to the pachinko game machine 1 after installation.

In addition, the power supply board is enclosed in a board case made of a transparent synthetic resin material.
At the lower right side of the back of the power supply board, there is a clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM05 that functions as a setting switch to change settings such as the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate), which will be described later.
2 and a power switch 21TM055 are provided. By operating the power switch 21TM055 when the pachinko game machine 1 is not supplied with power supply voltage, a clerk at the game parlor or the like operates the main board 11, the effect control board 12, the payout control board 21TM037, etc. operating voltage is supplied. Furthermore, at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated,
If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and an initialization process (RAM clear) to be described later is executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 close to each other on the same power supply board, power-on operation and initialization operation can be easily performed.

In addition, lock switch 21TM051 and clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM05
2 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3, which can be opened by operating a predetermined key, is opened, and only a clerk in possession of a predetermined key can open it. It becomes possible to operate. Further, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires a key operation, only a clerk at the game parlor who has a key to operate the lock switch 21TM051 can operate it. In addition, the lock switch 21TM051 can be turned on and off using a predetermined key.
Although the switch is capable of performing an FF switching operation, it may also be a switch that can perform the switching operation and also perform an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a push operation).

Note that the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain an ON state or an OFF state. In other words, the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or OFF state even if no force is applied by an employee of the game parlor or the like. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 is configured such that a key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the clerk at the game parlor must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key. You can prevent this from happening.

As shown in FIG. 9-3, at the bottom of the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, there are holes for discharging game balls that have entered each winning hole and game balls that have entered the out hole to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1. A nozzle (discharge port) is provided, and within the nozzle is provided a discharge port switch 21TM070 for detecting game balls discharged from the pachinko game machine 1 (detecting fired game balls). ing. The outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the switch circuit 110.

Control signals transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 are relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a production control command transmitted and received as an electrical signal. The effect control commands include, for example, display control commands used to control image display operations in the image display device 5, audio control commands used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, frame LEDs 9, and decorations. Contains LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of LEDs.

FIG. 9-2 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 9-2, the payout control board 21
The TM037 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU21TM371. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer and includes at least a built-in RAM. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a RAM (not shown), a ROM (not shown) storing a payout control program, an I/O port, etc. constitute a payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is a payout control board 21TM037.
Microcomputer 21 for payout control having PU21TM371, RAM and ROM
It is realized by TM370 and I/O port. Further, the I/O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Detection signals from the bulb out switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the payout number counting switch 21TM301 are input to the I/O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number counting switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and then output to the main board 11 via the I/O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. .

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 9-2, the payout control board 21TM037 includes a gaming machine frame open sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2, and a gaming machine frame opening sensor that allows the front surface of the gaming board 2 to be opened and closed. A gaming machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 comprising a door frame open sensor that detects the opening of the glass door frame 3a covering the frame is connected, and various abnormalities are detected based on the detection signals output from these sensors. It also has a function to determine if an error has occurred. Note that the detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM37
0 can distinguish and recognize the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

In addition, the detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is transmitted to the relay board 21TM07.
2 to the I/O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037.
The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor that includes a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and detects whether a game ball is jammed or not.
That is, it is used to detect so-called ball biting. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 has a ball out switch 21T.
If the detection signal from M187 indicates that the ball is out of stock, or if the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates that the tank is full, the ball dispensing process is stopped.

Furthermore, if the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates a full tank state,
The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs a low-level full signal to the launch board 21TM090 in order to stop the ball launcher from launching the ball. A firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 output from the AND circuit 21TM091 of the firing board 21TM090 is transmitted from the firing board 21TM090 to the firing motor 21TM094. The full tank signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is sent to the launch board 21.
The drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (a signal for driving the firing motor 21TM094, which plays the role of supplying power from the power supply board) is input to one of the input sides of the AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the TM090. ) is input to the other input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the firing motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the firing motor 21TM094. That is, while the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 is outputting the full tank signal, the dispensing motor 21TM094
The output of the firing motor signal to is stopped.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 includes a serial communication circuit 21T for inputting and outputting (sending and receiving) signals via serial communication with the gaming control microcomputer 100.
It has a built-in M380. In this embodiment, a game control microcomputer 10
0 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a serial communication circuit 21TM
505, 21TM380, in order to confirm the connection between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a signal (prize ball request signal, reception ACK signal) is sent at a fixed interval (for example, 1 second). ) are exchanged (sent and received). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal (a prize ball request signal in this embodiment) to confirm the connection at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and sends a signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When receiving the prize ball request signal from the game control microcomputer 100, the system sends a signal to notify that (reception A
CK signal) to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment,
By placing specific data on the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal, specific data can be set between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 at the timing of transmitting and receiving the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal. It is configured to exchange data. For example, when a winning occurs, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out by changing a predetermined bit of the prize ball request signal, and A ball request signal is sent to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. And, microcomputer 21TM3 for payout control
When the prize ball payout operation is completed, 70 sets data indicating the end of the prize ball by differentiating a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and transmits the set received ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. do. In addition, when a predetermined error (such as a ball borrowed, full tank, or out of ball error) occurs, data indicating the content of the error is set by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the setting is changed. The received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sends a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls paid out and a ball rental number signal indicating the number of rented balls to the terminal boards (an external terminal board for the frame and an external terminal board for the board) via the output port 21TM372b. )21TM160. Note that a driver circuit is installed outside the output port 21TM372b, but as shown in Figure 9-2
The description is omitted here.

In addition, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has an output port 21TM37.
2c, an error signal is output to the error display LED21TM374, which is a 7-segment LED. Furthermore, a signal for instructing lighting/extinguishment is output to the winning ball LED 21TM053 and the out of ball LED 21TM054 via the output port 21TM372b. Note that a detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for releasing the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release the error state by software reset.

Furthermore, the payout motor 21TM from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370
The drive signal to 289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. In addition, a driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 21TM372a.
is installed, but its description is omitted in Figure 9-3.

A card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the gaming machine is equipped with a card unit control microcomputer. Further, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a usable indicator lamp, a connection stand direction indicator, a card insertion indicator lamp, and a card insertion slot. The interface board (relay board) 21TM066 has a frequency display LED.
21TM060, ball rental available LED 21TM061, ball rental switch 21TM062, and return switch 21TM063 are connected.

A ball lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated are provided from the interface board 21TM066 to the card unit 21TM050 in response to the player's operation. . Further, a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lending possible display signal are given from the card unit 21TM050 to the interface board 21TM066.
A connection signal (VL
signal), unit operation signal (BRDY signal), ball rental request signal (BRQ signal), ball rental completion signal (EXS signal), and pachinko machine operation signal (PRDY signal) are input to port 21TM.
372f and output port 21TM372d. Card unit 21
Between TM050 and payout control board 21TM037, there is an interface board 21TM066.
is intervening. Therefore, signals such as the connection signal (VL signal) are transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066, as shown in FIG. 9-2.

When the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 connects the card unit 21TM050.
Outputs the PRDY signal to Further, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. Microcomputer 21TM37 for payout control
0 determines the connected state/unconnected state of the card unit 21TM050 based on the input state of the VL signal. When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050, the ball rental switch is operated and the ball rental switch signal is input, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit control microcomputer controls the payout control board 2.
Outputs the BRQ signal to 1TM037.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a card unit 21T.
When the EXS signal for M050 is raised and the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050 is detected, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to pay out a predetermined number of rental balls to the player. When the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21T
M370 lowers the EXS signal to card unit 21TM050. after that,
On the condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not on, upon receiving a payout command signal from the game control microcomputer 100, prize ball payout control is executed.

The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is the payout control board 21T.
Supplied from M037. In other words, power is supplied from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 through the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066.
It is done through. In this example, the card unit 2 is connected to the AC 24V power supply line for the card unit 21TM050 arranged in the interface board 21TM066.
A fuse is provided to protect the card unit 21TM050, and prevents a voltage higher than a predetermined voltage from being supplied to the card unit 21TM050.

The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning the jackpot (ball payout rate) changes depending on the set value. In detail, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the probability of winning the jackpot (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. . The set value has six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest ball payout rate and decreasing values in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate.
In other words, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the most advantageous for the player;
The smaller the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage becomes.

FIGS. 9-4(A) to 9-4(F) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables corresponding to each setting value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a winning determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. Each display result determination table has two cases: the variable special symbol designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the first special symbol is the target of variable display, and the case where the variable special symbol designation buffer is 2 (second). In other words, a determination value for determining a jackpot is set for each case where the second special symbol is subject to variable display.

As shown in Figure 9-4 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to setting value 1, if the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of variable display. If the set value is ``2'', ``3'', ``4'', ``5'', or ``6'', the probability of winning the jackpot will be lower (1/300). ing. In addition, when the variable special symbol designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as the case where the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot, and the second special symbol The same probability (1/30
0) to win the jackpot.

In addition, as shown in Figure 9-4 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to setting value 2, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1". The probability of winning the jackpot is higher (1/280) than in other cases. In addition, when the variable special symbol designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as the case where the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot, and the second special symbol The same probability (1/28
0) to win the jackpot.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-4(C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to setting value 3, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", The probability of winning the jackpot is higher (1/280) than when the number is "2". In addition, when the variable special symbol designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as the case where the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot, and the second special symbol The same probability (
1/280) to win the jackpot.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-4(D), when using the display result determination table corresponding to setting value 4, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", "2", "3"
”, the probability of winning the jackpot is higher (1/250). In addition, when the variable special symbol designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as the case where the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot, and the second special symbol Even when the first special symbol is subject to the variable display, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same (1/250) as when the first special symbol is the subject of the variable display.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (E), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", "2", "3"
”, the probability of winning the jackpot is higher than that of “4” (1/235). In addition, when the variable special symbol designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as the case where the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot, and the second special symbol Even when the first special symbol is subject to the variable display, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same (1/235) as when the first special symbol is the subject of the variable display.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (F), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", "2", "3"
”, “4”, and “5”, the probability of winning the jackpot is higher (1/220). In addition, when the variable special symbol designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as the case where the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot, and the second special symbol Even when the first special symbol is subject to the variable display, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same (1/220) as when the first special symbol is the subject of the variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to the jackpot shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (F). If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot (jackpot A to jackpot F). That is, winning the jackpot is determined with probability according to the set value. Furthermore, Figure 9-4
The "probability" shown in (A) to (F) indicates the probability (proportion) of hitting the jackpot. In addition, deciding whether to make a jackpot means deciding whether to control to a jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. It also means deciding whether to use the jackpot symbol or not.

In addition, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-4(A) to (F) to determine whether or not it is a jackpot. A common table is used to determine the jackpot in the case where the first special symbol is a variable display and the case where the second special symbol is a variable display, regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. Good too.

In this embodiment, a total of six setting values 1 to 6 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 The number of setting values that can be set may be 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

(Setting suggestion effect)
The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the setting value by executing an effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the setting value to the player by changing the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends depending on the specified setting value. Figure 9-5 (1),
(2) and (3) show examples of setting suggestion effects. Figure 9-5 (1) is an example where a "sunny" ending image is selected on the jackpot end screen, and Figure 9-5 (2) is an example where a "cloudy" ending image is selected on the jackpot end screen. For example, FIG. 9-5 (3) shows an example in which the "rain" style ending image is selected on the jackpot end screen.
Further, FIG. 9-5 (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect based on the setting value specified by the setting command.

The CPU 103 sends a setting command specifying a setting value to the production control CPU 120. Further, when the jackpot game state ends, the CPU 103 transmits a performance control command for executing an ending performance on the image display device 5 to the performance control CPU 120. The production control CPU 120 sets the setting value specified by the received setting command to R.
By storing it in the AM 102, it is possible to determine the mode of the ending effect based on the stored setting values. For example, based on an effect control command sent when the jackpot gaming state ends, a character (“B
It becomes possible to display an ending image in a mode (sunny mode, cloudy mode, rainy mode) determined based on the stored setting values, along with the words "ONUS END").

The table shown in Figure 9-5 (4) shows cases where the setting value specified by the setting command is "1, 2", "3, 4", and "5, 6". , respectively, when determining the setting suggestion effect mode to be the "sunny" mode shown in Figure 9-5 (1), Figure 9-5 (2)
When determining the "cloudy" mode as shown in FIG. 9-5 (3) and when determining the "rainy" mode shown in FIG. 9-5 (3), the following determination values are assigned.

The production control CPU 120 determines whether the setting value specified in the received setting command is "1" or "
2", it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) for the "sunny" mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%), and at a medium rate (for example, 40%). in(
It was decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) for the "cloudy" mode shown in 2),
It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the "rain" mode shown in (3) at a medium rate (for example, 40%). In addition, when the setting value specified by the received setting command is "3" or "4", the production control CPU 120 sets a low percentage (for example, 20%).
It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) for the "sunny" mode shown in (1), and the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) for the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) is executed at a high rate (for example, 50%). ) and "Rain" shown in (3) at a medium rate (e.g. 30%).
It is decided to execute a mode setting suggestion effect (ending effect). In addition, when the setting value specified by the received setting command is "5" or "6", the production control CPU 120 sets the "sunny" mode shown in (1) at a high rate (for example, 50%). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a low rate (for example, 20%), and at a medium rate. (for example, 30%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the "rain" mode shown in (3).

In this way, by varying the determination ratio of each aspect of the setting suggestion performance depending on the setting value, the player becomes interested in the manner in which the setting suggestion performance is executed, and the setting suggestion It is possible to improve the interest of the performance. In this example, the player is interested in how the ending effect that is executed when the jackpot game state ends, and in particular, the ending effect is executed in the "sunny" mode. You will expect what will happen.

(Processing at power-on)
Next, the power-on processing will be explained.
9-6 to 9-8 are diagrams showing an example of a process executed in the game control microcomputer 100 when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 9-6, after the power is turned on, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area (step S21).
TM4010). This process performs a parity check as a data check.

If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103
If the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is a normal value, for example, 0 to
5 (step S21TM4020). In this example, six numbers, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5, are normal values as the setting values stored in the setting value storage area, and six levels of setting values with different jackpot probabilities are provided. ing. The setting value 0 in this example corresponds to the setting value 1 shown in FIG. 9-4 etc. described above, and the setting value 1 in this example corresponds to the setting value 2 shown in FIG. The value 2 corresponds to the setting value 3 shown in FIG. 9-4 etc. described above, and the setting value 3 in this example corresponds to the setting value 4 shown in FIG. 9-4 etc. described above. The setting value 5 in this example corresponds to the setting value 6 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above.

Here, in this example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is shipped from the game machine manufacturer (before it is installed in the game parlor), the value with the lowest jackpot probability among the above regular values is stored in the setting value storage area. (0 in this example) is stored. Note that if the data in the setting value storage area is corrupted, the value may not be normal. If the set value is a normal value (step S21
TM4020: YES), it is checked whether the setting changing flag is set (step S21 TM4030). The setting change flag is set when transitioning to a setting change mode to be described later (step S21TM4580), and is cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state (step S21TM4720).

If the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030),
The CPU 103 checks whether the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4040).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S
21TM4040), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4050). The value of the RAM clear flag is a value indicating whether it has been decided to execute RAM clear (initialization of gaming state), and if the value is 1, RA
This indicates that it has been decided that M clear will be executed. In this example, RAM clearing is not actually executed when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, and when the setting change mode is controlled, RAM clearing is executed after the processing related to the setting change mode is completed. will be done.

The area where the value of the RAM clear flag is stored is not included in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when a power failure occurs, the value of the RAM clear flag is not held, and when the power is restored, the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (initial value is not set). Note that the notification that the gaming state will be initialized may be made before being controlled to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, or may be notified after the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends, as will be described later. It is also possible to do so.

On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 moves to step S21TM4060.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM4060). Here, as mentioned above, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a are determined by the gaming machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300.
A detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected is sent from the gaming machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the opening of the glass door frame 3a. A detection signal is output indicating that the condition has been detected.
When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the gaming control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, When it is recognized that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected,
By notifying the game control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, the game control microcomputer 100 side can check the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a. The open state and the open state can be individually recognized.

Note that the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 sends a detection signal to the game control microcomputer 100 indicating that the open state of the game machine frame 3 is detected, and the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected. In the case of a configuration in which a detection signal indicating that the By inputting the detection signal, it becomes possible to individually recognize the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4060), it checks whether the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4070). . And lock switch 21TM
051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), as shown in FIG. 9-7.
Processing after step S21TM4510 related to setting change mode or setting confirmation mode,
to move to. When the setting change mode is entered, the setting values can be confirmed and changed, and when the setting confirmation mode is entered, the setting values can be confirmed.

That is, the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (step S21T).
YES in step S21TM4020), and the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020).
), if there is no power outage during the setting change (NO in step S21TM4030).
), the setting value can be changed and/or confirmed on condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4060) and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070). becomes. On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state (NO in step S21TM4060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is selected. Step S21TM4, which will be described later, is not controlled by the mode.
The process moves to 760 (sending setting command).

In this embodiment, in order to create a state in which setting values are not allowed to be changed but can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, and (2) ) Two conditions are required: the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. CPU
103 is a state in which the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode). In addition to these (1) and (2) conditions, (3) clear switch (setting changeover switch)
21TM052 is determined to be in the ON state (YES) and the RAM clear flag is set, as described later, a state in which the setting value can be changed (setting change mode) It is possible to move to

As mentioned above, the lock switch 21TM051, which must be operated to confirm or change the set value, is provided on the back side of the game board 2, and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state. I can't. If the lock switch 21TM051 is operated even though the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, there is an abnormality in the gaming machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300, or there is some kind of unauthorized operation. There is a possibility that the setting value is about to be confirmed or changed by the means. It is inappropriate to allow confirmation or change of the setting values in such a state, so in this embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode. and setting change mode.

In this embodiment, as the condition (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. However, the control is not limited to this mode, and even if the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode It is also possible not to control any of them.

On the other hand, if the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4060 (NO in step S21TM4060), that is, if both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are If it is in the closed state, it will not be controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and will not be controlled in step S21TM47, which will be described later.
The process moves to step 60 (sending setting command). Further, when it is confirmed in step S21TM4070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (step S21TM407
0 (NO), the process moves to step S21TM4760 (sending a setting command), which will be described later, without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

In checking the data in the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010),
If the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103
The process moves to step S21TM4120. In addition, when checking the value stored in the setting value storage area (step S21TM4020), the setting value storage area contains a normal value (0 to 5).
is not stored (NO in step S21TM4020), the CPU 103
The process moves to step S21TM4120. Also, when checking the setting change flag (
In step S21TM4030), if it is confirmed that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 performs step S21T
Move to M4120.

Here, even if a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the setting value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is damaged, the determination in step S21TM4010 is NO. Then, the process moves to step S21TM4120. That is, if there is a possibility that the value stored in the setting value storage area is inappropriate, the setting is changed based on the conditions for transitioning to setting change mode (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later) being met. It will be controlled by the mode. Furthermore, even if the check result is normal in the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010) (YES in step S21TM4010), if the normal value (0 to 5) is not stored in the setting value storage area. (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change mode is controlled based on the fact that conditions for transition to the setting change mode (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140, which will be described later) are satisfied. In addition, if the setting change mode was being controlled when the previous power-off occurred, the setting change mode is controlled based on the fact that the setting change mode transition conditions (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later) are satisfied. It turns out.

In step S21TM4120, the CPU 103 checks whether the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM4120). CPU
103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a, (
(YES in step S21TM4120), it is confirmed whether the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4130).

If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130)
), the CPU 103 checks whether the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S
21TM4140: YES), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150). Then, the processes from step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 9-7 are executed.

On the other hand, if the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4120 (NO in step S21TM4120), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are not recognized. If it is in the closed state, step S21TM413
0 and the lock switch 21TM051 is not in the ON state (step S21TM4
130), if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state in step S21TM4140 (NO in step S21TM4140)
In O), the CPU 103 detects a setting value abnormality indicating that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area may be abnormal, without executing the processing from step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode. An error command is sent to the production control CPU 120.

When the production control CPU 120 receives the setting value abnormality error command, the production control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5.
, it is reported that the set value may be abnormal. For example, a message saying "The setting value may be abnormal" is displayed. Furthermore, the production control CPU 120 temporarily operates the image display device 5 in a power-off state (turns off the power switch 21TM055).
), when the power is turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on), a notification is issued to prompt the user to move to the setting change mode and perform an operation to change the set value (confirm the set value). For example, a message such as "Please turn the power off and on again to enter the setting change mode" is displayed. Incidentally, similar notification may be performed by audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the production control CPU 120 performs a predetermined loop process (step S) until the power is cut off.
21TM4200 to repeat steps S21TM4220).

In this loop processing, the CPU 103 waits for 4ms (step S21TM420
0), by displaying the letter "E" on the display monitor 21TM029, etc.
``Despite the possibility that the setting value is not the normal value (0 to 5), the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode (determined as YES in all steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140) is satisfied.'' and has not entered the setting change mode (step S21TM4210). Then, a security signal is output from the output terminal (terminal number 10) to which one end of the security signal line is connected (step S21T
M4220). The security signal is input to an external device to which the other end of the security signal line is connected (for example, a hall computer that manages information on multiple gaming machines, a card unit or a call lamp device installed corresponding to the gaming machine, etc.) be done.

During the loop processing period, the 7-segment display included in the display monitor 21TM029 is
The letter "E" will be displayed every s. By providing a 4 ms wait, excessive heat is prevented from accumulating in the 7-segment display and damaging the display. Furthermore, the security signal is continuously output during the loop processing period. By outputting the security signal to the outside, an external device such as a hall computer can detect a predetermined event (in this example, the setting value is a normal value (0 to 5) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the input of the security signal). ) may not have occurred, but the transition conditions for controlling to the setting change mode have not been satisfied and the transition to the setting change mode has not occurred.

The loop processing from step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 is continued until the power supply is stopped (until the power switch 21TM055 is turned off).

That is, if the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (step S2
1TM4010: NO), if the set value is not a regular value (step S21TM4020
(NO in step S21TM4030. If applicable, the game should not be played in this state, but the set value should be It is necessary to confirm the setting value of the storage area to a normal value. Therefore, the RAM clear flag is set to transition to setting change mode.

In this embodiment, in order to enter a state in which setting values can be changed (setting change mode), (1
) The gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state,
(3) The clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state.
Two conditions are required. The CPU 103 determines whether these (1
When it is confirmed that all of the conditions () to (3) are satisfied, a transition to a state in which setting values can be changed (setting change mode) is possible.

If any of the conditions (1) to (3) are not met, changes to the set value will not be permitted, and the set value in the set value storage area will not be fixed to the regular value. Therefore, it is not possible to proceed to normal game processing. Therefore, if a negative determination is made in any of the determination processes in steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140, the process moves to the loop process described above (steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220).

Once the loop processing (steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) has been entered, it will not be possible to proceed to the normal game processing, so the staff at the gaming parlor must first turn off the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and then turn it on again. No. In this way, if the conditions for transitioning to setting change mode are not met, turn off the power and make sure all conditions (1) to (3) are met the next time the power is turned on. Then, the setting change mode is entered, and the setting value in the setting value storage area is determined to be the normal value.

Note that, if any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 controls the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B in a predetermined manner. The light may be emitted in a power-off instruction mode to prompt the user to turn off the power.

In this embodiment, if the setting changing flag is not set (step S21TM4
030), in order to set the state in which the change of the setting value is not permitted but the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode), (1) the slot 3 for the gaming machine is in the open state (step S2
Two conditions are required: (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES at step S21TM4070).

However, if the setting changing flag is set (step S21TM4
030: YES), (1) gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (step S21TM4120
(YES in step S21TM4), (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4
Even if the two conditions (YES at 130) are satisfied, the setting confirmation mode will not be entered. Even if these conditions (1) and (2) are met,
(3) Clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM05 in step S21TM4140
2 is not in the ON state (NO), the game is controlled to a stopped state (loop processing from step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) without being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. That will happen.

Next, regarding the processing related to the settings change mode and settings confirmation mode, see Figures 9-7 and 9.
This will be explained using -8. In the process shown in FIG. 9-7, the CPU 103 checks whether the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value (in this example, any one of 0 to 5). Step S21TM4510). Regular values (0 to 5) are stored in the setting value storage area.
) is stored (YES in step S21TM4510), step S21
Move to TM4530. If the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4510), the CPU 103 stores "0", which has the lowest jackpot probability, as the regular value in the set value storage area. is stored (step S21TM4520).
Then, the process moves to step S21TM4530.

Next, the CPU 103 waits for 4 ms (step S21TM4530), and then executes power-off processing (step S21TM4540). In the power-off processing, the CPU 103 checks whether a power-off signal based on a power-off, including an unexpected power outage, etc., has been input, and if a power-off signal has been input, the CPU 103 interrupts the power supply. Immediately before operation becomes impossible due to a stop, the power supply stop processing is executed. In this power supply stop processing, R
A process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up to AM102;
Data protection processing of the RAM 102 and the like are executed. The data protection process includes adding error detection codes (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for proceeding with the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. That is, in the power-off process, check data is stored in a predetermined backup area.

As a result, when the control is in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode (step S
Repeated processing of 21TM4530 to step S21TM4620 or step S21T
M4530 to step S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 are being repeated), if a power outage occurs, step S21TM40 after the power is restored
10, a data check will be performed appropriately.

Next, the CPU 103 stores the setting values (0 to 5 in this example) stored in the setting value storage area.
The value corresponding to is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4550
). Here, the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is the value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area. Since the staff at the game parlor usually recognizes the range of set values as 1 to 6, if the value stored in the set value storage area is displayed as is on the display monitor 21TM029, the staff at the game hall will not be able to see the actual value. There is a risk that the setting value may be recognized incorrectly. Therefore, in this example, [value stored in the setting value storage area + 1] is
The setting value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. Next, CPU1
03 outputs a security signal (step S21TM4560).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570
(YES in step S21TM4650), that is, if RAM clearing is not executed after the end of the mode (in this case, setting confirmation mode), the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation mode command specifying that the setting confirmation mode is controlled (step S21TM4650). , the process moves to step S21TM4680. The performance control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on receiving the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4570), that is, if RAM clear is executed after the mode (here, setting change mode) ends, the CP
U103 sets a setting change flag indicating that the setting value may be changed (step S21TM4580). The area where the value of the setting changing flag is stored is:
Since it is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting change flag is retained even if the power is turned off. Therefore, if power is cut off while being controlled to the setting change mode, the value of the setting change flag is set to 1 (set state) when the power is turned on next time.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command specifying that the setting change mode is controlled (step S21TM4590). Based on receiving the setting change mode command, the production control CPU 120 controls the game control microcomputer 100.
It is possible to identify that the has shifted to the setting change mode. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode.

Next, the CPU 103 inputs setting changeover switch information indicating whether the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM4600), and checks whether the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. (Step S21TM4610).

If the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is not operated (NO in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 moves to step S21TM4680. When the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM4620), and in step S21TM4.
680. The updated set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the next step S21TM4550.

Every time the game parlor clerk operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM4610), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated (step S21TM4620). For example, the normal setting value is in the range of 0 to 5, and the setting value stored in the setting value storage area when controlled to the setting change mode (when the power was turned on or when the previous power was turned off) was 3. If so, the setting values stored in the setting value storage area will be updated in the order of 3 → 4 → 5 → 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 for each setting change operation, and accordingly, the setting values will be updated on the display monitor 21TM029. The displayed information will be updated in the order of 4→5→6→1→2→3→4.

Here, it is possible to display the current setting value (step S21TM4550), output a security signal (step S21TM4560), and send a setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM4650), but send a setting change mode command (step S21TM4650).
21TM4590) and updating of setting values (step S21TM4620) corresponds to a setting confirmation mode in which setting values can be confirmed but cannot be changed.
The period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled is from step S21TM4530 to step S21.
The processes of TM4570 and step S21TM4650 are repeatedly executed.

In the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21T).
YES in M4070), clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052
is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040 and the RAM clear flag remains 0).

In addition, it is possible to display the current setting value (step S21TM4550) and output a security signal (step S21TM4560), as well as send a setting change mode command (step S21TM4590) and update the setting value (step S21TM4620).
The state in which this can be executed corresponds to a setting change mode in which setting values can be checked and changed.

In the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21T).
M4070 or step S21TM4130 is determined to be YES), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (it is determined to be YES in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140, and the RAM clear flag is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150. settings).

Note that the setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during setting confirmation mode control. Therefore, when the CPU 103 sends the setting confirmation mode command, it sets a setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that allows it to be identified that the setting confirmation mode command has been sent and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. , when the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared. Then, the setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during setting change mode control. Therefore, when the CPU 103 sends the setting change mode command, it is configured to set a setting change mode command transmission flag that allows it to be identified that the setting change mode command has been sent and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. , when the setting change in progress flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared. Then, the setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

In step S21TM4680, the CPU 103 checks whether the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4680), a 4ms wait is performed again (step S21T
After performing step S21TM4530), the process from step S21TM4540 onward is repeated. That is, R
If the value of the AM clear flag is 0, control in the setting confirmation mode is continued, and if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, control in the setting change mode is continued.

In step S21TM4680, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (YES in step S21TM4680), the CPU 103 ends the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode and sets 1000 ms as the value of the security signal timer (
Step S21TM4710). By setting a predetermined time as the value of the security signal timer, the security signal will continue to be output until the value of the security signal timer becomes 0ms from the predetermined time in the information output process when the normal gaming process is started. will be done. For example, when the game control timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, the value of the security signal timer is decremented by 2 ms, and when it reaches 0 ms, the output of the security signal is stopped. Therefore, at the time of step S21TM4710, the remaining output period of the security signal is set to 1000 ms, regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended.

That is, as shown in FIG. 9-9(1), the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM4560),
In response to the end of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is continuously output until at least 1 second has elapsed from the end of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The value of the security signal timer is set (step S21TM4710).

Here, the process of starting the output of the security signal in step S21TM4560 is performed regardless of whether the control is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (it is determined which mode is being controlled). ) is executed as a common process. Furthermore, the process of setting the remaining output period of the security signal in step S21TM4710 is performed regardless of whether the control is set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (it is not necessary to determine which mode is controlled). ) is executed as a common process. In this way, the security signal output control is simplified by making the security signal output start control and output end control common between the settings change mode and the settings confirmation mode. , the control burden can be reduced.

In addition, the output of a security signal is started in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the output of the security signal is started in response to the end of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. By stopping the game, it is possible to appropriately notify an external device such as a hall computer that the gaming machine may have been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Here, step S21T immediately after the control in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is finished.
In M4710, a common value (1000 ms) is set in the security signal timer both when controlled to the setting change mode and when controlled to the setting confirmation mode. However, if the output start control and output end control of the security signal are made common between when controlled to the setting change mode and when controlled to the setting change mode, it is difficult to select which mode on the external device side. This makes it difficult to determine whether or not the system is being controlled.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-9(2), when the setting change mode is controlled, that is, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the step S21 is
After setting the value of the security signal timer to 1000 ms in TM4710, based on the determination of NO in step S21TM4770, which will be described later, in step S21TM1465 after clearing the RAM, the value of the security signal timer is reset to 30000 ms (overwriting). ). That is, after the remaining output period of the security signal is once set to 1 sec, the remaining output period of the security signal is reset (overwritten) to 30 sec.

When the signal output control shown above is performed, the final output stop timing of the security signal is as shown in Figure 9-9 (2). If the control is in the setting confirmation mode, the setting confirmation mode ends. This is the timing when 1 sec has elapsed from the end of the setting change mode, and if the setting change mode has been controlled, the timing is when 30 seconds have elapsed from the end of the setting change mode.

Specifically, if the control is in the setting confirmation mode (RAM is not cleared and the security signal timer value is not changed from 1 second), the game control timer interrupt after the interrupt is allowed. In processing (for example, information output processing), the value of the security signal timer is 10.
If the security signal continues to be output from 00ms to 0ms and is controlled to the setting change mode (RAM is cleared, and the security signal timer value is 1)
seconds to 30 seconds), in game control timer interrupt processing (for example, information output processing) after interrupt permission, the security signal is output until the security signal timer value changes from 30000ms to 0ms. will continue. In addition, when the control is in the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode, the value of the security signal timer changes for a predetermined period of time (1000ms or 3 seconds) before shifting to the game control timer interrupt process.
The output of the security signal may be continued from 0000 ms to 0 ms, and after the output of the security signal is finished, the process may be shifted to the game control timer interrupt process.

In this way, the security signal will continue to be output for at least 1 sec when the control in the setting confirmation mode is finished and when the control in the setting change mode is finished.
When controlled to setting change mode, 30 seconds after the control of setting change mode ends.
The security signal will continue to be output until the period has elapsed. With this configuration, the output control of the security signal can be shared, and when controlled to the setting confirmation mode,
The output period of the security signal can be made different depending on when the setting change mode is controlled.

As a result, it is also possible to determine whether the external device is controlled to setting confirmation mode without executing initialization processing, or whether it is controlled to setting change mode after initialization processing is executed. . For example, if the output period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, it is possible to identify that the setting confirmation mode has been entered without initialization processing being executed, and if the output period of the security signal is 30 seconds or more, it is possible to identify that the setting confirmation mode has been set. It is possible to estimate that the setting change mode may have been controlled by executing the conversion process.

In addition, even if an error that causes the game to be stopped, such as a magnetic abnormality, is detected by the abnormality detection sensor,
A security signal will be output. In this case, the security signal is continuously output until the gaming machine is powered off. Further, the CPU 103 sets an abnormality detection flag in the backup area of the RAM 102 (an area cleared by initialization processing) based on the abnormality detected by the abnormality detection sensor. Then, it is assumed that a security signal is output for 4 minutes based on the fact that the abnormality detection flag is set when the power is restored.

Here, if the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is restored, RAM clearing is not executed, so the value of the abnormality detection flag is not initialized in the signal output process and remains set. It is possible to output the security signal continuously for 4 minutes after the power is turned on. That is, it is possible to not limit the output period of the security signal to the period from the end of the control in the setting confirmation mode until one second has elapsed. On the other hand, if the setting change mode is selected when the power is restored, the RAM will be cleared, so the abnormality detection flag will be cleared in the subsequent signal output processing (when the power is turned off). As a result, the output period of the security signal is the period from the end of the setting change mode until 30 seconds have elapsed (depending on the execution of RAM clear). period).

Note that in the example shown in step S21TM4710 in FIG. 9-7, the value of the security signal timer is set to 1 second, but this is not the only option. The value of the security signal timer to be set may be at least a period that allows the external device to recognize that the security signal has been output, and may be, for example, 50 ms or more. That is, a common value of 50 ms may be set as the value of the security signal timer when the setting change mode ends and when the setting confirmation mode ends.

After the process in step S21TM4710, the CPU 103 clears the setting changing flag (step S21TM4720). Since the setting changing flag is cleared, if a power outage occurs after this point, it will be determined that the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030) when the power is restored. Become.

Next, the CPU 103 erases the setting values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4730). Then, the setting value (0
-5) in the setting command and send the setting command (step S
21TM4760). Note that even if the device is not controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, the process of step S21TM4760 will be executed and the setting command will be transmitted.

Here, the player usually recognizes the setting value range as 1 to 6, and the effect control CPU 12
If the value specified by the setting command (the value stored in the setting value storage area) is displayed as is on the image display device 5 on the 0 side, there is a risk that the player may misunderstand the setting value. . Therefore, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 side recognizes the value (0 to 5) specified by the setting command plus 1 as the setting value (1 to 6), and Within the range, an effect that suggests the set value is executed.

In addition, the CPU 103 is not limited to this form, and the CPU 103 sets a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area to a setting command, and performs production control. For C
It may also be transmitted to the PU 120. As a result, the range of setting values specified by the setting command becomes 1 to 6, which matches the range normally recognized by the player. The effect control CPU 120 side displays the setting values (1 to 6) specified by the setting command on the image display device 5 as is, or executes an effect that suggests the setting values (1 to 6) specified by the setting command. By doing so, the setting value can be appropriately notified or suggested. In addition, CP for production control
It is also unnecessary for the U120 side to perform addition processing on the setting value specified by the received setting command, and the control burden on the production control CPU 120 side can be reduced.

As described above, the performance control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. Further, the setting value can be suggested by executing an effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the setting value to the player by changing the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends depending on the specified setting value.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4770).

Here, the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4770)
This means that the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (step S
21TM4010: YES), the setting value is a normal value (Step S21TM4020: YES), and there is no power outage during the setting change (Step S21T: YES).
M4030 is NO), and clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF.
Since it is in the FF state (NO in step S21TM4040), it is sufficient to execute processing at the time of power-off recovery that does not involve clearing the RAM.

If the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the CPU 103 executes the process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal when the power is turned on, and executes the game control timer interrupt process (special (including pattern processing, etc.). That is, when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, or when the control in the setting confirmation mode ends, the CPU 103 clears the RAM based on the value of the RAM clear flag being 0. Without executing clearing, a backup command is sent as a command at the time of power-off recovery, and a transition to normal game processing is made.

Based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of recovery), the performance control CPU 120 determines that recovery from the power outage has been performed based on the data at the time of power supply interruption (RAM has not been cleared). Recognize the following: When the production control CPU 120 receives the backup command, for example, the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the frame LED 9
In such production devices, it is possible to notify that recovery from a power outage has been performed (RAM has not been cleared) based on data at the time of power supply stoppage.

On the other hand, the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4770), which means that RAM clear was set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150, and it was decided to execute RAM clear. Therefore, it is sufficient to perform power-on processing that involves clearing the RAM.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the CPU 103 executes processing to set 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer, and processing when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal when the power is turned on. , After permission for interruption, it is sufficient to proceed to game control timer interruption processing (including special symbol process processing, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 9-8, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is 1 (step S21TM1410). In RAM clear processing, R
The data (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, pending memory, etc.) indicating the gaming state before the power supply stop stored in the gaming state information storage area of AM102 is cleared and the initial value is set. , the setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 are not cleared and remain unchanged from before the RAM clearing process. In addition, the area where each aggregate value (gaming information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as continuous ratio, winning ratio, and base is stored for each setting value is not cleared, and each aggregate value for each setting value is not cleared. The value remains unchanged from before the RAM clear process. Then, by displaying the letter "C" on the display monitor 21TM029, it is notified that the gaming state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). In addition, R.A.
By the M clear process, predetermined data (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number for normal symbol hit determination) is initialized to 0, but it can also be initialized to an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. . Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 102 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data on the count value of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol hit determination) may be left as is.

The reason why the setting values stored in the setting value storage area are not cleared in this RAM clearing process is as follows: (a) If the setting value storage area is not controlled by the setting change mode, the normal value will not be stored in the setting value storage area when the power is turned on. This means that it has been stored (YES in step S21TM4020).
, (b) When the setting change mode is controlled, the value of the setting value storage area is set to 0 (step S21TM4520) or a normal value is stored by an operation in the setting change mode (step S21TM4610). and step S21TM4620).
Furthermore, after the RAM clearing process, the setting change mode cannot be controlled and there is no opportunity to change the values stored in the setting value storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 in a pointer (step S21TM1430), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization setting table in the work area (step S21TM1440). Step S21TM1
430 and step S21TM1440, initialization is performed on flags for selectively processing depending on the control state, such as a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a buffer for storing the total number of prize balls, and a special symbol process flag. The value is set.

After executing steps S21TM1430 and S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads out the setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1440).
M1450). In the game control timer interrupt process to be described later, a jackpot determination in the special symbol process process is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command specifying that the initialization process was performed when the power was turned on (or when the setting change mode ended) (step S21TM1460). Production control CPU120
Now, the initialization process was performed based on the reception of this initialization command (RAM was cleared without recovery from the power failure based on the data at the time of power supply failure). Recognize. When the performance control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, the performance control CPU 120 determines that the game state etc. have been initialized in the performance devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the frame LED 9 (data at the time of power supply stop). It is possible to notify that the RAM has been cleared without recovery from a power outage based on the following.

Next, the CPU 103 sets 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM1465). As a result, step S21TM4 after the end of the setting change mode
The value of the security signal timer (1 second) set in step 710 is changed (overwritten) to the value (30 seconds) corresponding to the execution of RAM clearing. In addition, if RAM clear is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, step S21TM4710 is not executed (1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer). The value of the security signal timer is set to 30 seconds corresponding to the RAM clear being performed. On the other hand, if RAM clearing is not executed (including when controlled to setting confirmation mode), this step S21TM14
Since the process in step S21TM47 is not executed, the value of the security signal timer is set at step S21TM47.
It remains at 1 second set at 10.

Since the value of the security signal timer is set in step S21TM1465 or step S21TM4710 described above, a security signal will be output in the game control timer interrupt process after the interrupt is permitted (information output process), After that, each time the game control timer interrupt process is executed by interrupt permission, the value of the security signal timer is set to 2m.
The output of the security signal is stopped at the timing when the value of the security signal timer becomes 0.

Then, the CPU 103 executes a setting process for the serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11
A connection confirmation signal is output from the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037. Further, communication between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to an executable state.

Next, the CPU 103 executes random number circuit setting processing to initialize the random number circuit 104 (
Step S21TM1490). For example, the CPU 103 provides the random number circuit 104 with a random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result by executing processing according to the random number circuit setting program.
Configure settings to update the value.

Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 waits for a predetermined period of time (for example, 2
The CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this example, 2 m
Assume that a timer interrupt occurs periodically every s.

Next, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes display random number update processing (step S21TM1520) and initial value random number update processing (step S21TM1530). When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, it is set to the interrupt disabled state (step S21TM1510), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, it is set to the interrupt enabled state. settings (step S21TM1540). Thereby, the game control timer interrupt process is shifted to the normal game process that can be executed. In this example, the random number for display is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a jackpot, or a random number for determining whether to set it as a reach when it is not a jackpot, and is a random number for display. The random number update process is a process of updating the count value of a counter for generating display random numbers. In addition, the initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of a counter for generating the initial value random number. In this example, the initial value random number determines the initial value of the count value of the counter (random number generation counter for normal symbol hit determination) for generating random numbers for determining whether or not a normal symbol is a hit. It is a random number to A game control process that controls the progress of the game (the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game devices provided in the game machine, such as the effect display device, the variable winning ball device, and the ball payout device) by itself to control the progress of the game, which will be described later. In the process of transmitting a command signal to control another microcomputer, also referred to as the gaming machine control process, the count value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination When the counter is incremented by the number of numeric values between the minimum and maximum possible values), the initial value is set in the counter.

In this example, when it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES), the CPU 103 determines whether the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both in the closed state. Although the process is shifted to the power-off recovery process without confirmation (regardless of the status of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), step S is not limited to this type of configuration.
21TM4770 determines that the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES), on the condition that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state (the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door (depending on the state of the frame 3a), the process may proceed to the process at the time of power-off recovery.

Further, in this example, when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO) in step S21TM4770, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both in the closed state. Processing at power-on (processing after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)) without confirmation (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or glass door frame 3a)
However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and if it is determined that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO) in step S21TM4770, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state. (depending on the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the processing at power-on (processing after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear))
You may move to

As shown above, the clerk of the game parlor, etc. turns on the lock switch 21TM051 when turning on the power.
By setting the N state and turning the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 to the ON state, it is possible to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting change mode, and to initialize the gaming state etc. (RAM clear). It becomes possible to execute Moreover, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, it is possible to control the pachinko game machine 1 to the setting confirmation mode, and also control the gaming state etc. is not initialized (step S21TM40
40 or step S21TM4140 and the RAM clear flag is not set to 1). In this way, the clerk at the game parlor can select whether to control the pachinko game machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether to initialize the gaming state, etc. There is.

As mentioned above, if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, it means that the setting change mode was set when the power was turned off, so the setting values are unstable. There is a possibility that the setting value that the game parlor is trying to confirm is not stored in the setting value storage area. In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, the CPU 103 does not shift to the normal gaming process based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), but puts the game in a stopped state (step S21TM4200 ~ Step S21TM42
20 loop processing), and a security signal is output in response to the control to the game stop state (step S21TM4220).

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from being started (the timer interrupt process for game control is executed) when the set value is unstable, and also to prevent the game from being started when the set value is unstable.
It is possible to notify an external device that the setting change mode is being controlled when a power outage occurs.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, the CPU 103 sets the conditions ( Step S21TM4120 to Step S21TM4140 are all YES) is not established, send a set value abnormal error command (
Step S21TM4190) as well as the game stop state (Step S21TM4200~
In step S21TM4220 loop processing), "E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.
An error message is displayed (step S21TM4210).

In the example shown in FIG. 9-10, by displaying the letter "E" on each of the 7-segment displays 21TM029A to 21TM029D constituting the display monitor 21TM029, an abnormality has occurred to the clerk at the game hall (in the setting change mode). This clearly indicates that a power outage may have occurred while the system was under control. In addition, upon receiving the setting value abnormality error command, the production control CPU 120 displays a message on the image display device 5 saying, "Please turn the power back on after the power is turned off and shift to the setting change mode." A store clerk, etc., must first turn off the power (power switch 21TM055 is turned OFF), and then when the power is turned back on (power switch 21TM055 is turned ON), the operation is to change the settings by changing the settings to the setting change mode. A notification is issued to prompt the user to perform the following steps (confirm the setting value).

In this example, (a) when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition conditions for controlling to the setting change mode are satisfied, that is, (i) gaming machine slot 3;
is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), and (ii) the lock switch 21T
M051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii)
The clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21
If it is determined (YES in TM4140), the setting change mode is controlled. As a result, an error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display monitor 21TM0
29) is not executed, and the message display on the production control board 12 side ("E" display) is not executed.
Please turn the power off and then turn it back on to switch to setting change mode.'') will not be performed.

Here, the production control CPU 120 that has received the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590) confirms that the image display device 5 is controlled to the setting change mode, that is, the setting change operation (the operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052). ), it is possible to notify that the setting value can be changed. For example, it is possible to display a message on the image display device 5 such as "You are in setting change mode" or "Please perform a setting change operation to change the setting value." As a result, the staff of the game hall can understand that the setting change mode is being set, and the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052
After changing the setting value stored in the setting value storage area to the planned setting value by operating , by switching the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state, the setting value is confirmed and the pachinko game machine is activated. 1 can be transferred to normal game processing.

On the other hand, (b) if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition conditions for controlling to the setting change mode are not satisfied, that is, the above (i) to (ii)
If any of the conditions i) are not satisfied, the setting change mode will not be applied.
After sending the set value abnormality error command (step S21TM4190), the game is controlled to be stopped (loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220). As a result, an error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display monitor 21T
Display of "E" in M029) will be executed, and a message will also be displayed on the production control board 12 side ("Please turn on the power again after turning off the power and move to setting change mode"). .

In this way, an error display is executed on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029), and a message is displayed on the production control board 12 side ("Turn on the power again after turning off the power. Please move to setting change mode.")
If this is also done, the game machine will be notified that the conditions for transitioning to the settings change mode are not satisfied after the power is restored, even though the power was cut off during the settings change mode. It turns out. In this case, the staff at the gaming parlor understands that the game is not being controlled by the setting change mode and is in a stopped state (it is necessary to turn the power back on to change the setting change mode). It is possible. Therefore, after the power is turned off, the power is turned on again by performing operations such that conditions (i) to (iii) for transition to the setting change mode are all satisfied. Then, in the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed to the planned setting value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF. By switching to this state, the set value can be determined and the pachinko game machine 1 can be shifted to normal game processing.

In this way, when power is cut off in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified when the power is restored.

Here, in case (a) where the conditions for transitioning to the setting change mode are met when the power is restored,
Error display on main board 11 side (Step S21TM4210: Display monitor 21TM029
The setting change mode is automatically entered without displaying "E" (display of "E"), thereby avoiding unnecessary error display and appropriately prompting the setting value to be changed.

On the other hand, in case (b) where the conditions for transitioning to the settings change mode are not met when the power is restored, the system cannot transition to the settings change mode when the power is restored even though a power outage occurred during the settings change mode. state, the game is forcibly stopped (step S21TM420
0 to step S21TM4220), and an error display is performed on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029). Thereby, it is possible to restrict the progress of the game in an unstable state where the set value is not determined, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

Note that if the setting changing flag is set (Y in step S21TM4030)
ES), when all transition conditions (i) to (iii) for transitioning to setting change mode are satisfied, and when any of transition conditions (i) to (iii) are not satisfied. A different command may be sent as a command indicating that the set value may be abnormal.

For example, if the transition conditions are met, this is a command that indicates that the setting value may be abnormal, and the mode has been transitioned to setting change mode (or the conditions for transition are satisfied). The production control CPU 120 which sent a command indicating and received this command
In this case, it is preferable to have the image display device 5 display a message saying "The setting value may be abnormal" and a message saying "You will be automatically controlled to the setting change mode." On the other hand, if the transition condition is not satisfied, as described above, step S21TM4
It is best to send a 190 setting value abnormal error command.

After the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends and the transition to normal game processing occurs, when the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both in the closed state, (1) lock switch 21T is pressed.
In response to M051 being operated (changing from the OFF state to the ON state), a lock switch operation command is sent from the game control microcomputer 100 to the production control CPU 120, and (2) the setting changeover switch is activated. (Clear switch) In response to operation of 21TM052 (changed from OFF state to ON state), a setting changeover switch operation command is sent from the game control microcomputer 100 to the production control CPU 120. become.

Then, the production control board 12 (production control CPU 120) issues lock switch operation commands,
and/or that an operation was performed to change the setting value based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, even though the device was not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to specify and notify that fact. For example, based on reception of a lock switch operation command, an abnormal operation warning notification is executed to display the words "Lock switch operation has been detected" on the image display device 5. Furthermore, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, an abnormal operation warning notification is executed to display the words "Operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." As a result, game parlor staff, etc. can clearly understand that an operation to change the setting value has been performed even though it is not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can prevent unauthorized use. You can check whether this is being done.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 is not limited to such a form, but after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and shifts to normal game processing, the lock switch 21TM is activated.
Whether or not 051 was operated and setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052
The lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command may not be sent without confirming whether or not the lock switch operation command has been operated. In this way, during the period when normal game processing (timer interrupt processing for game control) is being executed, the execution status of operations for changing setting values and operations for checking setting values is not checked. This makes it possible to reduce the control burden on the game control microcomputer 100.

(Modified example of power-on processing)
In the example shown in FIG. 9-6, if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine slot 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120); ), (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140).
Only when it is confirmed that the following three conditions are satisfied, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150) and the setting change mode is entered (step S21T
NO for M4570).

Not limited to this form, as shown in FIG. 9-11, if the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) to (iii)
) without checking whether the three conditions are satisfied or not, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150), and the process shifts to the setting change mode (step S21TM4).
570 (NO).

In the process shown in FIG. 9-11, if the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010) or if the setting value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change flag is set. (Step S
21TM4030: YES), the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150) without determining whether conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied, and the setting change mode is controlled (step S21TM4150). (NO in S21TM4570), the part that is not controlled in the game stop state (processing corresponding to the loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) differs from the processing shown in FIG. 9-6. The other parts are the same as the processing shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8.

Even in this case, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 and the setting change mode is entered based on the fact that the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on. It is possible to appropriately determine the state of a game machine when a power outage occurs during a change.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-11, if the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, the setting change mode is set (NO in step S21TM4570). (The setting value in the setting value storage area can be changed.) On the other hand, if the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) to (iii) Regardless of whether the three conditions are satisfied or not, the setting change mode is forcibly controlled.

In this way, if a power outage occurs while the control is in the settings change mode, the three conditions (i) to (iii) are applied based on the fact that the setting change flag is set when the power is restored. By automatically being controlled to the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the
It is possible to improve the work efficiency for determining set values.

Here, if the setting changing flag is set (Y in step S21TM4030)
ES), (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM
Even if the condition (YES at 4130) is not satisfied, the setting change mode is controlled. As a result, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF.
By operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the current state,
The setting values stored in the setting value storage area will be changed (step S in Figure 9-7).
21TM4610 to step S21TM4620).

As mentioned above, the condition for terminating the setting change mode is to turn the lock switch 21TM051 to ON.
This means switching from the N state to the OFF state (making the determination YES in step S21TM4680). Therefore, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state, the clerk at the game parlor who has performed the operation to change the setting value must first turn the lock switch 21TM051 from the OFF state in order to confirm the setting value and end the setting change mode. After switching to the ON state, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step S21T
M4680 makes a YES determination).

In this way, when the setting change flag is not set (step S21TM40
30 (NO), and the setting changing flag is set (step S21TM40).
30: YES), by making the conditions for starting the control in the setting change mode different, while making the conditions for ending the control in the setting change mode (operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state) the same. The conditions for terminating the control of the setting change mode are made clear, and the game is appropriately shifted to normal game processing.

Here, the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030).
), the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on when the setting change mode is controlled based on the
It is also possible to issue a notification to prompt the user to enter the state. For example, if the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 in step S21TM4150, and sends a setting value abnormal error command (in step S21TM4190 described above). After receiving the set value abnormality error command (step S21TM4110), the production control CPU 120 says, "Turn the lock switch ON once, and then switch it OFF after changing the set value." The message may also be displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, in the processes shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8 and FIG. 9-11, it is not possible to proceed to the normal game process while the setting changing flag is set. Therefore, when the game machine manufacturer ships the pachinko game machine 1 (before it is installed in the game hall), it is possible to set the setting change flag in advance. Unless the setting value is changed and the setting change mode is ended, the pachinko game machine 1 cannot be played. Thereby, when installing the pachinko game machine 1 at a game parlor, it is possible to reliably control the setting change mode, perform a setting change operation, and take measures to confirm the set value.

(Set value memory control in case of power outage while changing set values)
Next, setting value storage control when a power outage occurs while changing a setting value will be explained using FIGS. 9-12. In the example shown in FIG. 9-7, when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area is changed.

First, FIG. 9 shows the control when the setting value is changed during the setting change mode and the power is cut off before the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (before the end of the setting change mode). This will be explained using -12(1).

As shown in order 1, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) to control the setting change mode.
In this example, when the power is turned on, the setting value is set to “0” in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102.
' is stored. Next, as shown in order 2, with the start of the setting change mode, the setting value "0" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read out, and 1 is added to the read setting value. The sum of "1" will be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

Next, as shown in order 3, in the setting change mode, press the setting changeover switch (
Based on the operation of Clear Switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed from "0" to "1", and "2" is added by 1 to the changed setting value. will be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, lock switch 21TM05
1 remains in the ON state. Furthermore, as shown in order 4, in the setting change mode, 2
Based on the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed from "1" to "2", and the changed setting value is changed to 1. The sum of "3" will be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

Next, as shown in order 5, it is assumed that the power is cut off while the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state in the setting change mode, that is, before the operation to end the setting change mode is performed. At this time, the setting value "2" after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is stored in the setting value storage area.
In the power-off state, the setting value "2" stored in the setting value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is held as is.

Next, as shown in order 6, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) to control the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, "2" is set as the setting value in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102.
is stored. This set value "2" is the value that was stored in the set value storage area when the power was cut off during the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in order 7, as the setting change mode is started, the RAM 102
The setting value "2" stored in the setting value storage area of is read out, and "3", which is the result of adding 1 to the read setting value, is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

Note that when the power is turned on in order 6, the setting change flag is set, so when applying the control shown in Figure 9-11, even if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (or cleared). Even if the switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), the setting change mode is automatically controlled. Therefore, the state of the lock switch 21TM051 in order 6 and order 7 may be in the OFF state.

In this way, the setting value is changed in the setting change mode, and the lock switch 21TM0
If a power outage occurs without 51 being turned off (without terminating the setting change mode), when the power is restored, the setting value after the change in the previous setting change mode will be retained in the setting value storage area. It is in a state of being Therefore, when the power is restored, the planned setting values may have already been set, and in this case, the arcade staff can exit the setting change mode without having to perform an operation to change the setting values again. Since it is only necessary to shift the game machine to normal game processing by using the above command, work efficiency can be improved.

Next, regarding the control when the power is cut off after the setting value change operation is performed during the setting change mode and the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (after the setting change mode ends), This will be explained using FIG. 9-12 (2).

Orders 1 to 4 are the same as the example shown in FIG. 9-12(1), and their explanation will be omitted. Next, as shown in order 5, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051
By switching from the ON state to the OFF state, the setting change mode ends. As a result, the set value "2" after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is determined as the final set value. At this time, "2" is stored as the set value in the set value storage area, and "3", which is the determined set value plus 1, is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

After that, as shown in order 6, an operation is performed to turn off the power switch 21TM055, and the power supply is stopped. In this power-off state, R
The setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area formed in the backup area of AM102
' will be retained as is.

Next, as shown in order 7, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) to control the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, "2" is set as the setting value in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102.
is stored. This set value "2" is the value that was finally stored in the set value storage area at the end of the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in order 8, as the setting change mode is started, the RAM 102
The setting value "2" stored in the setting value storage area is read out, and "3", which is the result of adding 1 to the read setting value, is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

As shown in Figure 9-12 (1) and (2), when the power is cut off while being controlled in the settings change mode, and when the power supply is stopped after the settings change mode control ends. In either case, when the power is restored, the setting values that have been changed according to the setting change operation in the previous setting change mode, that is, the setting values that were stored in the setting value storage area immediately before the power was turned off, are restored. , is a valid setting value (the setting value stored in the setting storage area when the power is restored).

Note that the storage control of setting values is not limited to that shown in FIGS. 9-12. That is, when the setting change mode is controlled, the setting values stored in the setting value storage area are copied to the setting information temporary storage area, and when the setting change mode is controlled, the setting changeover switch (clear switch) is activated. 21
When TM052 is operated, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed without changing the setting value in the setting value storage area, and the setting change mode is terminated (turning on the lock switch 21TM051). The setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored (overwritten) in the setting value storage area and the setting value is confirmed based on the fact that an operation for switching from the state to the OFF state has been performed. It's okay. In this case, the display monitor 21TM029
The setting value to be displayed is the value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (0 to 5) stored in the setting information temporary storage area. In accordance with the change, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 will also change.

With such a configuration, even if the power is turned on and the setting change mode is entered and a setting change operation is performed (the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed), the settings will not be changed. Without completing the operation to end the change mode (lock switch 21TM0
51 is not switched to the OFF state), if a power failure occurs, the RAM 10
The setting values stored in the setting value storage area No. 2 have not been changed since the power was turned on (before the setting change operation was performed in the setting change mode). That is, in the power supply stop state, the setting values that were stored in the setting value storage area when the power was last turned on are still held. Therefore, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display section 21TM029A) when controlled to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode after the power is restored is as follows.
The value corresponds to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power was last turned on.

In this way, it is possible to appropriately determine the set value in the event that power is cut off while the device is controlled in the setting change mode. Furthermore, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state where the setting change mode has not ended, changes to the set value can be restricted.

The controls related to the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode shown in the above embodiments are applied to gaming machines that have a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5) and have different jackpot probabilities depending on the setting values. This is applicable, but is not limited to this.Although multiple setting values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, the jackpot probability is the same regardless of the setting value (for example, for all setting values 0 to 5) It is also applicable to gaming machines (where the jackpot probability is 1/300).

Furthermore, the following invention is disclosed in this feature section 21TM.

As shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes a setting change means for changing setting values in multiple stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine has been proposed in which a "jackpot signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board. Regarding gaming machines such as those described in JP-A No. 2010-200902 (Paragraph 0007), when changing setting values, etc., it is necessary for the external device to understand the control state related to the settings. However, even if the conventional gaming machine signal output technology described in JP-A-2014-200506 (Paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to understand this. be. The inventions related to means O1 to means O4 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately notify the outside of the gaming machine of the control state related to the settings.

The gaming machine of means O1 is a gaming machine (pachinko) that can execute control (jackpot judgment processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot judgment). A gaming machine 1), which includes a setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which setting values can be changed, and a setting value that can be checked. Setting confirmation mode control means that can control the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM4530 to step S21TM
4570 and step S21TM4650), and a specific signal output means that outputs a specific signal (security signal) in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. (Step S21TM45
A gaming control microcomputer 100 that outputs a security signal at 60) and a setting means (gaming control microcomputer 100 that sets the value of the security signal timer) that sets a value related to the period during which a specific signal is output (value of the security signal timer). computer 100), the setting means is capable of setting a common predetermined value when controlled to the setting change mode and when controlled to the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM4710 sets a security signal timer). (1 second is set as the value of), and the specific signal output means, in response to the end of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, until at least a period corresponding to the predetermined value has elapsed. Outputs a specific signal (continuously outputs a security signal until 1 second has elapsed from the end of setting confirmation mode, and continues to output a security signal until 30 seconds have elapsed from the end of setting change mode when setting change mode ends) (The security signal continues to be output until the time elapses.) According to this, the state of the gaming machine related to the settings can be appropriately notified to the external device.

The gaming machine of the means O2 is the gaming machine of the means O1, and includes an initializing means (
A gaming control microcomputer 100) that executes RAM clear (step S21TM1410) based on the RAM clear flag being set in step S21TM4050 and step S21TM4150 is provided, and the initialization means is configured to control the setting change mode. After initializing the gaming state (in the case of being controlled to the setting change mode, RAM clearing has been executed after being controlled to the setting change mode), and setting the predetermined value (in step S21TM4710), After setting the value of the security signal timer to 1 second), it is possible to set a specific value corresponding to a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value (when RAM clear is executed, the security signal timer is set to 1 second). 30 seconds can be set as the value of the signal timer), and the specific signal output means outputs the specific signal until a period corresponding to the specific value elapses in response to the end of the control in the setting change mode. (The security signal is continuously outputted until 30 seconds have elapsed since the end of the setting change mode.) According to this, a specific signal is output for at least a period corresponding to a predetermined value in both cases when control in the setting change mode ends and when control in the setting confirmation mode ends, and when the setting change mode ends. If the mode is controlled, the specific signal will be output for a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value.
It becomes possible to set different output periods in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode while standardizing the setting process by the setting means.

The gaming machine of means O3 is the gaming machine of means O1 or means O2, and in the setting change mode, a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (step S21TM4680
Specific information storage means (RAM 102 backup In the area, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the setting changing flag in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting changing mode, and clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720 based on the ending of the setting changing mode. ), and when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when power supply to the gaming machine is started (the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 when the power is restored). ), the game is stopped and a specific signal is output (steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 based on the fact that the conditions for transitioning to the setting change mode are not satisfied).
This process can be repeatedly executed until the power is turned off. According to this, when the power supply is stopped during the control of the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the external device when the power supply is restarted.

The gaming machine of the means O4 is any gaming machine selected from the means O1 to O3, and includes a game control means (a game control microcomputer that executes a game control timer interrupt process) for controlling the progress of the game. 100), and a performance control means (performance control CPU 1) that controls the execution of the performance.
20), and the game control means includes a display means (display monitor 21TM029) and the setting change mode control means (steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620).
(Step S
21TM4680 without detecting an operation to turn off the lock switch 21TM051) specific information storage means for storing specific information (
In the backup area of the RAM 102, a setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting changing mode, and a setting changing flag is cleared in step S21TM4720 based on the ending of the setting changing mode. microcomputer 100), and when power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (step S2 at the time of power restoration)
1TM4030 determines that the setting change flag is set), it is possible to execute an error notification on the display means and send an error command to the production control means (when the setting value is changed in step S21TM4190). Sends an abnormal error command and displays "E" on the display monitor 21TM029 in the error display of step S21TM4210.
In response to receiving the error command, the production control means issues a notification prompting an operation to change the set value (the image display device 5 displays the characters "
After the power is turned off, turn the power back on and enter the setting change mode.'' According to this, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the staff at the gaming parlor, and the operator can be prompted to perform an operation to change the setting value.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes a setting change means for changing setting values in multiple stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. In a gaming machine such as that described in JP-A No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when power supply is stopped when changing a setting value. The inventions related to means P1 to means P4 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and provide a gaming machine that appropriately notifies the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the setting value. It is about providing.

The gaming machine of the means P1 is a gaming machine (pachinko) that can execute control (jackpot judgment processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to the setting value (six levels of setting values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot judgment). A gaming machine 1), which includes a setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which setting values can be changed; Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can specify that the control has been performed (setting change in progress flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and step S21TM4580 is set based on the completion of the setting change mode) A gaming control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag in S21TM4720, and the specific information storage means is capable of storing the specific information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped ( The value of the setting change flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102), and when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when power supply to the gaming machine is started (when the power is restored) (If it is determined in step S21TM4030 that the setting change flag is set), an error notification means that can execute error notification (if the conditions for transition to the setting change mode are not met, an error notification is issued in step S21TM4210) It is characterized by further comprising a game control microcomputer 100) that performs display. According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified.

The gaming machine of the means P2 is the gaming machine of the means P1, and the setting change mode control means determines that the setting change condition is satisfied (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state). ,
The setting change mode can be controlled based on the lock switch 21TM051 being in the ON state and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 being in the ON state, and power supply to the gaming machine has started. In this case, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (when it is determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 when the power is restored), the setting change condition is satisfied. It is possible to control the setting change mode without executing the error notification based on the fact that the
Based on the determination of YES in all the steps 4140, the setting change mode is entered without proceeding to the loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220)
It is characterized by According to this, when the conditions for controlling to the setting change mode are met, the setting change mode is controlled without executing an error notification, thereby avoiding unnecessary error notifications and appropriately changing the setting value. Can encourage change.

The gaming machine of means P3 is the gaming machine of means P1 or means P2, and when power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (power supply If it is determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of recovery), it is possible to execute the error notification and bring the game to a halt state (when the power is turned on, it is possible to enter the setting changing mode). If the transition conditions are not satisfied (step S2
If the determination is NO in any of steps 1TM4120 to S21TM4140),
Steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4 without shifting to setting change mode
220). According to this, it is possible to restrict the progress of the game in a state where the set value is unstable, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

The gaming machine of the means P4 is any gaming machine selected from the means P1 to P3, and includes a game control means (a game control microcomputer that executes a game control timer interrupt process) that controls the progress of the game. 100), and a performance control means (performance control CPU 1) that controls the execution of the performance.
20), and the game control means includes a display means (display monitor 21TM029);
The setting change mode control means (steps S21TM4530 to S21TM46
20) and the specific information storage means, and when power supply to the gaming machine is started, the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means. (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration), executes the error notification on the display means and sends an error command to the production control means. It is possible to do (
In step S21TM4190, a set value abnormality error command is sent, and in step S21TM
4210 error display, the character "E" can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029), and the effect control means can perform an operation for changing the set value in response to receiving the error command. The feature is that a message prompting the user (displays a message on the image display device 5 saying "Please turn the power back on after turning off the power and shift to the setting change mode"). According to this, the status of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the staff at the gaming parlor, and
It is possible to prompt the user to perform an operation to change the setting value.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes a setting change means for changing setting values in multiple stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. In a gaming machine such as that described in JP-A-2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when power supply is stopped when changing a setting value. The inventions related to Means Q1 to Means Q5 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and provide a gaming machine that appropriately determines the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the setting value. It's about doing.

The gaming machine of the means Q1 is a gaming machine (pachinko) that can execute control (such as jackpot judgment processing in special symbol process processing) according to the setting value (six levels of setting values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot judgment). A gaming machine 1), which includes a setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which setting values can be changed; Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can specify that the control has been performed (setting change in progress flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and step S21TM4580 is set based on the completion of the setting change mode) A gaming control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag in S21TM4720, and the specific information storage means is capable of storing the specific information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped ( The value of the setting change flag is stored in a backup area of the RAM 102), and the setting change mode control means:
When power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 when the power is restored) (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state). It is characterized in that the setting change mode is automatically controlled regardless of whether or not the condition for transitioning to the setting change mode is satisfied. According to this, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately determined when power supply is stopped in the setting change mode that involves initialization of the gaming state. It should be noted that the gaming machine of means Q1 initializes the gaming state in response to the control of the setting change mode (for example, in step S21TM4050 and step S21TM4150,
RAM is cleared based on the clear flag being set (step S21TM14)
10) may further include a game control microcomputer 100) that executes.

The gaming machine of means Q2 is the gaming machine of means Q1, and the setting change mode control means stores the specific information in the specific information storage means when power supply to the gaming machine is started. If not, the setting change mode is controlled based on the setting change condition being met (if the setting change flag is not set when the power is turned on (step S2
1TM4030: NO), the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and the lock switch 21TM0 is
51 is in the ON state, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, the RA
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means. (If the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21 TM4030), the setting changing mode is set regardless of whether the setting changing conditions are satisfied or not. (The setting change mode is automatically controlled regardless of whether the conditions for transitioning to the setting change mode are satisfied or not.) According to this, if a power outage occurs during setting change mode control, based on the fact that specific information is stored when the power is restored, the setting change mode will be activated even if the setting change conditions are not met. Since it is controlled, work efficiency can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means Q3 is the gaming machine of the means Q1 or the means Q2, and the setting change mode control means performs a transition operation when power supply to the gaming machine is started (when the power is turned on, the setting is being changed). When the flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in an ON state, and
The condition for transitioning to the setting change mode is satisfied: the RAM clear flag is 1 (RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode ends because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state). It is possible to control to the setting change mode based on the setting change mode), and a specific operation while being controlled to the setting change mode (it is confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF in step S21TM4680). It is possible to terminate the settings change mode based on the above-mentioned settings change mode, and the specific information storage means stores the specific information when controlled to the settings change mode (when the settings change mode control is started). (setting change in progress flag is set at the timing of step S21TM4580), and the specific information is erased when the setting change mode ends based on the specific operation (at the timing of step S21TM4720 when the control of the setting change mode ends). (clearing the setting change in progress flag), and the setting change mode control means executes the transition operation when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when power supply to the gaming machine is started. The setting change mode is set regardless of whether the change has been made (if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030).
S), regardless of whether the conditions for transitioning to the setting change mode are satisfied or not, the setting change mode is automatically controlled), and the setting change mode is ended based on the specific operation (step S21TM4680 (The setting change mode is terminated based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF.) According to this, the conditions for terminating the control in the setting change mode can be appropriately determined.

The gaming machine of the means Q4 is any gaming machine selected from the means Q1 to Q3, and has a setting value that stores a setting value (6 levels of setting values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination). A storage means (setting value storage area of RAM 102 where setting values are stored) is provided, and control according to the setting values stored in the setting value storage means (jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.)
can be executed, and the setting value stored in the setting value storage means is changed based on the changing operation when controlled in the setting change mode (setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is set in step S21TM4610). If the operation is performed, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed), and the setting change mode control means changes the setting change mode based on the specific operation when the setting change mode is controlled. (Step S2
1TM4680, the setting change mode is terminated based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF), and the setting value storage means is configured to perform the specific operation when the setting change mode is controlled. When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without being affected, the setting values changed by the changing operation in the setting change mode are continuously stored (the setting value storage area is in the backup area of the RAM 102). If the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area will be changed. Even if a failure occurs, the set value changed by the change operation is retained. According to this, when the power supply is resumed, the set value changed by the change operation in the setting change mode before the power outage is stored in the set value storage means, and the set value according to the set value is stored in the set value storage means. Since control is executed, work efficiency can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means Q5 is any gaming machine selected from the means Q1 to Q3, and has a setting value that stores a setting value (six levels of setting values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination). A storage means (setting value storage area of RAM 102 where setting values are stored) is provided, and control according to the setting values stored in the setting value storage means (jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.)
The setting change mode control means performs a change operation when being controlled in the setting change mode, and a setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21 in the setting change mode.
When TM052 is operated, only the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed, not the setting value stored in the setting value storage area), and based on the specific operation after the changing operation. The setting value stored in the setting value storage means is changed, and the setting change mode is ended (based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF in the setting change mode, the setting information is temporarily changed at that time). (The setting value stored in the storage area is stored in the setting value storage area to be determined as a valid setting value and the setting change mode is ended), and the setting value storage means is controlled in the setting change mode. In this case, when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without the specific operation being performed, the setting value before the changing operation is performed in the setting changing mode is stored (the setting is switched during the setting changing mode). Even if switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated, lock switch 21TM051
The setting values themselves stored in the setting value storage area will not be changed unless the switch is turned off, so if a power failure occurs during setting change mode, the setting values before being controlled by setting change mode will be retained. It is characterized by: According to this, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state where the setting change mode has not ended, it is possible to restrict the change of the setting value.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 052IW)
Next, the characteristic part 052IW will be explained. First, the gaming state in this feature section 052IW will be explained. First, the gaming states in this feature section 052IW include a normal state (low probability/non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small win time) where small wins are more likely to occur than in the normal state. Furthermore, there are two types of KT states, the first KT state and the second KT state, and in this characteristic part 052IW, the gaming state includes a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state: normal state). There are two cases: controlled to a low probability and first KT state (low probability/first KT state), and controlled to a high probability and first KT state (high probability/first KT state). , and may be controlled to a high probability and second KT state (high probability/second KT state).

Of the KT states, in the first KT state, as will be described later, a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is likely to be in the open state, but the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is open for an extremely long time, and a small hit is likely to occur. Even if this occurs, there are very few cases in which a game ball wins in the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about 1 ball for every 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, it is controlled to be in a state where small hits are likely to occur, and it is also controlled to be in a high base state, so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be long. In addition, in the second KT state, as described later, the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is transferred to the downstream special variable winning ball device 17. Easy to win. Specifically, the 2nd K
In the T state, it is controlled to be in a state where small hits are likely to occur, and it is also controlled to be in a low base state, so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be short.

Furthermore, the KT state is a gaming state in which small wins are more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state). Specifically, in this characteristic part 052IW, when a normal drawing is won, the variable winning ball device 6
The probability that B will be in the open state is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. Then, when the first special symbol changes, the percentage of small hits is determined to be low, while when the second special symbol changes, the percentage of small wins is determined to be high (however, as will be described later). (excluding the case of a forced loss), the KT state is a gaming state in which small wins are more likely to occur than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, small hits occur frequently mainly by changing the second special symbol, resulting in a gaming state advantageous to the player.

Note that the configuration for making the KT state a gaming state in which small wins are more likely to occur than the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state due to a normal symbol is the same as in the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol changes By configuring the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern to be shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of fluctuations to a certain period of time is higher in the KT state than in the normal state, and the KT state is changed to the normal state. It may also be possible to create a gaming state in which it is easier to win a small hit.

In addition, this feature section 052IW is configured such that the time required from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 until it reaches the variable prize winning ball device 6B is 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, it is adjusted by the installation position of the passage gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, and the nail group that forms the falling path of the game ball. Although details will be described later, in this characteristic part 052IW, the variable winning ball device 6B can be controlled to the open state based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, and in the first KT state described later, the game ball passes through. The time from passing through the gate 41 until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and after the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, it reaches the variable winning ball device 6B. Since this is shorter than the required time of 0.6 seconds, if one game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in the first KT state and the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state, The game balls can be entered into the variable winning ball device 6B as they are.

(Special variable winning ball device)
FIG. 10-1 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the special variable winning ball device 7 in this feature part 052IW. As shown in FIG. 10-1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a plate-shaped bottom member 052IW108 that is formed as the bottom of the channel through which the game balls flow. From the closed state where the bottom member is moved forward
By moving the 52IW 108 backward, the big prize opening which becomes the winning area is opened. The game ball that has entered the grand prize opening is detected by the first count switch 23.

In this feature part 052IW, as shown in Figure 10-1, the game ball that has entered the grand prize opening is
Furthermore, it is guided to the guide path 052IW100 provided on the right side of the special variable winning ball device 7.
The guide route 052IW100 further branches into two routes 052IW102, 103, and the game ball guided to the guide route 052IW100 is guided to the left route 052IW102 or the right route 052IW103. When guided to the left path 052IW102, the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 and is detected by the V area switch 052IW106. When guided to the right path 052IW103, the game ball is ejected to the ejection area 052IW1.
05 and is detected by the discharge area switch 052IW107.

As shown in Figure 10-1, near the entrance of the left path 052IW102, there is a V area opening/closing plate 0.
52IW101 is provided, and when the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is in the open state, the game ball guided to the guide path 052IW100 enters the left path 052IW102, and the V
It is possible to enter area 052IW104. In addition, when the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is in the closed state, the game ball guided to the guide path 052IW100 is moved to the right path 052IW10.
3 and is discharged from the discharge area 052IW105 to the back side of the gaming area.

In addition, the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is controlled from the closed state to the open state by driving the solenoid 052IW109 by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103).

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, when the jackpot game is controlled, the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game and is detected by the V area switch 052IW106, and after the jackpot game ends. Controlled to a variable state.

Note that the total number of game balls detected by the V area switch 052IW106 and the number of game balls detected by the discharge area switch 052IW107 during one round matches the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. It should be. Therefore, the total number of game balls detected by the V area switch 052IW106 and the number of game balls detected by the discharge area switch 052IW107 during one round is the first count switch 23.
If it does not match the number of game balls detected by , it may be determined that there is a large winning hole input/output mismatch error, and the error may be notified. In this case, since it takes a certain amount of time for the winning game ball to reach the V area 052IW104 or the discharge area 052IW105 just before the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state, the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state. If the number of game balls does not match after a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, it may be configured to determine that there is a large winning hole input/output mismatch error.

(Configuration of control board)
FIG. 10-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like in this feature section 052IW.
In this characteristic part 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-2, the switch circuit 110 includes a gate switch 21, a starting port switch (first starting port switch 22A and second starting port switch 22B)
), count switch (first count switch 23 and second count switch 24))
In addition to the detection signals from V region switch 052IW106 and discharge region switch 05
The detection signal from the 2IW 107 is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-2, the solenoid circuit 111 is
The solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 is sent to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory, the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door, the solenoid 83 for the special prize opening, and the solenoid for the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101. 052IW109.

(Jackpot probability, small hit probability)
FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the jackpot probability and small win probability for each set value. Of these, FIG. 10-3 shows the jackpot probability and small win probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Further, FIG. 10-4 shows the jackpot probability and small win probability when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Also, Figure 10-3
As shown in FIG. 10-4, this example shows a configuration in which the settings can be changed in six stages from "1" to "6". In addition, it is not limited to the case where the setting can be changed to 6 levels.
For example, the configuration may be such that the settings can be changed in 2 to 5 levels, or the settings can be changed in 7 or more levels.

First, using FIG. 10-3, the jackpot probability and small win probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed will be explained. In the example shown in Figure 10-3 (A), in the non-probability variable state (low probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "205/65536" and is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", setting value "5", and in the case of setting value "6", the jackpot probability "
247/65536", which is the highest and the most advantageous setting for the player. Also,
In the example shown in Figure 10-3 (B), in the variable probability state (high probability state), the probability of winning the jackpot is 10 times higher than in the non-variable state (low probability state), and the set value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "2050/65536" and is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and for setting value "6", the jackpot probability is "2470/65536", which is the highest. high,
This is the most advantageous setting for the player.

On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in Figures 10-3 (A) and (B), the setting value "1" ~
The small hit probability is "6298/65536" regardless of whether it is "6" or whether it is in an uncertain variable state (low probability state) or a definite variable state (high probability state). constant. That is, in this example, the determination value for determining a small hit is common regardless of the setting value, and is common between the non-probability variable state and the probability variable state. Even if the configuration is such that the jackpot probability varies depending on the setting value while the small hit probability remains constant, as shown in Fig. 10-3 (A),
As shown in (B), the number of determination values for each set value may be made consistent by varying the probability of deviation between set values "1" to "6".

Next, using FIG. 10-4, the jackpot probability and small win probability when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed will be explained. In the example shown in Figure 10-4 (A), in the non-probability variable state (low probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "205/65536" and is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", setting value "5", and when setting value "6", jackpot probability "
247/65536", which is the highest and the most advantageous setting for the player. Also,
In the example shown in Figure 10-4 (B), in the variable probability state (high probability state), the overall probability of winning the jackpot is 10 times higher than in the non-variable state (low probability state), and the set value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "2050/65536" and is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and for setting value "6", the jackpot probability is "2470/65536", which is the highest. high,
This is the most advantageous setting for the player.

On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in Figures 10-4 (A) and (B), the setting value "1" ~
The small hit probability is "62986/65536" regardless of whether it is "6" or whether it is in an uncertain variable state (low probability state) or a definite variable state (high probability state). constant. That is, in this example, the judgment value for small hit judgment is common regardless of the setting value,
And it is common to non-determinable variable states and definite variable states. However, in this example, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (see Figure 10-4), the small hit is smaller than when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (see Figure 10-3). The winning probability is approximately 10 times higher (that is, the number of judgment values for small hit determination when executing the variable display of the second special symbol is the same as the number of judgment values for small hit determination when executing the variable display of the first special symbol). (more than the number of judgment values for judgment). Even if the configuration is such that the jackpot probability varies depending on the setting value while the small hit probability remains constant, as shown in FIG.
As shown in -4(A) and (B), the number of determination values for each set value may be made consistent by varying the probability of failure between the set values "1" to "6".

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, the judgment value corresponding to the deviation is included in the judgment values corresponding to all the setting values "1" to "6" (Fig. -3 and Figure 10
As shown in -4, there is no set value for which the probability of failure is 0). The judgment value corresponding to the deviation differs depending on the setting value (as shown in Figures 10-3 and 10-4, depending on which of the setting values "1" to "6" , the probability of failure is different).

Note that the mode shown in this example is not limited to the case where the probability of failure is 0 (i.e.,
It may also be configured such that there is a setting value that does not include a determination value corresponding to an error. For example, with the setting value "6" having the highest advantage (highest jackpot probability), the probability of losing is 0, and the configuration may be such that the determination value corresponding to the loss is not included.

In addition, the mode shown in this example is not limited to, for example, when the small hit probability is 0 (i.e.,
It may be configured such that there is a judgment value that does not include a judgment value corresponding to a small hit. For example, when performing a variable display of the first special symbol (Figure 10-3), the small hit probability may be uniformly set to 0, and the judgment value for the small hit may not be included. good.

In addition, in Figures 10-3 (A), (B) and Figures 10-4 (A), (B), the small hit probability is the same in the variable probability state (high probability state) and the variable probability state (low probability state). The probabilities of winning and losing are different, but the probability of a small hit is higher in a variable state (high probability state) than in a variable state (low probability state) because the probability of a jackpot is higher in a variable state (high probability state) than in a variable state (low probability state). It is also possible to lower the probability of failure and match the probability of failure. Furthermore, even if the set values are different, for example "1" and "2", the jackpot probability and the small win probability may be made to match each other. As a result, in gaming machines that have less than 6 actual settable stages or where there is no difference in advantage due to the setting change function, the hardware/software configuration of gaming machines that have a 6-step setting change function and can be standardized, and manufacturing costs can be reduced.

(Jackpot type determination table)
FIGS. 10-5(A) and 10-5(B) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table determines the type of jackpot as "2R normal jackpot", "2R probability variable jackpot", "2R regular jackpot", " 6R normal jackpot”, “6R definite strange jackpot”, or “1
This is a table that is referred to in order to determine either ``0R Probable Variable Jackpot''.

As shown in FIG. 10-5(A), in this characteristic part 052IW, when performing a variable display of the first special symbol, regardless of the setting value "1" to "6", There is a probability of 9% that it will be a 10R jackpot, a probability of 56% that it will be a jackpot of 6R, and a probability of 35
% probability is determined as "6R normal jackpot". In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-5(B), in this characteristic part 052IW, when performing a variable display of the second special symbol, regardless of the setting value "1" to "6", is determined to be a "10R guaranteed strange jackpot" with a probability of 10%,
A ``6R probability variable jackpot'' is determined with a probability of 50%, a ``2R probability variable jackpot'' is determined with a 5% probability, and a ``2R normal jackpot'' is determined with a 35% probability.

"10R probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state for 10 rounds and then shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Also, what is “6R surefire jackpot”?
This is a jackpot that is controlled to a six-round jackpot gaming state and then transitioned to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. In addition, "2R probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a two-round jackpot gaming state and then shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends.

The "6R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the game to be in a jackpot gaming state for 6 rounds, and then shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Moreover, "2R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a two-round jackpot gaming state and then controlled to a low probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends.

In this characteristic part 052IW, "10R definite strange jackpot", "6R sure strange jackpot", and "6
In the case of "Normal Jackpot", the jackpot game will continue to win until a predetermined period of time (in this example, 30 seconds) passes or a predetermined number of game balls (in this example, 10) win a prize in each round of the jackpot game. The openings are controlled to be open, and it is possible to enter up to 10 big prize openings in each round. On the other hand, in the case of a "2R guaranteed strange jackpot" and a "2R regular jackpot", the jackpot is controlled to be open only for a short period (1.8 seconds in this example) in each round of the jackpot game. The number of prizes that can be won in each round is about 2 to 3.

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, when the jackpot game ends, it is controlled to either the first KT state, the second KT state, or the non-KT state depending on the game state before the jackpot game and the jackpot type. The manner of transition of the gaming state after the jackpot game will be described later (see FIG. 10-29).

(Small hit type determination table)
FIGS. 10-6 (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the small hit type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is to be used as a small hit symbol, the small hit type is changed to "Small hit A" based on the random number for determining the hit type.
”, “small win B”, or “small win C”.

As shown in FIG. 10-6(A), in this characteristic part 052IW, when performing a variable display of the first special symbol, regardless of the setting value "1" to "6", "Small win A" is determined with 100% probability. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 10-6(B), this characteristic part 05
In 2IW, regardless of the set value "1" to "6", when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, "small hit B" is determined with a 70% probability, and 30 A "small hit C" is determined with a probability of %.

In this example, as will be described later, in the case of "small win A", the special winning opening is opened for only an extremely short 0.2 seconds during the small win game (see Figure 10-12), and the small win game There is almost no expectation that the game ball will enter the special prize opening. In addition, in the case of "small win B", the special winning hole is opened for 0.8 seconds during the small winning game (see Figure 10-13), and the game ball enters the special winning hole during the small winning game. can be expected to some extent. In addition, in the case of "small win C", the special winning hole is opened for 1.8 seconds during the small winning game (see Figure 10-14), and the game ball enters the special winning hole during the small winning game. can be most expected.

(Fluctuation pattern table)
FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9 are explanatory diagrams showing variation patterns (variation times) of special symbols and decorative symbols used in this characteristic portion 052IW. EX shown in Figures 10-7 to 10-9
T is the second byte data of the production control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each variation pattern.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9, there are nine types of first variation patterns #01 to #09 for the first special symbol and the decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and the decorative symbol. Thirty-four types, #01 to #34, are used. Below, for example, fluctuation pattern #n(n
=01-09 or 01-34) means both the first variation pattern #n and the second variation pattern #n.

When performing a variable display of the first special symbol, if it is in a non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state), the first special symbol variation pattern for non-KT times shown in Figure 10-7 (A) A table is selected and a variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-7(A), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, one of the first variable patterns #01 to #06 is determined.

When performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the KT state (low probability/1st KT state, high probability/
(first KT state, high probability/second KT state), the first special symbol fluctuation pattern table for KT shown in FIG. 10-7(B) is selected and the fluctuation pattern is determined. Figure 1
As shown in 0-7(B), when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the KT state, one of the first variable patterns #07 to #09 is determined.

When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in a non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern for non-KT times shown in Figure 10-8 (C) A table is selected and a variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8(C), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, one of the second variable patterns #01 to #03 is determined. Specifically, when it is determined that the winning pattern is a loss, the second fluctuation pattern #01 is determined, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Also,
Even when a small hit is determined, the second variation pattern #02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when a jackpot is determined, the second variation pattern #03 is determined, and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner for a fairly long period of time, such as 5 minutes.

In this feature part 052IW, even in the non-KT state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs, a situation arises in which a certain amount of prize balls can be expected by entering the game ball into the special winning hole. I end up. Therefore, in this characteristic part 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-8(C), even if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is extremely lengthened and the execution frequency of the variable display is By reducing this, the frequency of occurrence of small hits is reduced, thereby preventing a situation where players are targeted to obtain prize balls due to small hits even though they are in a non-KT state. In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, the "occurrence frequency of small winnings" is, for example, the occurrence rate of small winnings per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example,
The occurrence rate of small wins per unit time is higher than the normal state.

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (C), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variable time is changed even if it is a jackpot. 5
By making the ball relatively long, it is possible to prevent the act of illegally aiming at the prize ball by entering the special winning hole during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a jackpot, it is not necessary to take as long to digest the first retention memory as compared to the case of a small win, so the structure is configured so that the fluctuation time is shorter than in the case of a small win. There is.

When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in a low probability/first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability/first KT state will be terminated. A variation pattern table is selected according to the number of variations since then. in this case,
When performing the first variation display, the low probability/first KT shown in Figure 10-8(D) is used.
The second special symbol variation pattern table for time and first variation is selected and a variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8(D), when the second special symbol is displayed as the first variation in the low probability/first KT state, one of the second variation patterns #04 to #06 is executed. determined.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 10-8 (D), when it is determined that the first variation in the low probability/first KT state is a failure, the second variation pattern #04, which is a shortened variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds, is selected. It is determined. In addition, when determining a small win as the first variation in the low probability/1st KT state, the second variation pattern #05 (second starting prize opening opening), which has a relatively long variation time of 7 seconds for a small win, Preparatory variation pattern) is determined. In this feature part 052IW, as already explained, when controlled to the first KT state, the frequency of small hits increases, but by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B, it is actually possible to win a special variable prize. The special prize opening in the ball device 17 is set so that prizes are rarely won. However, in the state immediately after transitioning to the low probability/first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special variable winning ball is immediately released. If the device 17 is controlled to be in the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will enter the special winning hole. Therefore, in this feature part 052IW, by securing a variation time of at least 7 seconds in the first variation of the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B and special variable winning ball device 17 are activated before shifting to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 17 to open state after a sufficient period of time has elapsed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member have fallen, the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to be in an open state to enable winning to the special winning opening. This prevents the occurrence of a situation where more prize balls than expected are obtained in the 1KT state. Further, when a jackpot is determined as the first variation in the low probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #06 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for two minutes.

In addition, if the 2nd to 49th variation display is to be executed after finishing the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability/1st KT state, then
The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low probability/1st KT and 2nd to 49th fluctuations shown in -8(E) is selected and the fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8(E), when the second special symbol is displayed as the second to 49th variations in the low probability/first KT state, the second variation patterns #07 to #13 are It will be decided either way. In addition, as shown in Figure 10-8 (E), when it is determined that it is a failure as the 2nd to 49th variation of the low probability/1st KT state,
The second variation pattern #07 of a shortened variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds or the second variation pattern #08 of a shortened variation with an even shorter variation time of 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, low probability/1st K
If it is determined that the 2nd to 49th variation of the T state is a failure, the second variation pattern #09 with reach may be determined. In addition, if a small hit is determined as the 2nd to 49th variation of the low probability/1st KT state, the second variation pattern #10 is a shortened variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds, or the variation pattern is even shorter with a variation time of 1 second. The second variation pattern #11 of the shortening variation may be determined. On the other hand, when determining a small hit as the 2nd to 49th variation of the low probability/1st KT state,
The second variation pattern #12 with reach may be determined. Second fluctuation pattern #07
, #10 is a variation pattern that can be selected only when the second pending memory is not stored,
The second variation patterns #08 and #11 are variation patterns that can be selected only when one or more second pending memories are stored. This makes it possible to speed up the use of reserved memory and increase the operating rate. Furthermore, when determining a jackpot as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability/first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern #13 with reach is determined.

In addition, after completing the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability/1st KT state, the 50th variation display (i.e., the final variation in the low probability/1st KT state) is executed. If so, the second special symbol variation pattern table for low probability/1st KT time and 50th variation shown in FIG. 10-8(F) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in Figure 10-8 (F), the second
When a variable display of special symbols is executed, one of the second variable patterns #14 to #16 is determined.

In this feature section 052IW, when the state is controlled to be in the low probability/first KT state, for example, a character display such as "Chance Time in progress" is displayed on the image display device 5. Figure 10-
As shown in 8(F), if it is determined that the 50th change in the low probability/1st KT state is a loss or a small hit, the image display device 5 displays characters such as "Chance time is over!!" The second variation pattern #14 or the second variation pattern #15 with display is determined. In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (F), when determining a jackpot as the 50th change in the low probability/1st KT state, the image display device 5 displays text such as "Chance time is over!!" A second variation pattern #16 with a predetermined resurrection display after the end display is determined.

In addition, in this feature section 052IW, as shown in Figure 10-7, if the first special symbol fluctuates and hits the jackpot during the KT state, the first fluctuating pattern #07 with a fluctuating time of 10 seconds is displayed. configured to make a decision. This is a case where a jackpot immediately occurs due to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after transitioning to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is made to be a long fluctuation time, Since the variation of the second special symbol executed during the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is configured to be a forced miss, forced misses occur frequently despite the second KT state, and the player receives a small hit. You will not receive any benefit from it.
Therefore, in this feature part 052IW, by making the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol a short fluctuation time, the transition to the jackpot game state based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol is made before forced misses occur frequently. It is configured.

In addition, unlike this feature part 052IW, even if the variation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot variation of the first special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol is not forcibly missed (for example, the first If the machine has a configuration in which the second special symbol is forcibly missed when the second special symbol is changing when the special symbol jackpot symbol is stopped, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol's jackpot during the KT state. may be a long variable time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case where a jackpot occurs immediately after shifting to the second KT state due to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot is made the same short fluctuation time as the loss, the player You will not be able to receive any profits from small winnings. Therefore, if the fluctuation time of the jackpot of the first special symbol during the KT state is set to a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, there will be enough time for the small hit to occur at least multiple times. (for example, 1 minute).

When performing the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability/first KT state, the fluctuation after the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variable jackpot that triggered the high probability/first KT state A variation pattern table is selected depending on the number of times. In this case, if the first variation is to be displayed, the second special symbol variation pattern table for high probability/first KT time and first variation shown in Figure 10-9(G) is selected and the variation is changed. A pattern is determined. Figure 10-
As shown in 9(G), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the high probability/first KT state, one of the second variation patterns #17 to #21 is determined. Ru.

As with the first fluctuation of the low probability/first KT state, as shown in Figure 10-9 (G), the fluctuation time is also determined as the first fluctuation of the high probability/first KT state The second variation pattern #17, which is a short variation of 5 seconds, may be determined. On the other hand, high probability/1st KT
Even when it is determined that the first fluctuation in the state is a failure, the second fluctuation pattern #18 with reach
may be determined. Furthermore, even when a small win is determined as the first fluctuation in the high probability/first KT state, the fluctuation pattern for preparing to open the second starting prize opening (second fluctuation pattern #19) may be determined. On the other hand, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #20 with reach may be determined. Also, Figure 10
As shown in -9 (G), when a jackpot is determined as the first variation in the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #21 with reach is determined.

In addition, if the second and subsequent fluctuations are displayed after the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variable jackpot that triggered the high probability/first KT state, the high probability shown in Figure 10-9 (H) is executed. A second special symbol variation pattern table for probability/first KT and after the second variation is selected and a variation pattern is determined. As shown in Figure 10-9(H), 2 of the high probability/first KT state
When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed after the variable eye, the second variable pattern #2
It is determined to be one of #2 to #28.

As with the 2nd to 49th fluctuations of the low probability/1st KT state, as shown in Figure 10-9 (H), when determining that it is a failure after the 2nd fluctuation of the high probability/1st KT state, The second variation pattern #22 of a shortened variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds or the second variation pattern #23 of a shortened variation with an even shorter variation time of 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, the high probability/first KT state 2
If it is determined that the variation after the variation is a miss, the second variation pattern #24 with reach may be determined. In addition, when determining a small hit after the second variation in the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #25 with a short variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds or the second variation pattern #25 with a short variation time of 1
The second variation pattern #26, which is a shorter variation of seconds, may be determined. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a small hit after the second variation of the high probability/first KT state, the second variation with reach is determined.
Variation pattern #27 may be determined. The second fluctuation patterns #22 and #25 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when no second reservation memory is stored, and the second fluctuation patterns #23 and #26 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when one or more second reservation memories are stored. This is a variation pattern that can be selected only when This makes it possible to speed up the use of reserved memory and increase the operating rate. Also,
When determining a jackpot as the second variation or later in the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #28 with reach is determined.

When performing a variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in a high probability/second KT state, Figure 1
The high probability/second special symbol variation pattern table for the second KT shown in 0-9(I) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (I), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/second KT state, the second variable patterns #29 to #
34.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 10-9 (I), when it is determined to be a failure in the high probability/second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern #29 of shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds is determined. In some cases, the second variation pattern #30, which is a normal variation with a variation time of 5 seconds, is determined.
On the other hand, if it is determined to be a miss in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern #31 with reach may be determined. In addition, when determining a small hit in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern #32 with a short variation time of 1.5 seconds may be determined, or the normal variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds. The second variation pattern #33 may be determined. Further, when determining a jackpot in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern #34 with reach is determined.

When determining the variable pattern, more specifically, it is determined whether the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is to be executed, the current gaming state, and the variable display result. Using the fluctuation pattern table, a lottery process is performed based on random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern,
It is determined which variation pattern to use. Figure 10-10 is for determining the fluctuation pattern when the variable display result is a small hit in the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high probability/second KT shown in Figure 10-9(I). It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a small hit fluctuation pattern table.

As shown in FIG. 10-10, in this feature part 052IW, when executing a variable display of the second special symbol during the high probability/second KT state, and when executing a variable display resulting in a small hit, , regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6", the second fluctuation pattern #32 is determined with a probability of 70%, and the second fluctuation pattern #33 is determined with a probability of 30%. Therefore, in this example, in the case of the second KT state, there is a high probability that the variation pattern of shortening variation of 1.5 seconds will be selected.

In addition, in FIG. 10-10, as an example, a fluctuation pattern table in the case where the small hit fluctuation of the second special symbol is executed during the high probability/second KT state is shown. The other fluctuation pattern tables shown are similarly configured, and each fluctuation pattern is determined with the same probability regardless of the set value "1" to "6".

In the examples shown in Figures 10-8 to 10-10, a shortening change of 5 seconds or 1 second is performed in the first KT state, and a shortening change of 1.5 seconds is performed with high probability in the second KT state. Although the example is shown in which the configuration is configured to be executed in For example, it may be configured to perform a shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second in the case of a low probability state, and to perform a shortening variation of 1.5 seconds in the case of a high probability state.

(Opening pattern of special variable winning ball device 7)
Next, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 will be explained. FIG. 10-11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7. First, Figure 10-11 (
1) will be used to explain the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 when controlled by a jackpot game based on a 10R definite variable jackpot, a 6R definite variable jackpot, and a 2R definite variable jackpot (hereinafter also simply referred to as a "probable variable jackpot"). do. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), when the first round of the jackpot game starts, the solenoid 82 for the jackpot door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big jackpot) is opened. controlled by. When a game ball wins while the big prize opening is open, it is detected by the first count switch 23.

In addition, in a jackpot game based on a variable jackpot, as shown in Figure 10-11 (1), the first
When detecting the winning of the second game ball to the big prize opening in a round, solenoid 052I
W109 is driven, the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is controlled to the open state, and the V area 052
The game ball can enter the IW 104. Then, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) passes or a predetermined number of wins (for example, 10) are detected in the first round, a special prize will be awarded as shown in Figure 10-11 (1). When the variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is controlled to be closed again, and the big winning hole is controlled to be closed, the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is also controlled to be closed.

A game ball enters the V area 052IW104, and the V area switch 0 is activated within the predetermined detection validity period.
When detected by the 52IW 106, the gaming state is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the jackpot game based on the variable probability jackpot, the predetermined detection effective period starts at the timing when the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is controlled to the open state, and the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 This is the period until a predetermined period (in this example, 500 ms) has elapsed after being controlled to the closed state again.

Next, using FIG. 10-11 (2), release of the special variable winning ball device 7 when controlled by a jackpot game based on a 6R normal jackpot and a 2R normal jackpot (hereinafter also simply referred to as "normal jackpot") Explain patterns. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), when the first round of the jackpot game starts, the solenoid 82 for the jackpot door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big jackpot) is opened. controlled by. When a game ball wins while the big prize opening is open, it is detected by the first count switch 23.

In addition, in a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot, as shown in Figure 10-11 (2), the first
When it is detected that the first game ball enters the big winning hole in a round, solenoid 052I
W109 is driven, and the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is operated for a very short period of time (in this example, 0.
02 seconds) is controlled to be in the open state. Then, in the first round, a predetermined period (for example, 29
10 seconds) or when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings are detected in the big winning opening.
As shown in 11(2), the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is controlled to be closed again,
The grand prize opening is controlled to be closed.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), in a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot, the predetermined detection effective period is an extremely short opening period of the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 (in this example, 0.02
seconds), until a predetermined period (in this example, 500 ms) elapses.

As shown in FIG. 10-11(1), in the jackpot game based on the variable probability jackpot, the opening period of the V area opening/closing board 052IW101 is long. Therefore, during the predetermined detection valid period, the V area 052
The game ball easily enters the IW 104, and it is easy to be controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-11(2), in a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot, the opening period of the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is extremely short. Therefore, it is substantially difficult for the game ball to enter the V area 052IW104 during the predetermined detection effective period, and it is extremely rare that the game ball is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, in this example, in the jackpot game based on variable probability jackpots, game balls enter the V area 052IW104 at a higher rate during the jackpot game than in the jackpot game based on normal jackpots.

Next, the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state will be explained. FIGS. 10-12 to 10-14 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state. Of these, FIGS. 10-12 shows the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit A. Moreover, FIGS. 10-13 shows the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit B. Also,
Figure 10-14 shows the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 1 in the case of a small hit C.
7 open patterns are shown. 10-12(1) to FIG. 10-14(1) respectively show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state, and FIG. 10-12(2) ~FIG. 10-14 (2) shows the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state, respectively.

First, the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state will be explained using FIGS. 10-12(1) to 10-14(1). Figure 10
As shown in -12(1) to FIG. 10-14(1), when a game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and is detected by the gate switch 21, a normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 20. The variable display is executed, and if it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol, the winning symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20, and when it is determined that it is a loss, the winning symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. . In this characteristic part 052IW, as shown in Figures 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol is determined to derive and display the winning symbol and the losing symbol. The time is assumed to be 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, Figure 10-12
(1) - As shown in Figure 10-14 (1), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, and after the second starting winning hole opening processing time of 0.1 seconds has elapsed, the variable winning ball The device 6B is kept open for 5.5 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the second starting prize opening.

When a game ball enters the second starting prize opening when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, a variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is determined to be a small hit, A small winning symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small winning symbol is derived and displayed, in the case of small winning A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is kept open for 0.2 seconds, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (1). , in the case of small hit B, Figure 10-13
As shown in (1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is kept open for 0.8 seconds, and if it is a small hit C, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds. device 17 is 1
．． It remains open for 8 seconds, and the game ball can enter the special winning hole (however, in the case of small win A, the special variable winning ball device 17 opens only for an extremely short 0.2 seconds, so (You can hardly expect to win any prizes.) However, in the first KT state, in Figure 10-12 (1
), while the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side is short, 0.2 seconds, 0.8 seconds, or 1.8 seconds, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short. The time is long at 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although small wins are likely to occur, it is extremely rare for a game ball to enter the special winning slot (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation display).

In addition, in the first KT state, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is completed, the next variable winning ball device 6B can be opened. This is after at least 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the next normal symbol fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the second starting prize opening pre-processing time of 0.1 seconds, has elapsed. be. Therefore, this characteristic part 05
In 2IW, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened.

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, in the first KT state, after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where no fluctuation of the normal symbol is performed, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state. After 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the normal symbol fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the second starting prize opening pre-processing time of 0.1 seconds, has elapsed, and the game ball is It is configured such that the time required from passing through the passage gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is about 0.6 seconds. In this way, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 with no symbol fluctuation until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is longer. The variable winning ball device 6B is already open because it is shorter than the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 until the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B in a state where no fluctuation of the symbols is normally performed. The game ball will reach the variable winning ball device 6B when the state is controlled. Therefore, in the first KT state, a game ball that passes through the passage gate 41 with no normal symbol variation is likely to win a prize in the variable winning ball device 6B.

Next, the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state will be explained using FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2). Figure 10
As shown in -12(2) to FIG. 10-14(2), when a game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and is detected by the gate switch 21, a normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 20. The variable display is executed, and if it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol, the winning symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20, and when it is determined that it is a loss, the winning symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. . In this feature part 052IW, as shown in Figures 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1.0 seconds, and the symbol is determined to derive and display the winning symbol and the losing symbol. The time is assumed to be 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, Figure 10-12
(2) - As shown in Figure 10-14 (2), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, and after the second starting winning hole opening processing time of 2.6 seconds has elapsed, the variable winning ball The device 6B is kept open for 0.2 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the second starting prize opening.

When a game ball enters the second starting prize opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, a variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is determined to be a small hit, The small winning symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small winning symbol is derived and displayed, if it is a small winning A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is kept open for 0.2 seconds as shown in FIG. 10-12 (2). , in the case of small hit B, Figure 10-13
As shown in (2), when the special variable winning ball device 17 is in the open state for 0.8 seconds and it is a small hit C, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and as shown in FIG. device 17 is 1
．． It remains open for 8 seconds, allowing game balls to enter the special winning slot.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extremely short at 0.2 seconds. In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, in the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6
The interval period (closed period) after B is opened is at least 3.8 seconds (normal symbol fluctuation time 1.0 seconds + symbol confirmation time 0.2 seconds + time before second starting prize opening opening process 2.6 seconds) ), a relatively long period of time has been secured. Therefore, in the second KT state, Figure 10-12 (2)
~ As shown in Figure 10-14 (2), the open time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short and the interval period (closed period) is long, so compared to the first KT state, the special variable winning ball device on the downstream side The game balls can easily enter the ball device 17 and the game balls can easily enter the special prize opening. however,
In the case of small win A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened only for an extremely short 0.2 seconds, so even in the second KT state, it is hardly expected that the game ball will enter the special winning hole.

In addition, in the 2nd KT state, it is easy for the game ball to enter the special prize opening and it is easy to get a prize ball, so in this example, it is also called "small hit RUSH", and when in the 2nd KT state, it is called "small hit RUSH".
A message such as "USH" is displayed.

In addition, in this example, a case is shown in which the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning hole) is varied depending on which of the small winning types is the small winnings A to C. Not limited to. For example, the number of openings of the special variable winning ball device 17 may be changed depending on which of the small winning types A to C is the small winning type. In this case, for example, in the case of small win A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is released only once during the small win game, whereas in the case of small win B or small win C, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened only once during the small win game. The special variable winning ball device 17 may be configured to be opened 2 to 11 times. For example, even if the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is short to some extent, by opening the special variable winning ball device 17 for 0.4 seconds four times, the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning hole ) may be configured to provide a small winning type in which a certain amount of game balls can be won, and various embodiments can be considered. In addition, in this example, the small hit type is small hit A ~
Although the case where there are three types of C is shown, the configuration is not limited to such an embodiment, and for example, it may be configured to provide four or more types of small winnings.

In addition, in the present feature part 052IW, in the second KT state, after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 with no symbol fluctuation, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in the open state. After a total of 3.8 seconds, which is the sum of the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1.0 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the second starting prize opening pre-processing time of 2.6 seconds, the game ball is It is configured such that the time required from passing through the passage gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is about 0.6 seconds. In this way, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 with no symbol fluctuation until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is longer. The variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state because it is longer than the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 until the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B in a state where no symbol fluctuation is normally performed. The game balls will reach the variable prize winning ball device 6B before being controlled. Therefore, in the second KT state, it is difficult for a game ball that passes through the passage gate 41 with no variation of the normal symbol to win a prize in the variable winning ball device 6B.

In addition, this characteristic part 052IW executes the variable display of normal symbols and the variable winning ball device 6.
The process of controlling the opening of B is performed by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically,
This is done by executing the normal symbol process processing (see step S26) by the CPU 103). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the game state is a variable probability state (high probability state), a non-KT state, a first KT state, or a second KT state in the normal symbol process process of step S26. Regardless of whether there is a jackpot or a jackpot game state, it is determined whether or not it will be a jackpot based on the same probability (for example, 10% or 100%).

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the symbol confirmation time are the same in the first KT state and the second KT state, each 0.2 seconds, and the time before the second starting prize opening opening process is the same in the first KT state and the second KT state. A case has been shown in which the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B is varied by making it as short as 0.1 seconds in the 1KT state and as long as 2.6 seconds in the 2nd KT state. I can't. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to be different by making the fluctuation time and symbol confirmation time different between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second starting winning hole opening process after closing the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be controllable, and the time after the second starting winning hole opening process is different between the first KT state and the second KT state. The closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to be different by setting the variable winning ball device 6B. In particular, if the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B in the first KT state is shortened by any of the above methods, it is possible to suppress winnings to the special winning hole in the first KT state. .

In this characteristic part 052IW, as will be described later, in the first KT state, the high base flag indicating that the high base state is set is set to control the high base state. As shown in 10-14(1), the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be open for a long time. In addition, in the second KT state, by controlling to the low base state without setting the high base flag, the variable winning ball device 6B is released as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2). Controlled to shorten the time.

For example, a special flag (opening extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, the
) ~ Control the variable winning ball device 6B as shown in Figure 10-14 (1) with the first opening pattern (long opening) that opens for a long time, and if the special flag is not set, then Figure 10-12 (2)
~ It may be configured to control the variable winning ball device 6B shown in FIG. 10-14 (2) with a second opening pattern (short opening) in which the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a short time. In other words, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and the special flag may not be set in other states including the jackpot gaming state.

Further, even in the first KT state, when performing the last variable display in the low probability/first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be shortened. For example, low probability/1st KT
The above-mentioned special flag may be configured to be erased in response to the 49th special symbol fluctuation stop among the 50 special symbol shortening fluctuation periods in the state. If configured like that, the probability/
After the end of the first KT state, when giving a left-handed hit notification, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable about the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is open long.

In addition, as mentioned above, when configuring the variable winning ball device 6B using the flag (special flag) for opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B, it is also possible to use a flag for shortening variation of the variable display of the special symbol. In this case, the special flag and the flag for shortening variation may be managed and controlled separately.

Further, the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to be short-circuited during the low probability/non-KT state. With such a configuration, if the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to have a high opening probability in a low probability/non-KT state (left-handed hitting state), it is only necessary to perform a firing operation for a few game balls. In the variable winning ball device 6B, it is possible to avoid winning with low probability/non-KT.
It is possible to prevent a right-handed operation from being performed while in this state.

In addition, in this feature part 052IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 to 10-14, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. For example, when the variable display of the second special symbol with a relatively long variation time is executed in the first KT state, the variable winning ball is This is because the device 6B is in a closed state, making it possible to capture the timing when the second special symbol stops fluctuating (in the case of a small hit, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, the passing gate 41, the variable winning ball device 6B does not open until the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special winning hole becomes able to win). On the other hand, in this feature part 052IW, by shortening the variation time of the normal symbols, the variable winning ball device 6B is released after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and before reaching the variable winning ball device 6B. Since it is set to start, it is possible to eliminate the element of capture based on the firing operation aiming at the timing of occurrence of a small hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

(Production control command)
10-15 and FIG. 10-16 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the production control command sent to the production control CPU 120. In the example shown in Figure 10-15, command 80
00 (H) to 8009 (H), 8011 (H) to 8032 (H) are production control commands that specify the variation pattern of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols. (variable pattern command). Note that the performance control command that specifies the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, the production control CPU
120 is command 8000 (H) ~ 8009 (H), 8011 (H) ~ 8032 (H)
When receiving any of the above, the image display device 5 is controlled to start variable display of decorative symbols.

Command 9001 (H) is a performance control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is a loss. Command 9002 (H) is a production control command (display result 2 specification command (10R probability variable jackpot specification command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is a 10R probability variable jackpot. . Command 9003 (H) displays the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command.
This is a performance control command (display result 3 designation command (6R probability variable jackpot designation command)) that specifies an R probability variable jackpot. Command 9004 (H) is a production control command (display result 4 specification command (6R normal jackpot specification command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is a 6R normal jackpot. . Command 9005 (H) sets the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command to 2.
This is a production control command (display result 5 designation command (2R probability variable jackpot designation command)) that designates an R probability variable jackpot. Command 9006 (H) is a production control command (display result 6 specification command (2R normal jackpot specification command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is a 2R normal jackpot. . Command 9007 (H) is a performance control command (display result 7 designation command (small win designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variable pattern command is a small win.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to display result 7 designation command may be referred to as display result designation commands. In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, the game control microcomputer 1
00 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the fluctuation pattern command, so the display result designation command received by the production control CPU 120 immediately before the first fluctuation pattern command is the first
It can be determined that the display result designation command is for the special symbol, and the display result designation command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be the display result designation command for the second special symbol. can be used for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the display result designation command for the first special symbol and the display result designation command for the second special symbol may be separate.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 does not send a display result specifying command, but instead corresponds to 10R probability variable jackpot / 6R probability variation jackpot / 6R normal jackpot / 2R probability variation jackpot / 2R normal jackpot / small hit / miss. A variation pattern command may be determined, and the performance control CPU 120 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

Command 9C00 (H) is a production control command (right-handed lighting end designation command) that specifies that lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 has ended. Command 9C01 (H) is a production control command (right-handed lighting start designation command) that specifies that the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 has started.

Command A000 (H) is a performance control command (first symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol. Command A001 (H) is a production control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol.

Command A002 (H) is a production control command (first forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify to forcibly stop the variable display of the first special symbol. Command A003 (H) is a production control command (second forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify to forcibly stop the variable display of the second special symbol.

Command BXXX(H) (X=any hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the jackpot game. Among them, B000(H) is a performance control command (jackpot start designation command: fanfare designation command) that designates the start of a jackpot game. B001 (H) is a production control command (
Jackpot end specification command: Ending specification command). B004(H) is a performance control command (small win start designation command) that specifies the start of a small win game. B005
(H) is a performance control command (small win end designation command) that specifies the end of the small win game.

Command B1XX(H) is a production control command (big winning opening display command) that specifies the display during a round during the jackpot game. Note that the number of rounds to be displayed is set in "XX". Command B2XX(H) is an effect control command (display command after opening of the jackpot opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the jackpot game.

Command B400 (H) is a performance control command (big winning opening winning designation command) that specifies that a game ball has won in the big winning opening. Command B401 (H) is a performance control command (special winning opening designation command) that specifies that a game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening.

Command C000 (H) is a performance control command (first effective starting winning designation command) indicating that a game ball has won a prize in the first starting winning opening in a state where the first pending storage number has not reached 4. Command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second valid starting winning designation command) indicating that a game ball has won a prize in the second starting winning opening in a state where the second pending storage number has not reached 4. Note that a command indicating the first pending memory number may be transmitted as the first valid starting prize designation command, and a command indicating the second pending memory number as the second valid starting prize designating command, but this feature section 052IW Now, the first effective starting winning designation command and the second effective starting winning designation command are commands that indicate that there is a starting winning.

Command C801 (H) is a performance control command (gate passage designation command) that designates that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

Command D000 (H) is the first customer waiting state (the first special symbol has not changed,
This is a production control command (first customer waiting demo display specification command) that specifies that the first pending memory is not stored. Command D001(H) is the second customer waiting state (second
This is a production control command (second customer waiting demonstration display specification command) that specifies that the special symbol is not changing and the second pending memory is not stored. Note that the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command may be a command that can be sent only in the normal state. Further, the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command may be a command that can be sent only in the KT state.

Command E000(H) is an effect control command (low probability/non-KT background designation command) that specifies the background display when the gaming state is a low probability/non-KT state. Command E001 (
H) is an effect control command (low probability/first KT background designation command) that specifies the background display when the gaming state is the low probability/first KT state. Command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high probability/first KT) that specifies the background display when the gaming state is high probability/first KT state.
KT background specification command). Command E003 (H) indicates that the gaming state is high probability/2nd K
This is a production control command (high accuracy/second KT background specification command) that specifies the background display when in the T state.

Command E1XX (H) is a production control command (
setting value command). Note that a set value is set in "XX". For example, the setting value is "1"
If the value is set to , command E101(H) is transmitted as the setting value command. Further, for example, if the setting value is set to "6", command E106(H) is transmitted as the setting value command.

The performance control CPU 120 (specifically, the performance control CPU 120) mounted on the performance control board 12 is the same as the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11.
When the above-mentioned production control command is received from , the display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 10-15 and 10-16, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the audio control board 13 Outputs note number data for. In addition, Figures 10-15 and 10
Performance control commands other than the performance control command shown in -16 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. For example, a more detailed performance control command regarding the jackpot game and a performance control command indicating the game state (for example, a performance control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

(1st special symbol normal processing)
FIG. 10-17 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first special symbol process. The state in which the first special symbol normal processing is executed is as follows:
This is a case where the value of the first special figure process flag is a value indicating step S110A. In addition, when the value of the first special figure process flag is a value indicating step S110A,
This is a state in which the first special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display device 4A.

In the first special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120). It is confirmed whether or not (step 052IWS50A). In addition, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the value indicating the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. This is a case where the value indicating the end processing (step S128) is not reached, and the case is not during a jackpot game (opening the special variable winning ball device 7 a predetermined number of times) or during a small winning game (opening the special variable winning ball device 17). be.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 checks the value of the first pending storage number (
Step 052IWS51A). Specifically, the count value of the first pending storage counter is checked. If the first pending memory number is 0, the first customer waiting demo display designation command is sent to the C for production control.
It is transmitted to the PU 120 (step 052IWS52A).

If the first pending memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100
Each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of pending memories = 1 in the first pending memory number buffer of No. 02 is read out and stored in the first random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 052IWS53A), and the first pending memory is The value of the number is decreased by 1 (the count value of the first pending memory number counter is decreased by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted (step 052IW
S54A). That is, each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first pending memory number buffer of the RAM 102 is converted to the first pending memory number = n-. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first pending memory number is extracted is always as follows: First pending memory number = 1
, 2, 3, 4. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition for variable display is satisfied, so it is possible to specify the order in which each random value is extracted. In addition, in this example, each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first pending memory number and each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second pending memory number are The extracted order is also stored in an identifiable manner.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a setting value command indicating the setting value set in the RAM 102 to the production control board 12 (step 052I).
WS55A). Note that in this example, a setting value command is sent each time variable display is started by executing the process in step 052IWS55A, but a setting change process (processing to change the setting value) is performed when the power is turned on. A setting value command is also sent when executed.

Note that the timing at which the set value command is sent is not limited to that shown in this example; for example, the set value command may be configured to be sent every time the fluctuation display ends, or the set value command may be transmitted during the fluctuation display. It may also be configured to do so.

Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS56A). Specifically, if the variable probability flag and high base flag are off, it is determined that the state is low probability/non-KT, and a low probability/non-KT background specification command is issued. In some cases, it is determined that the state is low probability/first KT and a low probability/first KT background specification command is issued.
If the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is on, it is determined that the state is high probability/first KT and the high probability/first KT background specification command is issued; if the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off, It is determined that the state is in the high probability/second KT state, and a high probability/second KT background designation command is transmitted.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the second special symbol is changing in jackpot (step 052IWS57A). Specifically, when the second jackpot flag indicating a jackpot is set based on the fluctuating display of the second special symbol, it is determined that the second special symbol is fluctuating. If it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is changing, step 052I is executed without performing the processing from step 052IWS58A.
Move to WS69A. As a result, when the first special symbol starts varying during the jackpot variation of the second special symbol, the system is configured to forcibly result in a loss regardless of whether the jackpot determination value is stored.

Note that the method of forcibly causing the disc to be removed is not limited to the method described above. For example, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is changing in step 052IWS57A, a process is performed to set an unsuccessful random value (fixed value) as a random number for hit determination, and step 052IWS59A
By shifting to , it may be possible to forcibly cause a win regardless of which random number for determining a win was obtained at the time of starting winning.

Also, for example, when the second special symbol is fluctuating in the jackpot at step 052IWS57A, a random value (fixed value) of the loss may be set as the random number for hit determination without performing the processing at steps 052IWS58A to S63A. By performing the hit determination, it may be possible to forcibly cause a win regardless of which random number for hit determination was obtained at the time of starting winning.

When the jackpot of the second special symbol is not changing, the game control microcomputer 100
reads the random number for hit determination from the first random number storage buffer (step 052IWS58A
), executes the jackpot determination module (step 052IWS59A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines a jackpot when the random number for hit determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. If it is determined to be a jackpot (step 052IWS60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first jackpot flag indicating that it will be a jackpot based on the variable display of the first special symbol (step 052IWS61A). . Then, based on the random number for determining the hit type, it is determined whether the jackpot type is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot (step 052IWS62A), the jackpot type is stored (step 052IWS63A), and step 052IWS69A Move to.

Further, if the jackpot is not determined in step 052IWS60A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 052IWS60A).
4A). The small hit determination module is configured so that a random number for hit determination (a random number for small hit determination may be used) is
This is a program that determines a small win if it matches a predetermined small hit judgment value. If it is determined to be a small hit (step 052IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first small hit flag indicating that it will be a small hit based on the variable display of the first special symbol ( Step 052IWS66A). Also,
The game control microcomputer 100 determines the small winning type based on the random number for determining the winning type (step 052IWS67A), and stores the small winning type (step 052IWS67A).
S68A). In this example, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the small win type is determined to be small win A (see FIG. 10-6(A)). And step 052IWS
Move to 69A.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the value of the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of high base states is "0" (step 052IWS69A).
, "0", the process moves to step 052IWS75A. If the value of the high base number counter is not "0", that is, if it is in the low probability/first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base number counter (step 052I).
WS70A), and determines whether it has become "0" (step 052IWS71A). If the value of the high base count counter does not become "0", the process moves to step 052IWS75A. When the value of the high base number counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 1
00 resets the high base flag indicating the high base state (step 052
IWS72A), and a special symbol time saving flag indicating that the variable display of special symbols is under control for shortening is reset (step 052IWS73A). Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed display 26 is extended until the end of the variation (step 052IWS74A). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS75A.

In this feature part 052IW, as will be described later, the high base flag is set and the number of executions of the fluctuation display in the high base state is managed when the high probability is low at the end of the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or 2R normal jackpot. /High base state (low probability/first KT state) is controlled and fluctuation display is executed 50 times. Low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT
state), when starting the 50th fluctuation display, step 052IWS7
1A, S71B is determined as Y, and the high base flag is reset in steps 052IWS72A, S72B, and the special map time saving flag is also reset in steps 052IWS73A, S73B, and the low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state) ).

In addition, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) continues the right-handed hitting notification and continues the right-handed hitting state, and although the high base state has ended as a gaming state, it shortens the fluctuation common to the first KT state. This flag is used to set the same performance background as the first KT state.

In addition, in this example, the process of step 052IWS74A and step 052IWS described later
By executing the process of 74B, the final variation of the high base state (in this example, the 50th variation display) is caused by the start of variation of either the first special symbol variation display or the second special symbol variation display. When this starts, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is set and the fluctuation shortening state is extended. In this case, when the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is set, a variable display of the first special symbol or a variable display of the second special symbol (in this example, 50
The lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is reset when the 51st variation display of the other special symbol ends or the 51st variation display of the other special symbol starts, and the variation shortening state is reset. It is desirable to configure the system so that the extension ends.

Then, in step 052IWS75A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step 052IWS75A). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped is determined immediately before step 052IWS75A.

In addition, in step 052IWS59A, it is determined whether or not to make a jackpot using either the non-probability variable jackpot determination table or the probability variable jackpot determination table, taking into consideration the gaming state.

(First fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the special symbol time-saving flag indicating that the variable display of the special symbol is under control for shortening is set. (Step 052 IWS1700A). In addition, in this example, by setting the special symbol time saving flag and shortening the variable display of the special symbol, it becomes more advantageous to execute the variable display of the second special symbol (Figure 10-7 (see FIG. 10-9), small hits are likely to occur, so the state is controlled to the KT state. If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 10
0 selects the first special symbol variation pattern table for non-KT shown in FIG. 10-7(A) as the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern (step 052IW).
S1701A). If the special figure time saving flag is set (that is, if it is in KT state)
, the game control microcomputer 100 selects the first special symbol variation pattern table for KT shown in FIG. 10-7(B) as the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern (step 052IWS1702A).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs steps 052IWS1701A,
Based on the fluctuation pattern table determined to be used in S1702A and the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern stored in the first special symbol determination buffer, which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 10-7 is selected? (Step 052IWS1703A). In this example, the variation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the variation pattern. Further, after determining the fluctuation time, a fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

When the fluctuation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a fluctuation pattern command indicating the determined fluctuation pattern to the performance control CPU 120 (
Step 052IWS1704A).

Also, at step 052IWS1703A, the variation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol
When determining, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the variable time data indicating the determined variable time in the first variable time timer to start measuring the variable time (step 052IWS1705A), and also starts the first special symbol display device. The variable display of the first special symbol at 4A is started (step 052IWS1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process (step 052IWS1707A).

(1st special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 10-19 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, CPU10
3, first, it is checked whether the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating accessory control normal processing (step S120) (step 052IWS1120A). Note that the case where the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) means that the value of the accessory control process flag is the value indicating the gate passage waiting process (step S121).
) ~ This is a case where the value does not indicate the small winning end process (step S128), and even during a small winning game (special variable winning ball device 17 is opened a predetermined number of times) or during a small winning game (special variable winning ball device 17
(open)).

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to win the jackpot if it has not yet been transmitted.
Based on the determination result of the jackpot type, one of the display result specification commands (display result 1 specification command, display result 2 specification command, display result 3 specification command, display result 4 specification command, display result 7 specification command) is produced. Control is performed to transmit data to the control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1121A).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first variable time timer (step 052IWS11).
22A), if the first variable time timer times out (step 052IWS1123A)
), performs control to transmit a first symbol confirmation designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1124A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step S113A).
IWS1130A).

If the first variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052I).
WS1125A). In addition, whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag being a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing, The second symbol indicates a jackpot based on the variable display of the second special symbol.
This can be determined by checking whether the jackpot flag is set.

If the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small win symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052IWS1126A). In addition, whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag being a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. This can be determined by checking whether or not the second small hit flag indicating a small hit is set based on the variable display of the second special symbol.
If the small winning symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the process is immediately terminated.

If the small winning symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the fluctuating display of the first special symbol being executed results in a jackpot (step 0
52IWS1127A). It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a jackpot can be determined by, for example, checking whether the first jackpot flag is set. If the variable display of the first special symbol being executed does not result in a jackpot, the process is ended as is.

If the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a jackpot, the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot type is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 6R probability variable jackpot (step 052IWS1128A). It should be noted that whether or not it is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 6R probability variable jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63A. If it is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot, the process is immediately terminated.

When the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052 IWS
1125A Y), or when a small winning symbol is derived and displayed (step 052IWS112
6A Y), and the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed (step 0
52IWS1127A, step 052IWS1128A), the CPU 103
performs control to transmit the first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129A). In this case, if the first jackpot flag or the first small win flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the first jackpot flag or the first small win flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to the value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S113A) (step 052IWS113
0A).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS1125A to S1129A, in this feature section 052IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a jackpot while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, or when the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit. In this case, when the variable display of the first special symbol that results in a normal jackpot (in this example, 6R normal jackpot) is in progress, the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped, and the first special symbol is This is to prevent a situation in which a jackpot or small hit occurs at the same time with the second special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, on the performance control CPU 120 side, if the first special symbol is forced to change its display, it will change the decorative symbol based on the second forced symbol confirmation command sent in step 052IWS1129A. Control is performed to forcibly stop and display a missed symbol as a display result.

In addition, in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, it is a probability variable jackpot (in this example, a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 6R probability variable jackpot). If the first special symbol variation display is in progress, the first special symbol variation process is ended (see Y in step 052IWS1128A), but in this case, the second special symbol variation display is in progress.
Based on the variable display of the special symbol becoming a small win, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small win release pre-process (step S126), and the game shifts to a small win game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, the determination in step 052IWS1120A is N, the processing in steps 052IWS1121A to S1130A is skipped, and the first variable time timer in step 052IWS1122A is not updated. Therefore, when the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit and the variable display of the first special symbol that results in a probability variable jackpot is being executed, the first variable time timer is activated during the small win game. The updating of is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol continues to be executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the updating of the first variable time timer is restarted.

In addition, in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, and the variable display of the first special symbol that becomes a miss or a small hit is executed, Even if there is, the first special symbol variation process is ended as is (see N in step 052IWS1127A). Therefore, even if the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is in progress, resulting in a loss or a small hit, the first fluctuation The update of the time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small winning game is finished, the update of the first variable time timer is restarted.

(1st special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-20 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 103 checks whether the lighting extension flag is set (step 052IWS2010A). If the lighting extension flag is set, C
The PU 103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 052 IWS
2011A). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed player indicator 26 (
Along with step 052IWS2012A), control is performed to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2013A).

In this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole) is provided on the right side of the gaming area, when the gaming state is controlled to the KT state, the player who performed the right-hand hitting operation is advantageous to the player, and the right hit indicator 26 is lit. Therefore, in this example, the low probability/1st K
During the T state, the right-hand hitting indicator 26 is lit, but steps 052IWS69A to S
By executing the processes of 74A, S69B to S74B, when starting the 50th variation display, the low probability/first KT state is terminated and the state transitions to the normal state (non-KT state), and at the same time, steps 052IWS2010A to S2013A , S2010B to S2013B, the right-hand hit indicator 26 is turned off when the 50th variable display ends.

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052IWS2014A). In addition, in this case, if the first forced symbol confirmation designation command was sent in step 052IWS1129A of the first special symbol variation process, the forced symbol will be sent as the stop symbol of the first special symbol regardless of the determination result at the start of variation. A symbol that misses the target is derived and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the first jackpot flag is set (step 052IWS2015A). If the first jackpot flag is set, CPU1
Step 03 sets a jackpot start flag indicating that a jackpot is to be started (step 052I).
WS2016A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first jackpot flag (step 0
52IWS2017A).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed player indicator 26 (step 0).
52IWS2018A), control is performed to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the production control CPU 120 (Step 052IWS2019A). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS2027A.

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS2018A and S2019A, in this example, when a jackpot is achieved in the variable display of the first special symbol, the right hit indicator 26 starts lighting up. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is provided on the right side of the gaming area, it is more advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during a jackpot game. , and the right-hand hit indicator 26 is lit.

In addition, in this example, after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the jackpot game starts based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41, so when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the right hit It may be configured to start lighting the indicator 26.

If the first jackpot flag is not set (N in step 052IWS2015A), the CPU 103 determines whether the first small hit flag is set (step 052IWS2020A). If the first small hit flag is set, C for production control
Control is performed to send a small hit start designation command to the PU 120 (step 052IW
S2021A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first small hit flag (step 05
2IWS2022A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small winning release preprocessing (step 052IWS2026A). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS2027A.

In addition, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning hole) is provided on the right side of the gaming area, it is inherently advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during a small winning game. but,
As already explained, when there is a small win in the variable display of the first special symbol, there is only a case where the small win type is small win A, and it is almost impossible to expect the game ball to enter the special winning hole. Therefore, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the right-hand hit display 26 is not lit, and the right-hand hit lighting start designation command is not transmitted.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step 052IWS2027A).

In addition, in this example, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol, it is configured to be able to execute a right-hitting notification that prompts the player to operate the game ball to the right of the gaming area. There is. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol, it is configured to be able to execute a firing promotion notification that urges the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the passing gate 41 as a right hit notification. You can leave it there.

In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol, the right hit notification and launch promotion notification will not be executed, and if the game ball enters the first starting prize opening in that state, the right hit notification and launch promotion notification will be issued. (In this case, since the game ball is waiting to pass through the gate, even if the game ball enters the first starting prize opening, the variable display of the first special symbol will not start immediately and will become the first pending memory). It may be configured as follows.

Conversely, when the passing of a game ball at the passage gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state), the recognition level is low (for example, low-volume sound output or small screen display). Accordingly, the configuration may be such that a left-handed hit notification is given to the player to urge the player to shoot the game ball to the left side of the game area. On the other hand, when a winning of a game ball in the second start winning hole or special winning hole is detected in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state), the recognition level is high (for example, loud sound output or The configuration may be such that the player is notified of the player hitting left-handed using a large screen display. With such a configuration, accurate firing notification can be performed. In particular, with the above configuration, for a player who accidentally fires a game ball to the right of the gaming area, a slight left-handed notification is sent to the player in a manner in which the player is less aware of the surroundings of the gaming machine. , for players who intentionally perform right-handed operations,
The left-handed hit notification may be configured in a manner that allows a high degree of recognition of the surroundings of the gaming machine.
With such a configuration, a player who intentionally performs a right-handed operation can be urged by a clerk at the game parlor to return to a left-handed operation.

Further, in the above case, it may be configured such that a left-handed hit notification is performed when the number of game balls detected at the passage gate 41, the second start winning hole, or the special winning hole reaches a certain number. Also, passing gate 4
In 1, if a game ball is detected multiple times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 minute), a left-handed hit notification is performed, and in the second starting prize opening or special winning opening, a specific number smaller than the predetermined number is issued. It may be configured such that a left-handed hit notification is performed when (for example, one) or more game balls are detected.

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, a demonstration display is performed when a specific condition is met, but when the demonstration display is performed in the normal state, the entry to the passing gate 41, the second starting prize opening, or the special winning opening. When it is detected that a winning game ball has been won, the execution of the demonstration display that was being executed may be terminated and the left-handed hit notification may be performed.

(2nd special symbol normal processing)
FIG. 10-21 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol normal process in the second special symbol process. The state in which the second special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal process. In addition, when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing, there is a state where the second special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner on the second special symbol display device 4B.

In the second special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120). It is confirmed whether or not (step 052IWS50B). In addition, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the value indicating the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. This is a case where the value indicating the end processing (step S128) is not reached, and the case is not during a jackpot game (opening the special variable winning ball device 7 a predetermined number of times) or during a small winning game (opening the special variable winning ball device 17). be.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 checks the value of the second pending storage number (
Step 052IWS51B). Specifically, the count value of the second pending storage counter is checked. If the second pending memory number is 0, the second customer waiting demo display designation command is sent to the C for production control.
It is transmitted to the PU 120 (step 052IWS52B).

If the second pending memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100
Each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of pending memories = 1 in the second pending memory number buffer of 02 is read out and stored in the second random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 052IWS53B), and the second pending memory is The value of the number is decreased by 1 (the count value of the second pending memory number counter is decreased by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted (step 052IW
S54B). That is, each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending memory number buffer of the RAM 102 is converted to the second pending memory number = n - Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each second pending memory number is extracted is always the second pending memory number = 1.
, 2, 3, 4. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition for variable display is satisfied, so it is possible to specify the order in which each random number value is extracted.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a setting value command indicating the setting value set in the RAM 102 to the production control board 12 (step 052I).
WS55B). In addition, in this example, by executing the process of step 052IWS55B, a setting value command is sent every time variable display starts, but the setting change process (processing to change the setting value) is performed when the power is turned on. A setting value command is also sent when you execute .

Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the production control CPU 120 (step 052IWS56B). The specific method for sending the background designation command is at step 052IWS of the first special symbol normal processing.
This is similar to the process shown in 56A.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the first special symbol is changing in jackpot (step 052IWS57B). Specifically, when the first jackpot flag indicating a jackpot is set based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, it is determined that the first special symbol is fluctuating. If it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol is changing, step 052I is executed without performing the processing after step 052IWS58B.
Move to WS69B. As a result, when the second special symbol starts varying during the jackpot variation of the first special symbol, the system is configured such that the jackpot is forcibly missed regardless of whether the jackpot determination value is stored.

Note that the method of forcibly causing the disc to be removed is not limited to the method described above. For example, if the jackpot of the first special symbol is fluctuating in step 052IWS57B, a random value (fixed value) of the loss is set as the random number for determining the hit, and by moving to step 052IWS59B, it is possible to It may be possible to forcibly cause a win regardless of whether a random number for determining a hit has been obtained.

For example, if the jackpot of the first special symbol is fluctuating in step 052IWS57B, a random value (fixed value) of the loss may be set as the random number for hit determination without performing the processing in steps 052IWS58B to S63B. By performing the hit determination, it may be possible to forcibly cause a win regardless of which random number for hit determination was obtained at the time of starting winning.

When the jackpot of the first special symbol is not changing, the game control microcomputer 100
reads the random number for hit determination from the second random number storage buffer (step 052IWS58B)
), executes the jackpot determination module (step 052IWS59B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines a jackpot when the random number for hit determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. If it is determined to be a jackpot (step 052IWS60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second jackpot flag indicating that it will be a jackpot based on the variable display of the second special symbol (step 052IWS61B). . Then, based on the random number for determining the hit type, it is determined whether the jackpot type is 10R probability variable jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, or 2R normal jackpot (step 052IWS62B), and the jackpot type is stored (step 052IWS6
3B), proceed to step 052IWS69B.

Further, if the jackpot is not determined in step 052IWS60B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 052IWS60B).
4B). The small hit determination module is configured so that a random number for hit determination (a random number for small hit determination may be used) is
This is a program that determines a small win if it matches a predetermined small hit determination value. If it is determined to be a small hit (step 052IWS65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small hit flag indicating that it will be a small hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol ( Step 052IWS66B). Also,
The game control microcomputer 100 determines the small winning type based on the random number for determining the winning type (step 052IWS67B), and stores the small winning type (step 052IWS67B).
S68B). In addition, in this example, when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the small win type is determined to be small win B or small win C (see FIG. 10-6(B)). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS69B.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines that the value of the high base number counter is "0".
” (step 052IWS69B), and if it is “0”, the process moves to step 052IWS75B. If the value of the high base number counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability/first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base number counter (step 052IWS70B), It is determined whether the value has become "0" (step 052IWS71B). The value of the high base count counter is “0”
If not, the process moves to step 052IWS75B. When the value of the high base number counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating the high base state (step 052IWS72B), and shortens the display of fluctuations in special symbols. The special figure time saving flag indicating that it is under control is reset (step 052IWS73B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) (step 052IWS74B). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS75B.

Then, in step 052IWS75B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second fluctuation pattern setting process (step 052IWS75B). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped is determined immediately before step 052IWS75B.

In addition, in step 052IWS59B, it is determined whether or not to make a jackpot using either the non-probability variable jackpot determination table or the probability variable jackpot determination table, taking into consideration the gaming state.

The second variation pattern setting process is similar to the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) shown in FIG. 10-18. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 10-18, if "first" is read as "second", the second variation pattern process has been explained. However, in the second fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first performs step 0.
52 IWS 1700A performs the same process to check whether the special figure time saving flag is set. If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in KT state)
, the game control microcomputer 100 selects the second special symbol variation pattern table for non-KT times shown in FIG. 10-8(C) as the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. If the special figure time saving flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 changes the fluctuation according to whether the probability fluctuation flag and the high base flag are set and the number of fluctuations. As a fluctuation pattern table for determining the pattern, one of the second KT time tables shown in Figures 10-8 (D) to 10-9 (I) is used.
Select the special symbol variation pattern table. For example, if the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on (low probability/first KT state), if it is the first variation, Figure 10-8 (D
) Select the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in Figure 10 for the 2nd to 49th variations.
The second special symbol variation pattern table shown in -8(E) is selected, and if it is the 50th variation, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-8(F) is selected. Also, for example,
If both the probability variation flag and the high base flag are on (high probability/first KT state), if it is the first variation, select the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in Figure 10-9 (G). However, if it is the second variation or later, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-9 (H) is selected. Further, for example, if the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off (high probability/second KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-9(I) is selected.

(Second special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 10-22 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first checks whether the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 052IWS1120B). In addition, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the value indicating the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. This is a case where the value indicating the end processing (step S128) is not reached, and the case is not during a jackpot game (opening the special variable winning ball device 7 a predetermined number of times) or during a small winning game (opening the special variable winning ball device 17). be.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to win the jackpot if it has not yet been transmitted.
And based on the determination result of the jackpot type, select one of the display result specification commands (display result 1 specification command, display result 2 specification command, display result 3 specification command, display result 5 specification command, display result 6 specification command, display result 7 specified command) to the CPU 120 for production control.
The IWS 1121B performs control to transmit data to the IWS 1121B (Step 052).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second variable time timer (step 052IWS11).
22B), if the second variable time timer times out (step 052IWS1123B)
), performs control to transmit a second symbol confirmation designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1124B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process (step 052IWS1130B).

If the second variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052I).
WS1125B). In addition, whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is determined by, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag being a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing, and The first symbol that indicates a jackpot based on the fluctuating display of the first special symbol.
This can be determined by checking whether the jackpot flag is set.

If the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small win symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052IWS1126B). In addition, whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is determined by, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag being a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing. This can be determined by checking whether or not the first small hit flag indicating a small hit is set based on the variable display of the first special symbol.
If the small winning symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the process is immediately terminated.

If the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the fluctuating display of the second special symbol being executed results in a jackpot (step 0
52IWS1127B). It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a jackpot can be determined by, for example, checking whether or not the second jackpot flag is set. If the variable display of the second special symbol being executed does not result in a jackpot, the process is immediately terminated.

If the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a jackpot, the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot type is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot (step 052IWS1128B). . It should be noted that whether or not it is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63B. 10R definite strange jackpot, 6R sure strange jackpot,
Or, if it is a 2R probability-variable jackpot, the process ends immediately.

When the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052 IWS
1125B Y), or when a small winning symbol is derived and displayed (step 052IWS112
6B Y), and the variable display of the second special symbol that does not result in any of the 10R Probable Variable Jackpot, 6R Probable Variable Jacket, and 2R Probable Variable Jackpot (that is, 2R Normal Jackpot) is in progress (Step 052 IWS1127B Y). , step 052IWS1128B N)
, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129B). In addition, in this case, if the second jackpot flag or the second small jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the second jackpot flag or the second small jackpot flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process (step 052IWS1130B
).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS1125B to S1129B, in this feature section 052IW, when the fluctuating display of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot while the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is being executed, or when it becomes a small hit. If the variable display of the second special symbol that results in a normal jackpot (in this example, 2R normal jackpot) is in progress, the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and the first special symbol is This prevents a situation in which a jackpot or small hit occurs at the same time with the second special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, on the performance control CPU 120 side, if the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed, the variation of the decorative symbol will be changed based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command sent in step 052IWS1129B. Control is performed to forcibly stop and display the missing symbol as a display result.

In addition, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit while the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, a probability variable jackpot (in this example, a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, If the second special symbol variation display is in progress, resulting in a 2R guaranteed strange jackpot), the second special symbol variation process is ended (see Y in step 052 IWS1128B), but in this case, the first special symbol Based on the symbol fluctuation display becoming a small hit, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit release preprocessing (step S126),
Shift to a small winning game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, step 052IWS1
Since the determination in step 120B is N, the processing in steps 052IWS1121B to S1130B is skipped, and the second variable time timer in step 052IWS1122B is not updated.
Therefore, when the variable display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit and the variable display of the second special symbol that becomes a probability variable jackpot is being executed, the second variable time timer is activated during the small win game. The update is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol continues to be executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is changed again to the accessory control normal process (step S12).
0), and updating of the second variable time timer is restarted.

In addition, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit while the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, and while the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a loss or a small hit, Even if there is, the second special symbol variation process is ended as is (see N in step 052IWS1127B). Therefore, even if the variable display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variable display of the second special symbol is in progress, resulting in a loss or a small hit, the second variable The update of the time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small winning game is finished, the update of the second variable time timer is restarted.

By configuring as described above, the remaining second pending memory can be used in the normal state after the first KT state (after the time saving state has ended), and a jackpot can occur at an unintended timing when the player is not present. can be suppressed.

In addition, a variable winning ball device for the first special symbol is provided below the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning hole), and a winning ball device for the second special symbol ( It is configured to provide a starting prize opening which is not a variable winning ball device, and the second KT state (small hit RUSH)
In a gaming machine configured to shift to the normal state via the time-saving state of the first special symbol after the end of the game, a configuration may be applied in which the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed as described above. In this case, as the fluctuating efficiency of the first special symbol increases, the frequency of small hits based on the fluctuating display of the first special symbol also increases, but along with this, the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is forced to miss. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a variable display of the second special symbol based on the second pending memory in the normal state by increasing the frequency of occurrence of a jackpot at an unintended timing when the player is not present. I can do it.

(Second special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-23 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol stop processing. In the second special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 103 checks whether the lighting extension flag is set (step 052IWS2010B). If the lighting extension flag is set, C
The PU 103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 052 IWS
2011B). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed player indicator 26 (
Along with step 052IWS2012B), control is performed to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2013B).

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052IWS2014B). In addition, in this case, if the second forced symbol confirmation designation command was sent in step 052IWS1129B of the second special symbol fluctuation process, the command will be forced as the stop symbol of the second special symbol, regardless of the determination result at the start of fluctuation. A symbol that misses the target is derived and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the second jackpot flag is set (step 052IWS2015B). If the second jackpot flag is set, CPU1
03 sets a jackpot start flag (step 052IWS2016B). Also, C
PU103 clears the second jackpot flag (step 052IWS2017B).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed player indicator 26 (step 0).
52IWS2018B), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the production control CPU 120 (Step 052IWS2019B). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS2027B.

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS2018B and S2019B, in this example, when a jackpot is achieved in the variable display of the second special symbol, the right hit indicator 26 starts lighting up. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is provided on the right side of the gaming area, it is more advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during a jackpot game. , and the right-hand hit indicator 26 is lit.

If the second jackpot flag is not set (N in step 052IWS2015B), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second small win flag is set (step 052IWS2020B). If the second small hit flag is set, C for production control
Control is performed to send a small hit start designation command to the PU 120 (step 052IW
S2021B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second small hit flag (step 05
2IWS2022B).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the special figure time saving flag is set (step 052IWS2023B). If the special figure time saving flag is not set (i.e.
If it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed player display 26 (step 052 IWS2024B), and performs control to transmit a right-handed player lighting start designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2024B). 052IWS2025B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small win release preprocessing (step 052IWS2026B). And step 052IWS20
Move to 27B.

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS2024B and S2025B, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol, lighting of the right hit indicator 26 is started. That is, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening)
is provided on the right side of the game area, so it is advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during a small winning game, and the right-handed hit indicator 26 is lit.

However, in this example, even if there is a small hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, K
If the player is in the T state, the right-hand hit indicator 26 should already be lit. Therefore, in this example, by performing the determination process of step 052IWS2023B, the second
When a small hit occurs in the variable display of special symbols, the process of starting the lighting of the right-handed display 26 or sending the right-handed lighting start designation command is not performed redundantly.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step 052IWS2027B).

(Accessories control normal processing)
FIG. 10-24 shows the accessory control normal processing (step S120) in the accessory control process.
) is a flowchart showing the process. In the accessory control normal process, the CPU 103 first checks whether the jackpot start flag is set (step 052IWS2101)
. If the jackpot start flag is not set, the process ends.

If the jackpot start flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot start flag (step 052IWS2102). Next, the CPU 103 sets a timer before jackpot opening (step 052IWS2103), sets opening pattern data for round 1 according to the jackpot type (step 052IWS2104), and sets "1" to the round number counter indicating the number of jackpot rounds. ” (Step 052IWS2105).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the gate passage waiting process (step 052IWS2106).

(Gate passage waiting process)
FIG. 10-25 shows the gate passage waiting process (step S12) in the accessory control process process.
1) is a flowchart showing the process. In the gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 checks whether a detection signal from the gate switch 21 has been input (step 052IWS25).
01). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is not input, the process ends immediately. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag, high base flag, and special map time saving flag, if set, and clears the value of the high base number counter to 0 ( Step 052IWS2502). Next, CPU10
3 transmits a jackpot start designation command (step 052IWS2503) and sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (step 052IWS2).
504).

In this characteristic part 052IW, by executing the gate passing waiting process, the jackpot game is not started immediately when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol, but the passing gate 41 is played. The game is configured to proceed to a jackpot game on the condition that a ball passes through and is detected by the gate switch 21.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 10-26 shows the jackpot release process (step S123) in the accessory control process process.
) is a flowchart showing the process. In the jackpot opening process, the CPU 103 checks whether the first count switch 23 is in the on state (step 052 IWS24
01). If the first count switch 23 is in the ON state, that is, if a game ball that has entered the grand prize opening is detected, the CPU 103 determines the winning number for counting the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening. The value of the counter is incremented by 1 (step 052 IWS2402). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a large winning opening winning designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2403).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the V area switch 052IW106 is in the on state (step 052IWS2404). If the V area switch 052IW106 is in the on state, that is, if a game ball entering the V area 052IW104 is detected, the CPU 103 sets a V winning flag indicating that a game ball has entered the V area 052IW104. (Step 052IWS2405).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the winning prize counter is 10 (step 052IWS2406). If the value of the winning prize counter is 10, the process moves to step 052IWS2409. If the value of the prize winning counter is not 10, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the big prize opening (step 052 IWS2407), and the opening time timer after the subtraction times out. It is confirmed whether or not (Step 052IWS2408). If the open time timer has not timed out, the process ends immediately.

When the value of the prize winning counter is 10 (Y in step 052 IWS2406)
, or if the open time timer times out (Y in step 052 IWS2408)
, the CPU 103 stops driving the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening and controls the big winning opening to be in a closed state (step 052IWS2409). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a display command after opening the big prize opening to the performance control CPU 120 (step 0
52IWS2410). Further, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the round number counter (
Step 052IWS2411).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release post-processing (step 052 IWS2412).

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 10-27 shows the jackpot end process (step S125) in the accessory control process process.
It is a flowchart which shows. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot end display timer is set (step 052IWS2200), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, the process moves to step 052IWS2202. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot end display timer to the time during which the jackpot end display is performed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time).
A value corresponding to the display time corresponding to is set (step 052IWS2201), and the process ends.

In step 052IWS2202, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 052IWS2202). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 0
52IWS2203). If the time has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 052 IWS2203), the CPU
Step 103 checks whether the V winning flag is set (step 052IWS2).
204). If the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 clears the V winning flag (step 052IWS2205), sets the variable probability flag, and shifts to the variable probability state (high probability state) (step 052IWS2206).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the type of the jackpot that has ended this time is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 2R probability variable jackpot (step 052IWS2207). In addition, whether it is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 2R probability variable jackpot can be determined by checking the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63A of the first special symbol normal process or step 052IWS63B of the second special symbol normal process, for example. If it is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the special symbol time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 05
2IWS2208). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS2215. In addition, 10R
In the case of a probability variable jackpot or a 2R probability variable jackpot, the high base flag is not set, so if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a jackpot game, the high probability/low base state (high probability/second 2KT state).

If it is neither a 10R probability variable jackpot nor a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 checks whether the type of the jackpot that has ended this time is a 6R probability variation jackpot (step 052IWS).
2209). In addition, whether or not it is a 6R probability variable jackpot can be determined by checking the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63A of the first special symbol normal process or step 052IWS63B of the second special symbol normal process, for example. If it is a 6R surefire jackpot, CPU10
3 sets the high base flag and transitions to the high base state (step 052 IWS221
0), further sets the special figure time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 052IWS2
211). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS2215. Therefore, in the case of a 6R variable jackpot, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, it will be controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state).

In addition, in the case of a 6R probability variable jackpot, only the high base flag is set and the high base number counter is not set. In this case, the high base number counter is reset to 0 when starting the jackpot game (step 052IWS25 of the gate passage waiting process).
02), the value of the high base number counter remains 0. Therefore, after the end of the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variable jackpot, it is controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and since the value of the high base number counter is 0 in the subsequent fluctuation display, Step 052IWS69A of the first special symbol normal processing and Step 052I of the second special symbol normal processing
If WS69B determines Y, step 052IWS70A or step 052IWS70B
The high base count counter is not decremented. Then, the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs.

If it is not a 6R definite strange jackpot (that is, if it is a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 052 IWS2212), and also sets the special symbol time saving flag. and shifts to the KT state (step 052IWS2213). Additionally, the CPU 103 sets the high base count counter to ``50''.
” (Step 052IWS2214). And step 052IWS22
15. Therefore, if it is a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot, it will be controlled to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step 052IWS2215).

(Small winning end processing)
FIG. 10-28 shows the small hit end process (step S128) in the accessory control process process.
It is a flowchart which shows. In the small hit end processing, the CPU 103 checks whether the small hit end display timer is set (step 052IWS2300), and if the small hit end display timer is set, the process moves to step 052IWS2302. If the small hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 sets the small hit end display timer to the time during which the small hit end display is performed on the image display device 5 (small hit end display time).
A value corresponding to the display time corresponding to is set (step 052 IWS2301), and the process ends.

In step 052IWS2302, the value of the small winning end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 052IWS2302). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the small win end display timer is 0, that is, whether the small win end display time has elapsed (step 0
52IWS2303). If the time has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the small hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step 052 IWS2303), the CPU
Step 103 checks whether the special figure time saving flag is set (step 052 IWS
2304). If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 checks whether the right-hand hit indicator 26 is lit (step 05).
2IWS2305). If the right-handed player indicator 26 is lit, the CPU 103 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed player indicator 26 (step 052 IWS2306), and transmits a right-handed player lighting end designation command to the performance control CPU 120. Control is performed (step 052IWS2307).

In this example, if the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the non-KT state, the right hit indicator 26 starts lighting up at the start of the small win game (step 052 IWS2
023B to S2025B) and steps 052IWS2304 to S2307 are executed, the lighting of the right hit indicator 26 is ended at the end of the small winning game.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step 052IWS2308).

(Transition of gaming state)
Here, the transition of the gaming state in this feature section 052IW will be explained. Figure 10-2
9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the gaming state changes in this feature section 052IW. First, in this characteristic part 052IW, low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)
), the player performs a shooting operation (left-handed hit) of the game ball aiming at the left side of the game area. Therefore, in the normal state, starting winnings to the first starting winning hole mainly occur, and a variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Furthermore, since the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a jackpot occurs in a low probability/low base state, a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability variable jackpot occurs in the low probability/low base state, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability/low probability/low probability jackpot after the jackpot game ends. The state shifts to a low base state (high probability/second KT state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (steps 052 IWS2204 to S2
208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. Also, 6R in low probability/low base state
When a variable probability jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a jackpot game, after the jackpot game ends, it will shift to a high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state), and the next The high probability/high base state is maintained until a jackpot occurs (step 052I
(See WS2204-S2206, S2209-S2211). However, during the jackpot game, V
If the game ball does not enter the area 052IW104, the high probability state may not be controlled. Also, if a 6R normal jackpot occurs in the low probability/low base state, after the end of that jackpot game, it will shift to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state) and the next jackpot will occur. The low probability/high base state is maintained until the 50th variation display is completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214).

After transitioning to the KT state (high probability/high base state, low probability/high base state, high probability/low base state), this feature section 052IW allows the player to aim at the right side of the gaming area. to launch the game ball (hitting to the right). Therefore, in the KT state, starting winnings to the second starting winning hole mainly occur, and a variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Furthermore, since the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a jackpot occurs in the KT state, a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, a 2R probability variable jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot mainly occurs.

As shown in Figure 10-29, when a 10R probability variable jackpot or 2R probability variable jackpot occurs in the high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state), the V area 0
If the game ball enters the 2IW104, the high probability/low base state (
The high probability/low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 052 IWS2204 to S2208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, if a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs in the high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state), if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game ends. /Transition to high base state (high probability/first KT state), and high probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (step 052 IWS2204
~S2206, S2209~S2211). However, during the jackpot game, V area 052I
If the game ball does not enter W104, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, in this feature part 052IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the total probability of a 6R variable jackpot is 50% (see Figure 10-5), so once the high probability/high When it comes to the base state, the high probability/high base state will loop at a rate of 50%. Also, high probability/
If a 2R normal jackpot occurs in the high base state (high probability/1st KT state), after the end of that jackpot game, it will shift to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state) and the next jackpot will be played. The low probability/high base state is maintained until it occurs or until the 50th variation display ends (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214).

As shown in Figure 10-29, when a 10R probability variable jackpot or 2R probability variable jackpot occurs in the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), the V area 0
If the game ball enters the 2IW104, the high probability/low base state (
The high probability/low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 052 IWS2204 to S2208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, if a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs in the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game ends. /Transition to high base state (high probability/first KT state), and high probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (step 052 IWS2204
~S2206, S2209~S2211). However, during the jackpot game, V area 052I
If the game ball does not enter W104, the high probability state may not be controlled. Also, if a 2R normal jackpot occurs in the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), the system will shift to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , the low probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 50 fluctuating displays are completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214). In addition, this characteristic part 052I
In W, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of 2R normal jackpot is 3
Since it is 5% (see FIGS. 10-5 (D) and (E)), once the low probability/high base state is reached, the low probability/high base state will loop at a rate of 35%. In addition, after a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot occurs and becomes a low probability/high base state, if the next jackpot does not occur and the fluctuating display ends 50 times, as shown in Figure 10-29. As shown, transition to a low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) (steps 052IWS69A to S73
A, see S69B to S73B).

As shown in Figure 10-29, if a 10R probability variable jackpot or 2R probability variable jackpot occurs in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), the V area 0
If the game ball enters the 2IW104, the high probability/low base state (
The high probability/low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 052 IWS2204 to S2208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, in this feature part 052IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 2R probability variable jackpot is 15. % (see FIGS. 10-5 (D) and (E)), once the high probability/low base state is reached, the high probability/low base state will loop at a rate of 15%. Also,
If a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability/high probability after the jackpot game ends. The state shifts to the base state (high probability/first KT state), and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (steps 052 IWS2204 to S2206
, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. Also, if a 2R normal jackpot occurs in the high probability/low base state (high probability/2nd KT state), the system will shift to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state) after the end of the jackpot game. , the low probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 50 fluctuating displays are completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214).

In addition, in Figure 10-29, in the low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the first
Although a case has been described in which the variable display of the special symbols is executed, there is also a possibility that the variable display of the second special symbol is executed at a low rate. In this case, if a 10R variable jackpot or a 2R variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game,
A transition will be made to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). In addition, when a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will shift to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). Also, 2R
Normally, when a jackpot occurs, it moves to a low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), and the low probability/high base state remains until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuating display ends 50 times. It will be maintained.

In addition, in FIG. 10-29, a case was explained in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state), but the variable display of the first special symbol is executed at a low rate. It is possible that this could be carried out. In this case, if a 10R definite jackpot occurs,
If the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a jackpot game, the high probability/low base state (
High probability/second KT state). In addition, when a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will shift to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, if a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it will transition to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), and the low probability/high probability will change until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuating display ends 50 times. The base state will be maintained.

In addition, in FIG. 10-29, a case was explained in which the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), but the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner at a low rate. It is possible that this could be carried out. In this case, if a 10R definite jackpot occurs,
If the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a jackpot game, the high probability/low base state (
High probability/second KT state). In addition, when a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will shift to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, if a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it will transition to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), and the low probability/high probability will change until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuating display ends 50 times. The base state will be maintained.

In addition, in FIG. 10-29, a case was explained where the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), but the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner at a low rate. It is possible that this could be carried out. In this case, if a 10R definite jackpot occurs,
If the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a jackpot game, the high probability/low base state (
High probability/second KT state). In addition, when a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will shift to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, if a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it will transition to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), and the low probability/high probability will change until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuating display ends 50 times. The base state will be maintained.

(Normal pattern process processing)
Next, the normal symbol process processing (step S29) executed by the game control microcomputer 100 will be explained. FIG. 10-30 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol process processing. In normal symbol process processing, the game control microcomputer 10
0 (specifically, the CPU 103) detects that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 and the gate switch 21 has been turned on (step 052IWS5111), and sends a gate passage designation command to the performance control CPU 120. (Step 052)
IWS5112). Then, the CPU 103 performs gate switch passage processing (step 052).
IWS5113).

In this feature section 052IW, when the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected by executing the processing of steps 052IWS5111 to S5113, a gate passage designation command is transmitted. In addition, in this feature part 052IW, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate and also plays the role of an operating area, but is it in a gate passage waiting state after stopping and displaying the jackpot symbol and before starting the jackpot game? Regardless of whether or not the gate passage designation command is sent.

Then, the CPU 103 performs step 052IWS according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.
One of the processes shown in S5100 to S5104 is executed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, regardless of whether or not the game is in the gate passage waiting state, if passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected in step 052IWS5111, the gate switch passage process in step 052IWS5113 is executed. Normally, a variable display of symbols is executed, but the display is not limited to such a mode. For example, if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 when the game ball is not in the waiting state to pass through the gate, a variable display of the normal symbol is executed, and in the waiting state to pass through the gate, even if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol is displayed. The configuration may be such that the variable display is not performed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, the passage gate 41 is used as a gate for both the normal starting area and the operating area, but the special symbol process processing (see steps S25A and S25B) is normally performed within the timer interrupt processing. Design process processing (see step S26)
Since it is executed earlier than the above, after the process of detecting the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41 as the operating area is performed, the process of detecting the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41 as the normal starting area is performed. Therefore, the process for starting the jackpot game can be executed quickly.

Gate switch passage processing (step 052IWS5113): The CPU 103 uses a gate passage memory counter (a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41).
Check whether the count value (memory number of gate passages) has reached the maximum value (“4” in this example). If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by 1.
In addition, the LED of the ordinary card reservation display 25C is lit according to the value of the gate passage memory counter. Then, the CPU 103 extracts the value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination, and performs processing to store it in a storage area (normal symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the gate passing memory number.

Normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100): The CPU 103 is in a state where it is possible to start changing the normal symbol (for example, when the value of the normal symbol process flag is set to step 052IWS5100)
If the value indicates WS5100, specifically, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is not displayed on the normal symbol display 20, and the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. If the winning ball device 6B is not in the process of opening or closing), the value of the number of gate passages stored is checked. Specifically, the count value of the gate passing memory number counter is checked.
If the number of gate passing memories is not 0, it is determined whether or not it is a hit (whether or not a stop symbol of a normal symbol is to be a winning symbol). Then, the normal symbol fluctuation time is set in the normal symbol process timer and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically "1") indicating the normal symbol variation process (step 052IWS5101).

Normal symbol variation processing (step 052 IWS5101): The CPU 103 checks whether the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal symbol stop symbol display time to the normal symbol process timer and starts the timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "2") indicating the normal symbol stop processing (step 052IWS5102).

Normal symbol stop processing (step 052 IWS5102): The CPU 103 checks whether the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, checks whether the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol. If it is not a winning symbol (if it is a losing symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is changed to normal symbol normal processing (step 052 IWS5100).
is updated to a value indicating (specifically, "0"). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the normal electric accessory release pre-release time is set in the normal symbol process timer and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is changed to the normal electric accessory release preprocessing (step 052
IWS5103) to a value (specifically, "3").

Normal electric accessory opening pre-processing (step 052IWS5103): The CPU 103 checks whether the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal electric accessory operating time to the ordinary symbol process timer, and is started, and the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "4") indicating the normal electric accessory actuation process (step 052IWS5104).

Normal electric accessory activation process (Step 052IWS5104): The CPU 103 measures the normal symbol process timer, and when the normal symbol process timer times out, closes the variable winning ball device 6B. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically "0") indicating normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100).

(Normal pattern normal processing)
FIG. 10-31 is a flowchart showing normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100). In the normal symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 checks whether the gate passing memory number is 0 by checking the count value of the gate passing memory number counter (step 052IWS5121). If the number of gate passage memories is 0 (step 052 IWS
5121, Y), the process ends. If the gate passing memory number is not 0 (N in step 052IWS5121), the CPU 103 reads out the random number value for normal symbol hit determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate passing memory number = 1 (step 052IWS512
2). Then, the CPU 103 decreases the value of the gate passing storage number counter by 1 and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 052IWS5123). That is, the random value for normal symbol hit determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passage memories = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is transferred to the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passage memories = n-1. Store. Therefore, the order in which the random numbers for normal symbol hit determination stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the number of gate passage memories are extracted is always in the order of gate passage memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It's supposed to match.

Next, the CPU 103 uses the normal symbol determination table to determine whether or not to win a normal symbol, and performs a lottery process based on random numbers (random numbers for determining whether or not to win a normal symbol). (Step 052IWS5127). In addition, this characteristic part 0
52IW, in step 052IWS5127, the CPU 103 uniformly returns 99 regardless of whether it is in the variable probability state, whether it is in the KT state, or whether it is in the high base state.
It is decided that the probability of winning a normal symbol is /100.

In step 052IWS5127, if the read random number value for normal symbol hit determination is within the winning range (if it is a hit), the CPU 103 sets the winning symbol as the display result (step 052IWS5128), and moves to step 052IWS5130. Further, in step 052IWS5127, if the read random number value for normal symbol hit determination is not within the winning range (if it is a loss), the CPU 103 sets a loss symbol as the display result (step 052IWS5129), and moves to step 052IWS5130.

In step 052IWS5130, if the high base flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the normal symbol process timer to 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol fluctuation time (
Y of step 052 IWS5130, S5131). Also, if the high base flag is not set, that is, if it is in the normal state or the second KT state, 1.0 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal symbol fluctuation time (N in step 052 IWS5130,
S5132).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically "1") indicating the normal symbol variation process (step 052IWS5101) (step 052IWS5133).

(Normal pattern stop processing)
FIG. 10-32 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol stop processing (step 052IWS5102). In the normal symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the normal symbol process timer by 1 (step 052IWS3701). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 052IWS3702). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step 052 IWS3702), the process ends as is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in step 052IWS3702), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (in step 052IWS5127 if the symbol is a winning symbol). (Step 052IWS3703) In addition, whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol can be confirmed by setting a normal symbol hit determination flag when it is determined to be a hit in step 052IWS5127, and checking whether that flag is set. I can do it.

When it is determined that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is not a winning symbol but a miss symbol (N in step 052IWS3703), the CPU 103 changes the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value indicating normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100). Specifically, it is updated to "0" (step 052IWS3708).

In step 052IWS3703, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (Y in step 052IWS3703), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step 052IWS3704), and if it is set, That is, in the case of the first KT state, 0.1 second is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before the normal electric accessory is released (step 052IWS3706). In addition, if the high base flag is not set, that is, if it is in the normal state or the second KT state, 2.6 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before the release of the normal electric accessory (step 052IWS3705). .

Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically "3") corresponding to the normal electric accessory release pre-processing (step 052 IWS5103) (step 0
52IWS3707).

(Normal electric accessory release pre-processing)
FIG. 10-33 is a flowchart showing the normal electric accessory release preprocessing (step 052IWS5103). In the normal electric accessory opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 subtracts -1 from the value of the normal symbol process timer (step 052IWS3801). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 052IWS3802). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step 052 IWS3802),
Processing ends immediately.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the time before the normal electric accessory is released has elapsed (Y in step 052IWS3802), the CPU 103 determines whether the high base flag is set (step 052IWS3803). , when it is set, that is, when it is in the first KT state, the normal electric accessory opening time is 5.
Set 5 seconds to the normal symbol process timer (step 052IWS3805). Also,
If the high base flag is not set, that is, if it is in the normal state or the second KT state, 0.2 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory release time (step 052IWS3804).

In this way, in this characteristic part 052IW, 5.5 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory release time in the first KT state, and 0.2 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory release time in the normal state or the second KT state. By doing so, the first KT state is a state in which it is easier to win a starting prize in the second starting winning hole than in the normal state or the second KT state. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game ball is more difficult to reach the special variable winning ball device 17 provided downstream of the variable winning ball device 6B than in the normal state or the second KT state.

In addition, when the gaming state is the first KT state, the control method for making it easier to win a starting prize in the second starting winning hole is not limited to the one shown in this characteristic part 052IW. For example, in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened more times than in the normal state or the second KT state (for example, in the normal state or the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened more times than in the normal state or the second KT state). The number of openings of the variable winning ball device 6B may be set to one time, whereas in the first KT state, the number of openings of the variable winning ball device 6B may be set to two times. By doing so, in the case of the first KT state, by increasing the number of times the variable winning ball device 6B is opened, it is possible to make it easier to win a starting prize in the second starting winning opening.

For example, in the case of the first KT state, compared to the normal state or the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B may be controlled to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B shown above. It may also be executed in combination with control to increase the number of openings.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B to an open state (step 052).
IWS3806). Specifically, the solenoid 81 is driven to open the variable winning ball device 6B.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically "4") corresponding to the normal electric accessory activation process (step 052 IWS5104) (step 05
2IWS3807).

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the operation of the production control means will be explained. FIGS. 10-34 to 10-37 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step S75). The production control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the production control CPU 120 checks the contents of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks whether the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 052IWS611). Whether the command is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter and the read pointer. If both match, the received command is not stored. If the received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the production control CP
U120 reads the received command from the command reception buffer (step 052 IWS
612). Furthermore, after reading, add 2 to the value of the read pointer (step 052 IWS).
613). The reason for adding +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read out at a time.

If the received production control command is a setting value command (step 052IWS614)
, the production control CPU0120 stores the setting value indicated by the received setting value command in the RAM1.
22 (step 052IWS615).

If the received production control command is a variation pattern command (step 052IWS6
16) The production control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 052IWS617
). Then, the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set (step 052IWS61
8).

If the received production control command is a display result specification command (step 052IWS6
19) The production control CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 052 IWS620
).

If the received production control command is any of the symbol confirmation designation commands (first symbol confirmation designation command, second symbol confirmation designation command, first forced symbol confirmation designation command, second forced symbol confirmation designation command) (step 052 IWS621 ), the production control CPU 120 sets a confirmation command reception flag according to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 0
52IWS622). For example, when the first symbol confirmation designation command is received, the first confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when a second symbol confirmation designation command is received, a second confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the first forced confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when a second forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, a second forced confirmation command reception flag is set.

If the received production control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 052 IWS
623), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to start displaying a right-handed hit display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 052IWS624). In addition, CPU1 for production control
20 sets the jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 052 IWS625
).

If the received production control command is a jackpot end specification command (step 052 IWS
626), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to end the display of the right hit display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 052IWS627). In addition, CPU1 for production control
20 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 052 IWS628
).

In addition, in this example, by executing the processing of steps 052IWS624 and S627, a right hit display is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the jackpot game.

In addition, for example, by changing the display mode (for example, display color) of the right hit display displayed during the jackpot game, it may be configured to perform a setting value suggestion effect that suggests the current setting value. For example, when starting the right-handed display in step 052 IWS624, normally the right-handed display with white display color is started, but if it is decided to execute the setting value suggestion effect, the setting value is "1". If the setting value is "2", right-handed display with a blue display color is started at a relatively high rate, and when the setting value is "2", right-handed display with a green display color is started at a relatively high rate. , when the setting value is "3", the yellow display color starts to be displayed on the right at a relatively high rate, and when the setting value is "4", the orange display color starts to be displayed on the right at a relatively high rate. If the setting value is ``5'', the right-handed hitting display with red display color will start, and if the setting value is ``6'', the right-handed hitting display will start at a relatively high rate. A right-handed display with rainbow display colors may be started.

Also, for example, the right-handed display may be configured to continue to be displayed during the KT state after the end of the jackpot game, and the display mode (for example, display color) of the right-handed display may be changed and set at the timing of the end of the jackpot game. It may be configured to execute a value suggestion effect.

Also, for example, in the low probability/first KT state, after 50 fluctuation displays are completed, the normal state (
The left-handed display is configured to start when the player shifts to a low probability/low base state), and the display mode of the left-handed display (for example, display color) is changed to perform a setting value suggestion effect. may be configured. It is only necessary to configure the setting value suggestion performance to be executable when the control of the gaming state is switched in some form in this way.

If the received production control command is a small hit start designation command (step 052 IWS
629), the production control CPU 120 sets a small hit start designation command reception flag (step 052IWS630).

If the received production control command is a small hit end designation command (step 052 IWS
631), the performance control CPU 120 sets the small hit end designation command reception flag (step 052IWS632).

If the received performance control command is a big prize opening display command (step 052I
WS633), the performance control CPU 120 resets (clears to 0) the value of the winning number counter for counting the number of game balls that entered the big winning hole during the round of the jackpot game (
Step 052IWS634). In addition, the production control CPU 120 sets a grand prize opening flag that specifies that the grand prize opening is open (during the round period during the jackpot game) (step 052IWS635).

In addition, in this example, by executing the process of step 052IWS634, the value of the winning number counter is cleared to 0 at the timing of receiving the big winning opening opening display command (timing of starting a round), so it is extremely rare. Even if an over-win is detected during the interval period after the end of the round period, the value is counted in the number-of-wins counter.

If the received production control command is a display command after opening the big winning hole (step 052I
WS636), the performance control CPU 120 sets a post-opening flag for the grand prize opening that specifies that it is an interval period after the opening of the grand prize opening (step 052 IWS637).

If the received production control command is a right-handed lighting start designation command (step 052I
WS638), the production control CPU 120 performs control to start lighting the right-handed hitting notification LED 37 (step 052IWS639).

If the received production control command is a right-handed lighting end designation command (step 052I
WS640), the production control CPU 120 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed hitting notification LED 37 (step 052IWS641).

If the received production control command is a low-accuracy/non-KT background specification command (step 052
IWS642), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to display the background image on the image display device 5 as a background image (for example, a blue background image) according to the low probability/non-KT state (step 052 IWS643). In addition, if set, the production control CPU 120 resets the first KT state flag indicating that the first KT state is set (step 052IWS).
644). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 is configured to perform an award for counting the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winnings in the big winning hole and special winning hole during the jackpot game and the high probability/second KT state. If the ball number counter is set, the value of the prize ball number counter is reset (cleared to 0) (step 052IWS645).

In this example, a game ball enters the jackpot during a jackpot game (excluding jackpot games based on 2R definite jackpot and 2R normal jackpot), or a game ball enters the special jackpot during the high probability/second KT state. When a ball wins a prize, the value of the prize ball counter is cumulatively updated (see steps 052IWS660, S667), but by executing the process of step 052IWS645, the game state changes to low probability/low probability/ High base state (low probability/1st KT state)
After 50 fluctuation displays are completed and the low probability/low base state is reached, the value of the prize ball counter is cleared to 0.

If the received production control command is a low accuracy/first KT background specification command (step 05
2IWS646), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to display the background image on the image display device 5 as a background image (for example, a green background image) according to the low probability/first KT state (
Step 052IWS647). In addition, the production control CPU 120 sets the first KT state flag (step 052IWS648), and if set, the high probability state flag indicating that the state is in a high probability state or the high probability state flag indicating that it is in the second KT state. 2KT status flag is reset (step 052IWS649).

If the received production control command is a high precision/first KT background specification command (step 05
2IWS650), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to display the background image on the image display device 5 as a background image (for example, a yellow background image) according to the high probability/first KT state (
Step 052IWS651). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the first KT state flag (step 052IWS652), and if set, resets the second KT state flag (step 052IWS653).

If the received production control command is a high precision/second KT background specification command (step 05
2IWS654), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to display the background image on the image display device 5 as a background image (for example, a red background image) according to the high probability/second KT state (
Step 052IWS655). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the second KT state flag (step 052IWS656), and if set, resets the first KT state flag (step 052IWS657).

If the received production control command is a big prize opening prize designation command (step 052IW
S658), the production control CPU 120 selects a 10R guaranteed variable jackpot, a 6R guaranteed variable jackpot, or a 6R guaranteed variable jackpot.
R Check whether or not a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot is in progress (step 052IWS6
59). In addition, whether or not you are playing a jackpot game based on a 10R definite strange jackpot, a 6R definite strange jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot can be determined, for example, by determining whether the value of the performance control process flag is a jackpot performance process (
Step S176) - Check whether the value indicates the ending effect processing (Step S177), and check whether the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area is the display result 2 specification command - display result 4. This can be determined by checking whether it is a designated command or not.

If a jackpot game based on a 10R definite strange jackpot, a 6R definite strange jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot is being played, the performance control CPU 120 adds 15 to the value of the prize ball number counter (step 0
52IWS660). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 updates the prize ball number display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the prize ball number counter after the addition (step 052I).
WS661). Note that the prize ball number display is a display of the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winnings in the big winning hole and special winning hole during the jackpot game and the high probability/second KT state.

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS658 to S661, in this example,
The value of the prize ball number counter and the prize ball number display are updated on the basis of the occurrence of a prize in a big prize opening during a jackpot game based on a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, or a 6R regular jackpot. On the other hand, even during a jackpot game, if a prize is entered into the jackpot during a jackpot game based on a 2R guaranteed variable jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot, the value of the prize ball counter will not be updated, and the prize ball number counter will not be updated. The number display is also not updated.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes an over winning suggestion performance process for determining and executing an over winning suggestion performance (step 052IWS662). In addition,
The "suggestive performance when over-winning" is a performance that is executed at the timing when an over-winning into the big winning opening occurs and suggests the currently set setting value.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes a prize ball number display suggestion production process for determining and executing the prize ball number display suggestion production (step 052IWS663). In addition, the "prize ball number display suggestion effect" is a predetermined cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winnings in the big winning hole or special winning hole during jackpot games or high probability / 2nd KT state. number (in this example, 456, 5
55, 666, 2456, 2555, 2666) is reached, and is an effect that suggests the currently set setting value.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes a prize pitch number emphasizing production process for determining and executing a prize pitch number emphasizing production (step 052IWS664). In addition, the "prize ball number emphasizing production" is a predetermined number of accumulated number of prize balls paid out based on winnings in the big winning hole or special winning hole during jackpot games or high probability / 2nd KT state. (In this example, 1000 pieces, 2000 pieces,
This is an effect that highlights that the number of items (3,000, 4,000, 5,000) has been reached.

If the received production control command is a special winning opening winning designation command (step 052I
WS665), the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the second KT status flag is set (step 052IWS666). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the high probability/second KT state), the performance control CPU 120 adds 10 to the value of the prize ball number counter (step 052IWS667). In addition, CP for production control
U120 updates the prize ball number display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the prize ball number counter after addition (step 052IWS668).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS665 to S668, in this example,
The value of the prize ball number counter and the prize ball number display are updated based on the occurrence of a small hit and a winning in the special winning hole during the high probability/second KT state. On the other hand, even if the ball is in the KT state, if a special winning occurs during the high probability/first KT state or the low probability/first KT state, the value of the prize ball number counter will not be updated. The prize ball number display is also not updated (however, the value of the prize ball number counter is not updated, and the value of the prize ball number counter is not reset).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes a small hit winning suggestion performance process for determining and executing the small winning winning suggestion performance (step 052IWS669). In addition, the "Suggestion performance when winning a small hit" is a performance that is executed at the timing when a small hit occurs during the high probability / 2nd KT state and a prize is entered into the special prize opening, and it is a performance that suggests the currently set setting value. .

Next, the performance control CPU 120 moves to step 052IWS663 and executes a prize ball number display suggestion performance process (step 052IWS663). Next, the production control CPU
120 executes a prize ball number emphasizing process (step 052IWS664).

If the received production control command is another command, the production control CPU 120,
A process of storing the received production control command and setting a flag according to the received production control command is executed (step 052IWS670). And step 05
Move to 2IWS611.

(Suggestive effect processing when over winning)
FIG. 10-38 is a flowchart showing the over winning suggestion production process (step 052 IWS662). In the over-winning suggestion production process, the production control CPU 120
First, 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter (step 052IWS301). Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the value of the winning number counter after addition is 11 or more (step 052IWS302). If the value of the winning number counter is 11 or more (that is, if an over-winning into the big winning opening has occurred), the performance control CPU 1
20 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the over-winning suggestion performance determination table for determining the presence/absence and type of over-winning suggestion performance (step 20). 052IWS303).

FIG. 10-39 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the over-winning suggestion effect determination table.
As shown in Figure 10-39, the over-winning suggestion performance determination table includes no over-winning suggestion performance, over-winning suggestion A, over-winning suggestion B, over-winning suggestion C, and over-winning suggestion performance C. Judgment values are assigned to each of the suggestion effect D, the over-winning suggestion effect E, and the over-winning suggestion effect F.

As shown in FIG. 10-39, in this example, when a game ball wins in the big winning hole, the winning display (in this example, "+15 " character display) is displayed, and the winning sound of the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-39, when the "Over Winning Suggestion Effect A" is executed, the winning display is displayed in blue on the image display device 5, and the speaker 8L , 8R outputs the winning sound of sound A, which is different from the normal sound. In addition, when the "Over Winning Suggestion Effect B" is executed, the winning display is displayed in green on the image display device 5, and the winning sound B, which is different from the normal sound, is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output. In addition, when the "Over Winning Suggestion Effect C" is executed, a winning display is displayed in yellow on the image display device 5, and a winning sound C different from the normal sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output. In addition, when the "Over Winning Suggestion Effect D" is executed, the winning display is displayed in orange on the image display device 5, and the winning sound D, which is different from the normal sound, is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output. In addition, when the "Over Winning Suggestion Effect E" is executed, a winning display is displayed in red on the image display device 5, and a winning sound E different from the normal sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output. In addition, when the "Over Winning Suggestion Effect F" is executed, a winning display is displayed in rainbow colors on the image display device 5, and a sound F different from the normal sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. A winning sound is output.

As shown in FIG. 10-39, different determination values are assigned to the over winning suggestion effect determination table depending on which of the setting values "1" to "6" the current setting value is. In step 052IWS303, the performance control CPU 120 checks the storage contents of the setting value storage area (see step 052IWS615) and specifies the current setting value. Then, based on the determination value corresponding to the specified setting value, the presence or absence and type of the over-winning suggestion performance are determined.

As shown in FIG. 10-39, in this example, when the set value is "1", the percentage of execution of the over winning suggestion performance A is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the setting value is "2", the proportion of execution of the over-winning suggestion effect B being determined is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "3", the percentage of execution of the over-winning suggestion effect C being determined is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "4", the percentage of execution of the over-winning suggestion effect D being determined is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the setting value is "5", the proportion of execution of the over-winning suggestion effect E is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "6", the proportion of execution of the over winning suggestion effect F is determined to be relatively high.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-39, in this example, when the setting value is "1", the ratio for determining the execution of the over winning suggestion effect, which is the sum of the over winning suggestion effects A to F, is: 10
% + 8% + 7% + 5% + 5% + 5% = 40%, and if the setting value is "2", 45%
, when the setting value is "3", it is 50%, and when the setting value is "4", it is 55%.
, when the setting value is "5", it is 60%, and when the setting value is "6", it is 65%.
It is. In this way, in this example, since over-winning occurs relatively rarely, the proportion of decisions to execute the over-winning suggestion effect is relatively high compared to the small hit winning suggestion effect described later. There is.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not it has been decided in step 052IWS303 to execute the over-winning suggestion performance (step 052IWS304). If it has been decided to execute the over-winning suggestion effect, the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display a winning display according to the determined type of over-winning suggestion effect (
Step 052IWS305). For example, if it is decided to execute the over-winning suggestion performance A, control is performed to display a winning display in a blue display color on the image display device 5. Further, the performance control CPU 120 controls the speakers 8L and 8R to output a winning sound according to the determined type of over winning suggestion performance (step 052IWS306). For example, if it is decided to execute the over-winning suggestion performance A, control is performed to output the winning sound of sound A from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, if the value of the winning number counter is 10 or less (N in step 052 IWS302)
, or if it is determined that there will be no suggestion effect when winning over (N in step 052 IWS304)
), the production control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display a winning display in the normal display color (in this example, white) (step 052IWS307). Further, the performance control CPU 120 performs control to output the winning sound of the normal sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 052IWS308).

(Suggestive performance processing when winning a small hit)
FIG. 10-40 is a flowchart showing the small hit winning suggestion production process (step 052IWS669). In the small hit winning suggestion production process, the production control CPU 120
First, a lottery process based on random numbers is performed using a small hit winning suggestion performance determination table for determining the presence/absence and type of the small winning winning suggestion performance, and the presence/absence and type of the small winning winning suggestion performance is determined. (Step 052 IWS321).

FIG. 10-41 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the small hit winning suggestion effect determination table. As shown in Figure 10-41, the small hit winning suggestion performance determination table includes: no small hit winning suggestion performance, small winning winning suggestion performance A, small winning winning suggestion performance B, and small winning winning suggestion performance. C,
Judgment values are assigned to each of the small hit winning suggestion performance D, the small winning winning suggestion performance E, and the small winning winning suggestion performance F.

As shown in FIG. 10-41, in this example, when a game ball wins in the special winning hole, the winning display (in this example, "+10 ”
character display) is displayed, and the winning sound of the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-41, when the "Small hit winning suggestion effect A" is executed, the winning display is displayed in blue on the image display device 5, and the speaker The winning sound of sound A, which is different from the normal sound, is output from 8L and 8R. In addition, when the "Small hit winning suggestion effect B" is executed, a winning display is displayed in green on the image display device 5, and a sound B different from the normal sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. A winning sound is output. In addition, when the "Small hit winning suggestion effect C" is executed, a winning display is displayed in yellow on the image display device 5, and a sound C different from the normal sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. A winning sound is output. In addition, when the "Small hit winning suggestion effect D" is executed, a winning display is displayed in orange on the image display device 5, and the speaker 8L
, 8R outputs the winning sound of sound D, which is different from the normal sound. In addition, when the "Small hit winning suggestion effect E" is executed, a winning display is displayed in red on the image display device 5, and a sound E different from the normal sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. A winning sound is output. In addition, when the "Small hit winning suggestion effect F" is executed, a winning display is displayed in rainbow colors on the image display device 5, and a sound F different from the normal sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound will be output.

As shown in Figure 10-41, different judgment values are assigned to the small hit winning suggestion effect determination table depending on whether the current setting value is from ``1'' to ``6''. . In step 052 IWS321, the performance control CPU 120 stores the setting value storage area (step 0
52IWS615) and identify the current setting value. Then, based on the determination value corresponding to the specified setting value, the presence or absence and type of the small hit winning suggestion performance are determined.

As shown in FIG. 10-41, in this example, when the set value is "1", the percentage of execution of the small hit winning suggestion performance A is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "2", the proportion of execution of the small hit winning suggestion performance B is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "3", the proportion of execution of the small hit winning suggestion performance C is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "4", the percentage of execution of the small hit winning suggestion performance D being determined is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "5", the proportion of execution of the small hit winning suggestion performance E is relatively high. In addition, in this example, the setting value is "6".
In this case, the percentage of execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect F being determined is relatively high.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-41, in this example, if the setting value is "1", the ratio for determining the execution of the small hit winning suggestion performance, which is the sum of the small winning winning suggestion performances A to F. is 2%+1
% + 1% + 1% = 5%, when the setting value is "2" it is 6%, when the setting value is "3" it is 7%, and when the setting value is "4" is 8%, when the setting value is "5" it is 9%, and when the setting value is "6" it is 10%. In this way, in this example, the proportion of decisions to execute the small hit winning suggestion presentation is relatively low compared to the over winning suggestion presentation described above.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not it has been decided in step 052IWS321 to execute the small hit winning suggestion performance (step 052IWS322). If it has been decided to execute the small hit winning suggestion performance, the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display a winning display according to the determined type of small hit winning suggestion performance (step 052IWS323). For example, if it is decided to execute the small winning winning suggestion performance A, the image display device 5 is controlled to display a winning display in a blue display color. Further, the performance control CPU 120 controls the speakers 8L and 8R to output a winning sound according to the determined type of small hit winning suggestion performance (step 052IWS324). For example, if it is decided to execute the small hit winning suggestion performance A, control is performed to output the winning sound of sound A from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there will be no suggestion effect when winning a small hit (N in step 052 IWS322)
In the image display device 5, the performance control CPU 120 changes the normal display color (in this example,
Control is performed to display a winning display in white) (step 052 IWS325). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 performs control to output the winning sound of the normal sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (
Step 052IWS326).

In addition, the reliability of the set value suggestion may be made different depending on when the over-winning suggestion performance is executed and when the small winning suggestion presentation is executed. For example, although over-winning suggestion effect F can be executed with any setting value of ``1'' to ``6'', it is executed at a relatively high rate when the setting value is ``6''. If the winning suggestion effect F is executed, the set value is “6”.
It may be configured such that it is determined that Conversely, for example, the small winning suggestion effect F can be executed at any setting value of "1" to "6", but it is executed at a relatively high rate when the setting value is "6". On the other hand, the setting value may be determined to be "6" if the over-winning suggestion effect F is executed.

In addition, in this example, for the over-winning suggestion effect and the small winning suggestion effect, the display format of the winning display (in this example, the display color) is different from normal, and a winning sound different from normal is output. Although the case where execution is carried out according to the mode has been shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. for example,
By making either the display mode of the winning display (display color in this example) or the winning sound different from the usual mode, it is possible to perform the over-winning suggestion effect or the small winning award suggestion effect. may be configured. In addition, for example, by displaying an effect display or changing the display color of lamps or LEDs at the timing of an over-winning or a winning in a special winning opening, it is possible to create a suggestion for over-winning or to win a small hit. It may be configured to execute a time-suggesting effect.

(Prize ball count display suggestion processing)
FIG. 10-42 is a flowchart showing the prize ball number display suggestion production process (step 052IWS663). In the award pitch number display suggestion production process, the production control CPU 120 first checks whether the value of the award pitch number counter reaches 456 for the first time (step 052IW
S341). In this example, if a game ball enters the jackpot during a jackpot game, 15 prize balls will be obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter will be incremented by 15, so step 052IWS3
In step 41, if the value of the prize ball number counter is 465, the performance control CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 456 for the first time.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 456 for the first time, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the current set value is equal to or higher than the set value "4" (step 052 IWS342).
. It should be noted that whether or not the current set value is greater than or equal to the set value "4" can be specifically determined by checking the storage contents of the set value storage area (see step 052 IWS615). If the current setting value is the setting value "4" or more, the performance control CPU 120 uses a prize ball number display suggestion performance determination table for determining whether or not there is a prize ball number display suggestion performance, and draws a lottery based on random numbers. Processing is performed to determine whether or not there is a prize ball number display suggestion effect A (step 052IWS343).
Then, the process moves to step 052IWS359.

FIG. 10-43 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the award ball count display suggestion effect determination table. Figure 1
As shown in 0-43, in this example, when prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed, a character display such as "456 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current setting value is set. It is suggested that the value is "4" or more. As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, the execution of the award ball number display suggestion effect A is determined with a probability of 3%. In addition, in this example, the prize pitch number display suggestion effect A
is executed only when the set value is greater than or equal to the set value "4", so the prize ball number display suggestion effect A
If this is executed, it will be determined that the value is at least the set value "4" or more.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 456 for the first time (step 052 IWS
341N), the production control CPU 120 checks whether the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 555 for the first time (Step 052IWS344). In this example, if a game ball enters the jackpot during a jackpot game, 15 prize balls will be obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter will be incremented by 15, so in step 052IWS344, If the value of the prize ball number counter is 555, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 555 for the first time.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 555 for the first time, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "5" (step 052IWS345).
. It should be noted that whether or not the current set value is greater than or equal to the set value "5" can be specifically determined by checking the storage contents of the set value storage area (see step 052 IWS615). If the current setting value is the setting value "5" or more, the performance control CPU 120 uses the prize ball number display suggestion performance determination table to perform a lottery process based on random numbers, and determines whether or not there is a prize ball number display suggestion performance B. (Step 052IWS346). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when prize pitch number display suggestion effect B is executed,
A character display such as "555 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, suggesting that the current setting value is greater than or equal to the setting value "5". As shown in Figure 10-43, in this example, 2
Execution of prize ball number display suggestion effect B is determined with a probability of %. In addition, in this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed only when the set value is greater than or equal to the set value "5", so if the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed, at least the set value "5" is executed. It is confirmed that the above is the case.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 555 for the first time (step 052 IWS
344N), the production control CPU 120 checks whether the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 666 for the first time (Step 052IWS347). In this example, if a game ball enters the jackpot during a jackpot game, 15 prize balls will be obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter will be incremented by 15, so in step 052IWS347, If the value of the prize ball number counter is 675, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 666 for the first time.

If the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 666 for the first time, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the current set value is the set value "6" (step 052IWS348). It should be noted that whether or not the current setting value is the setting value "6" can be specifically determined by checking the storage contents of the setting value storage area (see step 052 IWS615). If the current setting value is the setting value "6", the production control CPU 120 uses the prize pitch number display suggestion production determination table to perform a lottery process based on random numbers to determine whether or not there is a prize pitch number display suggestion production C. Determine (step 052IWS349). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed,
A character display such as "666 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, suggesting that the current setting value is the setting value "6". As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, execution of the award ball number display suggestion effect C is determined with a probability of 1%. In addition, in this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed only when the setting value is "6", so if the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed, the setting value is "6". One thing is certain.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 666 for the first time (step 052 IWS
347N), the production control CPU 120 checks whether the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 2456 for the first time (Step 052IWS350). In this example, if a game ball enters the jackpot during a jackpot game, you will receive 15 prize balls, and if a game ball enters the special prize slot during the high probability/second KT state, you will receive 10 prize balls. is obtained, and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15 or 10. Therefore, in step 052IWS350, the production control CPU 120 determines that if the value of the prize ball number counter is 2460 or 2465, the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15 or 10. It is determined that the value of the number counter reaches 2456 for the first time.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2456 first, the production control CPU 120
Check whether the current setting value is greater than or equal to the setting value "4" (step 052IWS351
). It should be noted that whether or not the current set value is greater than or equal to the set value "4" can be specifically determined by checking the storage contents of the set value storage area (see step 052 IWS615). If the current setting value is the setting value "4" or more, the performance control CPU 120 uses the prize ball number display suggestion performance determination table to perform a lottery process based on random numbers, and determines whether or not there is a prize ball number display suggestion performance D. (Step 052 IWS352). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed,
A character display such as "2456 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, suggesting that the current setting value is greater than or equal to the setting value "4". As shown in Figure 10-43, in this example:
Execution of prize ball number display suggestion effect D is determined with a probability of 5%. In addition, in this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed only when the set value is equal to or higher than the set value "4", so if the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed, the set value "4" is executed. The above is confirmed.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2456 for the first time (step 052IW)
N in S350), the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2555 for the first time (Step 052IWS353). In this example, if a game ball enters the jackpot during a jackpot game, you will receive 15 prize balls, and if a game ball enters the special prize slot during the high probability/second KT state, you will receive 10 prize balls. is obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is incremented by 15 or 10. Therefore, in step 052IWS353, the production control CPU 120
If the value of the prize ball number counter is 2555 or 2560, it is determined that the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 2555 for the first time.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2555 for the first time, the production control CPU 120
Check whether the current setting value is greater than or equal to the setting value "5" (step 052IWS354
). It should be noted that whether or not the current set value is greater than or equal to the set value "5" can be specifically determined by checking the storage contents of the set value storage area (see step 052 IWS615). If the current setting value is the setting value "5" or more, the production control CPU 120 uses the prize pitch number display suggestion production determination table to perform a lottery process based on random numbers, and determines whether or not there is a prize pitch number display suggestion production E. (Step 052IWS355). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is executed,
A character display such as "2555 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, suggesting that the current setting value is greater than or equal to the setting value "5". As shown in Figure 10-43, in this example:
Execution of prize ball number display suggestion effect E is determined with a probability of 3%. In addition, in this example, since the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is executed only when the set value is equal to or greater than the set value "5", if the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is executed, the set value is "5". The above is confirmed.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2555 for the first time (step 052IW)
N in S353), the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2666 for the first time (Step 052IWS356). In this example, if a game ball enters the jackpot during a jackpot game, you will receive 15 prize balls, and if a game ball enters the special prize slot during the high probability/second KT state, you will receive 10 prize balls. is obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is incremented by 15 or 10. Therefore, in step 052IWS356, the production control CPU 120
If the value of the prize ball number counter is 2670 or 2675, it is determined that the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 2666 for the first time.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2666 for the first time, the performance control CPU 120
It is checked whether the current setting value is the setting value "6" (step 052IWS357).
It should be noted that whether or not the current setting value is the setting value "6" can be specifically determined by checking the storage contents of the setting value storage area (see step 052 IWS615). If the current setting value is the setting value "6", the production control CPU 120 uses the prize pitch number display suggestion production determination table to perform a lottery process based on random numbers to determine the presence or absence of the prize pitch number display suggestion production F. decide(
Step 052IWS358). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed,
A character display such as "2666 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, suggesting that the current setting value is "6". As shown in Figure 10-43, in this example, 2%
Execution of prize ball number display suggestion effect F is determined with probability. In addition, in this example, the prize pitch number display suggestion effect F is executed only when the set value is "6", so the award pitch number display suggestion effect F is executed only when the set value is "6".
If this is executed, it will be determined that the set value is "6".

Next, the production control CPU 120 performs steps 052IWS343, S346, and S34.
9, S352, S355, and S358, it is confirmed whether or not it has been decided to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effect (step 052IWS359). If it has been decided to execute the prize ball number display suggestion performance, the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to execute the determined type of prize ball number display suggestion performance (step 052IWS360). For example, award pitch display suggestion effect A
If it is determined to execute, the image display device 5 is controlled to display characters such as "456 OVER".

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 10-43, looking at the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to C executed during the jackpot game, the period during the jackpot game becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases. As the game progresses, the execution probability of the prize pitch display suggestion effect becomes lower to 3%, 2%, and 1%. 6” The accuracy of confirmation and setting value suggestion has increased. In addition, in this example, as shown in Figure 10-43, high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH
) Looking at the prize ball number display suggestion performances D to F that are executed during the period, as the period during the small hit RUSH becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases, the execution probability of the prize ball number display suggestion production increases to 5%. , 3%, and 2%, while the accuracy of confirming the set value "4" or more, confirming the set value "5" or more, confirming the set value "6" and suggesting the set value is increasing. .

Note that the mode is not limited to the one shown in this example, but for example, as the period during the jackpot game or the period during the small win RUSH becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases, the probability of executing the prize ball number display suggestion effect increases. It may be configured as desired. Further, for example, as the period during the jackpot game or the period during the small win RUSH becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases, the accuracy of the setting value suggestion may be lowered.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 10-43, there are prize ball number display suggestion effects A to C that are executed during the jackpot game, and prize ball number display suggestions that are executed during the small hit RUSH period. Performances D-F
Although a case is shown in which the execution probabilities of the prize ball number display suggestion performance are different, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and the configuration may be such that the prize ball number display suggestion performance is executed with the same execution probability.

(Processing to emphasize the number of prize pitches)
FIG. 10-44 is a flowchart showing the prize ball number emphasizing process (step 052IWS664). In the prize pitch number emphasizing production processing, the production control CPU 120 first sets the value of the prize pitch number counter to a threshold value of every 1000 (in this example, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000).
, 5000) is reached first (step 052IWS371). In this example, if a game ball enters the jackpot during a jackpot game, 15 prize balls will be obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter will be incremented by 15, so in step 052IWS371, For example, if the value of the prize ball number counter is 1000 or 1005, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 1000 for the first time. For example, if the value of the prize ball number counter is 2000 or 2005, the value of the prize ball number counter is 200.
It is determined that 0 is reached first. Also, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 3000 or 3
If the value is 005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 3000 for the first time. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball number counter is 4000 or 4005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 4000 for the first time. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball number counter is 5000 or 5005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 5000 for the first time.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches the threshold of every 1000 for the first time, the production control CPU1
20 uses a prize pitch number emphasizing performance determination table for determining the presence or absence of a prize pitch number emphasizing performance,
A lottery process is performed based on random numbers, and it is determined whether or not to emphasize the number of prize balls (step 052IW).
S372).

FIG. 10-45 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of a prize ball number emphasizing effect determination table. Figure 10-
45, in this example, if the value of the prize ball counter reaches 1000,
Execution of prize pitch number emphasizing production A is determined with a probability of 50%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect A is executed, a character display such as "1000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5.
Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 2000, execution of prize ball number emphasizing effect B is determined with a probability of 60%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect B is executed, characters such as "2000 OVER" are displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 3000, execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect C is determined with a probability of 70%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect C is executed, characters such as "3000 OVER" are displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 4000, execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect D is determined with a probability of 80%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect D is executed, the image display device 5 displays “40
A character display such as "00 OVER" is displayed. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 5000, execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect E is determined with a probability of 90%. When the award ball count emphasis effect E is executed, the image display device 5 displays “5000 OVE
A character display such as "R" is displayed.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not it has been decided in step 052IWS372 to execute the prize ball number emphasizing performance (step 052IWS373). If it has been decided to execute the prize ball number emphasizing performance, the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to execute the determined type of prize ball number emphasizing performance (step 052IWS374). For example, if it is decided to execute the prize pitch count emphasizing effect A, the image display device 5 displays “1000 O
Control is performed to display characters such as "VER".

In addition, in this example, a case is shown in which the number of prize balls is emphasized when the number of prize balls reaches 1,000, 2,000, 3,000, 4,000, and 5,000. It is not limited to the form. For example, it is not necessary to make it possible to perform the presentation that emphasizes the number of prize pitches in all of these cases, but to make it possible to perform the presentation that emphasizes the number of prize pitches when the number of prize balls reaches 1000, 2000, and 3000. may be configured. Also, for example, the number of prize balls is 600.
It may be configured such that the presentation emphasizing the number of prize balls can be performed even when the number of balls reaches 0 or 7000, and various embodiments are possible.

As shown in Figures 10-44 and 10-45, the prize pitch count emphasizing performance is different from the prize pitch count display suggestion performance shown in Figures 10-42 and 10-43, and is unrelated to the current setting value. This is a performance decided and executed. Note that the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and may be configured to be able to execute the prize pitch number emphasizing performance in a manner that suggests the current setting value, for example, by changing the display mode of the prize pitch number emphasizing performance. For example, you can display "1000 OVER" or "
The current setting value may be suggested by displaying a character display such as "2000 OVER".

(variable display start waiting process)
FIG. 10-46 is a flowchart showing the variable display start waiting process (step S170). In the variable display start waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not a variable pattern command has been received (step 052IWS811). Note that whether or not a variation pattern command has been received can be determined by, for example, setting a variation pattern command reception flag indicating that a variation pattern command has been received in the command analysis process (step S75) when a variation pattern command is received. Step 052IWS811
Then, it may be checked whether the variable pattern command reception flag is set.

If the fluctuation pattern command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 052I).
WS812). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is a non-KT state), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the time to execute the variable display of the first special symbol. (Step 052IWS813). In addition, whether or not it is the case to execute the variable display of the first special symbol depends on, for example, whether the variable pattern indicated by the received variable pattern command specifies the first variable pattern #01 to #09. This can be determined by checking whether If the variable display of the first special symbol is not to be executed (that is, if the variable display of the second special symbol is to be executed), the process is ended as is. When performing a variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 12
0 updates the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 052IWS815).

If the first KT status flag or the second KT status flag is not set (i.e.
If it is in the KT state), the performance control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the case to execute the variable display of the second special symbol (step 052IWS814). In addition, whether or not it is the case to execute the variable display of the second special symbol depends on, for example, whether the variable pattern indicated by the received variable pattern command specifies the second variable pattern #01 to #34. This can be determined by checking whether Unless the variable display of the second special symbol is to be executed (i.e.,
If the variable display of the first special symbol is to be executed), the process is ended as is. If the variable display of the second special symbol is to be executed, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 052IWS815).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS812 to S815, in this characteristic part 052IW, in the non-KT state, the variable display of decorative symbols is displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the first special symbol. When this is executed and the state is KT, a variable display of decorative symbols is executed on the image display device 5 in response to a variable display of the second special symbol. In other words, even if the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, it is in the KT state,
Even if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, in the non-KT state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is not executed.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 10-47 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not it is the case to execute the variable display of the first special symbol (step 052IWS920). In addition, whether or not it is the case to execute the variable display of the first special symbol depends on whether, for example, the variable pattern command stored in the variable pattern command storage area specifies the first variable pattern #01 to #09. This can be determined by checking whether or not it exists. If the variable display of the first special symbol is to be executed, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the current variable display is a small hit (step 052IWS921). In addition, to determine whether the current variable display is a small hit, for example, check whether the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 7 designation command. This can be determined by If it is a small hit variation, the production control CPU 120 determines a non-reach symbol as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol (step 052IWS922).

As already explained, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and it becomes a small win, there is only a case where the small win is A. I can hardly expect to win any prizes. Therefore, in this example, by executing the processing of steps 052IWS920 to S922, if the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs,
By forcibly stopping and displaying out-of-reach symbols, the player is prevented from having excessive expectations.

When performing a variable display of the second special symbol (N in step 052IWS920) or when there is no small hit variation (N in step 052IWS921), the performance control CPU 120 displays the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the variable display result. (Step 052IWS923)
. In step 052IWS923, when the display result 1 designation command is received (when it is determined that the display result 1 is a miss), the performance control CPU 120 determines that the left center right decorative pattern is a completely mismatched missed symbol or only the left and right decorative symbols are displayed. The matched reach determines the combination of missing symbols. In addition, when a display result 2 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a 10R probability-variable jackpot), a combination of symbols in which the decorative symbols on the left center right are "7" among the odd symbols is determined. Further, when a display result 3 designation command is received (when a 6R probability-variable jackpot is determined), a combination of symbols in which the left-center right decorative symbols are odd-numbered symbols other than "7" is determined. In addition, when the display result 5 designation command is received (when it is determined that it is a 2R probability-variable jackpot), the combination of symbols in which the decorative symbol inside includes a special symbol (in this example, the symbol "R") is determined. . In addition, when a display result 4 designation command or a display result 6 designation command is received (if it is determined to be a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot), a combination of symbols in which the decorative symbols on the left center right are even numbers. Determine. Further, when the display result 7 designation command is received (when it is determined that a small win is achieved), a combination of decorative symbols of the small win symbol (for example, "135") is determined.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not the current variable display is a failure (Step 052IWS924). To determine whether or not the current variable display is a failure, for example, check whether the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 1 designation command. It can be determined by If there is no deviation variation, the process directly proceeds to step 052IWS928. If it is a deviation variation (Y in step 052 IWS924), the performance control CPU 120 executes a setting value suggestion effect setting process to determine the presence or absence and type of a setting value suggestion effect that suggests the currently set setting value. (Step 052IWS925).

In step 052IWS925, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the setting value stored in the setting value storage area (see step 052IWS615). Then, the performance control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the table corresponding to the specified setting value as a setting value suggestion performance determination table for determining the presence/absence and type of setting value suggestion performance. Determine the presence or absence and type of value suggestion performance.

FIG. 10-48 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the setting value suggestion effect determination table. As shown in Figure 10-48, the setting value suggestion effect determination table includes settings such as no setting value suggestion effect,
A determination value is assigned to each of the setting value suggestion effect A, the setting value suggestion effect B, the setting value suggestion effect C, the setting value suggestion effect D, the setting value suggestion effect E, and the setting value suggestion effect F.

The setting value suggestion effect A is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. The execution rate is highest in certain cases. Further, the setting value suggestion performance B is a performance executed by displaying a predetermined character image in green display color on the image display device 5, for example, and as shown in FIG. ”, the execution rate is highest.
Further, the setting value suggestion effect C is an effect executed by, for example, displaying a predetermined character image in a yellow display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. ”, the execution rate is highest. Further, the setting value suggestion effect D is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in an orange display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. ”, the execution rate is highest. Further, the setting value suggestion effect E is an effect executed by, for example, displaying a predetermined character image in a red display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. ”, the execution rate is highest. In addition, the setting value suggestion effect F is, for example,
This is an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a rainbow display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. 10-48, the execution rate is highest when the setting value is "6". .

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the second KT status flag is set (step 052IWS926). If the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the second KT state), the process directly proceeds to step 052IWS928. If the second KT status flag is set (Y in step 052 IWS926),
That is, in the second KT state, the performance control CPU 120 is in the second KT state (small hit R
A small win RUSH continuation suggestion effect setting process is executed to determine the presence or absence and type of a small win RUSH continuation suggestion effect that suggests that the small win RUSH (USH) continues (step 052 IWS92
7).

FIG. 10-49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production determination table. As shown in Figure 10-49, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance determination table includes small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance no, small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance A, and small hit R
A determination value is assigned to each USH continuation suggestion performance B. The small win RUSH continuation suggestion performance A is a performance executed by displaying a predetermined performance image in a blue display color on the image display device 5, for example. Further, the small win RUSH continuation suggestion performance B is a performance executed by displaying a predetermined performance image in a red display color on the image display device 5, for example.

As shown in Figure 10-49, in this example, when the set value is "1", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is highest, and when the set value is "2", the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed. If the execution rate is the next highest and the set value is "3", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest and the set value is "4", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest, and when the setting value is ``5'', the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest, and when the setting value is ``6'', the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest. It's getting lower.

In addition, as shown in Figure 10-49, when the setting value is "1", the execution rate of small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance A is the highest, and when the setting value is "6", the execution rate of small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance B
has the highest execution rate.

In this example, the jackpot probability is the lowest when the set value is "1" and the highest when the set value is "6", but when the set value is in the second KT state, the jackpot probability does not occur. Since the second KT state may end as a trigger, a setting value of "1" is the setting state in which the second KT state is most likely to continue (high expectation of continuation), and a setting value of "6" is the setting state in which the second KT state is most likely to continue. It can be said that a certain case is a set state in which the second KT state is most difficult to continue (the degree of continuation expectation is low).
Therefore, in this example, when the setting value is "1", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest, and when the setting value is "6", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the lowest. Therefore, by executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, the second
Expectations for the continuation of the KT state (small hit RUSH) can be increased.

As explained above, the degree of expectation for continuation of the second KT state (small hit RUSH) is the degree of expectation that the control period to the second KT state will become longer without a jackpot occurring.

In addition, in this example, since the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance A is highest when the setting value is "1", in particular, by executing the small win RUSH continuation suggestion performance A, It is possible to further increase expectations for the continuation of the second KT state (small hit RUSH).

Next, based on the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command, the performance control CPU 120 determines the variation pattern of the decorative symbol to be used and whether to execute the set value suggestion production or the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production. There is a setting value suggestion effect and a small hit RUSH.
A process table corresponding to the continuation suggestion effect is selected (step 052 IWS928).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the process timer setting value of the process data 1 in the process table selected in step 052IWS928 to the process timer and starts the process timer (step 052IWS929). Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (image display device 5, various lamps, speakers 8L) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1).
, 8R) is executed (step 052IWS930). For example, in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5, a control signal (display control execution data) is output to the VDP. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the LED control board 14. In addition, speaker 8L,
In order to output audio from the 8R, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13.

In addition, when it is decided to execute the setting value suggestion effect, step 052IWS930 and the variable display effect process (step S172) are executed according to the process table including the setting value suggestion effect selected in step 052IWS928. The setting value suggestion performance is executed while the symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner (while the symbol is fluctuating).

In addition, if it is decided to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, step 052IWS
By executing step 052IWS930 and the variable display effect processing (step S172) according to the process table including the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect selected in step 928, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner (during a loss variation in the second KT state). ), a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed.

Next, the production control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the variation time in the decorative symbol variation time timer and starts the ornamental symbol variation time timer (step 052 IWS931). Then, the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display effect processing (step S172) (step 052IWS932).

(Variable display processing)
FIG. 10-50 shows the variable display performance process (step S17) in the performance control process process.
2) is a flowchart showing the process. In the production process during variable display, the production control CPU 12
0 first subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step 052 IWS8101
), the value of the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer is subtracted by 1 (step 052IWS8102). When the process timer times out (step 052 IWS8103), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 052 IWS8104). Furthermore, the control state for the production device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step 052IWS8105).

Next, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS8106). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is a non-KT state), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first symbol confirmation designation command has been received (for example, if the 1 confirmation command reception flag is set (step 052IWS8107). If the first symbol confirmation designation command is received, C for production control
PU120 updates the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8110).

If the first symbol confirmation designation command has not been received, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the first forced symbol confirmation designation command has been received (for example, whether the first forced symbol confirmation command reception flag is set or not). (Step 052IWS8108). If the first forced symbol confirmation designation command has been received, the production control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 052IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with a missed symbol (step 052IWS8109). And the production control CPU 120,
The value of the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8110).

If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set in step 052IWS8106 (that is, if it is in the KT state), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second symbol confirmation designation command has been received (for example, if the (Step 052IWS8111). If the second symbol confirmation designation command has been received, the production control CPU 120 updates the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol hit waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8114)
).

If the second symbol confirmation designation command has not been received, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the second forced symbol confirmation designation command has been received (for example, whether the second forced symbol confirmation command reception flag is set or not). (Step 052IWS8112). If the second forced symbol confirmation designation command has been received, the production control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 052IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with a missed symbol (step 052IWS8113). And the production control CPU 120,
The value of the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8114).

If the first forced symbol confirmation designation command has not been received in step 052IWS8108, or if the second forced symbol confirmation designation command has not been received in step 052IWS8112, the production control CPU 120 uses the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer. It is checked whether or not timeout has occurred (step 052IWS8115). If the decorative symbol variation time timer has timed out, the performance control CPU 120 switches to the process data for standby performance (step 052IWS8116). Then, the production control CPU 120 restarts the process timer (step 052IWS8117).

In this example, as already explained, when the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit, and the variable display of the first special symbol is in progress, which results in a miss, a small hit, or a variable jackpot. During the small winning game, the updating of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. In addition, if the variable display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit, and if the variable display of the second special symbol that is a loss, small hit, or probability variable jackpot is in progress, during the small hit game , the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol continues to be executed. This means that the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer timed out in step 052IWS8115 without receiving any symbol confirmation designation command.
This is a case where the updating of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed. In this case, in this example, the process of steps 052IWS8116 and S8117 is executed to switch to the standby effect, and then the updating of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is restarted, and finally 1 special The standby performance is continued until the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol is finished. Note that the "standby effect" is, for example, an effect in which the image display device 5 is brought into a temporary stop state while the left-center right decorative pattern is shaken or slightly fluctuated.

Note that, for example, in the case where the image display device 5 also executes a variable display of a system small symbol, a fourth symbol, etc., updating of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the first special When the variable display of the symbols or the second special symbol is continuously executed, the variable display of these system small symbols and the fourth symbol is also continuously executed. Then, when the updating of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is resumed and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finally stopped and displayed, these system small symbols and the fourth symbol The variable display is also stopped and displayed.

(Special drawing waiting process)
FIGS. 10-51 and 10-52 are flowcharts showing the special symbol per waiting process (step S173) in the production control process process. In the special symbol hit waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the jackpot symbol is displayed as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set (step 052 IWS).
9701). If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, step 052IWS970
Move to 6. In this characteristic part 052IW, when a jackpot symbol is displayed as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol, a stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step 052IWS9705.
Then, when executing the jackpot performance, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the jackpot symbol has been confirmed, but the jackpot effect has not yet been executed. The process moves to step 052IWS9706 without being executed.

If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the stop symbol display flag 2, which indicates that the small winning symbol is displayed as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol, is set. (Step 052IWS9702). Stop symbol display flag 2
If set, the process moves to step 052IWS9717. This characteristic part 052I
In W, if a small winning symbol is displayed as a stop symbol of a decorative symbol, step 052IW
Stop symbol display flag 2 is set in S9716. Then, when executing the small hit performance, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 2 is set means that the small hit symbol has been confirmed but the small win effect has not yet been executed, so the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 052 IWS9703 is displayed. The process moves to step 052IWS9717 without executing any processing.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the production control CPU 120 displays the stop symbol (missing symbol, jackpot symbol) of the left center right decorative symbol that is being stopped and displayed on the image display device 5. , small winning symbol) is determined and displayed (step 052IWS9703). In addition, when the first forced symbol confirmation designation command or the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is received and the process of replacing it with a missed symbol is executed in steps 052IWS8109 and S8113, in step 052IWS9703, the production control CP
U120 performs control to confirm and display a missed symbol.

When the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 052IWS9703 (Y of step 052IWS9704), the performance control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 052IWS9705).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not a jackpot start designation command has been received (step 052IWS9706). If the jackpot start designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 052
IWS9707).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not the number of prize balls is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS9708). If the prize ball number display is not being displayed, the production control CPU 120 will determine that the jackpot type of the jackpot that occurred this time is 10R probability variable jackpot, 6
Check whether it is an R certain variable jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot (step 052IWS9
709). In addition, whether the jackpot type is 10R definite variable jackpot, 6R probable variable jackpot, or 6R normal jackpot can be determined by, for example, whether the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command ~
This can be determined by checking whether or not it is a display result 4 designation command. If it is a 10R definite strange jackpot, a 6R definite strange jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot, the production control CPU 120 performs control to start displaying the number of prize balls on the image display device 5 (step 052 IWS97
10).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS9708 to S9710, in this example, the display of the number of prize balls is started when a jackpot game based on a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot is started. On the other hand, even if there is a jackpot, when starting a jackpot game based on a 2R probability-variable jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot, the display of the number of prize balls is not started.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the jackpot performance (step 052IWS9711). Next, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 052 IWS9712), and inputs the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number According to data 1), the production device (image display device 5 as production parts, various lamps as production parts, and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts)
) is executed (step 052IWS9713).

Thereafter, the production control CPU 120 updates the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot production process (step S176) (step 052IWS9714).

If the jackpot symbol has not been confirmed and displayed in the process of step 052IWS9703 (N in step 052IWS9704), and if the small win symbol has been confirmed and displayed in the process in step 052IWS9703 (Y in step 052IWS9715), the performance control CPU 120 stops. Set symbol display flag 2 (step 052IWS9716).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the small hit start designation command has been received (step 052IWS9717). If the small hit start designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step 052
IWS9718).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the small hit performance (step 052IWS9719). Next, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 052 IWS9720), and updates the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number According to data 1), the production device (image display device 5 as production parts, various lamps as production parts, and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts)
) is executed (step 052IWS9721).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit performance process (step S174) (step 052IWS9722).

If the jackpot symbol or the small prize symbol is not displayed in the process of step 052IWS9703 (that is, if a losing symbol is displayed) (N in step 052IWS9704 and N in step 052IWS9715), the production control CPU 120 controls the production control. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 052IWS9723).

(Ending production processing)
FIG. 10-53 is a flowchart showing the ending effect processing (step S177) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the ending performance process, the performance control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the performance period measurement timer (step 052
IWS951). The production period measurement timer is set based on the completion of all rounds of the jackpot game in the jackpot production processing (see step S176).
Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the performance period measurement timer has timed out (step 052IWS952).

When the production period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step 052IWS952), the production control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 052IWS952).
S953), executes processing to control the effect devices (image display device 5, game effect lamp 9, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) according to the contents of process data n (step 052IWS954)
). For example, effects such as displaying that the jackpot ends or displaying a predetermined character are executed.

Then, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the process timer has timed out (step 052IWS955), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step 052IWS956). Then, the process timer setting value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step 052IWS957).

If the production period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step 052 IWS952),
The performance control CPU 120 confirms whether the jackpot game to be ended this time is a jackpot game based on a 6R probability variable jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot (step 052IWS958). In addition, whether it is a 6R definite strange jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot is determined by, for example, whether the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 3 designation command or the display result 4 designation command. This can be determined by checking. If it is a 6R probability-variable jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot, the production control CPU 120 performs control to end the display of the prize ball number display on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS959).

In this example, by executing the processing of steps 052IWS958 to S959,
When executing a jackpot game based on a 6R guaranteed variable jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot, the prize ball number display is displayed during the jackpot game, and when the jackpot game ends, the prize ball number display is erased and the jackpot game is completed. The number of prize balls is not displayed during the high probability/first KT state or the low probability/first KT state after the end of the game.

Next, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the jackpot game to be ended this time is a jackpot game based on the 2R probability variable jackpot (step 052IWS960). Note that whether or not it is a 2R probability variable jackpot can be determined by, for example, checking whether the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 5 designation command. If it is a 2R probability-variable jackpot, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the number of prize balls is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS961). If the prize ball number display is not being displayed, the production control CPU 120 performs control to start displaying the prize ball number display on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS962).

In this example, by executing the processing of steps 052IWS960 to S962,
When executing a jackpot game based on a 2R probability variable jackpot, the prize ball number display is not displayed during the jackpot game (however, in this example, the prize ball number display is displayed before the 2R probability variation jackpot occurs). (If so, the prize ball number display will continue to be displayed, but the display will not be updated), and the prize ball number display will be displayed during the high probability/second KT state after the end of the jackpot game.

Thereafter, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 052IWS963).

(Example of production)
Next, the performance mode of the performance executed in this feature section 052IW will be explained. First, the presentation mode of the setting value suggestion presentation will be explained. FIG. 10-54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the presentation mode of the setting value suggestion presentation. In this example, it is possible to perform the setting value suggestion effect in the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of place. As shown in FIG. 10-54(A), the image display device 5
10-54 (B1) to (B3), when the display of the decorative pattern on the left middle right is being displayed in a variable manner, when the timing to perform the setting value suggestion effect is displayed, the decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable manner, as shown in Figures 10-54 (B1) to (B3). The setting value suggestion effect is executed.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-54 (B1) to (B3), the setting value suggestion effect is executed by displaying predetermined character images 052IW001, 052IW002, and 052IW003 on the image display device 5. In this case, for example, when executing the setting value suggestion effect A, the setting value is set by displaying a predetermined character image 052IW001 in a blue display color on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 10-54 (B1). A value suggestion performance is executed. For example, when executing the setting value suggestion effect C, as shown in FIG. 10-54 (B2), a predetermined character image 052IW00 is displayed in yellow on the image display device 5.
The setting value suggestion effect is executed depending on the manner in which 2 is displayed. Also, for example, setting value suggestion effect E
When performing this, the setting value suggestion effect is executed in a manner in which a predetermined character image 052IW003 is displayed in a red display color on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 10-54 (B3).

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 10-54, the case where setting value suggestion effect A, setting value suggestion effect C, and setting value suggestion effect E are executed is shown, but for example, when executing setting value suggestion effect B, The predetermined character image is displayed in green, when setting value suggestion effect D is executed, the predetermined character image is displayed in orange display color, and when setting value suggestion effect F is executed, a rainbow is displayed. A predetermined character image is displayed in different display colors.

In this example, depending on whether a character image of a different display color is displayed during the fluctuating display of a decorative symbol that is out of place and a setting value suggestion effect is executed, the player is informed which setting value is currently set. It can create a sense of expectation.

Next, the production mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production will be explained. FIG. 10-55 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the production mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production. In this example, the second K
Small hit RUS in the fluctuating display of decorative symbols that are out of T state (during small hit RUSH)
H continuation suggestion performance can be executed.

In this example, when the second KT state is in progress, as shown in FIG. It is clearly displayed that it is inside. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (A), when the image display device 5 is performing a variable display of the left center right decorative symbol during the second KT state, the execution timing of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is Then, Figure 10-5
As shown in 5(B1) to (B3), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance is executed during the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-55 (B1) and (B2), the small hit RUSH is
Continuation suggestion performance is executed. In addition, in this example, the predetermined effect image 052IW005,052
A case is shown in which an image of a racing car is displayed as IW006. in this case,
For example, when executing small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, as shown in FIG. A RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed. Also, for example, small hit RU
When executing the SH continuation suggestion effect B, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (B2), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is displayed by displaying the predetermined effect image 052IW005 in red display color on the image display device 5. is executed.

In this example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern that is out of the second KT state, or the effect image of any display color is displayed to suggest the small hit RUSH continuation. Depending on whether the performance is executed or not, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the second KT state (small win RUSH) will continue.

Next, the display mode of the right-handed hit notification will be explained. FIG. 10-56 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of right-handed hit notification. In this example, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol results in a jackpot or the variable display of the second special symbol executes and results in a jackpot, when a jackpot game is in progress, As shown in FIG. 10-56(1), the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) lights up the right-handed display 26 (see steps 052IWS2018A and S2018B). Furthermore, based on the reception of the right-handed hitting lighting start designation command, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (1), the right-handed hitting notification LED 37 is turned on by the performance control CPU 120 (step 052
2019A, S2019B, S639). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (1), the performance control CPU 120 causes the right-handed display 05 to appear on the display screen of the image display device 5.
2IW007 is displayed (see step 052IWS624).

In addition, in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol results in a small hit, during the small hit game, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically , the CPU 103) lights up the right-hand hitting indicator 26 (step 052IWS2).
024B). In addition, based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command,
As shown in 0-56 (2), the CPU 120 for controlling the performance controls the LED 3 for right-handed hitting notification.
7 is lit (see step 052IWS2025B, S639). However, unlike during a jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (2), the right-hand hit display 052IW007 is not displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

On the other hand, in this example, if a small hit occurs due to the variable display of the first special symbol,
As shown in 3), during the small winning game, the right-handed hit indicator 26 lights up and the right-handed hit notification LED
37 is not lit, and the right-hand hitting display 052IW007 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.
is not displayed either.

Next, the presentation modes of the over-winning suggestion presentation, the small hit winning suggestion presentation, and the prize ball number display suggestion presentation will be explained. FIG. 10-57 and FIG. 10-58 are explanatory views for explaining the presentation modes of the over-winning suggestion presentation, the small hit winning suggestion presentation, and the prize ball number display suggestion presentation. Note that in FIGS. 10-57 and 10-58, the display screen changes in the order of (A), (B), (C), and so on. Furthermore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 10-57 and 10-58, a case is shown in which the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state based on a 10R variable jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 10-57(A), during the jackpot game, the image display device 5 displays characters such as "Jackpot in progress!" and round number displays such as "Round 2". Prize ball number display 052IW008 is displayed. Also, if a normal prize (not an over-win) occurs in the jackpot during a jackpot game, the prize will be displayed in the normal display color (in this example, white) as shown in Figure 10-57 (B). 052IW009 (in this example, “+15
'') is displayed, and the winning sound of the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see steps 052IWS307 and S308).

Next, it is assumed that an over-win occurs during the jackpot game, and based on the occurrence of the over-win, it is decided to execute the over-win suggestion performance. In this case, Figure 10-57 (
As shown in C), the winning display 052IW according to the determined type of over winning suggestion effect.
010 (in this example, the characters "+15") are displayed, and the speakers 8L and 8R are
, a winning sound corresponding to the determined type of over-winning suggestion effect is output (step 0
52IWS305, S306). For example, when over-winning suggestion performance A is executed, a winning display is displayed in blue on the image display device 5, and a winning sound of sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, it is assumed that the number of prize balls reaches 456, and based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 456, it is decided to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effect A. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-57(D), the image display device 5 displays characters such as "456 OVER" 052IW01.
1 is displayed, and prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed (see step 052 IWS360).
.

In this example, a case is shown in which the award pitch number display suggestion effect A is executed, but for example, if it is decided to execute the award pitch number display suggestion effect B, "555" is displayed on the image display device 5. O
A character display such as "VER" is displayed, and prize pitch number display suggestion effect B is executed. Further, for example, when it is decided to execute the award ball count display suggestion effect C, the image display device 5 displays “666
A character display such as "OVER" is displayed, and a prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-58(E), when the jackpot game ends, the gaming state is controlled to the high probability/second KT state after the jackpot game ends. In addition, when controlled to the high probability/second KT state, as shown in Figure 10-58 (F), a text display such as "Small hit RUSH in progress!" is displayed, and the prize ball number display 052IW008 continues. will be displayed.

Next, in the high probability/second KT state, a small hit occurs and the game ball enters the special winning slot, but if it is not decided to execute the small hit winning suggestion effect, the process shown in Figure 10-58 As shown in (F), the winning display 052IW012 (in this example, white) is displayed in the normal display color (in this example, white).
``+10'' is displayed, and the winning sound of normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see steps 052IWS325 and S326).

Next, during the high probability/second KT state, a small hit occurs and the game ball enters the special winning opening, and based on the fact that the gaming ball enters the special winning opening, a small winning winning suggestion presentation is performed. Assume that it has been decided to execute. In this case, as shown in Figure 10-58 (G), the winning display 052IW013 (in this example, the character display of "+10") is displayed according to the determined type of small winning winning suggestion effect, and the speaker From 8L and 8R, a winning sound corresponding to the determined type of small hit winning suggestion effect is output (see steps 052IWS323 and S324).
For example, when the small winning winning suggestion performance A is executed, the winning display is displayed in blue on the image display device 5, and the winning sound of sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, it is assumed that the number of prize balls reaches 2666 during the high probability/second KT state, and based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 2666, it is decided to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effect F. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-58(H), the image display device 5 displays "2666 OVER
A character display 052IW014 such as "" is displayed, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed (see step 052IWS360).

In addition, in this example, a case is shown in which the award ball number display suggestion effect F is executed, but for example, when it is decided to execute the award pitch number display suggestion effect D, the image display device 5 displays "2456".
A character display such as "OVER" is displayed, and a prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed. Further, for example, when it is decided to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effect E, the image display device 5 displays “25
A character display such as "55 OVER" is displayed, and a prize ball number display suggestion effect E is executed.

Although not shown in the examples shown in FIGS. 10-57 and 10-58, for example, execution of the prize pitch number emphasizing effect A is determined based on the number of prize pitches reaching 1000. In this case, characters such as "1000 OVER" are displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize ball number emphasizing effect A is executed. Further, for example, if it is decided to execute the prize ball number emphasizing effect B based on the fact that the number of prize balls has reached 2000, the image display device 5 displays "
A message such as "2000 OVER" is displayed, and performance B emphasizing the number of prize pitches is executed. Further, for example, when it is decided to execute the prize ball number emphasizing effect C based on the fact that the number of prize balls has reached 3000, a character display such as "3000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , the prize pitch count emphasizing effect C is executed. Further, for example, when it is decided to execute the prize ball number emphasizing effect D based on the fact that the number of prize balls has reached 4000, a character display such as "4000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , the prize pitch count emphasizing effect D is executed. Further, for example, when it is decided to execute the prize ball number emphasizing effect E based on the fact that the number of prize balls has reached 5000, a character display such as "5000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , the prize pitch count emphasizing effect E is executed.

In this example, the number of prize balls is 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555,
Or, depending on the fact that 2666 balls have been reached (in other words, the total gaming value given by small wins during jackpot games or high probability/second KT state), the number of prize balls is displayed with different selection ratios Suggestion performance A ~ Although the case where F is executed is shown, the embodiment is not limited to such a mode. for example,
Depending on the number of small hits that occurred during the high probability/second KT state and the number of variable displays executed during the high probability/second KT state, prize ball number display suggestion effects A to F are executed at different selection ratios. It may be configured to do so, and various aspects are possible.

Next, control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed will be explained. FIG. 10-59 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed.

During the fluctuating display of the first special symbol that results in a jackpot, if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuating display of the second special symbol, the fluctuating display of the first special symbol will be a probability variable jackpot (in this example, 10R
If the jackpot fluctuation is a certain variable jackpot or a 6R certain variable jackpot), please refer to Figure 10-59 (
As shown in A), even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the first special symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, during the small winning game, the update of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. When the small winning game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the updating of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, (See Y in step 052 IWS1128A).

On the other hand, if the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is a jackpot fluctuation that results in a normal jackpot (in this example, a 6R normal jackpot), the small winning symbol will be stopped and displayed as shown in Figure 10-59 (B). When this occurs, the variable display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as the symbol is off (step 0).
52IWS1128A, step 052IWS1129A).

In addition, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the fluctuating display of the first special symbol that results in a loss or small hit, as shown in Figure 10-59 (C), Even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small winning game, the update of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the updating of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, (See step 052 IWS 1127A N).

During the fluctuating display of the second special symbol that results in a jackpot, if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuating display of the first special symbol, the fluctuating display of the second special symbol will be a probability variable jackpot (in this example, 10R
In the case of a jackpot change (probable variable jackpot, 6R probable variable jackpot, or 2R probable variable jackpot), as shown in Figure 10-59 (D), even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol will change. Display continues. Specifically, during the small winning game, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the updating of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1).
120B, step 052 IWS 1128B (see Y).

On the other hand, if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is a jackpot fluctuation that results in a normal jackpot (in this example, 2R normal jackpot), the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in Figure 10-59 (E). When this occurs, the variable display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed with the symbol being off (step 0).
52IWS1128B, step 052IWS1129B).

In addition, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the fluctuating display of the second special symbol that results in a loss or small hit, as shown in Figure 10-59 (F), Even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small winning game, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. When the small winning game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, (See N in step 052 IWS1127B).

The control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed is not limited to the mode shown in this example. Hereinafter, a modification of the control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed will be described.

(Modification 1)
FIG. 10-60 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in modification 1. In Figure 10-60, steps 052IWS1120A-S
The process of step 1127A is similar to those shown in FIG. 10-19, but in modification 1, the determination process of step 052IWS 1128A shown in FIG. 10-19 does not exist.

In modification example 1, if the variable display of the first special symbol being executed results in a jackpot, the CPU
103 directly proceeds to the process of step S1129A, and performs control to send the first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129A).
. In addition, in FIG. 10-60, the process of step 052IWS1130A is as shown in FIG. 10-1.
This process is similar to that shown in 9.

FIG. 10-61 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process in Modification 1. In FIG. 10-61, the processes of steps 052IWS1120B to S1127B are similar to those shown in FIG. 10-22, but in modification 1, the determination process of step 052IWS1128B shown in FIG. 10-22 does not exist. .

In modification example 1, if the variable display of the second special symbol being executed results in a jackpot, the CPU
103 directly proceeds to the process of step S1129B, and performs control to send a second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129B)
. In addition, in FIG. 10-61, the process of step 052IWS1130B is as shown in FIG. 10-2.
This process is similar to the process shown in 2.

FIG. 10-62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed in Modification 1.

If the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol while the first special symbol is fluctuating and displaying a jackpot, whether the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is a jackpot fluctuation that is a probability variable jackpot. Regardless of whether it is a jackpot variation that normally results in a jackpot, as shown in Figure 10-62 (A), when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly changed to a missed symbol. Stop display (N of step 052IWS1127A, step 052IWS112
(See 9A).

On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the fluctuating display of the first special symbol that results in a loss or small hit, as shown in Figure 10-62 (B), Even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small winning game, the update of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the updating of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, (See step 052 IWS 1127A N).

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that results in a jackpot, whether the variable display of the second special symbol is a jackpot variation that results in a probability variable jackpot. Regardless of whether it is a jackpot fluctuation that normally results in a jackpot, as shown in Figure 10-62 (C), when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is also forcibly displayed as a missed symbol. Stop display (N of step 052IWS1127B, step 052IWS112
(See 9B).

On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the fluctuating display of the second special symbol that results in a loss or small hit, as shown in Figure 10-62 (D), Even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small winning game, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. When the small winning game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, (See N in step 052 IWS1127B).

(Modification 2)
FIG. 10-63 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in modification 2. In Figure 10-63, steps 052IWS1120A-S
The process of step 1126A is similar to those shown in FIG. 10-19, but in modification 2, the process of step 052IWS1127C is included instead of the determination process of steps 052IWS1127A and S1128A shown in FIG. 10-19. .

In the second modification, if the variable display of the first special symbol being executed results in a jackpot, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the variable display of the first special symbol being executed does not result in a jackpot, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129A). Note that in FIG. 10-63, the process of step 052IWS1130A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-19.

FIG. 10-64 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process in Modification 2. In FIG. 10-64, the processing in steps 052IWS1120B to S1126B is the same as those shown in FIG. Alternatively, step 052I
Includes processing of WS1127D.

In the second modification, if the variable display of the second special symbol being executed results in a jackpot, the process is ended as is. On the other hand, if the variable display of the second special symbol being executed does not result in a jackpot, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129B). Note that in FIG. 10-64, the processing at step 052IWS1130B is similar to the processing shown in FIG. 10-22.

FIG. 10-65 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed in Modification 2.

If the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol while the first special symbol is fluctuating and displaying a jackpot, whether the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is a jackpot fluctuation that is a probability variable jackpot. Regardless of whether the jackpot fluctuation is a normal jackpot, as shown in FIG. 10-65(A), even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continued. in particular,
During the small winning game, the updating of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the updating of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, Step 052IWS1
(See Y of 127C).

On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the fluctuating display of the first special symbol that results in a loss or small hit, as shown in Figure 10-65 (B), When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed with the missed symbol (N of step 052IWS1127C, refer to step 052IWS1129A).
.

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that results in a jackpot, whether the variable display of the second special symbol is a jackpot variation that results in a probability variable jackpot. Regardless of whether it is a jackpot variation that normally becomes a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 10-65(C), even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the second special symbol is continued. in particular,
During the small winning game, the updating of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. When the small winning game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, Step 052IWS1
(See Y in 127D).

On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that results in a loss or small hit, as shown in Figure 10-65 (D), When the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (see Step 052IWS1127D N, Step 052IWS1129B).
.

In addition, in addition to the methods shown in Modifications 1 and 2, as a control method when a small hit occurs in the fluctuation display of one special symbol while the other special symbol is fluctuating, for example, If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol that becomes When the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, the variation may be continued.

Also, for example, if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol that will result in a 10R probability variable jackpot, the second special symbol will be forced to miss and stop, while the second special symbol will become a 2R probability variable jackpot. If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed during the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol, the variation may be continued.

Also, for example, during the normal state (low probability/low base state), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuating display of the first special symbol, the fluctuating display of the second special symbol that is being executed is off and fluctuates, It may be configured such that the game is forced to stop regardless of whether it is a small hit fluctuation or a jackpot fluctuation. With such a configuration, in this example, after 50 fluctuation displays are completed in the low probability/high base state, the state will shift to the low probability/low base state (see Figure 10-29).
When the 0-time fluctuation display is finished and the transition is made to the low probability/low base state, the second retention memory is set to 1 to 4.
If there is a second pending memory that will become a jackpot among them, by forcibly stopping the game, it is possible to prevent a jackpot from occurring at an unintended timing. In particular, in a gaming machine configured to be controllable to the KT state as in this example, the normal state (low probability/
By performing a right-handed operation in a low base state), you can make a starting prize in the 2nd starting winning hole where it is easy to win a starting prize, and while making a variable display of the 2nd special symbol, you can make a starting winning in the 1st starting winning hole and win the first prize. 1. It is also possible to use a strategy method in which a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, which is effective as a preventive measure against such a strategy method.

As mentioned above, various aspects can be considered as a control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed.

(Modification 3)
In addition, in this feature section 052IW, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol and when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the same control is performed to forcibly stop and display the missed symbol. Although the case (see FIG. 10-59) is shown, different control may be used. Figure 10-
66 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process in the third modification. In addition, in modification 3, the first special symbol variation process is the same as the process shown in FIGS. 10-19. In FIG. 10-66, the processing of steps 052IWS1120B to S1125B is as shown in FIG.
Although the processing is similar to those shown in FIG. 10-22, in modification 3, the determination processing of steps 052IWS1126B to S1128B shown in FIG. 10-22 does not exist. Therefore, modification 3
Now, if the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 0
52IWS1125B), the CPU 103 immediately ends the process.

FIG. 10-67 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed in Modification 3.

As shown in FIGS. 10-67 (A) and (C), in Modification 3, during the variable display of the first special symbol that results in a loss, small hit, or probability variable jackpot, a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol. When the symbols are stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol continues even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, similar to FIGS. 10-59(A) and (C). In addition, as shown in Figures 10-67 (D) and (F), during the fluctuating display of the second special symbol that results in a miss, small hit, or probability variable jackpot, the small hit symbol stops in the fluctuating display of the first special symbol. If displayed, Figure 10-59 (D), (F)
Similarly, even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol continues.

Also, as shown in Figure 10-67(B), in Modification 3, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol, which normally results in a jackpot. 10-59(B), when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed with the winning symbol.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-67(E), in Modification 3, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol while the second special symbol, which normally results in a jackpot, is variable displayed. Unlike FIG. 10-59(E), even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued.

As shown in Figure 10-67, in Modification Example 3, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol and when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the special symbol is forced to be displayed with a missed symbol. The controls for stopping and displaying are different.

In addition, in modification 3, if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, which normally results in a jackpot, the small winning symbol is forced to miss and stops, while the normal jackpot is In the case where the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol while the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, the variable display is continued, but this is limited to such a mode. do not have. For example, on the contrary, if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol while the variable display of the first special symbol, which normally results in a jackpot, is executed, the variable display will continue, while the normal jackpot will be displayed. If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, it may be configured to be forcibly missed and stopped. Also, for example, if a small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol while the variable display of the first special symbol that results in a jackpot is being executed (regardless of whether it is a probability variable jackpot or a normal jackpot), the result will be forcibly removed. On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol that results in a jackpot (regardless of whether it is a guaranteed variable jackpot or a regular jackpot), the change will occur. The display may be configured to continue. In this way, in some form, the control to force the stop to be forced to come off may be different depending on whether the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner or the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

(Modification 4)
FIG. 10-68 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in modification 4. In Figure 10-68, steps 052IWS1120A-S
The processing of 1128A is similar to those shown in Figures 10-19.

In modification example 4, when the variable display of the first special symbol that does not result in either a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 6R probability variable jackpot (that is, a 6R normal jackpot) is being executed in step 052IWS1128A, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag to Check whether it is set (step 052IWS1131A). If the variable probability flag is not set (that is, if the probability variable state is not present), the process ends. If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if it is in a probability variation state), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129A). Note that the process of step 052IWS1130A is similar to the process shown in FIG. 10-19.

In modification 4, by executing the determination process of step 052IWS1131A, when a small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol that normally results in a jackpot, The variable display of the first special symbol is not uniformly forcibly stopped and displayed at the missed symbol, but the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed at the missed symbol when the probability is in a variable state. On the other hand, even if the first special symbol that normally results in a jackpot is being displayed in a variable manner, if the probability is not in a variable state, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 10-69 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process in Modification 4. In FIG. 10-69, the processing of steps 052IWS1120B to S1128B is similar to those shown in FIG. 10-22.

In Modification 4, in step 052IWS1128B, the first game that does not result in a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot (that is, a 2R normal jackpot)
When the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, the CPU 103 checks whether the probability variation flag is set (step 052IWS1131B). If the variable probability flag is not set (that is, if the probability variable state is not present), the process ends. If the probability change flag is set (that is, if it is in a probability change state), the CPU 103 controls the production control C.
Control is performed to send the second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the PU 120 (step 052IW
S1129B). Note that the process of step 052IWS1130B is similar to the process shown in FIG. 10-22.

In modification 4, by executing the determination process of step 052IWS1131B, when a small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that normally becomes a jackpot, The variable display of the second special symbol is not uniformly forcibly stopped and displayed at the missed symbol, but the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed at the missed symbol when the probability is in a variable state. On the other hand, even if the second special symbol that normally results in a jackpot is being displayed in a variable manner, if the probability is not in a variable state, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in modification example 4, whether or not the probability variation flag is set (whether or not it is in a probability variation state)
Although a case has been described in which control is performed to forcibly stop and display a missed symbol, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, it may be configured such that control is performed to forcibly stop and display a missed symbol depending on whether or not the special symbol time saving flag is set. Also, for example, high probability/
It may be configured such that only when the low base state (high probability flag is on, high base flag is off) is controlled to forcibly stop and display a missed symbol. In some form like that,
Any system may be used as long as it is configured to forcibly stop and display a missed symbol according to the current gaming state.

In addition, if the configuration is configured such that the control is forcibly stopped and displayed with a missed symbol only in the high probability/low base state as described above, it is possible to prevent the fluctuating display of one identification information from normally resulting in a jackpot, It is possible to prevent the second KT state (small win RUSH) from being interrupted.

As explained above, according to the feature section 052IW, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values "1" to "6") that have different degrees of advantage for the player. be. In addition, it can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and it can be controlled to a special state that is different from the advantageous state (for example, a small winning gaming state), and the special state allows the player to control the game. It is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) in which value is easily assigned. Then, in response to a game medium (eg, a game ball) passing through a specific area (eg, a special winning opening), a setting suggestion performance (eg, a small hit winning suggestion performance) can be executed.
Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance.

Specifically, in this example, the system is configured to be able to execute the small hit winning suggestion effect based on the game ball winning the special winning slot during the high probability/second KT state (small winning RUSH). However, during the small win RUSH, the frequency of winning especially in the special winning opening is high, so it is possible to draw attention to the setting suggestion performance (in this example, the suggestion performance when winning a small hit), and improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance. be able to.

In addition, in this example, a case is shown in which a setting suggestion performance (in this example, a small hit winning suggestion performance) is executed based on a game ball winning a prize in a special winning hole as a specific area, but such a mode is not applicable. Not limited to. For example, it may be configured to be able to execute a setting suggestion performance based on the winning of a game ball in the starting winning hole (winning ball device 6A, variable winning ball device 6B), general winning hole 10, or big winning hole as a specific area. good. Further, it may be configured to be able to execute a setting suggestion performance based on the entry of a game ball into an out port as a specific area. In addition, for example, the passage gate 4 may be used as a specific area.
The setting suggestion performance may be configured to be executable based on the game ball passing through gates such as 1.

Further, according to the feature section 052IW, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values "1" to "6") that have different degrees of advantage for the player. In addition, it is possible to control an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and it is possible to control a special state that is different from the advantageous state (for example, a small winning gaming state), and the special state allows the player to control the game. It is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) in which value is easily assigned. In addition, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect (for example, a prize pitch display suggestion effect), and the ease with which the setting suggestion effect is executed varies depending on the length of the period in which the special state is controlled (for example, in Figure 10-43 As shown in , when the number of prize balls reaches 456, there is a 3% probability that the prize ball number display suggestion effect A can be executed, and when the number of prize balls reaches 555, there is a 2% probability that the prize ball display will be executed. Number display suggestion performance B can be executed, and when the number of prize balls reaches 666, prize ball number display suggestion performance C can be executed with a probability of 1%, and when the number of prize balls reaches 2456, 5 % probability of displaying the number of prize balls D
When the number of prize balls reaches 2,555, it is possible to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effect E with a probability of 3%, and when the number of prize balls reaches 2,666, it is possible to execute the prize ball display suggestion effect E with a probability of 2%. Pitch count display suggestion effect F can be executed). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance.

In this example, the number of prize balls is 456,
This shows a case where the prize ball number display suggestion effect is executed at the timing when 555, 666, 2456, 2555, and 2666 balls are reached (in other words, the period until a certain game value is given). However, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, "the length of the period controlled to a special state" is the length of the period controlled to an advantageous state (in this example, a jackpot gaming state),
It may be the length of the period controlled by the special state (in this example, the small winning game state), or it may be the length of these total periods.

In addition, when using the length of the period controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) as the "length of the period controlled to a special state", the length of the period from the fanfare of the jackpot game to the ending is used. Alternatively, the length of only the round game during the jackpot game may be used. In this case, for example, it may be configured such that the longer the period from the fanfare of the jackpot game to the ending of the jackpot is, the higher the rate of the prize ball number display suggestion effect is executed.
Further, for example, in the case of a jackpot with a small number of rounds during a jackpot game, the prize ball number display suggestion performance may be executed at a higher rate than in a jackpot with a large number of rounds.

For example, the "length of the period controlled by the special state" may be the number of small hits that occur during the high probability/second KT state, or the number of variable displays executed during the high probability/second KT state. Accordingly, it may be configured to execute a prize ball number display suggestion effect. In this case, for example, the larger the number of small hits, the higher the rate of the award ball number display suggestion effect, or the greater the number of variable displays, the higher the rate of the execution of the award ball number display suggestion effect. . Also, for example, the number of prize balls display suggestion effect may be executed at a high rate at the timing when the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH) ends, and the "length of the period controlled by the special state" may vary. There are many possible ways.

Generally, in gaming machines, when the number of prize balls reaches a certain number, "XXXX OVER" will be displayed.
If you want to display something like "1000 OVER" or "
2000 OVER" is displayed in units of 1000 prize balls, and is displayed in a somewhat limited unit. On the other hand, the award ball number display suggestion performance shown in this example is performed at a different timing than usual, such as when the number of award balls reaches 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666. Since this is executed, it is possible to make the player expect a high setting while giving a sense of strangeness to the timing of occurrence of the presentation suggesting the number of prize balls, and it is possible to improve interest in the game.

Further, according to this feature section 052IW, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state). Further, when a special display result (for example, a small winning symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small winning game state). Further, the display result of the variable display is determined using a determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, a determination value for jackpot determination, a determination value for small hit determination). In addition, the judgment value includes a specific judgment value for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a display result of a variable display (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment), and a special display result as a display result of a variable display. A special judgment value (for example, a judgment value for small hit judgment) is included for determining the derivation and display of . In addition, multiple setting values with different numbers of specific judgment values (for example, setting values "1" to "6"
”). Further, the number of special judgment values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, appropriate gameplay can be achieved.

In addition, according to this feature section 052IW, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion performance in response to control to a special state (for example, a small hit occurs during the high probability/second KT state, and a game ball enters the special prize opening. (Based on this, it is possible to perform a small hit award suggestion performance and a prize pitch number display suggestion performance). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance in relation to the control to the special state.

In addition, this example shows a case where a setting suggestion performance (in this example, a small hit winning suggestion performance and a prize ball number display suggestion performance) is executed based on the game ball winning a prize in the special winning opening. , but is not limited to such embodiments. For example, the configuration may be such that the setting suggestion effect is executed at the start of a small winning game during small winning fluctuations or when the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to be in an open state. Further, for example, the configuration may be such that setting suggestion performance is executed by changing the small hit notification mode when a small hit occurs. It is sufficient if the setting suggestion effect is executed in some form in response to the control for the small hit.

Further, according to the present feature part 052IW, when controlled to be in an advantageous state and when controlled to be in a special state, the variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17) is It can be controlled into an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) in which a medium (for example, a game ball) can easily enter and an difficult-to-enter state (for example, a closed state) in which it is difficult or impossible to enter. In addition, in response to the variable means being controlled to the easy-to-enter state, a setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 and the special variable winning ball device 17 are in the open state, Based on the occurrence of winning of game balls in the winning opening or special winning opening, it is possible to perform a small hit winning suggestion performance and a prize ball number display suggestion performance). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the control of the variable means.

In addition, in this example, when executing a setting suggestion performance (in this example, a small hit winning suggestion performance and a prize ball number display suggestion performance) based on the game ball winning a prize in the big winning opening or the special winning opening. is shown, but is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when performing an opening effect when the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to the open state, a setting suggestion effect is executed by changing the presentation mode of the opening effect. It may be configured as follows. It is sufficient that the setting suggestion performance is executed in some form in response to the variable means being controlled to the easy-to-enter state.

Furthermore, according to the feature section 052IW, when the control of the gaming state is switched (for example, at the start or end of a jackpot game, from the low probability/first KT state to the normal state (low probability/low base state)
(for example, when transitioning to step 052IWS6), a setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, when transitioning to
24, the display mode (for example, display color) of the right-hand hitting display is changed). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance in relation to the switching of control of the gaming state.

In this example, "when the control of the gaming state changes" is when the setting is set at the start or end of a jackpot game, or when transitioning from the low probability/first KT state to the normal state (low probability/low base state). Although a case is shown in which the suggestive performance is configured to be executable, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the performance period when transitioning to a jackpot game during a high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH), or the transition from a jackpot game to a high base state (high probability/first KT state or low probability/first KT state) The setting suggestion performance may be configured to be executable during the current performance period. Furthermore, for example, a gaming machine configured to shift to a high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH) based on a predetermined number of fluctuating displays or a predetermined number of small wins occurring during the high base state. In the above, the setting suggestion performance may be configured to be executable during the performance period when transitioning from the high base state to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH), and there are various times when the control of the gaming state is switched. There are many possible ways.

Further, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting suggestion effect is executed by changing the display mode of the right-handed hit display or the left-handed hit display, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the setting suggestion performance may be configured to be executed by changing the performance mode of the fanfare performance at the start of the jackpot and the ending performance at the end of the jackpot, and various modes can be considered.

In addition, according to the feature section 052IW, depending on the number of times the special state is controlled during the special state, the total gaming value given by the special state during the special state, or the number of times variable display is executed during the special state, It is possible to execute setting suggestion effects with different selection ratios (for example, the number of prize balls is 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666).
In response to reaching the number of balls, prize ball number display suggestion effects A to F are executed at different selection ratios. Or, for example, depending on the number of small hits that occurred during the high probability/second KT state or the number of times the variable display was executed during the high probability/second KT state, the prize ball number display suggestion performance A may be performed at different selection ratios. ～
It may be configured to execute F. ). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance in relation to the number of times the special state is controlled, the total gaming value, or the number of times variable display is executed.

Further, according to the present feature part 052IW, as the special state, an advantageous special state (for example, the second K
T state) and a disadvantageous special state (for example, the first KT state) which is disadvantageous for the player compared to the advantageous special state. Furthermore, setting suggestion effects can be executed using different selection ratios depending on when the game medium passes through a specific area during an advantageous special state and when the game medium passes through a specific area during a disadvantageous special state (for example, Only when a small hit occurs and a game ball enters the special prize opening during the second KT state, it is possible to perform the small hit winning suggestion performance and the prize ball number display suggestion performance). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance in relation to the type of special state.

In addition, this example shows a case where the small hit winning suggestion performance and the prize ball number display suggestion performance can be executed only when a game ball enters the special winning opening during the second KT state. It is not limited to this aspect. For example, even if a game ball enters the special winning slot during the first KT state, the system is configured to be able to perform a small hit winning suggestion performance or a display suggesting the number of prize balls, and a game ball enters the special winning slot during the second KT state. It is now possible to perform a small hit winning suggestion performance or a prize ball number display suggestion performance at different rates depending on whether the game ball wins or the game ball enters the special prize opening during the 1st KT state. may be configured. Further, for example, even if an irregular game ball enters a special winning slot during a non-KT state, the system may be configured to be able to perform a small hit winning suggestion performance or a prize ball number display suggestion performance. .

In the case of the above configuration, if a winning or irregular winning occurs in the special winning opening during the 1st KT state (high base state), and if a winning occurs in the special winning opening during the 2nd KT state. In comparison, it may be configured to execute a small hit winning suggestion performance or a prize ball number display suggestion performance at a high rate, or a small hit winning suggestion performance or a prize ball number display suggestion performance at a low rate. It may be configured to run.

In addition, in this feature section 052IW, the value of the prize ball counter and the number of prize balls are displayed during jackpot games based on 10R definite variable jackpot, 6R definite variable jackpot, and 6R normal jackpot and during the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH). , and the value of the prize ball counter is not updated during jackpot games based on 2R probability variable winnings and 2R normal jackpots and during high base states (high probability/1st KT state, low probability/1st KT state) (However, (Does not reset the prize pitch counter) In addition, in principle, the prize pitch number display is hidden, and the 50 fluctuating displays are finished in the low probability/1st KT state and the system returns to the normal state (low probability/low base state). Although a case has been described in which the value of the prize ball counter is controlled to be reset when the transition occurs, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. The value of the prize ball counter may be updated even during a jackpot game based on a 2R probability variable jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot.

In addition, in this example, by having the above configuration, for example, high probability/second K
After finishing the T state (small hit RUSH) and moving to the high base state (high probability/1st KT state, low probability/1st KT state), a 10R probability variable jackpot or 2R probability variable jackpot occurs during the high base state. When the system shifts to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH) again, the value of the prize ball counter is updated while the number of prize balls during the previous small hit RUSH is inherited, and the prize ball number display is displayed. can do.

In addition, it is not limited to the manner of displaying the number of prize balls as shown in this example. (Small win RUSH) and the immediately preceding jackpot game may be regarded as one section, and the number of prize balls in that section may be totaled and the total value may be displayed. Further, for example, a setting suggestion effect that suggests the current setting value may be executed by changing the display mode (in this example, display color) of the total value.

In addition, in this feature section 052IW, the current setting value is set to "1" as a "setting suggestion effect".
” to “6”, the case is shown in which the small hit award suggestion performance and the award ball number display suggestion performance are executed in a manner that suggests any of the numbers ” to 6,” but the present invention is not limited to such a manner. For example, instead of suggesting the current setting value, the setting suggestion effect may be executed in a manner that suggests whether or not a setting change has been made to change the setting value when the gaming machine is powered on. good. In this way, the "setting suggestion effect" may be anything that suggests settings in some form.

Furthermore, according to the feature section 052IW, it is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) in parallel. , when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player, and a special display result is displayed as a display result of the variable display. When a display result (for example, a small winning symbol) is derived and displayed, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small winning game state) different from an advantageous state. In addition, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a probability variable jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), and it is better to derive and display the first specific display result. It is more advantageous for the player than if the second specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, it is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game). In addition, during the execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information that corresponds to the first specific display result, the special display result is displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Based on the derived and displayed display result of the variable display of the one identification information (for example, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the first special symbol or 2) The variable display of special symbols will continue to be executed)
. In addition, during the execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information that corresponds to the second specific display result, the special display result is displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Based on the derived and displayed, the variable display of one of the identification information is derived and displayed as a predetermined display result (for example, a missed symbol) (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a missed symbol) (Forcibly stopped and displayed). Therefore, it is possible to implement control that takes into account the degree of advantage of the display results of variable display.

Specifically, even though it has moved to the second KT state (small hit RUSH) or variable probability state, if it becomes a normal jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot) with a variable display corresponding to the remaining reservation of one of the identification information, The second KT state (small win RUSH) or variable probability state will end soon, and there is a possibility that interest in the game will decrease. On the other hand, if the fluctuation display corresponding to the remaining retention of one of the identification information is uniformly forced to stop and display the winning symbols (forced loss), even if the fluctuation display is a guaranteed variable jackpot, it will be a forced loss. As a result, the gaming value given to the player in an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) decreases, which is undesirable. Therefore, in this feature part 052IW, while the fluctuation display that usually results in a jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot) is forced to miss, the fluctuation display that results in a probability variable jackpot is extended by extending the fluctuation (suspending the measurement of the fluctuation time). This makes it possible to improve the interest in the game while suppressing a decrease in the gaming value given to the player.

In addition, in this example, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is Although a case is shown in which the process is executed continuously, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. for example,
Even if the configuration is such that the fluctuating display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is interrupted (temporarily stopped) and the fluctuating display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that was suspended is resumed after the small winning game ends. good. Any method that does not completely stop the variable display may be used.

Further, according to the present feature section 052IW, it is possible to control the game to a special state (for example, the second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) is easily awarded due to the special state. Therefore, by providing a situation in which a game value is easily awarded due to a special state, interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to this characteristic part 052IW, it is a state different from an advantageous state, and a non-specific state (
For example, it is possible to control to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (variable probability state)) that is more likely to be controlled to be an advantageous state than a low probability state (for example, a low probability state). Further, the control is performed to a specific state based on the first specific display result being derived and displayed (for example, controlled to a variable probability state after the end of a jackpot game based on a variable probability jackpot), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed. Based on this, the game is controlled to a non-specific state (for example, it is not controlled to a variable probability state after the end of a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot). Therefore, it is possible to realize control that takes into account whether or not the control is to be controlled to a specific state.

Further, according to the present characteristic part 052IW, it is a state different from an advantageous state, and a non-specific state (
For example, it is possible to control to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (variable probability state)) that is more likely to be controlled to be an advantageous state than a low probability state (for example, a low probability state). Also, when controlled in an advantageous state, a specific area (
For example, it is possible to control to a specific state based on the fact that a game medium (for example, a game ball) has passed through the V area 052IW104). When the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the game medium passes through the specific area at a higher rate when the control is in an advantageous state compared to when the second specific display result is derived and displayed. (See Figure 10-11). Therefore, it is possible to implement control that takes into account whether or not it is easy for game media to pass through a specific area.

Furthermore, according to this feature section 052IW, it is possible to derive and display the special display result regardless of whether the first identification information is displayed variably or the second identification information is variably displayed ( (See Figures 10-3 and 10-4). Further, based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second identification information during the execution of the variable display that corresponds to the second specific display result in the variable display of the first identification information, the first identification A variable display of information is derived and displayed based on a predetermined display result (see FIG. 10-67(B)). In addition, if a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information during the execution of the variable display that corresponds to the second specific display result in the variable display of the second identification information, the second identification information Control is not performed to derive and display the variable display based on the predetermined display result (see FIG. 10-67(E)). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of variable display, it is possible to implement control that takes into account whether the first identification information or the second identification information is variable display.

Further, according to the present characteristic part 052IW, it is a state different from an advantageous state, and a non-specific state (
For example, it is possible to control to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (variable probability state)) that is more likely to be controlled to be an advantageous state than a low probability state (for example, a low probability state). Further, the variable display execution means, when controlled to be in the specific state, displays a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result. During execution, based on the derivation and display of the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed as a predetermined display result (Fig. 10-68, 69). Further, when the control is in the non-specific state, while the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information corresponds to the second specific display result, When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the control to derive and display the variable display of the one identification information with the predetermined display result is not performed (see Figures 10-68 and 10-69). ). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to implement control that takes into consideration whether or not the control is in a specific state.

Further, according to the present feature part 052IW, based on the fact that the game medium (for example, a game ball) enters the first start area (for example, the first start prize opening), the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol ), and the variable display of second identification information (e.g., second special symbol) can be executed based on the game medium entering the second starting area (e.g., second starting prize opening). It is possible. Further, the variable means (for example, a special variable prize winning state) that can change between a first state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can enter and a second state (for example, a closed state) in which the game medium is difficult or impossible to enter. A ball device 17) is provided. Further, after the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information is executed, an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state)
and a special state having a lower advantage than the advantageous state (for example, a small winning game state), and when the special state is controlled, the variable means is controlled to the first state. Also,
The first starting area is provided so that the game medium that moves along a predetermined path (for example, the left area of the game area) among the movement paths on which the game medium can move can enter, and the variable means is configured to move along a specific path among the movement paths. (For example, the right area of the gaming area) is provided so that the gaming medium that moves therein can enter the area. In addition, specific notifications (for example, Fig. 10-56 (1
), right-handed notification shown in (2)) can be executed, and when the special state is controlled after the variable display of the first identification information is executed, the specific notification is not executed (for example, the right-handed notification shown in FIG. 10-56 ( 3
)reference). Therefore, it is possible to appropriately notify the promotion of firing of game media.

Specifically, as shown in this feature part 052IW, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, and the small hit type of the first special symbol is This is configured so that the winning percentage (advantage) of the special winning opening is lower than that of the small winning type on the second special symbol side, and when a small winning occurs in the fluctuating display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol is In the case where the fluctuating display of symbols is forcibly removed and stopped, if a right hit notification is executed for a small hit on the first special symbol side, which has a low winning percentage (advantage), it will effectively The player ends up hitting the game ball in vain even though it is almost impossible to expect to win a prize in the special winning hole, and it is not preferable that a disadvantageous firing promotion notification is performed. Therefore, in this example, the right hit notification is executed for the small hit on the second special symbol side, while the right hit notification is not executed for the small hit on the first special symbol side. , it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages due to wasteful play by the player, and it is possible to realize appropriate notification.

Further, according to the present characteristic part 052IW, the first holding storage means (for example, a first holding storage buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display of the first identification information as a holding memory, and the variable display of the second identification information. and a second suspension storage means (for example, a second suspension storage buffer) capable of storing information related to the storage as suspension storage. In addition, the display result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second
When a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the identification information, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and the display of the variable display of the first identification information can be controlled. The special display result (
For example, when a small winning symbol is derived and displayed, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small winning game state). Further, it is possible to control the display result of the variable display of the second identification information to a special state (for example, the KT state) in which the display result becomes a special display result more frequently. Further, based on the fact that when the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, a special display result is derived and displayed as the display result of one of the variable displays, As the display result of the other variable display, a predetermined display result (for example, a missed symbol) different from the specific display result and the special display result is derived and displayed. Therefore, the variable display can be forcibly terminated, and the suspended memory can be smoothly used.

In addition, according to this feature section 052IW, when controlled to a special state, it is possible to give a predetermined value (for example, payout 10 prize balls based on the winning of a game ball to a special prize opening), When controlled to be in an advantageous state, it is possible to give a value higher than a predetermined value (for example, 15 prize balls are paid out based on the winning of game balls in the big winning hole). In addition, as a specific notification, a first specific notification (for example, lighting of the right-handed hit indicator 26 and right-handed hit notification LED 37 shown in FIGS. 10-56 (1) and (2)) and a more visible It is possible to perform a second specific notification (for example, display of right-hand hit display 052IW007 shown in FIG. 10-56(1)) with high performance. Also, when controlled to be in an advantageous state, the first specific notification and the second specific notification are executed (
(See Figure 10-56 (1)), when controlled to a special state after the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the first specific notification is executed and the second specific notification is not executed (Figure 10-56 (2)
reference). Therefore, it is possible to realize notification corresponding to the value that can be provided.

Further, according to this feature section 052IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of special states (for example, small wins A to C). Furthermore, when the first identification information is variablely displayed and then controlled to a special state, it is more advantageous to have a higher ratio than when the second identification information is controlled to a special state after the variable display is executed. Control is performed to a special state of a low degree (for example, small win A). Further, when controlled to a special state after the variable display of the second identification information is executed, specific notification is executed (see (2) and (3) of FIG. 10-56). Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification taking into consideration the player's advantage.

Further, according to the present feature section 052IW, it is possible to perform a variable display effect (for example, a variable display of a decorative pattern) corresponding to at least the variable display of the first identification information. In addition, it is possible to perform variable display effects in a common manner when controlled by a special state and when not controlled by a special state (
For example, if the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and results in a small hit, the out-of-reach symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's ability to recognize that the special state is controlled after the variable display of the first identification information is executed. In addition, the pending memory stored in the second pending storage means can be smoothly digested.

Further, according to this feature part 052IW, a delay means for delaying the movement of the game medium (for example, a regulating piece provided on the variable winning ball device 6B) is provided upstream of the variable means in the specific route.
Equipped with. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the timing at which the control to the special state is executed after the variable display of the second identification information is executed in the normal time from being targeted. Therefore, it is possible to strengthen strategies against gaming machines.

Note that the delay means is not limited to the embodiment shown in this example. For example, a passage member is provided as a delay means on the upstream side of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 provided on the right side of the gaming area, for moving the game balls in a meandering manner from side to side. You may.

Furthermore, according to the feature section 052IW, the game control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) and the performance are performed based on information from the game control means. Effect control means to control (for example, effect control CPU 120
). Further, the game control means controls the execution of notification by the notification means (for example, the right-handed display 26) that performs predetermined notification. Moreover, the performance control means executes specific notification (for example, lighting of the right-handed hitting notification LED 37) in response to the notification by the notification means. Therefore, appropriate notification can be realized while reducing the processing load on the performance control means.

In addition, in this example, the right hit notification is executed during the jackpot game, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Although this example is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, a special variable winning ball device (large left winning hole) is provided on the left side of the gaming area, a special variable winning ball device (large right winning hole) is also provided on the right side of the gaming area, and the first special If a jackpot is achieved with the fluctuating display of symbols, the left big prize opening is opened during the jackpot game, and when a jackpot is achieved with the fluctuating display of the second special symbol, the right big prize opening is opened during the jackpot game. When applied to a gaming machine configured as such, if a jackpot is achieved with the variable display of the second special symbol, a right hit notification is executed during the jackpot game, while with the variable display of the first special symbol. In the case of a jackpot, the right hit notification may not be executed during the jackpot game. Furthermore, in the case of such a configuration, if a jackpot is achieved in the variable display of the first special symbol, a left-handed hit notification may be executed during a jackpot game. That is, the specific notification execution means may be configured to execute the specific notification when the variable means (in this example, the right large winning hole) is controlled to be in an advantageous state of the type to be controlled. With such a configuration, when a jackpot is achieved with the fluctuating display of the first special symbol, a left-handed hit notification is executed during the jackpot game, thereby preventing the player from accidentally performing a right-handed operation. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages to players.

In addition, in this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole) is provided on the right side of the gaming area, a case is shown in which the right-handed hit notification is executed even during the KT state. It is not limited to this aspect. For example, when applying to a gaming machine in which the second starting prize opening is provided on the left side of the gaming area, it is configured so that the right hit notification is not executed during the KT state, the high base state, or the time saving state. Good too.

In addition, in this example, in addition to turning on the right-handed hitting display 26 and the right-handed hitting notification LED 37 only during the jackpot game, the right-handed hitting display 052IW007 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 to notify the right-handed hitting. However, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, even in the second KT state (during small hit RUSH), when executing the first variable display after the end of the jackpot game, in addition to lighting the right-hand hit indicator 26 and the right-hand hit notification LED 37. The right-handed hit notification may be executed by displaying the right-handed hit display 052IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or, in this case, for example, during the ending period at the end of the jackpot game, the right-handed hit display 26 and the right-handed hit notification LE
In addition to the lighting of D37, a right-handed hit display 052IW0 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.
07 may be displayed to notify the user of a right-handed hit.

Furthermore, in this example, the right-handed display displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, in addition to the relatively large right-handed batting display 052IW007 as shown in FIG. 10-56 (1), a symbol display indicating right-handed batting (for example, a right-pointing triangular display) may be displayed on the image display device 5. Accordingly, the right-handed hit notification may be configured to be executable.

Moreover, the method of small hit control is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, a plurality of special variable winning ball devices are provided, and the special variable winning ball devices (special winning openings) to be opened are different depending on the type of small hit, and the variable display of the first special symbol is used to indicate the small winning. The selection ratio of the small winning type may be configured to be different depending on whether the small winning occurs or when the variable display of the second special symbol results in a small winning. In this case, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the small winning type that is opened by the special variable winning ball device with a small number of winning balls (or the small winning type in the opening mode with a low winning rate) is likely to be selected. , When performing a variable display of the second special symbol, the small winning type opened by the special variable winning ball device with a large number of winning balls (or the small winning type in the opening mode with a high winning rate) is likely to be selected. It may be configured as follows.

In addition, in this example, if a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol, a right hit notification is performed during the small hit game (see Figure 10-56 (2)), and the variable display of the first special symbol is notified. In the case where a small hit occurs, the right hit notification is not performed during the small hit game (see Figure 10-56 (3)), but in the case where a small hit occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol. It may also be configured such that there is a case where the right-handed player is not notified of a right-handed hit. For example, if a variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs in a normal state where a left-handed operation should be performed, the configuration is such that the right-handed hit notification is not performed during the small hit game. You may.

Further, according to the feature section 052IW, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the state to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player. It is. In addition, when a special display result (for example, a small winning symbol) that is different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to a special state that is different from the advantageous state (for example, a small winning game state). It is. Also, using the judgment value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the judgment value for jackpot judgment, the judgment value for small hit judgment),
Determine the display result of variable display. Further, it is possible to control a non-specific state (for example, a variable probability state) and a specific state (for example, a variable probability state) that is more likely to be controlled to be advantageous than the non-specific state.
In addition, the judgment value includes a specific judgment value for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a display result of a variable display (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment), and a special display result as a display result of a variable display. A special judgment value (for example, a judgment value for small hit judgment) for deciding to derive and display is included. In addition, multiple setting values with different numbers of specific judgment values (for example, setting value “1
” to “6”). Furthermore, the number of special judgment values is the same regardless of the set value, and is the same when the control is in a non-specific state and when the control is in a specific state (Figures 10-3 and 10-3). -4)). Therefore, appropriate gameplay can be achieved.

Specifically, if the lottery probability and type distribution other than the jackpot winning probability change depending on the setting value, the difference in the degree of advantage (difference in ball payout performance) depending on the setting value may become too noticeable, and the gambling quality may become excessively high. There is. Therefore, in this feature part 052IW, by making the number of special judgment values the same regardless of the setting value (making the small winning probability common), it is possible to prevent the difference in the degree of advantage from becoming excessively large depending on the setting value. This prevents gambling from becoming excessively high.

In addition, according to this characteristic part 052IW, variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, variable display of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol). (can be executed in parallel). Further, it is possible to control the display result of the variable display of the second identification information to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the frequency at which the display result becomes a special display result (for example, a small winning symbol) is increased. Therefore, appropriate gaming performance can be realized in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state.

Further, according to the present characteristic part 052IW, the special state is the first special state (for example, the first K
T state) and a second special state (for example, second KT state) that is more advantageous than the first special state. Therefore, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to the second special state, appropriate gaming performance can be achieved.

Further, according to this feature section 052IW, it is possible to execute a special suggestion performance (for example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance shown in FIG. 10-55) corresponding to the advantage of the special state. Therefore, by suggesting the advantage of the special state, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the feature section 052IW, a predetermined display result (for example, a losing symbol) that is different from a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) and a special display result (for example, a small winning symbol) is derived as a display result of the variable display. When the displayed variable display is executed, a setting value suggestion effect that suggests a setting value (for example, a setting value suggestion effect shown in FIG. 10-54) can be executed. Therefore, by executing the setting value suggestion performance, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Although this example shows a case where the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance and the set value suggestion performance are executed in the fluctuating display that results in a loss, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, it may be configured to execute a small win RUSH continuation suggestion performance or a set value suggestion performance during a jackpot game or a small win game, and various modes can be considered.

Further, according to this feature section 052IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). Further, the type of the special state is determined using a special type determination value (for example, a small hit type determination value) for determining the type of the special state. Furthermore, the number of special type determination values is the same regardless of the setting value (see Figure 10-6). Therefore, more appropriate gameplay can be achieved.

Specifically, in this feature part 052IW, by making the number of special type judgment values the same regardless of the setting value (making the distribution of the small hit type the same), the difference in the degree of advantage depending on the setting value becomes excessive. This prevents it from becoming too large and prevents the gambling nature from becoming excessively high.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figure 10-6, the allocation of the small hit type is the same regardless of the setting value "1" to "6". It is not limited to this aspect. For example, the determination ratio of the small winning type may be varied depending on the setting value "1" to "6", so that the degree of advantage may differ depending on the setting value.

Moreover, according to this characteristic part 052IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, 10R probability variable jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 6R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, and 2R normal jackpot). Further, the type of advantageous state is determined using an advantageous type determination value (for example, a jackpot type determination value) for determining the type of advantageous state. Furthermore, the number of advantageous type determination values is the same regardless of the setting value (see FIG. 10-5). Therefore, more appropriate gameplay can be realized.

Specifically, in this feature part 052IW, by making the number of advantageous type determination values the same regardless of the setting value (making the distribution of jackpot types the same), the difference in the degree of advantage depending on the setting value is excessively large. This prevents gambling from becoming excessively high.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figure 10-5, the allocation of the jackpot type is the same regardless of the setting value "1" to "6", but such It is not limited to the form. For example, the determination ratio of the jackpot type may be varied depending on the setting value "1" to "6", so that the advantageous degree may differ depending on the setting value.

Further, according to the feature section 052IW, the variable display mode is determined using the variable display mode determination value (for example, the variable pattern determination value) for determining the variable display mode. Further, the number of variable display mode determination values is the same regardless of the setting value (see FIG. 10-10). Therefore, more appropriate gameplay can be achieved.

Specifically, in this feature part 052IW, by making the number of variable display mode judgment values the same regardless of the setting value (making the distribution of variation patterns the same), the difference in the degree of advantage depending on the setting value is not excessive. This prevents it from becoming too large and prevents the gambling nature from becoming excessively high.

In particular, if the selection ratio of the variable pattern differs depending on the setting value, the period from one small win control to the next small win control will change, and even if the small win winning probability is the same, it is advantageous in factors other than the jackpot lottery. This is not desirable as the degree (difference in ball output performance) differs greatly, but in this feature section 052IW, by making the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern the same regardless of the setting value,
We are trying to prevent such problems from arising.

In this example, as shown in Figure 10-10, the allocation of the fluctuation pattern is the same regardless of the set value "1" to "6". It is not limited to the form. For example, by changing the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern depending on the setting value "1" to "6" and providing a difference in the fluctuation time, the fluctuation efficiency can be made different depending on the setting value. It may also be configured such that the degree of advantage varies depending on the value.

Further, according to the feature section 052IW, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the state to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player. It is. In addition, when a special display result (for example, a small winning symbol) that is different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to a special state that is different from the advantageous state (for example, a small winning game state). It is. In addition, using the judgment value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the judgment value for jackpot judgment, the judgment value for small hit judgment),
Determine the display result of variable display. In addition, the judgment value includes a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as the display result of the variable display.
, a special judgment value for deciding to derive and display a special display result as a display result of a variable display (for example, a judgment value for small hit judgment), and a specific display result and a special display result as a display result of a variable display. A predetermined judgment value for determining a predetermined display result that is different from the predetermined display result (for example, a judgment value for a deviation judgment) is included. In addition, multiple setting values with different numbers of specific judgment values (
For example, it can be set to any one of the setting values "1" to "6". Further, the number of special judgment values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Further, the predetermined judgment value is included in the judgment values corresponding to all setting values, and the number of predetermined judgment values varies depending on the setting value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value and increase the interest in the game.

Further, according to the feature section 052IW, it is possible to control a non-specific state (for example, a non-probability variable state) and a specific state (for example, a probability variable state) that is more likely to be controlled to be an advantageous state than the non-specific state.
In addition, the predetermined judgment value is included in the judgment values corresponding to the specific state of all setting values (Figure 10-3
and Figure 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value in a specific state.

Further, according to the feature part 052IW, it is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information in parallel (for example, variable display of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol). (can be executed in parallel with variable display). Further, the number of special judgment values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is greater than the number of special judgment values corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and the number of special judgment values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information during the specific state is The corresponding determination value includes a predetermined determination value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the setting value using the display result of the variable display of the second identification information in the specific state.

Further, according to the present feature section 052IW, it is possible to control the variable display of the second identification information to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the display result becomes a special display result more frequently. In addition, when a variable display is executed that is controlled to a special state and a predetermined display result (for example, a losing symbol) is derived and displayed, a setting value suggestion effect that suggests a setting value (for example, the setting shown in FIG. 10-54) is executed. Value suggestion performance) can be executed. Therefore, by executing the setting value suggestion performance, it is possible to improve interest in the game.

Further, according to the present feature section 052IW, it is possible to variably display the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and to variably display the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol). Further, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous for the player. In addition, when a special display result (for example, a small winning symbol) that is different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, a special state that is different from the advantageous state (for example, a small winning game state) is displayed.
can be controlled to Further, the display result of the variable display is determined using a determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, a determination value for jackpot determination, a determination value for small hit determination). In addition, the judgment value includes a specific judgment value for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a display result of a variable display (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment), and a special display result as a display result of a variable display. A special judgment value (for example, a judgment value for small hit judgment) is included for determining the derivation and display of . In addition, multiple setting values with different numbers of specific judgment values (for example, setting value "1")
to "6"). In addition, the number of special judgment values among the judgment values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is the same regardless of the set value (see Figure 10-4), and the number of special judgment values corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information is the same regardless of the setting value (see Figure 10-4). The number of special judgment values differs between the value and the judgment value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the monotony of the game while realizing appropriate gameplay.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148127), regarding the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of identification information with a predetermined display result (forced stoppage), the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display is determined. It was not possible to realize control that took this into consideration. Therefore, this characteristic part 052
IW also includes the characteristic configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means A1) to (means A6) for the purpose of providing a gaming machine that can realize control that takes into account the advantageous degree of the display result of the variable display. Disclosed.

(Means A1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can play games, and includes a variable display of first identification information (for example, a first special symbol) and a variable display of second identification information (for example, a second special symbol). Variable display execution means (for example, a part that executes steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) that can execute the variable display of the symbols) in parallel, and the display of the variable display As a result, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed, advantageous state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 ( Specifically, the CPU
103)) and when a special display result (for example, a small winning symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, a special state different from an advantageous state (for example, a small winning game Step S126 in the special state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) that can control the state)
to S128), and the variable display execution means is configured to perform a special display in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of the variable display of the identification information of one of the first identification information and the second identification information. Based on the derivation and display of the display result, the first control that does not derive and display the display result of the variable display of the one identification information (for example, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the A variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed), and a second control (for example, a missed symbol) that derives and displays the variable display of the identification information of one of the special symbols as a predetermined display result (for example, a missed symbol). It is possible to display and stop the symbol (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed when the symbol is off), and in the variable display of one of the identification information. Which of the first control and the second control is executed depends on the derived and displayed display results (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) Steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B are executed based on the determination results of Steps 052IWS1127A and S1127B.For example, in Modification 1, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes Steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, and S1129B based on the determination results of Steps 052IWS1127A and S1127B. , S1130B. For example, in modification 2, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B based on the determination results of steps 052IWS1130C and S1130D.) It is characterized by According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control that takes into consideration the degree of advantage of the display result of variable display.

(Means A2) In means A1, a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling a special state (for example, a second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) is easily given due to a special state; Specifically, step 052 in the CPU 103)
IWS 2208). According to such a configuration, interest in the game can be improved by providing a situation in which a game value is easily awarded due to the special state.

(Means A3) In means A1 or means A2, the specific display result includes the first specific display result (
For example, there is a variable probability jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), which are different from the advantageous state and are in an advantageous state compared to a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). Specific state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) that can be controlled to a specific state that is easy to control (for example, high probability state (variable probability state))
The specific state control means includes a part that executes step 052IWS2206 in
Control is performed to a specific state based on the first specific display result being derived and displayed (for example, controlled to a variable probability state after the end of a jackpot game based on a probability variable jackpot), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed. It may be configured to control the game to a non-specific state based on it (for example, not to control to a variable probability state after the end of a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control that takes into consideration whether or not the control is to be performed in a specific state.

(Means A4) In any one of means A1 to means A3, the specific display result includes the first
There are a specific display result (for example, a variable probability jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), which are different from the advantageous state and are compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). A specific state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically,
The specific state control means includes a part that executes step 052IWS2206 in the CPU 103), and the specific state control means controls the specific region (for example, V region 052IW1) when controlled to an advantageous state.
04) can be controlled to a specific state based on the passing of a game medium (for example, a game ball) (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)
executes steps 052IWS2404, S2405, S2204 to S2206)
, when the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the game medium passes through the specific area at a higher rate when controlled to be in an advantageous state, compared to when the second specific display result is derived and displayed. (As shown in Figure 10-11 (1), in a jackpot game based on a variable probability jackpot, the opening period of the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is long. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 10-11 (2), in a jackpot game based on a variable jackpot, the opening period of the V area opening/closing board 052IW101 is long. In the jackpot game, the opening period of the V area opening/closing board 052IW101 may be extremely short. According to such a configuration, it is possible to implement control that takes into account whether or not it is easy for game media to pass through a specific area.

(Means A5) In any one of means A1 to means A4, the specific display result includes the first
There is a specific display result (for example, a variable probability jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), and the first specific display result is derived and displayed, while the second specific display result is derived and displayed. It is more advantageous for the player (for example, the variable display execution means is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game), and the variable display execution means is capable of displaying variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information. Regardless of whether the display is executed, the special display result can be derived and displayed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS64A and S64B. -3, see Figure 10-4), during the execution of the variable display of the first identification information that corresponds to the second specific display result, derive and display the special display result in the variable display of the second identification information. Based on this, the variable display of the first identification information is derived and displayed as a predetermined display result (for example, in modification 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) When step 052IWS1129A, S1130A is executed.
)reference. ), if a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information during execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the second identification information (For example, in Modification 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) does not perform the processing of steps 052IWS1126B to S1128B. 10-66, Figure 10-6
See 7(E). ) may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of variable display, it is possible to realize control that takes into account whether the first identification information or the second identification information is variable display.

(Means A6) In any one of means A1 to means A5, the specific display result includes the first
There is a specific display result (for example, a variable probability jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), and the first specific display result is derived and displayed, while the second specific display result is derived and displayed. A state that is more advantageous to the player (for example, controlled to a variable probability state after the end of a jackpot game), is different from an advantageous state, and is compared to a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). Specific state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, C
The variable display execution means includes a portion for executing step 052IWS2206 in the PU 103), and the variable display execution means variably displays one of the first identification information and the second identification information when controlled to a specific state. While executing the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result,
Based on the derivation and display of the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed as a predetermined display result (for example, in Modification 4, the game control microcomputer 100 (Specifically, the CPU 103) performs step 052I.
When WS1131A, S1131B is Y, step 052IWS1129A, S1130
Execute A. See Figures 10-68 and 10-69. ), while being controlled to a non-specific state, during execution of a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, which corresponds to the second specific display result, When a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, control is not performed to derive and display the variable display of the one identification information with a predetermined display result (for example, in Modification 4, when the special display result is derived and displayed, microcomputer 100
(Specifically, the CPU 103)
In this case, the process does not proceed to steps 052IWS1129A and S1129B. See Figures 10-68 and 10-69. ) may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control that takes into consideration whether or not a specific state is being controlled in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148127), regarding the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of identification information with a predetermined display result (forced stoppage), the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display is determined. It was not possible to realize control that took this into account. Therefore, this characteristic part 052
For the purpose of providing a gaming machine that can realize control that takes into account the advantageous degree of the display result of the variable display, IW also includes the characteristic configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means B1) to (means B6). Disclosed.

(Means B1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can play games, and includes a variable display of first identification information (for example, a first special symbol) and a variable display of second identification information (for example, a second special symbol). Variable display execution means (for example, a part that executes steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) that can execute the variable display of the symbols) in parallel, and the display of the variable display As a result, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed, advantageous state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 ( Specifically, the CPU
103)) and when a special display result (for example, a small winning symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, a special state different from an advantageous state (for example, a small winning game Step S126 in the special state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) that can control the state)
to S128), and the variable display execution means is configured to display a special display result regardless of whether the first identification information is variable displayed or the second identification information is variable displayed. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS64A and S64B. FIG. 10-3,
See Figure 10-4. ), during execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, based on the derivation and display of the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information, the identification of the first identification information and the second identification information is performed. The first control (for example,
The update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is continued), and the variable display of the identification information of one of them is displayed in a predetermined manner. A second control that is derived and displayed based on the result (for example, a missed symbol) (for example, displays a missed symbol and stops (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed at a missed symbol) Depending on the display result derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the identification information, whether the first control or the second control is executed differs (for example, the microcomputer 100 for game control (Specifically, the CPU 103) performs step 052.
Based on the determination results of IWS1128A and S1128B, step 052IWS1129A,
Execute S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B. For example, in Modification 1, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs step 052.
Based on the determination results of IWS1127A and S1127B, step 052IWS1129A,
Execute S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B. For example, in Modification 2, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs step 052.
Step 052IWS1129A, depending on the determination result of IWS1130C, S1130D
Execute S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B. ). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control that takes into consideration the degree of advantage of the display result of variable display.

(Means B2) In means B1, a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling a special state (for example, a second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) is easily given due to a special state; Specifically, step 052 in the CPU 103)
IWS 2208). According to such a configuration, interest in the game can be improved by providing a situation in which a game value is easily awarded due to the special state.

(Means B3) In means B1 or B2, the specific display result includes the first specific display result (
For example, there is a variable probability jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), which are different from the advantageous state and are in an advantageous state compared to a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). Specific state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) that can be controlled to a specific state that is easy to control (for example, high probability state (variable probability state))
The specific state control means includes a part that executes step 052IWS2206 in
Control is performed to a specific state based on the first specific display result being derived and displayed (for example, controlled to a variable probability state after the end of a jackpot game based on a probability variable jackpot), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed. It may be configured to control the game to a non-specific state based on it (for example, not to control to a variable probability state after the end of a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control that takes into consideration whether or not the control is to be performed in a specific state.

(Means B4) In any of the means B1 to B3, the specific display result includes the first
There are a specific display result (for example, a variable probability jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), which are different from the advantageous state and are compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). A specific state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically,
The specific state control means includes a part that executes step 052IWS2206 in the CPU 103), and the specific state control means controls the specific region (for example, V region 052IW1) when controlled to an advantageous state.
04) can be controlled to a specific state based on the passing of a game medium (for example, a game ball) (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)
executes steps 052IWS2404, S2405, S2204 to S2206)
, when the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the game medium passes through the specific area at a higher rate when controlled to be in an advantageous state, compared to when the second specific display result is derived and displayed. (As shown in Figure 10-11 (1), in a jackpot game based on a variable jackpot, the opening period of the V area opening/closing board 052IW101 is long. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 10-11 (2), in a jackpot game based on a variable jackpot, the opening period of the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is long. In the jackpot game, the opening period of the V area opening/closing board 052IW101 may be extremely short. According to such a configuration, it is possible to implement control that takes into consideration whether or not it is easy for game media to pass through a specific area.

(Means B5) In any of the means B1 to B4, the specific display result includes the first
There is a specific display result (for example, a variable probability jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), and the first specific display result is derived and displayed, while the second specific display result is derived and displayed. It is more advantageous for the player than the above (for example, it is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game), and the variable display execution means is a variable display of the first identification information that corresponds to the second specific display result. During execution of the variable display, based on the derivation and display of the special display result in the variable display of the second identification information, the variable display of the first identification information is derived and displayed as a predetermined display result (for example, in Modification 3, Game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)
is N in step 052IWS1128A, step 052IWS1129A, S1
Execute 130A. See Figure 10-67(B). ), if a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information during execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the second identification information (For example, in modification 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (
Specifically, the CPU 103) does not perform steps 052IWS1126B to S1128B. See Figures 10-66 and 10-67 (E). ) may be configured as follows.
According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of variable display, it is possible to realize control that takes into account whether the first identification information or the second identification information is variable display.

(Means B6) In any of the means B1 to B5, the specific display result includes the first
There is a specific display result (for example, a variable probability jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), and the first specific display result is derived and displayed, while the second specific display result is derived and displayed. A state that is more advantageous to the player (for example, controlled to a variable probability state after the end of a jackpot game), is different from an advantageous state, and is compared to a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). Specific state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, C
The variable display execution means includes a portion for executing step 052IWS2206 in the PU 103), and the variable display execution means variably displays one of the first identification information and the second identification information when controlled to a specific state. While executing the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result,
Based on the derivation and display of the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed as a predetermined display result (for example, in Modification 4, the game control microcomputer 100 (Specifically, the CPU 103) performs step 052I.
When WS1131A, S1131B is Y, step 052IWS1129A, S1130
Execute A. See Figures 10-68 and 10-69. ), while being controlled to a non-specific state, during execution of a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, which corresponds to the second specific display result, When a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, control is not performed to derive and display the variable display of the one identification information with a predetermined display result (for example, in Modification 4, when the special display result is derived and displayed, microcomputer 100
(Specifically, the CPU 103)
In this case, the process does not proceed to steps 052IWS1129A and S1129B. See Figures 10-68 and 10-69. ) may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control that takes into consideration whether or not a specific state is being controlled in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

Note that the configuration shown in the feature section 052IW can be appropriately combined with the structure shown in the feature section 21TM to configure a gaming machine. For example, a configuration that allows the setting value shown in the feature section 21TM to be changed can be applied to this feature section 052IW, so that a setting value suggestion effect can be executed, or a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect can be executed. , Configure right -handed notes, configure the over -priced suggestion production, configuration, and a prize -winning suggestions can be executed, and a prize ball display suggestive production can be executed. You may also do so. Also, for example, by applying a configuration that allows the setting value shown in the feature section 21TM to be changed to the present feature section 052IW, a small hit may occur in the variable display of one special symbol while the variable display of the other special symbol is being executed. In this case, the variable display of one of the special symbols may be forcibly stopped and displayed at the missed symbol, or the variable display may be continued.

Furthermore, when applying the configuration shown in the feature section 021TM, the setting value may be suggested by changing the mode of the ending effect, as shown in FIG. 9-5.
In this case, for example, in the ending effect, a mode transition notification including small win RUSH and chance mode, etc., a notification to prevent forgetting to take out a card such as a prepaid card, a manufacturer logo display, etc. It is configured to suggest setting values by changing the mode transition notification, notification to prevent forgetting to remove a card, the display form of the manufacturer logo display, and the display form of images displayed at the same time. You may.

In addition, patent documents (JP 2018-033787) and patent documents (JP 2018-033787)
By combining the game machines described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 200902), it is possible to configure a setting suggestion performance in a game configured to be controllable in a special state. However, in a game configured to be controllable in a special state, simply executing the setting suggestion effect cannot sufficiently improve the interest of the game. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance, this feature section 052IW is provided with the following (means C).
Characteristic configurations of the gaming machine shown in 1) to (means C7) are also disclosed.

(Means C1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is capable of playing games, and is capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values "1" to "6") that have different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine that can be set to a value, and is capable of controlling an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, an advantageous state control means (for example, executing steps S122 to S125 in the game control microcomputer 100) A special state control means (for example, a part that executes steps S126 to S128 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling a special state (for example, a small winning game state) that is a state different from the advantageous state. , special state control means (for example, step 052I in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling a special state (for example, KT state) in which a game value is easily given depending on the special state.
a part that executes WS2208, S2210, S2211, S2212, S2213),
A setting suggestion performance execution means (for example, a small winning winning suggestion performance) that can execute a setting suggestion performance (for example, a small winning winning suggestion performance) in response to a gaming medium (for example, a game ball) passing through a specific area (for example, a special winning opening); For example, the CPU 120 for effect control is characterized by having a portion that executes 052IWS323 and S324). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance.

(Means C2) In the means C1, the advantageous state control means is capable of controlling to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display. Yes, the special state control means controls the special state (e.g., small winning game state) when a special display result (e.g., small winning symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display. Display result determining means that determines the display result of the variable display using a determination value (for example, a determination value for jackpot determination, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining the display result of the variable display. (For example, a part that executes steps 026IWS59A, S64A, S59B, and S64B in the game control microcomputer 100), and the judgment value includes a value for determining to derive and display a specific display result as a display result of a variable display. A specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) and a special judgment value (for example, a judgment value for small hit judgment) for deciding to derive and display a special display result as a display result of the variable display. multiple setting values with different numbers of specific judgment values (for example, setting values "1" to "6")
Setting means that can be set to any of the setting values (for example, a part that executes steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620 in the game control microcomputer 100)
The number of special judgment values may be the same regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). According to such a configuration, appropriate gameplay can be realized.

(Means C3) In the means C1 or C2, the setting suggestion performance execution means is capable of executing the setting suggestion performance in response to control to the special state (for example, a small hit occurs during the high probability/second KT state). Based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize in the special winning hole, it may be possible to perform a small hit winning suggestion presentation or a prize ball number display suggestion presentation. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance in connection with the control to the special state.

(Means C4) In any of the means C1 to C3, when controlled to an advantageous state or controlled to a special state, variable means (for example, special variable winning ball device 7, special variable winning ball device 7, special variable winning ball device 7, special variable winning ball device 7, special variable winning ball device 7, special variable winning ball device 7, etc. Variable means that can control the ball device 17) into an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) in which a game medium (for example, a game ball) can easily enter and an difficult-to-enter state (for example, a closed state) in which it is difficult or impossible to enter. The setting suggestion performance execution means includes a control means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps S122 to S124, S126, and S127), and the setting suggestion performance execution means responds to the variable means being controlled to the easy-to-enter state. , it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect (for example, when the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened and a game ball enters the big winning hole or the special winning hole) Based on this, it may be configured such that it is possible to execute a small hit winning suggestion presentation and a prize ball number display suggestion presentation. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance in relation to the control of the variable means.

(Means C5) In any of the means C1 to C4, the setting suggestion performance execution means is configured to perform a setting suggestion performance execution means when the control of the game state is switched (for example, at the start or end of a jackpot game, from the low probability/first KT state to the normal state (low probability/low base state)), it is configured to be able to execute a setting suggestion effect (for example, change the display mode (for example, display color) of the right-handed display in step 052 IWS624). You can leave it there. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance in relation to the switching of control of the gaming state.

(Means C6) In any of the means C1 to C5, the setting suggestion performance execution means calculates the number of times the special state is controlled during the special state, the total gaming value given by the special state during the special state, or Depending on the number of executions of the variable display during the special state, it is possible to execute setting suggestion effects with different selection ratios (for example, if the number of prize balls is 456, 555, 6
In response to reaching 66 balls, 2456 balls, 2555 balls, or 2666 balls, prize ball number display suggestion effects A to F are executed at different selection ratios. Or, for example, depending on the number of small hits that occurred during the high probability/second KT state or the number of times the variable display was executed during the high probability/second KT state, the prize ball number display suggestion performance A may be performed at different selection ratios. It may be configured to execute ~F.
) may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance in relation to the number of times the special state is controlled, the total gaming value, or the number of times variable display is executed.

(Means C7) In any of the means C1 to C6, the special state control means selects, as the special state, an advantageous special state (for example, the second KT state), which is disadvantageous to the player compared to the advantageous special state. The setting suggestion performance execution means can control the specific area when the game medium passes through the specific area during the advantageous special condition and when the game medium passes through the specific area during the disadvantageous special condition. It is possible to execute a setting suggestion performance with different selection ratios depending on when the medium passes (for example, only when the game ball hits the special prize opening due to a small hit during the second KT state, the suggestion at the time of small hit winning can be executed) It may be configured such that it is possible to perform a presentation or a presentation suggesting the number of prize pitches. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance in relation to the type of special state.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 020SH)
Next, the gaming machine related to the feature section 020SH will be explained. The gaming machine according to the feature section 020SH is a gaming machine that can play games. In this embodiment, a pachinko game machine 1 that can play games will be explained as an example.

The gaming machine according to the feature section 020SH includes a gaming state control means, a variable display execution means, a pre-start determination means, a suspension storage means, a setting means, and an effect execution means. The game state control means, variable display execution means, pre-start determination means, suspension storage means, and setting means are realized by the CPU 103 of the main board 11, for example. The performance execution means is realized, for example, by the performance control CPU 120 of the performance control board 12.

The gaming state control means controls the gaming state. The game state control means is capable of controlling an advantageous state, a special state, a special state, and a non-special state. The advantageous state is an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and is, for example, a jackpot game state. The special state is a gaming state different from the advantageous state, and is, for example, a small winning gaming state.

The special state is a state that is easily controlled by the special state, and is, for example, the second KT state. The second KT state is a gaming state where a small hit is likely to occur, and a gaming state where a game ball is likely to enter the special prize opening. The non-special state is a gaming state that is less likely to be controlled as a special state than the special state, and is, for example, the first KT state. The first KT state is a gaming state in which small wins are likely to occur, but it is difficult for game balls to enter the special prize opening. In addition, the 2nd KT
Comparing the state and the first KT state, the frequency of small hits may be the same, but the second KT state may be the same.
In the KT state, the time to be controlled by the small winning game (for example, open time, etc.) is longer, so it is easier to be controlled by the small winning game.

In the gaming machine according to feature section 020SH, the advantageous state and special state are states in which variable display (also referred to as "variable display") is not performed. Specifically, a state where variable display is not performed is a state where identification information indicating an advantageous state (jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed and the identification information is stopped and displayed, or a state where identification information indicating a special state (small jackpot symbol) is displayed. This is a state in which the winning symbol) is derived and displayed, and the identification information is stopped and displayed. For example, in a configuration in which variable display of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel, a state in which variable display is not performed means that one of the symbols (
For special symbols), the jackpot symbol or the small prize symbol is displayed in a stopped state,
This also includes the case where the variable display of the other symbol is suspended.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to the feature section 020SH, the performance execution means is in a special state (second KT
When the special state (small winning game state) is controlled in the special state), a special performance corresponding to the control of the special state can be executed. When the special state (second KT state) is controlled to the special state, it is easy for the game ball to enter the special winning hole. For this reason, the performance execution means executes, for example, a special performance that notifies the player of a small winning game.

On the other hand, when the performance execution means is controlled to a special state in a non-special state (first KT state), it is possible to execute a suggestive performance that is different from the special performance and that suggests content that is advantageous to the player. . Even if the non-special state (first KT state) is controlled to the special state, game balls hardly ever enter the special winning opening. Therefore, in the non-special state, the performance execution means does not execute the special performance.

Examples of the suggestion effects include, as will be described later, a pending change suggestion effect based on a look-ahead determination, a set value suggestion effect, a probability change notification effect, and the like. However, the suggestive presentation is not limited to these, and may be, for example, the maximum number of consecutive games today in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the total number of variable display times, the total number of prize balls, etc., or an explanation of the presentation content on the pachinko gaming machine 1. There may be. Further, the content that is advantageous to the player suggested by the suggestive effect may be any information that the player wants to know when playing the game, such as content that suggests that the player is in a disadvantageous situation ( For example, it also includes suggestions that the setting is low.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the feature section 020SH, the performance execution means can perform variable display of decorative identification information in response to variable display of identification information. The decoration identification information is, for example, a decoration pattern. Further, when the special state is controlled to the special state, the effect execution means displays a special display result as a display result of the decoration identification information. The special display result is, for example, a combination of decorative symbols indicating a small win (for example, "1, 3, 5"). Note that when the special state is controlled in the special state, the effect execution means may display a specific character indicating that the special state is controlled.

Furthermore, when the non-special state is controlled to the special state, the effect execution means displays a predetermined display result different from the special display result as a display result of the decoration identification information. The predetermined display result is, for example, a combination of decorative symbols indicating a loss. The combination of losing symbols may be randomly determined for each variable display.

Further, in the gaming machine according to characteristic part 020SH, the pre-start determination means determines whether or not the display result of the variable display, which has not yet been started, is a display result indicating that the variable display is controlled to be in an advantageous state. do. The judgments made by the pre-start judgment means are, for example, look-ahead judgments, and specifically, the judgments are the same as the various judgments made when starting variable display, and the judgments are judgments made before the various timings. be. The various determinations include, for example, a jackpot determination, a jackpot type determination, a fluctuation pattern determination, and the like.

The effect execution means is capable of executing a suggestion effect that makes a suggestion regarding the pre-start determination means. The suggestion regarding the pre-start determination means is, for example, a suggestion of a performance to be performed based on the determination result of the pre-read determination.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the feature section 020SH, the suspension storage means stores information regarding variable display as suspension storage information. The pending storage information is, for example, information that has been determined by the pre-start determining means, but may also include information that has not been determined. The performance execution means displays the suspension storage information stored in the suspension storage means as a suspension display. For example, the effect executing means suspends and displays the suspended storage information in a display mode according to the determination result by the pre-start determining means. The display mode of the hold display includes a normal display mode and a special display mode with higher expectations than the normal display mode.

Further, the effect execution means can execute an action effect that acts on the pending display in the suggestion effect. Specifically, the performance execution means is capable of executing an action performance that suggests that the display mode of the reservation display may change as a performance that suggests a change in reservation. For example, the action performance is a performance that reveals a pending display of an object that may change and performs some action on the pending display of the target. Specifically, the action effect is, for example, an effect in which an object hits the target's pending display, or an effect in which lightning strikes the target's pending display, or the like. In the gaming machine according to the feature section 020SH, there are times when the display mode of the pending display changes and times when the display mode of the pending display does not change. A performance in which the display mode of the pending display does not change after the action performance is performed is a so-called fake performance (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "false pending change suggestion performance"). Note that the suggestion performance that makes a suggestion regarding the pre-start determination means is not limited to the pending change suggestion performance. For example, if pending memory information that has been pre-read and determined to be a jackpot is stored, or if SP (which is a loss) is stored
Super) When pending memory information that has been determined to be a reach variation pattern is stored, display a background image or character image that suggests that pending memory information with a high expectation of a jackpot is stored. It can also be used as a performance.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the feature section 020SH, the setting means can set the setting value to any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting value is a plurality of values set corresponding to the winning probability of the jackpot, and is, for example, a value set to one of "1" to "6". The production execution means is a suggestive production (hereinafter referred to as "
It is possible to perform a "set value suggestion performance"). The setting value suggestion performance is a performance that allows the player to guess the setting value, for example, using a background image or a character image. Note that the setting value suggestion effect may be an effect indicating the setting value itself. In the feature section 020SH, the setting value suggestion effect is more likely to be executed when the setting value is high than when the setting value is low.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to the feature part 020SH, the non-special state includes a first non-special state;
There is a second non-special state that is more easily controlled to be advantageous than the first non-special state. The first non-special state is a non-probability variable state (low probability state), for example, a low probability/first KT state. Second
The non-special state is a variable probability state (high probability state), for example, a high probability/first KT state.
The performance execution means is capable of executing a common performance when controlled to the first non-special state and when controlled to the second non-special state. The common performance is, for example, a performance controlled by a common performance mode (“chance time mode” in the embodiment related to the feature section 020SH). The production mode is, for example, a production in which a specific production image different from normal, specific BGM, etc. is performed over one or more variable displays. The effect image here includes, for example, a background image, a character image, a reserved image, an active display image, an interface image, a decorative pattern image of a display mode, and the like.

Further, the suggestive performance is a performance that suggests that the second non-special state is controlled (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "probable variable suggestive performance"). The probability change suggesting effect is, for example, an effect that displays an image (for example, a specific background image, a specific character image, a text image, etc.) that suggests that the second non-special state is being controlled.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the feature section 020SH, the performance execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestive performances with different modes as the suggestive performances. As described above, the plurality of types of suggestion presentations include a pending change suggestion presentation, a set value suggestion presentation, a definite change suggestion presentation, and the like. Furthermore, there are multiple types of suggestion performances for each suggestion production. For example, in the case of a performance suggesting a hold change, there may be a performance that has a high possibility that the hold display will change and a performance that has a low possibility that the hold display will change.
Further, for example, in the case of a setting value suggestion effect, there are modes that suggest that a high setting is likely to be set, and modes that suggest that a low setting is likely to be set. In addition, in the case of probability-variable suggestive performance, there are modes that suggest that there is a high possibility of being controlled to a variable-probability state, and modes that suggest that the possibility of being controlled to a variable-probability state is low.

In the feature section 020SH, the degree of advantage of the content suggested to the player differs depending on which type of suggestion effect is executed. For example, in a setting value suggestion effect, if a setting value suggestion effect suggesting that a high setting is likely is performed, a setting value suggestion effect suggesting a high possibility of a low setting is executed. It is more advantageous for the player than if the In addition, for example, if a definite variable suggestion performance that suggests that there is a high possibility of being controlled in a definite variable state is performed, it also suggests that there is a low possibility of being controlled in a definite variable state. This is more advantageous for the player than when the mode probability change suggestion effect is executed.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the feature section 020SH, the variable display execution means can execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information in parallel. Characteristic part 020SH
The gaming machine according to the above includes a first variable winning means. The first variable winning means is, for example, a variable winning ball device 6B (see FIG. 1) having a second starting winning opening. The first variable winning means has a first state (open state) in which the game medium easily passes through the starting area, and a second state (open state) in which the game medium is difficult to pass through the starting area.
It is possible to change the state (closed state).

The game state control means is capable of controlling the first variable prize winning means to a predetermined state in which it is easy to change to the first state. The predetermined state is, for example, a non-special state, and specifically, a first KT state (a game state in which a small winning game in which almost no game ball wins is repeatedly executed). The performance execution means is capable of executing the suggested performance when controlled to a special state in a predetermined state.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the feature section 020SH includes a second variable winning means. The second variable winning means is, for example, a special variable winning ball device 17 (see FIG. 1) having a special winning opening for small wins. The second variable winning means can change between an easy-to-win state (open state) in which the game ball is easy to win, and a difficult-to-win state (closed state) in which it is difficult to win the game ball. The second variable winning means can change to an easy winning state in a special state (small winning game state). The performance execution means executes the suggested performance in response to the second variable winning means changing to the winning easy state. in particular,
For example, the performance execution means executes the suggested performance in accordance with the opening timing of the second variable winning means.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to feature section 020SH, when the performance execution means is controlled to a special state (small win) in a special state (for example, the second KT state), based on the fact that the gaming medium has passed through the special area, It is possible to execute a predetermined effect corresponding to the passage of the game medium through the special area. Specifically, the special area is an area (for example, the V area or the discharge area) through which the winning game ball passes through the special variable winning device 7. The game ball that has passed through the special area is detected by the second count switch 24 provided in the special winning hole. As a result, the prize balls are paid out. The predetermined performance is, for example, a performance that indicates a winning in the special variable winning device 7, or a performance that adds up the number of prize balls paid out as a result of the winning.

Further, when the performance execution means is controlled to a special state in a non-special state (for example, the first KT state), the performance execution means does not execute the predetermined performance regardless of whether or not the game medium passes through the special area. Specifically, when the non-special state is controlled to the special state, the performance execution means executes the suggested performance without executing the predetermined performance.

(About the transition of the game state and production mode after the jackpot game in the feature section 020SH)
Next, using FIG. 11-1, the transition of the gaming state after the jackpot game in the feature section 020SH and the transition of the performance mode according to the gaming state will be explained. FIG. 11-1 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the game state and production mode after the jackpot game related to the feature section 020SH. As shown in FIG. 11-1, the characteristic section 020SH is controlled to the normal mode in the normal state (low probability/low base state). Also, in the high probability/low base state, the small hit RU
Controlled to SH mode. Furthermore, in the high probability/high base state and the low probability/high base state, control is made to the chance time mode. That is, a common effect is executed in the high probability/high base state and the low probability/high base state.

Also, regarding the performance during the jackpot game, a common performance may be performed when the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variable jackpot is executed and when the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot is executed. That is, a common combination of decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed for the 6R probability-variable jackpot and the 6R normal jackpot, and a common jackpot performance may be executed during each jackpot game.
As a result, whether a jackpot game based on the 6R probability variable jackpot was executed (controlled to a high probability/high base state) or whether a jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot was executed (controlled to a low probability/high base state) It is possible to make it impossible for the player to determine whether the game is being controlled or not.

In addition, in the characteristic part 020SH, in the KT state (first KT state and second KT state), the normal jackpot determined in the jackpot type determination is not determined as a 6R normal jackpot, but is determined as a 2R normal jackpot. Therefore, when a 2R jackpot game is executed in the KT state, the player will know that the state has transitioned to the low probability/high base state or that the low probability/high base state has continued. Therefore, when a jackpot game based on the 2R normal jackpot is executed in the KT state, a performance (separately prepared jackpot performance or performance mode) that notifies the low probability/high base state may be performed.

Furthermore, if a jackpot game based on a 6R probability variable jackpot is executed in the KT state, the player will know that the state has transitioned to a high probability/high base state, or that the high probability/high base state has continued. . Therefore, when a jackpot game based on the 6R variable probability jackpot is executed in the KT state, a performance (separately prepared jackpot performance or performance mode) that notifies the high probability/high base state may be performed. In other words, the chance time mode may be controlled only when there is a so-called first hit, i.e. when there is a transition from the normal state to a high probability/high base state, or when there is a transition to a low probability/high base state. It may be limited to those cases.

In addition, in the jackpot type determination, a 6R normal jackpot may be determined without determining a 2R normal jackpot. As a result, in the KT state, by performing a common performance when a jackpot game based on 6R normal jackpot is executed and when a jackpot game based on 6R probability variable jackpot is executed, any type of jackpot game was executed (
It is possible to make it impossible for the player to discern whether the control is in a high probability/high base state or a low probability/high base state.

(Example of production mode setting process related to characteristic part 020SH)
Next, an example of the production mode setting process related to the feature section 020SH will be explained using FIG. 11-2. FIG. 11-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the production mode setting process related to the feature section 020SH. The production mode setting process is a process executed in the special figure waiting process of S173 in the production control process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 11-2, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not a jackpot start designation command has been received (step 020SHS11). If a jackpot start designation command (first jackpot start designation command or second jackpot start designation command) is received (step 020SHS11: YES), that is, if a jackpot occurs, the performance control CP
U120 determines whether it is a probability variable jackpot (step 020SHS12). If it is not a guaranteed variable jackpot (step 020SHS12: NO), that is, if it is a 2R normal jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot, the production control CPU 120 decides to control the production mode to chance time mode (step 020SHS14), Finish the series of processing. In addition, in the case of a 2R normal jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 may determine a performance mode (separately prepared performance mode) that notifies a low probability/high base state.

On the other hand, in step 020SHS12, if it is a probability variable jackpot (step 020S
HS12: NO), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a 6R probability variable jackpot (step 020SHS13). If it is a 6R definite jackpot (step 020SHS13
:YES), the performance control CPU 120 determines to control the performance mode to the chance time mode by moving to step 020SHS14. That is, the performance control CPU 120 executes a common performance (chance mode) in the case of a normal jackpot and the case of a 6R probability variable jackpot. On the other hand, if it is not a 6R definite jackpot (step 020SHS1
3: NO), the production control CPU 120 decides to control the production mode to the small hit RUSH mode (step 020SHS15), and ends the series of processing.

In step 020SHS11, if the jackpot start designation command is not received (
Step 020SHS11: NO), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a small hit start designation command has been received (Step 020SHS16). If the small hit start designation command has been received (step 020SHS16: YES), the production control CPU 12
0 ends the series of processing. On the other hand, if the small hit start designation command has not been received (step 020SHS16: NO), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed (step 020SHS17). In step 020SHS17, the performance control CPU 120 does not receive the command specifying to start the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state, and waits for the reception of the command ("in step 020SHS17").
It is determined whether or not a period of time (equivalent to a "predetermined period of time") has elapsed.

In step 020SHS17, if the predetermined period has not elapsed (step 020
SHS17: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the series of processing. If the predetermined period of time has elapsed (step 020SHS17: YES), that is, if it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is a "lose", the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance high base number counter to "0". It is determined whether or not (step 020SHS18). When the value of the production high base number counter is “0” (Step 020SHS18: YES)
, the performance control CPU 120 ends the series of processing. If the value of the performance high base number counter is not "0" (step 020SHS18: NO), the performance control CPU 120 subtracts "1" from the value of the performance high base number counter (step 020SHS19).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the value of the effect high base number counter has become "0" (step 020 SHS20). If the value of the performance high base number counter is not “0” (step 020SHS20: NO), the performance control CPU 12
0 ends the series of processing. On the other hand, when the value of the performance high base number counter becomes "0" (step 020SHS20: YES), the performance control CPU 120 decides to control the performance mode to the normal mode (step 020SHS21), and performs a series of Finish the process.

In the performance mode setting process shown in FIG. 11-2, after the jackpot game is executed by the process of steps 020SHS12 to 14, when the high probability/high base state or the low probability/high base state is controlled, the common It is controlled by chance time mode, which is a production. For this reason,
It is possible to prevent the player from being able to determine whether the state is being controlled to a high probability/high base state or to a low probability/high base state.

(Example of variable display compatible display control processing related to characteristic part 020SH)
Next, an example of the variable display compatible display (hold display and active display) control process related to the feature section 020SH will be described using FIG. 11-3. Figure 11-3 shows the characteristic part 020SH
3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display compatible display control processing according to the present invention. The variable display compatible display control process is a process executed in the advance notice setting process of S161 in the production control process process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 11-3, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not a start prize designation command has been received (step 020SHS31). If the starting winning designation command (first effective starting winning designation command or second effective starting winning designation command) is not received (step 020SHS31: NO), the production control CPU 120 ends the series of processing. If the start prize designation command has been received (step 020SHS31: YES), the initial color that is the display mode when starting the pending display is determined (step 020SHS32).
), the final color that is the final display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display and active display) is determined (step 020SHS33). In determining the initial color and determining the final color, an initial color determination table and a final color determination table, which will be described below, are used.

(Initial color determination table and final color determination table for display compatible with variable display)
FIG. 11-4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an initial color determination table and a final color determination table for variable display compatible display. In FIG. 11-4, (A) shows the initial color determination table, and (B
) indicates the final color determination table. In (A), the display mode indicates the display mode when starting the variable display compatible display (pending display). Furthermore, in (B), the display mode indicates the display mode of the variable display compatible display (active display) to be finally displayed.

In the characteristic section 020SH, the display mode of the variable display compatible display is during the execution of the variable display, when the variable display is started (so-called hold shift), during the execution of a small winning game in the chance time mode, etc. It is possible to change at the change timing. In (A) and (B), four types of display modes are shown: "red", "green", "blue", and "gray". The "gray" display mode is a normal display mode. Moreover, the display modes of "red", "green", and "blue" are special display modes different from the normal display modes.

Moreover, in (A) and (B), the fluctuation pattern indicates any of "jackpot", "SP (super) reach loss", and "other loss". Here, in the feature section 020SH, since the description will mainly focus on the performance during chance time mode (high probability/high base state or low probability/high base state), in FIG. 11-4, high probability/high base A variation pattern used in a state or a low probability/high base state (the variation patterns shown in FIGS. 10-8(E) and 10-9(H)) will be described as an example.

The "jackpot" variation pattern is, for example, the second variation pattern #13 with a variation time of 2 minutes,
It is #28. In the second variation patterns #13 and #28, a decorative pattern indicating a jackpot is stopped and displayed after SP reach. For example, the variation pattern of "SP reach loss" is that the variation time is 2
second fluctuation patterns #09, #12, #24, and #27. Second fluctuation pattern #0
In 9, #12, #24, and #27, decorative symbols indicating a loss are stopped and displayed after SP reach. The variation pattern of "other losses" is, for example, a second variation with a variation time of 1 second or 5 seconds.
These are fluctuation patterns #07, #08, #22, and #23.

In addition, the "other losses" variation patterns have a variation time of 1 second or 5 seconds, and are selected when a small hit is determined as second variation patterns #10, #11, #25, # 26
including. Second fluctuation pattern #07, #08, #22, #2 with fluctuation time of 1 second or 5 seconds
3 and the second variable patterns #10, #11, #25, and #26, the decorative pattern variable display mode does not become the SP reach mode, and the determined decorative pattern of the losing combination is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the second variation patterns #07, #08, #22, #23 and the second variation patterns #10, #11, #25, #26, where the variation time is 1 second or 5 seconds, the normal reach effect is Then, the determined decorative symbols of the losing combinations in the reach mode may be stopped and displayed.

As shown in (B), in the case of the "Jackpot" variation pattern, the final color display mode is "red".
is the most likely to be selected, followed by "green", then "blue", and "gray" the least likely to be selected. In addition, as shown in (B), in the case of the variation pattern of "SP reach loss", the final color display mode is "green" most likely to be selected, followed by "red", and then "blue". It is easy to select, and "ash" is the least likely to be selected. In addition, as shown in (B), in the case of the fluctuation pattern of "other losses",
Regarding the final color display mode, "gray" is most likely to be selected, "blue" is next most likely to be selected, "green" is next most likely to be selected, and "red" is least likely to be selected. Therefore, if the jackpot expectation degree of the display mode is expressed by an inequality sign, it becomes "red">"green">"blue">"gray".

On the other hand, as shown in (A), in the case of any variation pattern, as for the initial color display mode, "gray" is most likely to be selected, followed by "blue", and then "green". "Red" is the least likely to be selected. This makes it possible to change the display mode in stages from a display mode with low expectations to a display mode with high expectations. In addition, when comparing (A) and (B) regarding the fluctuation pattern of "other losses", (B) has a higher expected display mode ("blue" and "green")
are more likely to be selected. Thereby, even in the case of the variation pattern of "other losses", it is possible to change the display mode from a low expectation level to a display mode with a high expectation level in stages. Furthermore, in the feature section 020SH, so-called decline in presentation, in which the display mode changes to a display mode with a low level of expectation, is prevented from occurring.

Returning to FIG. 11-3, once the initial color and the final color are determined, the production control CPU 120 compares the expected degree of display mode of the determined initial color and final color, and compares the expected degree of display mode of the initial color with the final color. It is determined whether the degree of expectation of the color display mode is high (step 020SHS34). If the expectation level indicated by the final color display mode is lower than the expectation level indicated by the initial color display mode (step 020SHS34: NO), the production control CPU 120 starts variable display compatible display based on the initial color display mode. (Step 020SHS37). In addition, if the expectation level indicated by the display mode of the final color is lower than the expectation level indicated by the display mode of the initial color, if a change effect is performed to change the display mode of the variable display compatible display, the effect of the effect will be lower. Therefore, by moving to step 020SHS37, the change effect is not performed.

On the other hand, in step 020SHS34, if the expectation level indicated by the final color display mode is higher than the expectation level indicated by the initial color display mode (step 020SHS34: YES), the effect control CPU 120 changes the final color display mode. , is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 122 (step 020SHS35).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets a change flag indicating that a change performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display is performed (step 020SHS36). Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts variable display compatible display (suspended display) in the initial color display mode (step 020SHS37), and ends the series of processing.

(An example of the suggested production execution process performed by the production control CPU 120 when the small winning game state is controlled)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 11-5 and 11-6, an example of the suggestion performance execution process performed by the performance control CPU 120 when the small winning game state is controlled will be described. Figure 11-5
And FIG. 11-6 shows the production control CPU 120 when the small winning game state is controlled.
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the suggestion performance execution process performed by. Figure 11-5 and Figure 11-
The suggested effect execution process shown in FIG. 6 is a process executed in the special figure hit waiting process of S173 in the effect control process process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 11-5, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a small hit start designation command has been received (step 020SHS51). If the small hit start designation command has not been received (step 020SHS51: NO), the production control CPU 120 ends the series of processing. If a small hit start designation command is received (step 020SHS5
1: YES), it is determined whether the production mode is controlled to chance time mode (first KT state) (step 020SHS52). When the production mode is controlled to chance time mode (step 020SHS52: YES), the production control CPU 120,
Determine whether the production mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode (step 020
SHS53).

When the production mode is controlled to small hit RUSH mode (step 020SHS53
: YES), the performance control CPU 120 makes settings for executing the performance (performance that notifies the small win) according to the small hit RUSH mode (step 020SHS54), and ends the series of processing. On the other hand, when the performance mode is not controlled to the small hit RUSH mode (step 020SHS53: NO), that is, when the performance mode is controlled to the normal mode, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance (loss) according to the normal mode. Performance: Settings are made to execute (continuously displaying the decorative symbols that have been stopped and displayed in combination with a loss) (step 020SHS55), and the series of processing is completed.

In step 020SHS52, if the production mode is controlled to chance time mode (step 020SHS52: YES), the production control CPU 120 sets a change flag indicating that a change production that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display is to be performed. It is determined whether or not it is set (step 020SHS56). If the change flag is not set (step 020SHS56: NO), the production control CPU 120 executes step 020S
Move to HS63. On the other hand, if the change flag is set (step 020SHS
56: YES), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the display mode of the pending display at the present time is the final color (step 020SHS57).

If the display mode of the pending display at the moment is the final color (step 020SHS57: YE
S), the performance control CPU 120 moves to step 020SHS63. On the other hand, if the current display mode of the pending display is not the final color (step 020SHS57: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a pending change suggestion effect (step 020SHS5).
8). In determining the presence or absence of a pending change suggestion performance, a pending change suggestion performance determination table, which will be described below, is used.

FIG. 11-7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a determination table for various suggestion effects. Figure 11-7 (
A) shows a pending change suggestion effect determination table. The pending change suggestion performance determination table is a table for determining either "with pending change suggestion performance" or "without pending change suggestion performance.""With pending change suggestion performance" is (
For example, at the start of the next variable display), this indicates that a series of change effects will be performed in which the display mode of the pending display changes. "No hold change suggestion effect" indicates that hold change suggestion effect is not performed and the display mode of the hold display does not change (change effect is not performed).

In FIG. 11-7(A), the determination ratio of "with pending change suggestion effect" is higher than the determination ratio of "no pending change suggestion effect". Therefore, in the small winning game state, when the pending display has not changed to the display mode of the final color, the pending change suggestion performance is likely to be performed. Note that by performing the suspension change suggestion effect, the display mode of the pending display is changed to a display mode in which the display mode of the currently displayed pending display indicates an expectation level that is one step higher. Specifically, for example, if the current status of the pending display is "gray", it changes to "blue", and if the current status of the pending display is "blue", it changes to "green". That's it.

Note that the display mode of the pending display after the change is not limited to a display mode in which the expectation level increases by one level, but may also be a display mode in which the expectation level increases by two levels, or a display mode in which the expectation level increases by three levels. good. Specifically, the display mode that changes the display mode of the pending display may be any display mode that is less than or equal to the expected level indicated by the final color, for example, if there are multiple display modes before reaching the final color display mode. (for example, if the initial color is "gray" and the final color is "red"), one of the multiple display modes ("blue", "green", "red") is determined. You may also do so.

In addition, in the embodiment related to the feature section 020SH, whether or not to perform a change effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display, for example, when executing a variable display or a small winning game,
The decision will be made on a case-by-case basis, but it is not limited to this. For example, a scenario (story) indicating the timing for performing a change effect up to the final color may be determined in advance, and by referring to the scenario, it may be determined whether or not to perform a change effect. Moreover, by including the transition of the display mode in the scenario, by referring to the scenario, it is possible to decide whether or not to perform a change effect and the color after the change.

Returning to FIG. 11-5, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the pending change suggestion performance (step 020SHS59). When the pending change suggestion effect is not performed (step 020
SHS59: NO), the performance control CPU 120 moves to step 020SHS63. On the other hand, when performing a hold change suggestion effect (step 020SHS59: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the display mode after the change of the hold display is the final color (step 020SHS60). Specifically, in step 020SHS60, the production control CP
U120 refers to the display mode of the final color stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 122 and determines whether the display mode of the pending display after the change is the final color.

If the display mode of the pending display after the change is not the final color (step 020SHS60: NO
), the performance control CPU 120 moves to step 020SHS62. On the other hand, when the display mode of the pending display after the change is the final color (step 020SHS60: YES), the performance control CPU 120 resets the change flag (step 020SHS61). Then, the performance control CPU 120 makes settings for executing the pending change suggestion performance (step 020SHS62), and ends the series of processing. An example of the pending change suggestion performance will be described later using FIG. 11-10, but it is a series of performances including a first inciting performance, a second inciting performance, and an action performance.

In FIG. 11-6, in step 020SHS64, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a setting value suggestion effect (step 020SHS63). A setting value suggestion effect determination table, which will be described below, is used to determine whether or not to provide a setting value suggestion effect.

FIG. 11-7(B) shows a setting value suggestion effect determination table. The setting value suggestion performance determination table is a table for determining the presence or absence of setting value suggestion performance and the type of setting value suggestion performance for each setting value. In FIG. 11-7(B), the "setting value" indicates any one of "1" to "6".

In addition, the "types" of setting value suggestion effects are "odd setting suggestion" which suggests that the setting value is an odd number setting, "even setting suggestion" which suggests that the setting value is an even number setting, and "even number setting suggestion" which suggests that the setting value is an even number setting. is “4”
” and “suggestion of setting value 4 or higher”. The effect of "odd number setting suggestion" is a effect that can be determined when the setting value is an odd number (any of "1", "3", and "5"). The effect of "even number setting suggestion" is a effect that can be determined when the setting value is an even number (any of "2", "4", and "6"). The effect of "suggestion of setting value 4 or more" is that the setting value is 4 or more (
This is an effect that can be determined in the case of ``4'', ``5'', or ``6'').

In addition, the setting value suggestion effect has a different effect depending on the type, for example, a background image is different. For example, the background image is an image indicating morning in the case of the effect of "odd number setting suggestion", an image indicating noon in the case of the effect of "even number setting suggestion", and an image indicating the daytime in the case of the effect of "setting value 4 or more suggested". case,
This is an image showing night.

As shown in the setting value suggestion effect determination table, regardless of whether the ``setting value'' is from ``1'' to ``6'', ``no setting value suggestion effect'' is determined at the highest rate. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the setting value suggestion performance from being performed frequently, and it is possible to prevent the player from easily guessing the setting value.

Further, the effect of "odd number setting suggestion" is determined at a higher rate as the "setting value" increases from "1" to "3" to "5". Therefore, by performing the "odd number setting suggestion" effect, it is possible to suggest that the setting value is likely to be "5". Similarly, the effect of "even number setting suggestion" changes as the "setting value" increases to "2", "4", and "6".
determined by a high percentage. Therefore, by performing the "even number setting suggestion" effect, it is possible to suggest that the setting value is likely to be "6". Furthermore, the effect of "suggestion of set value 4 or more" is determined at a higher rate as the "set value" increases to "4", "5", and "6". Therefore, the setting value is changed to "Suggestion of setting value 4 or higher" by
6".

Returning to FIG. 11-6, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the setting value suggestion effect as a result of determining the presence or absence of the setting value suggestion effect in step 020SHS63 (step 020SHS64). When performing a setting value suggestion effect (step 020SHS64: YES)
, the performance control CPU 120 performs settings for executing the setting value suggestion performance (step 0
20SHS65), the series of processing ends. For example, the setting value suggestion performance is as follows.
As will be described later with reference to FIGS. 11-12, this is a series of effects including a first inciting effect and a second inciting effect. On the other hand, if the setting value suggestion effect is not to be performed (step 020SHS64: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there will be a probability suggestion effect (step 020SHS66). In determining the presence or absence of a probability-changing effect, a probability-changing effect determination table described below is used.

FIG. 11-7(C) shows a probability change suggestion effect determination table. The probability variable suggestion performance determination table is a table for determining the presence or absence of probability variation suggestion performance and the type of probability variation suggestion performance for each high probability state and low probability state. In Figure 11-7(C), the "probability states" are "high probability", which is a definite variable state (high probability/high base state), and "low probability", which is an indeterminate variable state (low probability/high base state). Indicates one of the following. In addition, the types of definite variable suggestion effects are ``suggesting a high possibility'' which suggests that there is a high possibility of being in a high probability state, and ``suggesting a high probability'' indicating that the possibility of being in a high probability state is lower than ``suggesting a high possibility.'' There are three types: ``Suggests a medium probability'' which suggests that the probability is high, and ``Suggests a low possibility'' which indicates that the probability of being in a high probability state is lower than ``Suggests a medium possibility.''

As shown in the probability change suggestion production determination table, the "probability state" is "high probability" and "low probability".
No matter which one is, "no definite change suggestion effect" is determined at the highest rate. This results in
It is possible to prevent the probability change suggestion performance from being performed frequently, and it is possible to prevent the player from easily guessing whether the state is being controlled to a high probability state or a low probability state. .

In addition, as shown in the definite variable suggestion performance determination table, when the "probability state" is "high probability", the percentage of "no definite variable suggestion performance" being determined is lower than when the "probability state" is "low probability". In other words, there is a high probability that one of the types of probability-variable suggestive performances is determined. As a result, the very fact that the probability change suggestion performance is performed can suggest that there is a high possibility that the state is being controlled to a high probability state.

In addition, when the "probability state" is "high probability", the performance that "suggests a high probability" is most likely to be decided, followed by the performance that "suggests a medium possibility", and the production that "suggests a small probability" is the most likely to be decided. ” is the most difficult to decide. In addition, when the "probability state" is "low probability", the performance that "suggests a small probability" is most likely to be decided, followed by the performance that "suggests a medium possibility", and the production that "suggests a high possibility" is the most likely to be decided. ” is the most difficult to decide. As a result, when the effect of "suggesting a high possibility" is performed, it is possible to suggest that there is a high possibility that the state is being controlled to a high probability state. In addition, when a "possible possibility" effect is performed, whether the state is controlled to a high probability state or not.
It is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the state is controlled to a low probability state. Furthermore, when an effect of "suggesting low probability" is performed, it is possible to suggest that there is a high possibility that the state is being controlled to a low probability state.

Returning to FIG. 11-6, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the probability change suggestion effect as a result of determining the presence or absence of the probability change suggestion effect in step 020SHS66 (step 02
0SHS67). When performing the probability change suggestion performance (step 020SHS68: YES), the performance control CPU 120 performs settings for executing the probability change suggestion performance (step 020SH
S69), the series of processing ends. For details, please refer to Figure 11-13.
This will be described later using , but this is a series of effects including a first inciting effect and a second inciting effect. on the other hand,
If the definite change suggestion effect is not performed (step 020SHS68: NO), the effect control CPU1
20 determines whether the final color of all pending memories being displayed pending is determined to be gray (
Step 020SHS69). Specifically, in step 020SHS69, the production control CPU 120 determines the final color of the pending memory being displayed by referring to the display mode of the final color of each pending memory stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 122. Determine whether everything is set to gray.

If the final color of all pending memories currently being displayed is not determined to be gray (step 020S)
HS69: NO), that is, when it is determined that at least one of the pending memories in the pending display mode is in a special display mode, the effect control CPU 120 performs the first inciting effect ((in FIG. 11-10). Make settings to execute (see C) (step 020SHS73),
Finish the series of processing. On the other hand, when all the final colors of the pending memory being displayed on hold are determined to be gray (step 020SHS69: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a false pending change suggestion effect (step 020SHS70). The fake pending change suggestion is,
This is a pending change suggestion performance that is executed even though the display mode of the pending display does not change.
As a result, this is a series of performances where the performance suggesting a pending change turns out to be a fake performance. In determining the presence or absence of the false pending change suggestion performance, a false pending change suggestion performance determination table, which will be described below, is used.

FIG. 11-7(D) shows a false hold change suggestion effect determination table. The false pending change suggestion performance determination table is a table for determining either "with false pending change suggestion performance" or "without false pending change suggestion performance". "There is a production that suggests changes with false reservations"
indicates that the display mode of the hold display does not change after the hold change suggestion effect is performed (for example, at the start of the next variable display). "No false hold change suggestion effect" indicates that hold change suggestion effect is not performed and the display mode of the hold display does not change (change effect is not performed).

The determination ratio of ``there is a performance suggesting a change with false reservations'' is higher than the determination ratio of ``no performance suggesting a change with false reservation''. Therefore, in the small winning game state, the performance can be made lively by the false hold change suggestion performance.

In addition, in the characteristic section 020SH, as a false effect, a false pending change suggestion effect is executed, but if a setting value suggestion effect is performed, a false set value suggestion effect that is not performed may be executed, or a certain change may be performed. It may also be possible to perform a false probability-variant suggestion performance that is not performed in a fake manner when the suggestion performance is performed.

Returning to FIG. 11-6, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the false hold change suggestion effect as a result of determining the presence or absence of the false hold change suggestion effect in step 020SHS70 (step 020SHS71). When performing a false pending change suggestion effect (step 020S
HS71: YES), the performance control CPU 120 makes settings for executing the false hold change suggestion performance (step 020SHS72), and ends the series of processing. Note that the false suspension change suggestion performance, which will be described in detail later using FIG. 11-11, is a series of performances including a first inciting performance, a second inciting performance, and an action performance. On the other hand, if the false hold change suggestion performance is not performed (step 020 SHS71: NO), the performance control CPU 120 performs step 020
Move to SHS74.

By the above process, during chance time mode (high probability/high base state or low probability/
In the small winning game state (high base state), the holding change suggestion performance, the setting value suggestion performance,
It becomes possible to execute any one of the probability-variable suggestion performances.

(Example of change performance execution processing of variable display compatible display performed by performance control CPU 120 during variable display)
Next, with reference to FIG. 11-8, an example of a change effect execution process of a variable display compatible display performed by the effect control CPU 120 during variable display will be described. FIG. 11-8 is a flowchart showing an example of a change effect execution process of a variable display compatible display performed by the effect control CPU 120 during variable display. The variable display compatible display change effect execution process shown in FIG. 11-8 is a process executed in the variable display start waiting process of S171 in the effect control process process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 11-8, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether a change flag indicating that a change performance is to be performed that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display is set (step 020SHS101). If the change flag is not set (step 020SH
S101: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the series of processing. On the other hand, if the change flag is set (step 020SHS101: YES), the production control CPU
120 determines whether the current display mode of the variable display compatible display is the final color (step 020SHS102).

If the current display mode of the variable display compatible display is the final color (step 020SHS1
02: YES), the performance control CPU 120 ends the series of processing. On the other hand, if the current display mode of the variable display compatible display is not the final color (step 020SHS102: NO
), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the target variable display compatible display is an active display (step 020SHS103). If the target variable display compatible display is an active display (step 020SHS103: YES), the effect control CPU 120 performs settings for forcibly executing the final color display mode for the active display (step 020SHS107). ).

Here, in step 020SHS107, the display mode of the active display changes from the current display mode to the display mode of the final color. In some cases, the display mode may change to increase the degree by two or more levels. On the other hand, if the target variable display compatible display is not the active display (step 020SH
S103: NO), it is determined whether or not to change the display mode of the pending display (step 020).
SHS104). The rate at which it is decided to change the display mode of the hold display is, for example, the rate at which the hold display is changed with a hold change suggestion performance during a small winning game (Figure 11-7 (A
), the determination ratio of the pending change suggestion effect is 70/100), but it may be a different ratio.

When the performance control CPU 120 does not change the display mode of the pending display as a result of the determination in step 020SHS104 (step 020SHS105: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the series of processing. On the other hand, when changing the display mode of the pending display (
Step 020SHS105: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the display mode after the change of the pending display is the final color (Step 020SHS106). Specifically, in step 020SHS106, the production control CPU 120 refers to the display mode of the final color stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 122, and determines whether the display mode of the pending display after the change is the final color. to judge.

If the display mode of the pending display after change is the final color (step 020SHS106: YE
S) Settings are made to execute a change effect to change the display mode of the pending display to the final color (step 020SHS107). Then, the performance control CPU 120 resets the change flag (step 020SHS108) and ends the series of processing. Step 02
In 0SHS106, if the display mode of the pending display after the change is not the final color (step 020SHS106: NO), the effect control CPU 120 performs a change effect that changes the display mode of the pending display to a display mode with one level higher expectation level. Configure settings for execution (Step 02
0SHS109), the series of processing ends.

It should be noted that a change performance that changes the display mode of the hold display during variable display and a performance that changes the display mode of the hold display accompanied by a hold change suggestion performance during a small winning game are different effects. Specifically, in the performance that changes the display mode of the hold display during the variable display, the hold change suggestion performance is not performed.

(Example of transition of production screen during small hit RUSH mode)
Next, an example of transition of the performance screen during the small win RUSH mode will be explained using FIG. 11-9. In addition, in Figure 11-9, during the small hit RUSH mode (high probability/second
This figure shows the transition of the performance screen when a small winning game is executed during the KT state. FIG. 11-9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the effect screen during the small hit RUSH mode.

FIG. 11-9 (A) shows a variable display during the small win RUSH mode. Specifically, on the image display device 5, a decorative pattern 020SH200 and a small pattern 020SH201 are variably displayed. In addition, in the small winning RUSH mode, only the small pattern 020SH201 may be displayed without displaying the decorative pattern 020SH200. In displaying the screen shown in (A), the production control CPU 120 uses the display results and variation patterns (for example, the second variation pattern #32
) and the game state, display results of variable display of decorative symbols (determined decorative symbols), variable display modes of decorative symbols, execution of various performances such as reach performance, various preview performances, performance modes according to the game state, etc. The presence or absence of the decoration, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed based on the determination result.

Further, in (A), a total prize pitch number display 020SH204 is displayed. Total prize pitch count display 0
20SH204 indicates the total number of prize balls during the consecutive games including the small hit RUSH mode. Also,(
In A), in the upper right of the display area of the image display device 5, a notification image including the characters "right-handed hit" is displayed as a notification image corresponding to right-handed hit notification. Note that this notification image may include an image showing a rightward arrow in order to encourage right-handed hitting. Furthermore, although the hold display and active display are not displayed in FIG. 11-9, they may be displayed. In the screen shown in (A), when the timing for stopping the variable display comes, the screen changes to the screen shown in (B).

FIG. 11-9 (B) shows the screen when the fluctuation is stopped when it is determined that there is a small hit during the small hit RUSH mode. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a small hit notification image 020SH202 indicating a small win, and the small symbol 020SH201 stops at the confirmed symbol "1, 3, 5" which is a combination indicating a small win game. Displayed. In displaying the screen shown in (B), the performance control CPU 120, for example, uses the decorative pattern 020SH2 from the performance control pattern.
00 (and the small pattern 020SH201) is read out, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative pattern 020SH200 should be stopped and displayed. , the final decorative pattern 020SH200, which is the display result of the decorative pattern 020SH200, is stopped and displayed. In (B), when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, the screen changes to the screen shown in (C).

(C) of FIG. 11-9 shows a screen during a small winning game in small winning determination in the small winning RUSH mode. Specifically, in the small winning game state, when a prize is won in the special prize opening, the image display device 5 displays a winning effect image 020SH203 indicating the number of prize balls (for example, 10 balls).
is displayed. In addition, the total award pitch count display 020SH204 shows a number that has been added by 10 pitches compared to (B) in FIG. 11-9.

FIG. 11-9 (D) shows the screen when the second ball enters the special winning hole during the small winning game. In the small winning game state, when the second ball enters the special winning hole, the image display device 5
In addition, a winning effect image 020SH203 (
A total of two images) are displayed. In addition, the total award pitch count display 020SH204 shows a number that has been added by 10 pitches compared to (C) of FIG. 11-9. The same applies to the third and subsequent balls, and when a prize is won in the special winning hole, the image display device 5 further displays a winning effect image 020S.
H203 is additionally displayed.

In displaying the screens shown in (C) and (D), when the production control CPU 120 receives the special winning opening winning designation command (production control command), if the second KT status flag is set (i.e. , if it is in the high probability/second KT state), 10 is added to the value of the winning ball counter and the winning effect image 020SH203 is displayed on the image display device 5. When the small winning game ends, the screen changes to the one shown in (E) and the next variable display starts.

As shown in FIG. 11-9, when it is determined to execute the small win game in the small win determination in the small win RUSH mode, the small win notification image 020SH202 and the small symbol 020SH201 indicating the small win are stopped and displayed, During the small winning game, a winning effect image 020SH203 is displayed in response to a winning in the special winning opening. That is, high probability/second KT
In this state, when the small winning game state is controlled, a small winning notification image 020SH202, a small symbol 020SH201, and a winning effect image 020SH203 corresponding to the control of the small winning gaming state are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the small winning game in the small winning RUSH mode.

(Example of transition of suggestion effect during chance time mode)
Next, an example of the suggestion effect during the chance time mode will be explained using FIGS. 11-10 to 11-13. In addition, in Figures 11-10 to 11-13, the transition of the effect screen when a small winning game is executed during chance time mode (high probability/1st KT state or low probability/1st KT state) is shown. show. Note that in the description of FIGS. 11-10 to 11-13, the same contents as those explained in FIG. 11-9 are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

(An example of the transition of the effect that changes the display mode of the pending display during chance time mode)
FIG. 11-10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the transition of the effect that changes the display mode of the hold display during the chance time mode. FIG. 11-11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a transition of a fake effect that changes the display mode of the pending display during the chance time mode. Furthermore, Figure 11-1
0 and FIGS. 11-11 (A) to (E) show similar screens.

FIGS. 11-10 and 11-11(A) show variable displays during chance time mode. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a decorative pattern 020SH200 and a small pattern 0.
20SH201 is variably displayed. Furthermore, the image display device 5 displays an active display 020SH205 and a pending display 020SH206 as displays compatible with variable display. In addition, in the chance time mode, only the small pattern 020SH201 may be displayed without displaying the decorative pattern 020SH200. In (A), the variable display compatible display is
All of them show a normal display mode (for example, "gray").

In displaying the screen shown in (A), the performance control CPU 120 uses the display results and fluctuation patterns (for example,
The variable display of decorative symbols is executed based on the second variable pattern #11 in FIG. 8 or the second variable pattern #26 in FIG. 10-9 or the game state. In addition, in displaying the variable display compatible display, the performance control CPU 120, for example, determines the display mode of the variable display compatible display based on the determination result of the pre-read preview performance, and changes the display format according to the result of the determination. Display the display compatible display. On the screen shown in (A), when the timing to stop the variable display comes, (B)
Transition to the screen.

FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-11 (B) show the screen when the fluctuation is stopped when it is determined that there is a small hit in the small hit determination during the chance time mode. Specifically, although it is determined that it is a small hit, a prize ball cannot be expected, so the decorative pattern 020SH200 and the small hit notification image 020SH202 are both displayed as a pattern indicating a combination of losses. The small hit notification image 020SH202 (Figure 11-1
(see (B) of 0) is not displayed. In (B), when the symbol confirmation period has passed, (
Transition to the screen shown in C).

FIGS. 11-10 and 11-11 (C) show the screen (inciting effect 1: step 1) during a small winning game in the chance time mode. Specifically, in the small winning game state in the chance time mode, the first inciting effect image 020SH211 suggests that there is a possibility that a suggestive effect (a pending change suggestive effect, a set value suggestive effect, and a probability change suggestive effect) is performed. is displayed. The first inciting effect image 020SH211 is, for example, an image indicating that a character appears. In addition, the decorative pattern 020SH200 is erased, and the small hit notification image 020S
H202 is a symbol indicating a losing combination and is displayed as it is. In addition, in the small winning game state in the chance time mode, there is almost no chance of winning a prize in the special winning opening. Further, even if a prize is won in the special winning hole in the small winning game state in the chance time mode, the winning effect image 020SH203 shown in FIG. 11-9(C) is not displayed.

FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-11 (D) show the screen (inciting performance 2: step 2) during the small winning game in the chance time mode. Specifically, the image display device 5 includes (C
) A second provocative effect image 0 that suggests that a suggestive effect (any one of the pending change suggestive effect, the setting value suggestive effect, and the definite change suggestive effect) is more likely to be performed than the inciting effect 1 of ).
20SH212 is displayed. The second inciting effect image 020SH212 is an image that is a development of the first inciting effect image 020SH211, and is, for example, an image in which a character moves (an image in which a character brandishes a sword).

FIGS. 11-10 and (E) of FIG. 11-11 show a pending change suggestion performance, and specifically,
A screen (action effect: step 3) during a small winning game in the chance time mode is shown. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays an action effect image 020SH213. The action effect image 020SH213 is an image developed from the second inciting effect image 020SH212, and for example, the character acts on the pending display 020SH206 (the sword acts on the pending display 020SH206).
206).

(F) in Figure 11-10 shows the change in the pending display in the chance time mode (step 4).
) is shown. Specifically, on the image display device 5, the display mode of the pending display 020SH206 changes to a highly expected display mode (for example, from "gray" to (changes to “blue”) but is displayed.
That is, as shown in (E), in the small winning game state, the effect effect image 020SH213
As a result of acting on the hold display 020SH206, in (F) of FIG. 11-10,
A series of change effects are performed in which the display mode of the hold display 020SH206 changes. In addition, in FIG. 11-10, the display mode of the pending display 020SH206 is changed when the next variable display starts after the small winning game ends, but the display mode is not limited to this, for example, when the small winning game The display mode of the pending display 020SH206 may be changed during the game (before the start of the next variable display).

On the other hand, (F) in FIG. 11-11 shows a fake effect (a false hold change suggestion effect) in which the display mode of the hold display in the chance time mode does not change. Specifically, the decorative pattern 020SH
This shows a case where the display mode of the pending display 020SH206 does not change to the display mode with high expectations even at the timing of the pending shift 020SH214 when the variable display of 200 is started. In other words, although the action effect image 020SH213 (image showing a bow and arrow) acts on the pending display 020SH206 in the small winning game state as shown in (E), in (F) of FIG. 11-11, the display mode of the pending display 020SH206 will not change (the production will not develop).

As shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-11, in the characteristic part 020SH, when it is determined to execute a small hit game in the small hit determination in the chance time mode, the decorative pattern 020SH200 and the small hit notification image 020SH202 are all stopped and displayed with symbols indicating losing combinations, and during the small winning game, it is possible to perform a pending change suggestion performance (display of action performance image 020SH213) that suggests content advantageous to the player. Also,
By using the hold change suggestion effect or the false hold change suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-11, it is possible to expect a change in the display mode of the hold display, and the control is controlled to the small winning game state during the chance time mode. It is possible to make effective use of the period of time. Therefore, interest can be improved.

In addition, in (C) of FIG. 11-11, although the first inciting effect image 020SH211 is displayed, the second inciting effect image 020SH212 shown in (D) and the effect effect image 020SH213 shown in (E) are not displayed. In some cases, Further, in (D), although the second inciting effect image 020SH212 is displayed, a false effect may be performed in which the effect effect image 020SH213 is not displayed. In addition, in (E), the effect rendering image 020S
In some cases, H213 performs a false effect that does not affect the pending display 020SH206 (for example, an effect that displays an image of a character flying in the upper left corner of the image display device 5).

In addition, a first inciting effect image 020SH211, a second inciting effect image 020SH212,
A plurality of display modes are prepared for each image (or at least one image) with the action production image 020SH213, and the pending display 020 is displayed according to these display modes.
The ease with which the display mode of the SH 206 can be changed may be different. Specifically, for each image, a display mode that is likely to be determined when the display mode of the pending display 020SH206 changes, a display mode that is likely to be determined when the display mode of the pending display 020SH206 does not change,
All you have to do is prepare. Further, the display mode of the hold display 020SH206 may change without displaying the action effect image 020SH213, that is, without performing the hold change suggestion effect.

(Example of transition of setting value suggestion effect during chance time mode)
FIGS. 11-12 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a setting value suggestion effect during the chance time mode. Note that (A) to (D) in Figure 11-12 are similar to (A) to (D) in Figure 11-10 and b in Figure 11-10.
Since it is the same as A) to (D), the explanation will be omitted.

(E) of FIG. 11-12 shows a screen (setting value suggestion effect) during a small winning game in the chance time mode. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a setting value suggestion image 020SH220 whose background image indicates night. The night background image in the setting value suggestion image 020SH220 is an image that suggests that the setting value is 4 or more (see (B) in Figure 11-7).
.

(F) in FIG. 11-12 shows that the small winning game has ended and the next variable display is being performed. In addition, in the setting value suggestion effect shown in FIG. 11-12, the setting value suggestion image 020SH220 is displayed within the period when the small winning game state is controlled, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the following Even after the variable display starts, the setting value suggestion image 020SH220 may be continuously displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-12, in the characteristic part 020SH, when it is determined to execute a small winning game in the small winning determination in the chance time mode, the decorative symbol 020SH2
00 and the small hit notification image 020SH202 are both stopped and displayed with a pattern indicating a losing combination, and the setting value suggestion image 020SH220 is displayed during the small winning game. That is, in the characteristic part 020SH, when the small winning game state is controlled in the high probability/first KT state or the low probability/first KT state, a setting value suggestion effect (setting value suggestion) that suggests contents advantageous to the player is provided. display of image 020SH220). Figure 11
By the setting value suggestion performance shown in -12, it is possible to effectively utilize the period in which the game is controlled to a small winning game state in the chance time mode, and the interest can be improved.

Note that in the setting value suggestion performance, a fake performance may be performed similarly to the pending change suggestion performance. Specifically, although the first inciting effect image 020SH211 is displayed in (C) of FIG. 11-12, a false effect may be performed in which the second inciting effect image 020SH212 shown in (D) is not displayed. Further, in (D), although the second inciting effect image 020SH212 is displayed, a false effect may be performed in which the setting value suggestion image 020SH220 is not displayed.

In addition, a first inciting effect image 020SH211, a second inciting effect image 020SH212,
A plurality of display modes are prepared for each image (or at least one of the images) with the action effect image 020SH213, and the ease with which the setting value suggestion effect is executed differs depending on these display modes. You can leave it there. Specifically, for each image, a display mode that is likely to be determined when the setting value suggestion effect is executed and a display mode that is likely to be determined when the setting value suggestion effect is not executed may be prepared.

(Example of transition of probability change suggestion performance during chance time mode)
FIGS. 11-13 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of probability change suggestion performance during the chance time mode. Note that (A) to (D) in Figure 11-13 are similar to (A) in Figure 11-10 and b in Figure 11-10.
) to (D), so the explanation will be omitted. (E) of FIG. 11-13 shows a screen during a small winning game in the chance time mode (probability change suggestion effect). Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a probability change suggestion image 020SH230 in which three characters appear. The probability variation suggestion image 020SH230 in which three characters appear is an image indicating that there is a high possibility that the state is controlled to a high probability state (see (C) in FIG. 11-7).

(F) in FIG. 11-13 shows that the small winning game has ended and the next variable display is being performed. In addition, in the probability change suggestion effect shown in FIG. 11-13, the probability change suggestion image 020SH230 is displayed within the period when the small winning game state is controlled, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the following variable display Even after the start of the process, the probability change suggestion image 020SH230 may be continuously displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-13, in the characteristic part 020SH, when it is determined to execute a small winning game in the small winning determination in the chance time mode, the decorative symbol 020SH2
00 and the small hit notification image 020SH202 are both stopped and displayed with a pattern indicating a losing combination, and the probability variable suggestion image 020SH230 is displayed during the small winning game.
That is, in the characteristic section 020SH, when controlled to a small winning gaming state in the high probability/first KT state or the low probability/first KT state, a certain change effect (probability change suggestion image 020SH230 display) can be executed. The probability change suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 11-13 makes it possible to effectively utilize the period in which the game is controlled to a small winning game state in the chance time mode, thereby increasing the interest.

It should be noted that in the definite change suggestion performance, a fake performance may be performed in the same way as the pending change suggestion performance. Specifically, although the first inciting effect image 020SH211 is displayed in (C) of FIG. 11-13, a false effect may be performed in which the second inciting effect image 020SH212 shown in (D) is not displayed. Further, in (D), although the second inciting effect image 020SH212 is displayed, a false effect may be performed in which the probability change suggestion image 020SH230 is not displayed.

In addition, a first inciting effect image 020SH211, a second inciting effect image 020SH212,
A plurality of display modes are prepared for each image (or at least one of the images) with the effect effect image 020SH213, and the ease with which the probability change effect is executed differs depending on these display modes. You can. Specifically, for each image, a display mode that is likely to be determined when the probability variable suggestion effect is executed and a display mode that is likely to be determined when the probability variation suggestion effect is not executed may be prepared.

Each of the suggestive performances shown in FIGS. 11-10 to 11-13 can improve the interest in the small winning game state in the chance time mode. Specifically, in the chance time mode where a variable display of 1.5 seconds is executed continuously, even if a small winning game is executed for more than 1.8 seconds, the small winning game is executed. This can be made difficult for the player to recognize, and the game can be made to appear to be progressing smoothly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable that the game may have stopped during the small winning game in the first KT state, , a pleasant game).

(About the small hit release timing and the execution timing of various suggestion effects)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 11-14, the opening timing of the special variable winning ball device 17 in the small winning game and the execution timing of various suggestion performances will be explained. FIGS. 11-14 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of small hit opening timing and execution timing of various suggestion performances. Figure 11
-14 shows a variable display of a special symbol (second special symbol) determined to be a small win in the small win determination, and a small win game (opening of the special variable winning ball device 17) to be executed thereafter.

First, the variable display of special symbols and the small winning game will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 11-14, in the first KT state, variable display of the second special symbol is mainly performed. The variable display time (fluctuating time) of the second special symbol in the first KT state is 1 second if the second pending memory number is "1 or more" (second fluctuation pattern #11 in Figure 10-8 or -9 (see second fluctuation pattern #26 in Figure 10-9), and if the second retention memory number is "0", it is 5 seconds (see second fluctuation pattern #10 in Figure 10-8 or second fluctuation pattern #10 in Figure 10-9). (See variation pattern #25). When the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, the second special symbol (for example, a small winning symbol) is displayed in a determined manner until a symbol determination period (also referred to as a symbol determination period) of 0.5 seconds has elapsed.

Then, when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, the small winning game state is controlled. The small winning game state includes a fanfare period of 0.1 seconds, a predetermined opening period, and a small winning ending period. Specifically, in the small winning game state, after the small winning fanfare period of 0.1 seconds has elapsed, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened, and when a predetermined opening period (for example, 1.8 seconds) has elapsed,
The special variable winning ball device 17 is closed and the period shifts to the small winning ending period. When the small winning ending period has elapsed, the next variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Next, the execution timing of the pending change suggestion performance (including the fake pending change suggestion performance) will be explained. As shown in FIG. 11-14, when the small winning fanfare period has passed and the special variable winning ball device 17 is released, the first inciting effect (first inciting effect image 0 in FIG. 11-10
20SH211 display), second inciting effect (display of second inciting effect image 020SH212),
And an action effect (display of an image in which the action effect image 020SH213 contacts the hold display 020SH206) is performed. When changing the hold display (in the case of hold change suggestion performance), the hold display changes at the timing when the next variable display of the second special symbol is executed (hold shift timing). On the other hand, in the case of the fake pending change suggestion performance, the pending display does not change at the timing when the next variable display of the second special symbol is executed (timing of the pending shift), and the display mode of the current pending display is maintained.

In this way, in the feature section 020SH, an effect is performed in which the display mode of the pending display is changed between the small winning game and the variable display. This makes it difficult for the player to discern the transition from the small winning game state to the state where the variable display is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear that the game is progressing smoothly, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game.

Next, the setting value suggestion performance and the probability change suggestion performance will be explained. In the description of FIGS. 11-14, the setting value suggestion performance and the probability change suggestion performance are referred to as "setting value suggestion performance etc." Figure 11
-14, when the small hit fanfare period has passed and the special variable winning ball device 17 is released, the first promotion effect (for example, the first promotion effect image 020S in FIG. 11-12)
H211), a second inciting effect (displaying a second inciting effect image 020SH212), a setting value suggestion effect, etc. (displaying a setting value suggestion image 020SH220, etc.) are performed. The setting value suggestion performance and the like are executed until the closing timing of the special variable winning ball device 17, for example.

In this way, in the characteristic section 020SH, the setting value suggestion performance and the like are performed in response to the opening timing of the special variable winning ball device 17. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult to draw attention to the release of the special variable winning ball device 17, and to draw attention to the setting value suggestion performance and the like. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice a small winning game in which almost no game ball wins, and it is possible to make the game appear to be progressing smoothly. Furthermore, the period during which the small winning game state is controlled can be effectively utilized by setting value suggestion effects, etc., and the interest during the small winning game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the feature section 020SH, each suggestion effect is started in synchronization with the timing of the start of opening of the special variable winning ball device 17. Therefore, since each suggestion effect can be started immediately after transitioning to the small winning game state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the small winning game is being executed. It is possible to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable.

Note that the timing at which each suggestion effect is executed may be any timing that corresponds to the opening timing of the special variable winning ball device 17, and specifically, any timing that includes the opening of the special variable winning ball device 17. good. For example, the start timing of each suggestion performance is not limited to the timing of the start of opening of the special variable winning ball device 17, but may be the timing during the small win fanfare period. Thereby, these performances can be started at the earliest timing after shifting to the small winning game state, so it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to recognize that the small winning game is being executed.

Also, the start timing of each suggestion production may be during the symbol confirmation period,
The timing may be set during variable display of the second special symbol. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish the transition from the state where the variable display is executed to the small winning game state. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear that the game is progressing smoothly, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game.

Further, the end timing of the setting value suggestion performance etc. is not limited to the closing timing of the special variable winning ball device 17, but may be the timing during the small winning ending period. Thereby, these performances can be executed until the end of the small winning gaming state, so that the period during which the small winning gaming state is controlled can be utilized more effectively.

Moreover, the end timing of each suggestion performance may be the timing during the variable display of the next second special symbol. This makes it difficult for the player to discern the transition from the small winning game state to the state where variable display is performed. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear that the game is progressing smoothly, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game.

As explained above, in the embodiment described above, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Here, I would like to add some specifics about improving interest. In the first KT state, for example, shortening variations (1 second variations) and small winning games (decorative symbols stop when losing symbols) are repeatedly executed. If no special performance is performed in the small win game state, the progress of the game appears to be stopped in the small win game state. For this reason, the game does not appear to proceed quickly and easily in the first KT state (high base state), and the player may feel uncomfortable. Further, there is a possibility that the time during which the game is controlled to a small winning gaming state in the first KT state becomes wasted time for the player.

As explained above, in the embodiment related to the feature part 020SH, when the small winning gaming state is controlled in the first KT state (high probability/first KT state or low probability/first KT state), it is advantageous for the player. It is possible to execute a suggestive performance that suggests the content (for example, any one of the pending change suggestive performance, the set value suggestive performance, and the probability change suggestive performance). Therefore, even if the small winning game is repeatedly executed in the 1st KT state where most game balls do not win, it is possible to give the player the impression that the game is progressing smoothly.
It is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game by playing the small winning game in the state. Further, since the period during which the small winning game is executed in the first KT state can be effectively utilized, it is possible to prevent the period from being wasted time for the player.

In addition, when the small winning game state is controlled in the second KT state, the effect corresponding to the control of the small winning gaming state (for example, the display of the small winning notification image 020SH202 and the winning effect image 020SH203 shown in FIG. 11-9) is displayed. Made it executable. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest during the small winning game in the first KT state and the second KT state.

(Modification example 1 of characteristic part 020SH)
Next, a first modification of the characteristic portion 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature section 020SH, a configuration in which the feature section 020SH is applied to a so-called one-type pachinko game machine 1 has been described. Instead of such a configuration, it is also possible to apply the feature section 020SH to a so-called mixed type pachinko game machine. An example of a specification of a pachinko game machine of one type and two types will be described below.

In a pachinko game machine of one type and two types, in a normal state (non-special state: low base state), a variable display of the first special symbol (first special symbol game) is mainly executed by left-handed hitting.
When the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, a jackpot game is executed.

In the determination based on winning in the first starting winning hole, the small winning probability is constant regardless of the setting value, and is, for example, 6298/65536 (about 1/100). Although the details will be described later, even if a small winning game is executed based on winning in the first starting winning hole, the game ball passes through a specific area (V area) in the special variable winning ball device 17. Things have become almost impossible to expect.

In addition, in the determination based on the winning in the first starting winning opening, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value. Here, an example of the jackpot probability for each set value based on winnings in the first starting winning hole is shown below.

If the setting value is "1", 329/65536 (approximately 1/199).
When the setting value is "2", 346/65536 (approximately 1/189).
If the setting value is "3", 366/65536 (approximately 1/179).
If the setting value is "4", 387/65536 (approximately 1/169).
When the setting value is "5", 412/65536 (approximately 1/159).
If the setting value is "6", 439/65536 (approximately 1/149).

In the judgment based on the winning in the first starting prize opening, the small winning probability is constant, so by varying the probability of losing according to the set value "1" to "6", the set value "1" to " 6
You can set the jackpot probability according to ``.

For example, in the first special game, when it is determined that a jackpot game is to be executed, the system shifts to a special state (for example, a time-saving state) after the jackpot game is executed according to the jackpot type (with a predetermined probability). . Note that when a jackpot game is executed, depending on the type of jackpot, the game may return to the normal state, for example, without shifting to the special state.

In the special state, for example, the game (mainly the second special figure game) is played by right-handed firing operation aiming at the gate and the second starting prize opening located on the right side of the game area. The special state is a high base state, and specifically, the following controls (1) to (4) are performed.
(1) Control is performed to make the probability of winning a normal figure higher than in the normal state.
(2) Control is performed to make the opening time of the normal electric accessory longer than in the normal state.
(3) Control is performed to shorten the fluctuation time of the Fuzu game compared to the normal state.
(4) Control is performed to shorten the variation time of the special symbol compared to the normal state.
This makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting prize opening, increasing the frequency with which the second special figure game is executed. The special state is controlled, for example, until variable display is performed a predetermined number of times.

On the other hand, in the normal state, the above controls (1) to (4) are not performed. Even if the player hits right in the normal state, the probability of hitting a normal figure is low, the opening time of the normal electric accessory is short, and the fluctuation time of the normal figure game is long, so the second starting winning hole To win a prize,
I can hardly expect it.

In addition, in the determination based on winning in the second starting winning opening, the small winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, and is, for example, 62986/65536 (approximately 96/100). In addition, the small winning probability in the determination based on winning in the second starting winning hole and the small winning probability in determining based on winning in the first starting winning opening are different.

In addition, in the determination based on the winning in the second starting winning opening, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value. Here, an example of the jackpot probability for each set value based on the winning in the second starting winning opening is shown below.

If the setting value is "1", 329/65536 (approximately 1/199).
When the setting value is "2", 346/65536 (approximately 1/189).
If the setting value is "3", 366/65536 (approximately 1/179).
If the setting value is "4", 387/65536 (approximately 1/169).
When the setting value is "5", 412/65536 (approximately 1/159).
If the setting value is "6", 439/65536 (approximately 1/149).

In the judgment based on winnings in the second starting prize opening, the small winning probability is constant, so by varying the probability of losing according to the set values "1" to "6", the set values "1" to " 6
You can set the jackpot probability according to ``.

As mentioned above, in the judgment based on winning in the second starting prize opening, the small winning probability is 96/
100, small winning symbols are likely to be derived and displayed in the variable display in the special state (mainly in the second special pattern game). In the small winning game state, the special variable winning ball device 17 located on the right side of the gaming area opens, and the game ball enters the special variable winning ball device 17 (small winning attacker).
When the ball passes through a specific area (so-called V area) provided in the special variable winning ball device 17, a jackpot game is executed. In addition, in the small winning game state in the special state, the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is longer than in the normal state, so it is easier to win in the special variable winning ball device 17, and it is easier to pass through the V area. It has become.

In the special state (mainly the second special figure game), if the game ball passes through the V area under control of the small winning game state until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, the special state ends, A jackpot game is executed. Also, in a special state, if it is determined that a jackpot game will be executed before a predetermined number of variable displays are executed (even if a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed)
, Similarly, the special state is ended and the jackpot game is executed. Then, when the jackpot game is executed, the special state is controlled again depending on the jackpot type (with a predetermined probability). in this way,
By executing the jackpot game in the special state (by winning consecutive games), the player can expect many prize balls.

On the other hand, in the special state, even if a jackpot game is executed before the predetermined number of variable displays are executed, depending on the type of jackpot, the game may not be controlled to the special state and may, for example, shift to the normal state. In some cases. Further, when variable display is executed a predetermined number of times in the special state, the state also shifts to the normal state. Specifically, in the special state, if the jackpot game is not executed before the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, although the game ball is controlled to the small win game state, the game ball does not win the special variable prize If the ball does not enter the ball device 17, does not pass through the V area, or if the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed), the state shifts to the normal state. This ends the special state control and ends the consecutive games. In addition, even in the pachinko game machine of the one type and two types combination type, for example, special symbols are not variablely displayed in the jackpot game state and the small win game state.

In such a pachinko game machine of one type and two types, when the special state is controlled to the small winning game state, the special effect (for example, "small winning attacker") corresponding to the control of the small winning gaming state (special state) is (Display the image "Aim for the special variable winning ball device 17!"). This allows the player to expect a big win in the small win game in the special state.

Further, in the variable display of the first special symbol game in the normal state (non-special state: low base state), small winning symbols may be derived and displayed (small winning probability: approximately 1/100). In the small winning game in the normal state, the game is played by hitting to the left, and since the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged in the right area, it is difficult to win in the special variable winning ball device 17. . Even if you hit right, it is difficult to enter the special variable winning ball device 17 because the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is short, and even if you hit the ball in the special variable winning ball device 17, the V Since the configuration makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the area, it is almost impossible to expect the game ball to pass through the V area.

In modification example 1, in such a type of pachinko game machine, the normal state (
When the small winning game state (special state) is controlled in the non-special state), the characteristic part 020S
It may also be possible to execute the suggestion performance related to H. The suggestion performance is a performance that suggests content that is advantageous to the player, and is, for example, a suggestion performance based on the determination result of a pre-reading determination, a setting value suggestion performance, or the like. Note that the suggestion performance based on the judgment result of the look-ahead judgment is, for example, a reservation change suggestion performance, but is not limited to this, but is also a production that suggests that reservation memory information with a high expectation of a jackpot is stored (for example, (Display of highly anticipated background images, character images, etc.) may also be acceptable.

Note that even in the special state, if the first pending memory is stored, small winning symbols may be derived and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol game. In this case, if the configuration is such that it is difficult to pass through the V area in a small winning game, it may be possible to execute the suggestion performance related to the feature section 020SH when controlled by the small winning game.

According to modification example 1, even if a small winning game is executed in the normal state in which almost no game ball wins, it is possible to give the player the impression that the game is progressing smoothly. It is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game due to the winning game. Therefore, according to the first modification, it is possible to improve the interest during the small winning game in the normal state in the Pachinko game machine of the one type and two types mixed type. It should be noted that the pachinko game machine of one type and two types is not limited to the above-mentioned specifications, but may have other specifications as long as a small winning game is executed in a normal state in which game balls hardly win.

Note that the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the characteristic part 020SH can be expressed as follows. A gaming machine capable of playing games (one type and two types of pachinko gaming machines), which includes a gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state, and a variable display of identification information (for example, special symbols). The game state control means includes a variable display execution means for deriving and displaying a result, and an effect execution means, and the game state control means is configured to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player;
A special state (for example, small winning game state) different from the advantageous state and a non-special state (for example,
normal state), and a special state (characteristic part 0) that is more easily controlled by the special state than the non-special state.
A special state according to modification 1 of 20SH: for example, a time saving state), the advantageous state and the special state are states in which the variable display is not performed, and the effect execution means is a state in which the variable display is not performed. When controlled to the special state in the special state, a special effect corresponding to the control of the special state (for example, displaying an image of "Aim for the small hit attacker (special variable winning ball device 17)!") can be executed. When the non-special state is controlled to the special state, a suggestive performance that is different from the special performance and that suggests content advantageous to the player (for example, a suggestive performance based on the result of a pre-reading determination) , setting value suggestion effects, etc.).

(Modification example 2 of characteristic part 020SH)
Next, a second modification of the characteristic portion 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the characteristic part 020SH, the configuration is explained in which the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened once at the time of a small hit. In the second modification, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the special variable winning ball device 17 may be opened multiple times depending on the type of small hit.

Specifically, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 17 is the small hit C with the longest opening time.
In the case of 1.8 seconds x 1 time (see Figure 10-14), it is not limited to this. Regarding the opening pattern, for example, when the opening time is set to be the longest, the total opening time may be within 1.8 seconds, and may be 0.9 seconds x 2 times or 0.2 seconds x 9 times. Further, it may be possible to execute a content suggesting effect according to the opening pattern. Specifically, for example, a suggestive effect corresponding to opening twice for 0.9 seconds may be executed. In this way, even if the opening pattern is opened multiple times, the special variable winning ball device 17
It is possible to make it difficult to draw attention to the opening of the screen and draw attention to each suggestive effect.

(Modification example 3 of characteristic part 020SH)
Next, a third modification of the characteristic portion 020SH will be described. In the embodiment related to the feature section 020SH described above, a configuration has been described in which the suggestive effect can be executed in the first KT state. In modification 3, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, it may be possible to perform suggestion performance in a normal state (low probability/low base state).

For example, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), the variable display of the first special symbol is executed mainly by winning the first starting prize opening, but the small winning probability in the small winning determination in this case is
As shown in FIG. 10-3, it is "6298/65536" (approximately 10%). In addition, the small win type due to winning in the first starting winning hole is small win A (opening time: 0.2 seconds). Also,
When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and it becomes a small hit (small win A), the non-reach losing symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed so that the player does not have excessive expectations. There is.

Therefore, in the third modification, when the small winning game state is controlled in the normal state, the suggestion performance may be made executable. In addition, in order to secure time to perform the suggestion performance, the small win fanfare period and the small win ending period may be set long. Thereby, the performance in the small winning game in the normal state can be made into a performance that is beneficial to the player. Therefore, the period controlled by the small winning game in the normal state can be effectively utilized, and the interest of the small winning game in the normal state can be improved.

Note that after transitioning from the low probability/high base state to the normal state, variable display based on the second pending memory may be executed. Specifically, immediately after transitioning from the low probability/high base state to the normal state, variable display may be performed based on the second reserved memory stored in the low probability/high base state before transition. Since the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time, the small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display based on the second reservation memory in the normal state. When the small winning game is executed,
Variable display of the first special symbol may be executed. In this case, the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the period when the small win game state is controlled, and the variable display of the first special symbol is restarted after the small win game ends. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol will be extended for the period during which the small winning game state is controlled. In the third modification, it is also possible to perform a suggestive effect during a period in which the variable display of the first special symbol is extended. That is, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect in the normal state (low probability/low base state). This allows the first
The period during which the variable display of special symbols is extended can be effectively utilized, and the interest can be improved.

(Modification example 4 of characteristic part 020SH)
Next, a fourth modification of the characteristic portion 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature section 020SH, a configuration has been described in which a pending change suggestion performance that suggests the expectation level of a jackpot is executed as a suggestion performance based on the determination result of the pre-reading determination. In modification 4, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, as a suggestion performance based on the determination result of the look-ahead determination, a suggestion performance that suggests the type of jackpot when a look-ahead determination is made that it is a jackpot. may be executable.

For example, during a small hit game in the high probability/first KT state, if a pending memory that has been pre-read and determined to be a 2R normal jackpot is stored, that is, from the high probability/first KT state to the low probability/first KT state If it is known that there will be a transition, it may be possible to perform a performance that is disappointing for the player (disappointment performance) during the small winning game. Specifically, for example, in a small winning game before the start of the variable display based on the reserved memory that has been determined to be a 2R normal jackpot, the background image may be displayed darkly, or the background image may be a skull or crossbones image. You may perform an effect such as displaying an effect image. In addition, in this case, for example, for the target retained memory,
A hold change suggestion effect may be performed that changes the hold display to a hold display with an image of a skull mark attached.

On the other hand, during a small winning game in the high probability/first KT state or the low probability/first KT state, 1
If a pending memory that has been pre-read and determined to be an 0R definite variable jackpot or a 2R probable variable jackpot is stored, that is, it is determined that the state will shift from the high probability/first KT state or the low probability/first KT state to the second KT state. If so, it may be possible to perform a performance that is pleasing to the player (high expectation performance) during the small winning game. Specifically, for example, 10R definite strange jackpot or 2
In a small winning game before the start of the variable display based on the reserved memory that has been determined to be an R-probable jackpot, the background image may be displayed brightly (rainbow-colored), or an angel mark image or effect may be added to the background image. You may perform an effect such as displaying an image. Further, in this case, for example, a hold change suggestion effect may be performed for the target hold memory, such as changing the hold display to a hold display with an image of an angel mark attached.

In addition, if multiple small winning games are executed before the variable display corresponding to the pending memory of the target determined in advance is executed, similar suggestion effects (
A disappointing performance or a high expectation performance) may be performed, that is, a suggestive performance may be performed multiple times. In addition, if multiple variable displays are executed before the variable display corresponding to the target pending memory is executed, in addition to the small winning game state, similar suggestions will be made in the multiple variable displays. You may also perform a performance. That is, such a suggestive effect may be continuously executed until variable display based on the pending memory of the target determined in advance is started.

(Modification example 5 of characteristic part 020SH)
Next, a fifth modification of the characteristic portion 020SH will be described. In the embodiment related to the feature section 020SH described above, the rate at which it is decided to change the display mode of the pending display during the variable display in FIG. ) has been explained as the same ratio as the determination ratio of changing the reservation display together with the reservation change suggestion performance during the small winning game (the determination ratio of the reservation change suggestion performance). In modification 5, the change determination ratio during variable display and the determination ratio of the pending change suggestion performance may be set to be different ratios.

For example, the determination ratio of the pending change suggestion performance may be higher than the change determination ratio during variable display. This makes it easier to change the hold display accompanied by hold change suggestion performance than to change the hold display during variable display, and it is possible to effectively utilize the period in which the small winning game state is controlled.

Further, the change determination ratio during the variable display and the determination ratio of the reservation change suggestion performance may be set to different ratios depending on the result of pre-reading judgment (judgment of jackpot) for the target pending storage information. For example, when it is determined that a jackpot will be executed by the look-ahead judgment, the decision ratio of the pending change suggestion performance is set to be higher than the change decision ratio during the variable display. In this case, the determination ratio of the pending change suggestion performance may be set to be lower than the change determination ratio during variable display. As a result, a change in the hold display accompanied by a hold change suggestion effect can be made to be a highly anticipated effect than a change in the display mode of the hold display during variable display. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the reservation change suggestion performance during the small winning game.

Note that in the first KT state (high probability/first KT state or low probability/first KT state), the pending display may be changed more easily than in other gaming states (normal state or second KT state). That is, the chance time mode may be set as a mode in which the display mode of the hold display is most likely to change. Further, in this case, the determination ratio of the pending change suggestion performance may be higher than the change determination ratio during variable display. That is, among the performances that change the display mode of the hold display, the performance that changes the display mode of the hold display together with the hold change suggestion performance during the small winning game may be the one that is most likely to be executed. Thereby, it is possible to effectively utilize the period during the chance time mode in which the small winning game state is controlled.

(Variation example 6 of characteristic part 020SH)
Next, a sixth modification of the characteristic portion 020SH will be described. In the above-mentioned embodiment related to the feature section 020SH, the false hold change suggestion effect during the small winning game is executed when all the final colors of the hold memory during hold display are gray (see FIG. 11-6). 020SHS70:YE
(See S). In the sixth modification, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the fake pending change suggestion performance during the small winning game is stored in the pending memory during the pending display,
It may also be possible to execute the process even when a pending memory in which the final color is determined to be a special display mode other than gray is stored.

In this case, it may be easier to perform a fake pending change suggestion performance for a pending memory whose final color is determined to be a gray display mode, rather than a pending memory that is determined to be a special display mode. As a result, even if a suspended memory determined to have a special display mode is stored, a false suspended change suggestion effect can be performed for a suspended memory determined to have a display mode whose final color is gray. It is possible to liven up the performance during the winning game.

In addition, conversely, for a suspended memory determined to have a special display mode, it may be easier to perform a fake pending change suggestion effect than for a suspended memory determined to have a display mode whose final color is gray. for example,
For a pending memory whose final color is determined to be a special display mode, a false pending change suggestion performance may be forcibly executed, and the pending change suggestion performance may not be executed. In this case, in active display, the display mode is changed to the final color. As a result, it is possible to purposely lower the player's expectations at the stage of pending display, and correspondingly increase the sense of expectation when the display mode changes at the stage of active display. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the pending change suggestion performance.

(Modification example 7 of characteristic part 020SH)
Next, a seventh modification of the characteristic portion 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature section 020SH, a configuration has been described in which the pending change suggestion presentation, the set value suggestion presentation, and the probability change suggestion presentation are performed as the suggestion presentation. In modification 7, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, it may be possible to perform an explanation and suggestion performance regarding the progress of the game as a suggestion performance.

For example, the explanation-suggestive performance is a text-image-based performance regarding the progress of the game in the chance time mode. Specifically, it is an explanation-suggestive performance such as "Maybe you can move to the normal mode after 50 games?" or "Small win". RUSH mode is almost here!'' and the possibility of being controlled by a high probability state in chance mode at the first hit (62% = 5
6/56+35%: see Figure 11-1) is an explanatory and suggestive performance such as ``Is the probability of a definite change over 60%?''

Here, in the characteristic part 020SH, the gaming state is normal state, high probability/first KT
Since the game state is controlled to one of a plurality of game states such as state, low probability/first KT state, and second KT state, and the game state changes, it may be difficult for the player to understand the content of the game. be. Therefore, by making the explanatory and suggestive performance of Modification 7 executable, it is possible for the player to easily understand the game states that can be transitioned to after the chance mode.
It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Modification example 8 of characteristic part 020SH)
Next, modification 8 of the characteristic portion 020SH will be described. In the embodiment related to the feature section 020SH described above, a configuration in which the feature section 020SH is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is controlled to a high probability state until the next jackpot when a jackpot game based on a variable probability jackpot is executed will be described. did. Instead of such a configuration, it is also possible to apply the feature section 020SH to a gaming machine (for example, a so-called ST machine) that is controlled to a high probability state until a predetermined number of times has passed. Here, an example of the specifications of an ST pachinko game machine will be described.

For example, in an ST machine, when a variable probability jackpot is executed, the machine is controlled to a high probability state until the variable display of the specified number of times (ST number) is executed, and once the variable display of the specified number of times is executed, the high probability state is maintained. Transition from a probability state to a low probability state.

In addition, when a certain variable jackpot is executed, a high base state (high probability/1st K
T state). The period (variable display number) controlled to the high probability/first KT state is a period (transition fluctuation number) according to the probability variable jackpot symbol. After being controlled to the high probability/first KT state, when the number of transition fluctuations is executed, the state shifts from the high base state (high probability/first KT state) to the low base state (second KT state). The number of transition fluctuations is, for example, less than the number of times ST.

As a result, it becomes possible to control the second KT state after the number of transition fluctuations has elapsed until the number of ST has elapsed, that is, a small winning game in which winning can be expected is performed. In addition, the second
If a jackpot is not won even once before the ST number variable display is executed in the KT state, the ST state returns to the normal state by executing the ST number variable display. Here, when the small win game state is controlled in the second KT state, the effects corresponding to the control of the small win game state (for example, the small win notification image 020SH202 and the winning effect image 020 shown in FIG. 11-9)
SH203 display) can be executed.

Further, in the ST machine, when a normal jackpot symbol is executed, the game is controlled to a high base state (low probability/first KT state) after the normal jackpot game. The period (variable display number) controlled to the low probability/first KT state is usually a period (transition fluctuation number) according to the jackpot symbol. Low probability/1st KT
After being controlled by the state, when the number of transition fluctuations is executed, the high base state (low probability/first KT
state) to the low base state (normal state).

A common effect (for example, chance time mode) may be executable in the high probability/first KT state and the low probability/first KT state. In the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is difficult for a game ball to enter the special variable winning ball device 17, that is, a winning ball cannot be expected.

In modification 8, when the ST machine is controlled to a small winning game state in the first KT state (high probability/first KT state or low probability/first KT state), a suggestive effect that suggests contents advantageous to the player is provided. (For example, any one of the pending change suggestion performance, the set value suggestion performance, and the probability change suggestion performance) may be made executable.

According to modification example 8, even if the small winning game in the first KT state in which almost no game ball wins is repeatedly executed in the ST machine, the impression that the game is progressing smoothly is created by executing the suggestion effect. can be given to the player. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game due to the small winning game in the first KT state. Particularly, in the ST pachinko game machine, it is possible to improve the interest during the small winning game in the first KT state. Note that the pachinko game machine of the ST machine is not limited to the above-mentioned specifications, but may have other specifications as long as a small winning game in which the game balls hardly win a prize is executed.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 020SH)
In relation to the above-mentioned feature section 020SH, a pachinko gaming machine is known in which a first special symbol and a second special symbol can be variably displayed at the same time, and small hits occur frequently in variable probability gaming states (for example, , see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2018-033787.). However, when a small winning game is executed in which few game balls win prizes, the variable display is not performed during this period, which may give the player the impression that the game is not progressing smoothly. be. Specifically, for example, if a small winning game in which almost no game ball wins is repeatedly executed,
In the small winning game state, the special symbols are stopped and displayed each time, which may give the player the impression that the game is not progressing smoothly. For this reason, the player may feel uncomfortable and may lose interest in the game.

(Means D1)
Therefore, the gaming machine of the means D1 according to the characteristic part 020SH is a gaming machine that can play games (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 that can play games), and has a gaming state control that controls the gaming state. means (for example, the part that executes steps S120 to S128 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) shown in FIG. 6) and variable display of identification information (for example, special symbols); Variable display execution means (
For example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 10
3)) and the effect execution means (for example,
performance control CPU 120), and the game state control means controls an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state) and a special state that is different from the advantageous state (for example, a small win game state). , a non-special state (first KT state) and a special state (e.g., second KT state) that is more easily controlled by the special state than the non-special state, and the advantageous state and the special state are When the variable display is not performed and the effect execution means is controlled to the special state in the special state, the effect execution means executes a special effect corresponding to the control of the special state (for example, a small effect shown in FIG. 10-9). Hit notification image 020SH202, small pattern 020
SH201, and winning effect image 020SH203), and when the non-special state is controlled to the special state, a suggestive performance (SH201 and winning effect image 020SH203) that is different from the special performance and suggests content advantageous to the player. For example, it is possible to execute the pending change suggestion effect shown in (E) of FIG. 11-11.

According to such a configuration, even if the small winning game is repeatedly executed in a non-special state (for example, the first KT state), it is possible to give the player the impression that the game is progressing smoothly, that is, A small winning game in a non-special state can prevent a player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game. Particularly, according to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest during the small winning game in the non-special state by the suggestive performance.

(Means D2)
Further, in the gaming machine of the means D2 according to the characteristic part 020SH, in the gaming machine described in the means D1, the performance execution means displays decorative identification information (for example, a decorative pattern) in response to the variable display of the identification information. It is possible to perform a variable display, and when controlled to the special state in the special state, the display result of the decoration identification information is a special display result (for example, a fixed symbol "1," which is a combination indicating a small winning game). 3, 5"), and when the non-special state is controlled to the special state, the display result of the decoration identification information is a predetermined display result different from the special display result (a combination of decorative patterns indicating a loss). Display.

According to such a configuration, in a non-special state, it is almost impossible to expect a game ball to enter the special winning hole during a small winning game, so a predetermined display result (for example, a losing pattern) is forcibly stopped and displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent players from having excessive expectations.

(Means D3)
Further, in the gaming machine of the means D3 according to the characteristic part 020SH, in the gaming machine described in the means D1 or the means D2, regarding the variable display that has not yet started, the display result of the variable display is controlled to the advantageous state. Determine whether the display result is as shown (e.g., look-ahead determination)
and a pre-start determination means, wherein the effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestion effect (for example, the pending change suggestion effect shown in (E) of FIG. 11-10) that makes a suggestion regarding the pre-start judgment means. be.

According to such a configuration, since it is possible to perform a suggestive effect based on the determination result of the prefetch determination, it is possible to increase expectations for pending storage. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest during the small winning game in the non-special state.

(Means D4)
Further, as the gaming machine of the means D4 according to the characteristic part 020SH, the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1D to the means D3 is provided with a reservation storage means for storing information regarding the variable display as reservation storage information, and the performance execution means displays the suspension storage information stored in the suspension storage means as a suspension display (for example, suspension display 020SH206 shown in (A) of FIG. 11-10), and acts on the suspension display in the suggestion performance. Effect production (for example, Figure 11-
10(E) can be executed, and there are times when the display mode of the hold display changes and times when the display form of the hold display does not change.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform a series of effects including action effects and effects that change the display mode of the pending display, thereby drawing attention to the pending display and increasing expectations for the pending memory. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest during the small winning game in the non-special state.

(Means D5)
Further, as the gaming machine of the means D5 according to the characteristic part 020SH, in the gaming machine described in any one of the means D1 to the means D4, the setting value is set to one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The effect execution means includes a setting means that can be set, and the effect execution means executes the suggestion effect (for example, the setting value suggestion image 020S shown in FIG. 11-12 (E)).
H220) can be executed.

According to such a configuration, in a small winning game in a non-special state (for example, the first KT state), the player can be allowed to guess the set value. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest during the small winning game in the non-special state.

(Means D6)
Further, in the gaming machine of the means D6 according to the characteristic part 020SH, in the gaming machine according to any one of the means D1 to the means D5, the non-special state includes a first non-special state (for example, a non-probability variable state: low probability state). /first KT state) and a second non-special state (for example, variable probability state: high probability/first KT state) that is more easily controlled to the advantageous state than the first non-special state, and the effect execution means , a common effect (chance time mode) can be executed when controlled to the first non-special state and when controlled to the second non-special state, and the suggested effect is 2 indicates that it is controlled to a non-special state (for example, (E) in Figure 11-13)
020SH230).

According to such a configuration, the common performance is executed when the control is in either the high probability/first KT state or the low probability/first KT state, and the probability change suggestion performance is performed in the small winning game during the chance time mode. Since it is executable, it is possible to have the player guess whether or not the probability variable state is in the small winning game in the high probability/first KT state and the low probability/first KT state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest during the small winning game in the non-special state.

(Means D7)
Further, in the gaming machine of the means D7 according to the characteristic part 020SH, in the gaming machine described in any one of the means D1 to the means D6, the effect execution means may perform a plurality of types of suggestion effects having different modes as the suggestion effect (for example, , the odd number setting suggestion, the even number setting suggestion, and the setting value 4 or more suggestion shown in (B) of FIG. The degree of advantage of the suggested content differs.

According to such a configuration, by making it possible to execute a plurality of types of suggestion performances, it is possible to increase the variation of suggestion performances, so that it is possible to prevent the suggestion performances from becoming monotonous performances. Further, since the degree of advantage varies depending on the suggestion performance, the degree of attention of the player can be varied depending on the suggestion performance executed. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest during the small winning game in the non-special state.

(Means D8)
Further, in the gaming machine of the means D8 according to the characteristic part 020SH, in the gaming machine according to any one of the means D1 to the means D7, the variable display execution means is configured to change the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol). The display and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) can be executed in parallel, and the first
and a second state in which the game medium is difficult to pass through the starting area. 1st
The variable winning means can be controlled to a predetermined state (for example, a first KT state) that is easy to change to the first state, and the production execution means can be controlled to the special state (for example, a small winning game state) in the predetermined state. The above-mentioned suggestion effect can be executed when

According to such a configuration, even if the small winning game in the first KT state in which almost no game ball wins is repeatedly executed, it is possible to give the player the impression that the game is progressing smoothly. The small winning game in the 1KT state can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game. In particular, with such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest during the small winning game in the first KT state.

(Means D9)
Further, as the gaming machine of the means D9 according to the characteristic part 020SH, in the gaming machine according to any one of the means D1 to the means D8, there is a winning easy state (open state) in which the game ball can easily win a prize, and a winning state (open state) in which the game ball can easily win a prize. A second variable winning means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 17 shown in FIG. 1) that can be changed is provided in the winning difficult state (closed state), and the second variable winning means is configured to control the entering prize in the special state. It is possible to change to the easy state, and the production execution means changes the second variable winning means to the easy winning state (for example, the opening timing of the special variable winning ball device 17).
The above-mentioned suggestion effect is executed in response to the above.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to draw attention to the opening of the special variable winning ball device 17 and to draw attention to the suggestive effect. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice a small winning game in which almost no game ball wins, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing due to the small winning game.

(Means D10)
Further, in the gaming machine of the means D10 according to the characteristic part 020SH, in the gaming machine according to any one of the means D1 to the means D9, the gaming state control means controls the gaming medium in a specific area (for example, a special area) in the special state. The advantageous state can be controlled based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 17 has passed through a specific area (so-called V area).

According to such a configuration, even if a small winning game is executed in a normal state (non-special state) in which most game balls do not win in a pachinko game machine in which the characteristic part 020SH is a combination of one type and two types, the game can be smoothly played. It is possible to give the player the impression that the game is progressing, and in other words, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game due to the small winning game in the normal state. In particular, it is possible to improve the interest during the small winning game in the normal state.

(Means D11)
Further, in the gaming machine of the means D11 according to the characteristic part 020SH, in the gaming machine according to any one of the means D1 to the means D10, the performance execution means is configured to provide a game medium when controlled to the special state in the special state. has passed through a special area (e.g. ejection area) (
For example, based on the fact that a game ball has been detected by the second count switch 24 provided in the special prize opening, a predetermined effect corresponding to the passing of the game medium through the special area (for example, as shown in FIG.
When the winning effect image 020SH203) shown in 1-11 (C) is executable and the non-special state is controlled to the special state, regardless of whether or not the game medium passes through the special area, The predetermined effect is not executed.

According to such a configuration, in the second KT state, it is possible to encourage the player to win a prize in the special variable winning hole, thereby increasing the interest in the second KT state. On the other hand, in the small hit game in the 1st KT state, although the game ball may occasionally enter the special variable winning slot, in order to avoid executing the prescribed effect, the winning in the small win in the 1st KT state is It is possible to prevent players from having expectations.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 022SH)
Next, the gaming machine related to the feature section 022SH will be explained. The gaming machine according to the feature section 022SH is a gaming machine that can play games. In this embodiment, a pachinko game machine 1 that can play games will be explained as an example.

The gaming machine according to the feature section 022SH includes a gaming state control means, a variable display execution means, a pre-start determination means, and an effect execution means. The game state control means, the variable display execution means, and the pre-start determination means are realized by the CPU 103 of the main board 11, for example. The performance execution means is realized, for example, by the performance control CPU 120 of the performance control board 12.

The gaming state control means controls the gaming state. The game state control means is capable of controlling an advantageous state, a special state, and a special state. The advantageous state is an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and is, for example, a jackpot game state. A special state is a gaming state that is different from an advantageous state,
For example, it is a small winning game state.

The special state is a state in which gaming value is easily given due to the special state, for example, the second KT
state (high probability/low base state). The second KT state is a gaming state where a small hit is likely to occur, and a gaming state where a game ball is likely to enter the special prize opening. Note that the first KT state (high probability/high base state or low probability/high base state) is a gaming state in which small wins are likely to occur, but it is also a gaming state in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the special prize opening. . That is,
The first KT state is a state in which almost no gaming value is awarded due to the special state.

In the gaming machine according to characteristic part 022SH, it is possible to control to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state, and it is possible to control to an advantageous state after being controlled to a special state. The advantageous game mentioned here is a jackpot that causes the player to move to the second KT state after the jackpot game state ends. The gaming state control means can control to the second KT state after controlling to the jackpot gaming state, and can control to the jackpot gaming state again after controlling to the second KT state.

The performance execution means controls the performance mode to be the small hit RUSH mode in the second KT state. In the second KT state, the small hit RUSH mode is controlled, and no other performance mode is controlled. Further, the small hit RUSH mode is also an effect mode that is controlled only in the second KT state. In other words, when it is controlled in small hit RUSH mode,
This means that the control is always in the second KT state.

When the effect execution means is controlled to be in an advantageous state, it is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the fact that there are a plurality of states in which a gaming value can be awarded as a state after being controlled to be in an advantageous state. The time when the game is controlled in an advantageous state is the time when the game is controlled by the current jackpot game. The states in which gaming value can be awarded are the second KT state and the next jackpot game state. Specific indication is 2nd KT
This display corresponds to the fact that the state and the next jackpot game state will exist (occur) thereafter.

For example, the specific display is an image (hereinafter referred to as a "bonus rush icon") corresponding to the second KT state (small win RUSH mode) and the next jackpot game state. Specifically, the specific display includes a plurality of icon images corresponding to the current jackpot, icon images corresponding to the subsequent second KT state, and icon images corresponding to the next jackpot won in the second KT state. Consists of icon images.

The bonus rush icon may be displayed in any shape such as a circle, square, or triangle, or may have letters or symbols attached. Each icon image of the bonus rush icon is an image indicating a blank space when the corresponding state (game) is not completed, and changes to an image with a predetermined color when the corresponding state is completed. The blank icon image corresponding to the current jackpot, the blank icon image corresponding to the second KT state, and the blank icon image corresponding to the next jackpot, which constitute the bonus rush icon, are all displayed in the same manner. is displayed.

In addition, in the feature section 022SH, the performance execution means can change the display mode of the specific display according to a controlled state among states including an advantageous state and a plurality of states in which gaming value can be given. It is. For example, when the current jackpot ends, the performance execution means changes the display mode of the blank icon image corresponding to the current jackpot in a predetermined manner. Specifically, the performance execution means adds red to the blank bonus rush icon and changes the display mode to show a state in which the blank is filled. Note that changing the display mode is not limited to adding color and filling in the blanks; for example, it is also possible to add text such as "done" to the corresponding icon, or change the shape of the corresponding icon. .

Here, the timing of changing the display mode of the bonus rush icon will be explained. For example, in the case of a bonus rush icon corresponding to a jackpot, the display mode is changed during the ending period of the jackpot. However, the timing at which the display mode of the bonus rush icon corresponding to a jackpot is changed is not limited to these, and may be during a round game (for example, the final round). Further, in the case of the bonus rush icon corresponding to the second KT state, the display mode is changed during the fanfare period of the jackpot, for example. However, the second
The timing to change the display mode of the bonus rush icon corresponding to the KT status is as follows.
The present invention is not limited to these, and may be during a round game (for example, during the first round).

Furthermore, in the characteristic section 022SH, there are a plurality of different display modes for specific display.
The performance execution means is capable of displaying a specific display in a display mode corresponding to a controlled state among states including an advantageous state and a plurality of states in which a gaming value can be awarded. Specifically, when the jackpot ends, the performance execution means changes the icon image of the bonus rush icon corresponding to the jackpot to a display mode (for example, red) corresponding to the jackpot.

Further, when the second KT state ends, the effect execution means changes the icon image of the bonus rush icon corresponding to the second KT state to a display mode (for example, , yellow).

Further, in the feature section 022SH, the performance execution means performs a specific display in a specific mode corresponding to the controlled advantageous state, and a specific display in a predetermined mode corresponding to the existence of a plurality of states in which gaming value can be awarded. Can be displayed. The specific display of the specific mode is, for example, an icon image filled with red or yellow. The specific display of the predetermined mode is, for example, a blank icon image. The effect execution means is capable of displaying a bonus rush icon including an icon image filled in red and an icon image with a blank space.

Further, in the feature section 022SH, the performance execution means can display a specific display over a plurality of states including an advantageous state and a plurality of states in which a gaming value can be awarded. Specifically, the production execution means performs a specific display across the current jackpot gaming state, the second KT state after the current jackpot, and the next jackpot gaming state, that is, across multiple gaming states. can be displayed. Further, the performance execution means can always display a specific display, such as during variable display, stop display of symbols, standby for variable display, small win game, jackpot game, etc.

Further, in the feature section 022SH, the performance execution means can display the gaming value given in the advantageous state and the gaming value given in the special state, both in the advantageous state and the special state. The game value is, for example, a prize ball. Specifically, the production execution means executes the total prize over the current jackpot gaming state, the second KT state after the current jackpot, and the next jackpot gaming state, that is, across multiple gaming states. It is possible to display the number of pitches.

In addition, in the feature part 022SH, when the production execution means is controlled to an advantageous state after being controlled to a special state, the effect execution means suggests that it is controlled to the special state after being controlled to the subsequent advantageous state. Execute the performance. Specifically, the performance execution means, in the next jackpot game,
After the next jackpot game, a suggestion effect is executed to suggest that the second KT state will be controlled again. The suggestive performance is, for example, a success/failure performance that indicates either success or failure, and specifically includes a battle performance, a staged performance, and the like.

Further, the performance execution means, in response to the performance result of the suggested performance, displays a specific display in a predetermined manner corresponding to the existence of a plurality of states in which gaming value can be given as a state after being controlled to a later advantageous state. Can be displayed. For example, when the performance result of the suggested performance is a performance result indicating success, the performance execution means adds and displays a blank icon image to the bonus rush icon in the next jackpot game. On the other hand, when the performance result of the suggested performance is a performance result indicating failure, the performance execution means does not add a blank icon image in the next jackpot game.

For example, the effect execution means can execute a suggestive effect within the same round (for example, in the fifth round) and add and display a blank icon image. However, the effect executing means may execute the suggestive effect over a plurality of rounds to add a blank icon image. For example, a suggestive effect may be performed in the fifth round, and an icon image may be added in the sixth round.
Further, the performance execution means may execute the suggested performance over a plurality of rounds.

Further, in the feature section 022SH, a common number of round games are executed in the advantageous state before being controlled to the special state and the advantageous state after being controlled to the special state. That is, the same number of round games are executed for the current jackpot and the next jackpot. The production execution means is controlled at the current advantageous state and at the subsequent advantageous state.
It is possible to display a specific display in a common display mode. Specifically, the performance execution means displays the icon images corresponding to the respective jackpots in a common display mode with red color, regardless of whether the current jackpot or the next jackpot is completed.

Further, in the characteristic section 022SH, the variable display execution means variable display of the first identification information;
The variable display of the second identification information can be performed in parallel. Specifically, the variable display execution means can execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel. The game state control means can control the game to an advantageous state when a specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display. The specific display result is, for example, a display result indicating a jackpot (jackpot pattern)
It is. For this reason, the gaming state control means controls to the jackpot gaming state when a display result indicating a jackpot is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display.

Furthermore, in the feature section 022SH, the variable display of the second identification information is more advantageous to the player than the variable display of the first identification information. For example, in the characteristic part 022SH, the first
A jackpot based on the variable display of a second special symbol is easier to execute than a jackpot based on the variable display of the special symbol, a jackpot that causes the transition to a second KT state after the end of the jackpot game state, or a jackpot with a large number of rounds.

The effect executing means is configured to display the specific display when the specific display is displayed when the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information. Erase. Since the specific display is displayed mainly in the second KT state where the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the jackpot gaming state is controlled based on the variable display of the first identification information while the specific display is displayed. It is an irregular thing to do.

Here, as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information, after the end of the jackpot game state, the second K
When a jackpot that causes a transition to the T state is derived and displayed, the specific display will not be erased. In other words, the performance execution means erases the specific display only when a jackpot is derived and displayed as a result of the variable display of the first identification information, excluding a jackpot that causes the transition to the second KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. I decided to.

Here, the timing for erasing the specific display is, for example, the fanfare period of the jackpot. For example, even when a jackpot game is played based on the variable display of the first identification information, since the control of the second KT state is completed (the small win RUSH mode is completed) by this jackpot, the icon image is displayed during the fanfare period. , the display mode may be changed to indicate that the second KT state is controlled (for example, yellow), and then (during the fanfare period), the bonus rush icon may be deleted. Further, the timing for erasing the specific display is not limited to the jackpot game based on the variable display of the first identification information, and may be during the round game or during the ending period. When erasing the specific display during a round game, for example, a suggestion performance may be performed, a performance result indicating failure is displayed as a performance result of the suggestion performance, and then the specific display may be erased.

Furthermore, in the characteristic section 022SH, the effect execution means can display a specific display before the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. For example, if the current variable display is a jackpot, the production execution means may display an icon image of the bonus rush icon corresponding to the second KT state during the variable display to indicate that the control is to be performed in the second KT state. Mode (
For example, it is possible to change the color to yellow.

Further, in the feature section 022SH, the pre-start determining means determines whether or not the display result of the variable display that has not yet been started is a display result indicating that the variable display is controlled to be in an advantageous state. The judgment performed by the pre-start judgment means is, for example, a look-ahead judgment, and specifically, it is similar to the various judgments (jackpot judgment, jackpot type judgment, fluctuation pattern judgment, etc.) made when starting the open variable display. This is a content judgment. The determination timing performed by the pre-start determination means is a timing before the timing for performing the various determinations.

The performance execution means can display a specific display based on the determination result of the pre-start determination means.
For example, if there is a pending memory that has been determined to be a jackpot based on the pre-read judgment, the performance execution means may display a bonus corresponding to the second KT state before variable display of this pending memory is started.
It is possible to change the icon image of the rush icon to a display mode (for example, yellow) indicating that it is controlled to the second KT state.

(About the transition of the gaming state and production mode after the jackpot game in the feature part 022SH)
FIG. 12-1 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the game state and production mode after the jackpot game in the feature section 022SH. FIG. 12-1 shows the characteristic part 020SH shown in FIG. 11-1.
The type of jackpot is different from the transition of the game state and performance mode after the jackpot game in . In the explanation of FIG. 12-1, points different from FIG. 11-1 will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, in the feature section 022SH, there are five types of jackpots: 10R probability variable jackpot A, 10R probability variation jackpot B, 6R probability variation jackpot, 10R normal jackpot, and 6R normal jackpot. There is. 10R certain variable jackpot A is a high probability/second KT after the jackpot game.
It is a jackpot that will move you to the state. The 10R probability variable jackpot B and the 6R probability variation jackpot are jackpots that cause the player to shift to the high probability/first KT state after the jackpot game. 10R regular jackpot and 6R
A normal jackpot is a jackpot that causes a transition to a low probability/first KT state after a jackpot game. 10
In the case of an R jackpot, the same prize ball is obtained for any jackpot. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature section 022SH has specifications that make it easier to obtain more prize balls than the above-described feature section 020SH.

Next, the ratio at which each type of jackpot is determined in each gaming state will be explained. For example, in the normal game state, a starting prize is mainly generated in the first starting winning hole, and a first special symbol is variably displayed. In the jackpot type determination based on the starting prize in the first starting winning hole (i.e.,
In the normal gaming state), the 6R normal jackpot is determined at a rate of 35%, the 6R probability variable jackpot is determined at 30%, and the 10R probability variable jackpot A is determined at a rate of 35%.

On the other hand, in the low probability/1st KT state, the high probability/1st KT state, and the low probability/2nd KT state, a starting prize mainly occurs in the second starting winning hole, and a variable display of the second special symbol is performed. be exposed.
In the jackpot type determination based on the starting prize in the second starting winning hole (i.e., low probability / 1st KT
state, high probability/first KT state, and low probability/second KT state), the 10R normal jackpot is determined at a rate of 35%, the 10R probability variable jackpot B is 15%, and the 10R probability variable jackpot A is determined at a rate of 50%. In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature part 022SH has a higher rate of determining 10R probability variable jackpot A than the above-mentioned feature part 020SH, so it has specifications that make it easier to get more prize balls. There is.

In addition, a common performance is performed during the jackpot game when the jackpot game is executed based on the 10R probability variable jackpot B and when the jackpot game is executed based on the 10R normal jackpot. Specifically, a common combination of decorative symbols is derived and displayed for the 10R probability variable jackpot B and the 10R normal jackpot, and a common jackpot performance is also executed during each jackpot game. and,
After the jackpot game, the game is controlled to a common chance time mode.

As a result, the player cannot distinguish the type of jackpot executed between 10R probability variable jackpot B and 10R normal jackpot, and the gaming states controlled by the jackpot game (high probability/high base state and low probability/ It is also possible to make it impossible for the player to determine whether the player is in a high base state (any of the high base states). Therefore, in the feature section 022SH, the controlled gaming state can be controlled by the player, not only in the so-called first win when changing from the normal mode to the chance time mode, but also when the chance time mode is started from any mode. can be made undetectable.

(About the jackpot type determination table of feature part 022SH)
FIG. 12-2 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the jackpot type determination table of the feature section 022SH. FIG. 12-2 (A) is a jackpot type determination table when performing a variable display of the first special symbol. FIG. 12-2 (B) is a jackpot type determination table when performing a variable display of the second special symbol.

As shown in (A) of Figure 12-2, there are three types of jackpots when performing the variable display of the first special symbol: 10R probability variable jackpot A, 6R probability variation jackpot, and 6R normal jackpot. One of the jackpots is determined. In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-2 (B), the jackpot types when executing the variable display of the second special symbol include 10R probability variable jackpot A, 10R probability variable jackpot B, and 10R normal jackpot. One of three types of jackpots is determined. Figure 12
In both (A) and (B) of -2, the rate at which each jackpot type is determined is constant regardless of the setting value. Furthermore, in both (A) and (B) of FIG. 12-2, the percentage determined to be a variable jackpot is 65%, and the percentage determined to be a normal jackpot is 35%.

Below, (A) and (B) of FIG. 12-2 will be compared and explained. 10R certain variable jackpot A is (
(B) is easier to determine than A). Specifically, the 10R probability variable jackpot A is 35% in (A) and 50% in (B). In addition, in (A), 6R probability variable jackpot can be selected, and 10R probability variation jackpot B cannot be selected, but in (B), 10R probability variation jackpot B
is selectable, and 6R probability variable jackpot is not selectable. Also, regarding normal jackpots,
In (A), 6R normal jackpot can be selected (10R normal jackpot cannot be selected), and (B
), 10R normal jackpot can be selected (6R normal jackpot cannot be selected). For this reason, the jackpot type determination using (B) is more likely to determine a jackpot that is advantageous to the player than (A). That is, the variable display of the second special symbol is a variable display that is more advantageous to the player than the variable display of the first special symbol.

(Bonus/rush icon control process at the start of jackpot)
Next, with reference to FIG. 12-3, a description will be given of the processing when displaying the bonus rush icon at the start of a jackpot or when changing the display mode of the bonus rush icon. FIG. 12-3 is a flowchart showing an example of bonus/rush icon control processing at the start of a jackpot. The bonus rush icon control process at the start of the jackpot is a process executed in the special figure hit waiting process of S173 in the performance control process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 12-3, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a jackpot start designation command (first jackpot start designation command or second jackpot start designation command) has been received (step 022SHS11). If the jackpot start designation command has not been received (step 022SHS11: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the series of processing as it is.

On the other hand, if the jackpot start designation command is received (step 022SHS11: YE
S), that is, when a jackpot occurs, the production control CPU 120 determines whether it is a 10R probability variable jackpot A (step 022SHS12). If it is 10R probability variable jackpot A (step 022SHS12: YES), the production control CPU 120 executes step 0.
Move to 22SHS14. If it is not 10R guaranteed variable jackpot A (step 022SHS1
2: NO), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a jackpot based on the variable display of the first special symbol (step 022SHS13).

If it is not a jackpot based on the fluctuating display of the first special symbol (step 022SHS13:N
O), that is, if it is a jackpot based on the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU
Step 120 determines whether the bonus rush icon is being displayed (step 022).
SHS14). If the bonus rush icon is not displayed (step 022SH
S14: NO), the performance control CPU 120 starts displaying the bonus rush icon (step 022SHS15), and ends the series of processing.

On the other hand, if the bonus rush icon is being displayed (step 022SHS14:
YES), 2nd KT state (small hit RUSH mode) among bonus rush icons
A display change effect for changing the icon image corresponding to the icon image to a display mode (yellow) indicating that the small winning RUSH mode is controlled is set to be executed (step 022SHS16), and the series of processing is completed.

In step 022SHS13, if it is a jackpot based on the variable display of the first special symbol (step 022SHS13: YES), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the bonus rush icon is being displayed (step 022SHS17). Bonus·
If the rush icon is not being displayed (step 022SHS17: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the series of processing.

On the other hand, if the bonus rush icon is being displayed (step 022SHS17:
YES), that is, for example, in the second KT state (small hit RUSH mode), when controlled to an irregular jackpot game based on the variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CP
U120 erases the bonus rush icon (step 022SHS18) and ends the series of processing.

By the above-described process, when a jackpot game of 10R probability variable jackpot A is executed, a bonus rush icon can be displayed during the fanfare period of the jackpot. Also,
When a jackpot game based on the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is executed in the small win RUSH mode, during the round game, the bonus rush icon is changed to a display mode (for example, yellow) that indicates that the small win RUSH mode is controlled. ) can be changed to Also, small hit R
When an irregular jackpot is executed based on the variable display of the first special symbol in the USH mode, the bonus rush icon can be erased during the fanfare period.

(Bonus/rush icon control process during round play)
Next, with reference to FIG. 12-4, a process for adding a blank space for the bonus rush icon during a round game will be described. FIG. 12-4 is a flowchart showing an example of bonus rush icon control processing during a round game. The bonus rush icon control process during the round game is a process executed in the jackpot performance process of S176 in the performance control process process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 12-4, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the large winning hole opening display command is received (step 022SHS31). If the big prize opening opening display command is not received (step 022SHS31: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the series of processing as it is. If the big winning opening opening display command is received (step 022 SHS31: YES), the production control CPU 120 determines whether the current jackpot is a jackpot when controlled in the small winning RUSH mode. (Step 022
SHS32).

If the current jackpot is not the jackpot when controlled by the small hit RUSH mode (step 022 SHS32: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the series of processing.
On the other hand, if the current jackpot is a jackpot controlled by the small hit RUSH mode (
Step 022SHS32: YES), it is determined whether the round game is the fifth round or not (Step 022SHS33). In addition, based on the value of the round number counter which is counted by the CPU 103 and indicates the number of rounds of the jackpot, the performance control CPU 120
It may be determined whether or not it is the 5th round, or it may be determined whether or not it is the 5th round by counting the number of times the grand prize opening display command has been received.

If the round game is not the fifth round (step 022SHS33: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the series of processing. On the other hand, when the round game is the fifth round (step 022SHS33: YES), the performance control CPU 120 controls the bonus
It is determined whether the rush icon is being displayed (step 022SHS34). If the bonus rush icon is not being displayed (step 022SHS34: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the series of processing.

On the other hand, if the bonus rush icon is being displayed (step 022SHS34:
YES), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current jackpot is a 10R probability variable jackpot A (step 022SHS35). If it is 10R probability variable jackpot A (step 0
22SHS35: YES), the performance control CPU 120 adds and displays a bonus rush icon by setting a successful performance as a suggested performance (step 022S
HS36), the series of processing ends. On the other hand, if it is not the 10R probability variable jackpot A (step 022SHS35: NO), the performance control CPU 120 sets a failure performance as a suggested performance (step 022SHS37), and ends the series of processing.

By the above-mentioned process, in the jackpot game in the small hit RUSH mode, if the current jackpot is a 10R probability variable jackpot A, a successful performance can be executed as a suggestion performance, while on the other hand, if the current jackpot is a 10R probability variable jackpot B or If it is a 10R normal jackpot, a failure performance can be executed as a suggestion performance.

(Bonus rush icon control process during ending period)
Next, with reference to FIG. 12-5, a bonus rush icon control process for changing the display mode of the bonus rush icon during the ending period will be described. FIG. 12-5 is a flowchart showing an example of bonus rush icon control processing during the ending period. The bonus rush icon control process for the ending period is a process executed in the ending effect process of S177 in the effect control process process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 12-5, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the bonus rush icon is being displayed (step 022SHS51). If the bonus rush icon is not being displayed (step 022SHS51: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the series of processing. If the bonus rush icon is being displayed (step 022SHS51: YES), the performance control CPU 120 displays the icon image corresponding to the current jackpot among the bonus rush icons in a display mode (for example, red) that indicates jackpot completion. A display change effect is set to be executed (step 022SHS52).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current jackpot is a 10R probability variable jackpot A (step 022SHS53). If the current jackpot is 10R guaranteed variable jackpot A (step 022SHS53: YES), the production control CPU 120 controls the small hit RUSH.
An ending effect indicating the transition to the mode is set to be executed (step 022SHS54), and the series of processing is completed. On the other hand, if the current jackpot is not a 10R probability variable jackpot A (step 022SHS53: NO), that is, the current jackpot is a 10R probability variable jackpot B or 10R.
If it is a normal jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 sets to execute an ending performance indicating a transition to the chance time mode (step 022SHS55), and ends the series of processing.
In addition, the bonus rush icon is not displayed in the chance time mode.

Through the above-described processing, the bonus rush icon can be changed to a display mode (for example, red) indicating completion of the jackpot during the ending period of the jackpot game. Also, 1
In the case of 0R probability variable jackpot A, the bonus rush icon can be continuously displayed even in the small win RUSH mode. Further, in the case of 10R probability variable jackpot B or normal jackpot, the bonus rush icon can be made not to be displayed in the chance time mode.

(Example of transition between production mode and jackpot production screen)
Next, an example of the transition of the effect mode and the jackpot effect screen will be explained using FIGS. 12-6 to 12-8. FIG. 12-6 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the performance screen from normal mode to small hit RUSH mode. FIG. 12-7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the performance screen from the small hit RUSH mode to the chance time mode. FIG. 12-8 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of transition of the performance screen when the small hit RUSH mode continues.

FIG. 12-6 (A) shows variable display during normal mode. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a decorative pattern 022SH100 and a first special pattern corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern.
A small pattern 022SH101 is variably displayed. In displaying the screen shown in (A),
The performance control CPU 120 determines the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols (determined decorative symbols) and the variable display of decorative symbols based on the display results, fluctuation patterns, and gaming conditions specified by the performance control command received from the main board 11. Decide on the display mode, whether or not to execute various effects such as reach effects, various preview effects, and effect modes depending on the game status, their mode, and the execution start timing, etc.
Based on the determination result, variable display of decorative patterns is executed. In addition, in (A), an active display 022SH110 is displayed in the lower central area of the image display device 5. In (A), when the variable display period has elapsed, the screen changes to the screen shown in (B).

Figure 12-6 (B) is a decorative pattern 02 showing a 10R probability variable jackpot A in the normal mode.
The screen when 2SH100 is derived and displayed is shown. Specifically, on the image display device 5, a decorative pattern 022SH100 and a first small pattern 022SH101 are stopped and displayed as a fixed pattern "7, 7, 7" which is a combination indicating a 10R probability variable jackpot A. In displaying the screen shown in (B), the performance control CPU 120, for example, uses the decorative pattern 022S from the performance control pattern.
This corresponds to the fact that an end code indicating the end of the variable display of H100 (and the first small pattern 022SH101) has been read, or that a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that the fixed decorative pattern 022SH100 should be stopped and displayed. Then, the final decorative pattern 022SH100, which is the display result of the decorative pattern 022SH100, is stopped and displayed. In (B), when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, the screen changes to the screen shown in (C).

FIG. 12-6 (C) shows a screen during the fanfare period in the jackpot game of 10R probability variable jackpot A. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a jackpot notification image 022SH105 indicating a 10R probability variable jackpot A and a bonus rush icon 022SH120. Bonus rush icon 022SH120 has three icon images 0 indicating a blank field.
Consisting of 22SH120a to 120c. Three icon images 022SH120a-120
c indicates that there is a state in which the game value is awarded three times: the current jackpot, the small win RUSH mode after the current jackpot ends, and the next jackpot. In displaying the screen shown in (C), the production control CPU 120 displays the jackpot notification image 022SH105, the bonus
Display the rush icon 022SH120.

FIG. 12-6 (D) shows the screen during the 5th round of 10R probability variable jackpot A. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a round notification image 022SH106 that notifies that it is the 5th round of the 10R probability variable jackpot A. Further, in (D), a total prize pitch number display 022SH130 is displayed. The total number of prize balls display 022SH130 shows the total number of prize balls during the consecutive games including the small hit RUSH mode. In addition, total award pitch count display 022SH1
30 may display the fanfare period shown in FIG. 12-6(C). Also, (D)
Here, in the upper right of the display area of the image display device 5, a notification image including the characters "right-handed hit" is displayed as a notification image corresponding to right-handed hit notification. In displaying the screen shown in (D),
The performance control CPU 120 displays the round notification image 022SH106, for example, in response to receiving a command for displaying the opening of the big winning hole from the main board 11.

(E) of FIG. 12-6 shows the screen of the ending period in the jackpot game of 10R probability variable jackpot A. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a small win RUSH transition notification image 022SH107 indicating that the small win RUSH mode is controlled, and a bonus rush icon 0.
A colored image of the icon image 022SH120a (first from the bottom) of 22SH120 is displayed. The color assigned to the icon image 022SH120a is a color (for example, red) that indicates that the jackpot has been completed. In displaying the screen shown in (E), the performance control CPU 120 displays the small hit RUSH transition notification image 022SH107 and the icon image 022SH1 in response to, for example, receiving the jackpot end designation command from the main board 11.
A colored image is displayed on 20a.

In this way, the display mode of the bonus rush icon 022SH120 changes according to the progress of the game. Further, the bonus rush icon 022SH120 is displayed in a display mode (for example, red) corresponding to the jackpot gaming state.

(F) of FIG. 12-6 shows a variable display during the small win RUSH mode. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a decorative pattern 022SH100 corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern.
and a second small pattern 022SH102 are variably displayed. The bonus rush icon 022SH120 is displayed across a plurality of gaming states including a jackpot gaming state and a second KT state (small winning RUSH mode). In addition, in (F), in the right area of the active display 022SH110 of the image display device 5, a pending display 022SH11 indicating the second pending memory is displayed.
1 is displayed.

FIG. 12-6 (G) shows a screen on which small winning symbols are derived and displayed during the small winning RUSH mode. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a decorative pattern 022SH100 and a second small pattern 0.
22SH102 is stopped and displayed as a confirmed symbol "1, 3, 5" which is a combination indicating a small winning game.

(H) of FIG. 12-6 shows a screen during a small winning game in the small winning RUSH mode. Specifically, in the small winning game state, when a prize is won in the special prize opening, a winning effect image 022SH131 indicating the number of prize balls (for example, 10 balls) is displayed on the image display device 5. (H
) indicates, for example, that two balls have entered the special winning slot and two prize balls (a total of 20 balls have been paid out). In addition, the total prize ball number display 022SH130 shows the total number of prize balls in the jackpot and prize balls in the small win RUSH mode, and can be displayed across the jackpot game state and the small win RUSH mode (second KT state). It is. The total award pitch number display 022SH130 shows a number that has been added by 20 pitches compared to (G) in FIG. 12-6. After this, in Figure 12-7 (
The screen changes to either screen I) or (I) in Figure 12-8.

(I) of FIG. 12-7 shows a variable display during the small win RUSH mode.

(J) in Figure 12-7 shows that in the small hit RUSH mode, a decorative pattern 022SH100 indicating either a probability variable jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot A, 10R probability variable jackpot B) or a normal jackpot (10R normal jackpot) is derived and displayed. The screen shown is shown below. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a fixed pattern “2,
2, 2" is stopped and displayed. In (J), when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, the screen changes to the screen shown in (K).

(K) of FIG. 12-7 shows a screen during the fanfare period of the jackpot game controlled in the small win RUSH mode. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a jackpot notification image 022SH115 indicating that there is a possibility of either a definite jackpot or a normal jackpot, and an icon image 022SH120b of the bonus rush icon 022SH120 (two from the bottom).
A colored image is displayed. The color attached to the icon image 022SH120b is a color (for example, yellow) indicating that the small hit RUSH mode is controlled. Also,
The bonus rush icon 022SH120 continues to be displayed even after the transition from the second KT state (small win RUSH mode) to the jackpot game state. Also, jackpot notification image 022
SH115 indicates that the character has a bow and arrow, and in a jackpot game, a suggestive performance using the bow and arrow is performed that suggests that there is a possibility of being controlled to a small win RUSH mode after the jackpot game.

In this way, the bonus rush icon 022SH120 is displayed across a plurality of gaming states, including the previous jackpot gaming state, the second KT state (small winning RUSH mode), and the current jackpot gaming state. Further, the display mode of the bonus rush icon 022SH120 changes according to the progress of the game. Also, bonus rush icon 022SH12
0 (icon image 022SH120b) is displayed in a display mode (for example, yellow) indicating that the small hit RUSH mode (second KT state) is controlled.

FIG. 12-7 (L) shows the screen during the fifth round of the game. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a suggestion effect image 022SH116 that suggests that there is a possibility of being controlled to the small hit RUSH mode after the current jackpot. For example, the suggestive performance is
There is a successful performance in which the displayed character hits a target with a bow and arrow, and a failure performance in which the character is unable to hit the target.

(M) in FIG. 12-7 shows a screen indicating failure as a performance result in the suggestive performance. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a failure effect image 022SH117 in which the displayed character was unable to hit the target with a bow and arrow. Failure performance image 02
The display of 2SH117 suggests to the player that the game will not be controlled to the small win RUSH mode after the current jackpot game.

In addition, in the 5th round, the failure effect image 022SH117 is displayed, and in subsequent rounds and ending periods, an image indicating success is displayed. It is also possible to make it possible to perform a performance that shows In addition, as a suggestion effect, a blank icon image is added, which is likely to be added,
It is also possible to prepare performances that are unlikely to be added, and to execute one of the performances selected based on the determination.

(N) in FIG. 12-7 shows a screen during the ending period in the jackpot game. Specifically, the image display device 5 includes a chance time mode shift notification image 022SH118 indicating that the control is to be performed in the chance time mode, and an image in which the blank space (third from the bottom) of the bonus rush icon 022SH120 is filled. Displayed. Bonus rush icon 02
A colored image of the icon image 022SH120c (third from the bottom) of 2SH120 is displayed. The color assigned to the icon image 022SH120c is a color (for example, red) that indicates that the jackpot has been completed. In this way, bonus rush icon 022SH
120, the display mode changes according to the progress of the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 022SH, the jackpot that can be won in the small win RUSH mode is a jackpot of 10 rounds having the same number of rounds. Therefore, the gaming value given to the players by the jackpot games in the small jackpot RUSH mode is the same. For this reason, in the feature section 022SH, when the icon image of the bonus rush icon 022SH is displayed in a display mode indicating the completion of a jackpot, the icon image is uniformly displayed in "red" regardless of the jackpot type.

Also, icon image 022SH120 of bonus rush icon 022SH120
Among a to 120c, the bottom icon image 022SH120a and the top icon image 022SH120c are colored red, and the middle icon image 022SH120b is colored yellow. Therefore, when displaying the icon images 022SH120a to 120c (for example, see (C) in FIG. 12-6), the bottom icon image 022SH
120a, the top icon image 022SH120c, and the middle icon image 02
2SH 120b may be displayed in a different display mode from the beginning (from a blank state). For example, the middle icon image 022SH120b is set to the other icon image 022SH120.
A and 120c may have a display mode with a larger display area. As a result, even if each icon image 022SH120a to 120c is blank, the player can tell whether the icon image corresponds to a jackpot or a small win RUSH mode depending on the display mode of the blank. can be suggested.

(O) in FIG. 12-7 shows variable display during the chance time mode. in particular,
On the image display device 5, a decorative pattern 022SH100 and a second small pattern 022SH102 are variably displayed in correspondence with the variable display of the second special pattern. In addition, the Chantime mode is
It is controlled when it is in the first KT state (high probability/high base state or low probability/high base state). In the chance time mode, the bonus rush icon 022SH120 is
It has been erased.

Next, FIG. 12-8 will be explained. (I) to (L) in Figure 12-8 are (I) to (L) in Figure 12-7.
This screen is similar to the screens shown in I) to (L). Therefore, descriptions of (I) to (L) in FIG. 12-8 will be omitted.

(M) in FIG. 12-8 shows a screen indicating success as a result of the suggestion performance. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a success effect image 022SH127 in which the displayed character was able to hit a target with a bow and arrow. In addition, the bonus rush icon 022SH120 includes two icon images 022SH120d and 022SH120d indicating a blank field.
120e is additionally displayed. These two icon images 022SH120d, 12
In 0e, a new state has been added in which the gaming value of two times can be awarded after the jackpot ends (after the second jackpot) and the next jackpot (the third jackpot). to show that In this way, in the bonus rush icon 022SH120,
Icon image 022SH120a, 1 with display mode (red or yellow) corresponding to the completed game
20b and the icon images 022SH120c to 120e in a blank display mode corresponding to the existence of a plurality of states in which game values can be awarded thereafter can be displayed at the same time.

(N) in FIG. 12-8 shows the screen during the ending period in the jackpot game. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a small win RUSH continuation notification image 022SH128 indicating that the small win RUSH mode is continuously controlled, and a bonus rush icon 022SH12.
0 icon image 022SH120c (third from the bottom) is displayed in color. The color assigned to the icon image 022SH120c is a color (for example, red) that indicates that the jackpot has been completed.

(O) of FIG. 12-8 shows a variable display during the small win RUSH mode.

After this, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (P), when 10R probability variable jackpot A is executed in the small hit RUSH mode, the bonus rush icon 022SH120
, two icon images 022SH120f and 120g indicating blank fields are additionally displayed.

In addition, in the explanation of FIG. 12-8, it was not made clear that it was a 10R probability variable jackpot A until the result of the suggestion effect was displayed, but when the variable display result was derived and displayed, it was confirmed that it was a 10R probability variation jackpot A. You may also specify that. That is, in the explanation of FIG. 12-8, in the variable display determined to be 10R probability variable jackpot A, the decorative pattern 022SH100 is displayed as a combination "2, 2, 2” to stop and display.
During the jackpot game, the success effect image 022SH127 is displayed by the suggestion effect, but this is not limited to this. For example, in a variable display determined to be a 10R probability variable jackpot A, the decorative pattern 022SH100 is displayed to indicate a 10R probability variable jackpot A. The combination "7, 7, 7" may be stopped and displayed.

In this case, the timing at which the two icon images 120d and 120e are added to the bonus rush icon 022SH120 may be, for example, during the fanfare period, during the round game, or during the ending period. In addition, in this case, although the combination "7, 7, 7" of the decorative pattern 022SH100 indicating 10R probability variable jackpot A is stopped and displayed, before adding the two icon images 120d and 120e to the bonus rush icon 022SH120, Suggestive performances may also be performed. In this case, it is clear that a performance indicating success will be performed as a result performance in the suggestion performance, so the player
You can play the game while watching the suggested effects with peace of mind. On the other hand, since the combination "7, 7, 7" indicating 10R probability variable jackpot A has already been stopped and displayed, two icon images 120d and 120e are added to the bonus rush icon 022SH120 without performing any suggestive effect. You may let them.

In addition, when it is determined that it is a 10R guaranteed variable jackpot A, it is determined whether to perform a production that clearly indicates that it is a 10R probability variable jackpot A, or to perform a production that does not clearly indicate that it is a 10R probability variable jackpot A, and either of the productions determined by the judgment is performed. You may also do so.

(Bonus rush icon control processing in variable display)
Next, a process for changing the display mode of the bonus rush icon in variable display will be explained using FIG. 12-9. Figure 12-9 shows the bonus and variable display.
7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of rush icon control processing. The bonus rush icon control process in the variable display is a process executed in the variable display start setting process of S171 in the production control process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 12-9, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the small hit RUSH mode is in effect (step 022SHS71). If it is not in the small hit RUSH mode (step 022SHS71: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the series of processing as it is. If it is in the small hit RUSH mode (step 022SHS71: YES), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether there is a pending memory that has been determined to be a jackpot based on the pre-read determination (step 022SHS72).

If there is a pending memory that has been pre-read and determined to be a jackpot (Step 022SHS72: Y
ES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a change in the display of the bonus rush icon (step 022SHS73). In the determination of step 022SHS73, in FIG.
The bonus/rush icon display change determination table shown in FIG. 10(A) is used.

(About bonus/rush icon display change determination table)
Here, the bonus/rush icon display change determination table will be explained using FIG. 12-10. FIG. 12-10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a bonus/rush icon display change determination table. FIG. 12-10 (A) is a table used to determine whether or not to change the display of the bonus rush icon corresponding to pending storage.

Specifically, (A) in FIG. 12-10 is a table showing the execution rate of bonus/rush icon display changes for each type of jackpot, which is used when a jackpot is determined by the look-ahead judgment. . More specifically, in the table in (A) of Figure 12-10,
The “pre-reading determination result” indicates the type of jackpot based on the pre-reading determination. Further, the "bonus rush icon display change execution rate" indicates "yes" where the display change is performed and "no" where the display change is not performed.

For example, in the case of 10R probability variable jackpot A, the display change rate of the bonus rush icon is "25/100". Further, in the case of 10R probability variable jackpot B and 10R normal jackpot, the ratio of display changes of the bonus rush icon is "10/100". Therefore, when the pending memory of the jackpot is stored, 10R probability variable jackpot A is better, that is, when the small win RUSH mode continues after the jackpot game, it is better when the small win RUSH mode does not continue after the jackpot game. It is now easier to change the display of the bonus rush icon.

Returning to FIG. 12-9, as a result of the determination in step 022SHS73, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to change the display of the bonus rush icon (step 0
22SHS74). When not changing the display of the bonus rush icon (step 0
22SHS74: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the series of processing.

When changing the display of the bonus rush icon (step 022SHS74: YE
S), the performance control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the corresponding icon image to the small hit RUSH
A display change effect is set to be executed to change the display mode (for example, yellow) to indicate that the mode is controlled (step 022SHS75), and the series of processing ends.

In step 022SHS72, if there is no pending memory pre-read and determined to be a jackpot (step 022SHS72: NO), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the jackpot display result is derived and displayed in the current variable display. (Step 022SHS7
6). If the jackpot display result is not derived and displayed in this variable display (step 02
2SHS76: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the series of processing.

On the other hand, if the display result of the jackpot is derived and displayed in this variable display (step 02
2SHS76: YES), the bonus and
Determine whether the display of the rush icon has changed (step 022SHS77)
. If the bonus rush icon has already changed display at the stage of retention memory (step 0)
22SHS77: YES), the performance control CPU 120 ends the series of processing. If the bonus rush icon has not changed its display at the stage of pending storage (step 022S)
HS77: NO), and determines whether or not the display of the bonus rush icon changes (step 0).
22SHS78), the process moves to step 022SHS74. The determination at step 022SHS78 uses the bonus/rush icon display change determination table shown in FIG. 12-10(B).

Here, (B) of FIG. 12-10 is a table used when determining whether or not to change the display of the bonus rush icon corresponding to the variable display. Specifically, (B) in FIG. 12-10 shows the execution rate of the bonus/rush icon display change for each jackpot type, which is used when it is determined to be a jackpot by the jackpot judgment corresponding to the variable display. This is the table shown. More specifically, in the table of FIG. 12-10 (B), "Jackpot determination result" indicates the jackpot type when the current variable display is a jackpot. Further, the "bonus rush icon display change execution rate" indicates "yes" where the display change is performed and "no" where the display change is not performed.

For example, in the case of 10R probability variable jackpot A, the display change rate of the bonus rush icon is "10/100". Further, in the case of 10R probability variable jackpot B and 10R normal jackpot, the ratio of display changes of the bonus rush icon is "25/100". Therefore, during the variable display where the jackpot display result is derived, 10R probability variable jackpot B and 10R normal jackpot are better (when the small win RUSH mode ends after the jackpot game)
, 10R probability variable jackpot A (than when the small win RUSH mode continues after the jackpot game), the display change of the bonus rush icon is more likely to occur.

By using the tables shown in FIGS. 12-10 (A) and (B), it is possible to suggest the continuation or termination of the small win RUSH mode, depending on the timing at which the bonus rush icon changes in display. Specifically, if the display mode of the bonus rush icon changes while it is stored on hold, there is a high possibility that the small hit RUSH mode will continue.
If the display mode of the bonus rush icon changes during variable display, small hit RUS
It can be suggested that the H mode is likely to end.

In addition, in the above description, it was suggested that the small hit RUSH mode may continue depending on whether the information regarding the variable display of the target is being stored on hold or being displayed variablely, but the information is not limited to this. For example, regarding the information regarding the variable display of the target, the small hit RUSH mode continues depending on whether the variable display result (jackpot symbol) is displayed before the derivation is displayed (during storage or variable display) or after the derivation is displayed (during a jackpot game). You can also suggest possibilities. Specifically, before the variable display result (jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed, there is a high possibility that the small hit RUSH mode will continue,
On the other hand, after the variable display result is derived and displayed, it may be suggested that the small win RUSH mode is likely to end.

(Screen transition when changing the display mode of the bonus rush icon during variable display)
Next, the transition of the performance screen when changing the display mode of the bonus rush icon during variable display will be explained using FIGS. 12-11. FIG. 12-11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of transition of the performance screen when changing the display mode of the bonus rush icon during variable display.

(A) of Figure 12-11 shows the active display 022S during the small hit RUSH mode.
A screen when variable display corresponding to H110 is started is shown. Further, in (A), a pending display 022SH111 indicating second pending storage is displayed. Pending display 022S shown in (A)
H111 is a display mode different from the normal display mode, and specifically, it is a display mode with a high expectation of a jackpot. The pending memory corresponding to the pending display 022SH111 is, for example, a pending memory that has been determined to be a jackpot by the pre-read determination.

(B) of FIG. 12-11 shows a screen during variable display corresponding to the active display 022SH110 similar to (A). In (B), an image in which the icon image 022SH120b (second from the bottom) of the bonus rush icon 022SH120 is colored yellow is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to suggest to the player that a jackpot game will be played (that the small jackpot RUSH mode will end or be interrupted). In addition, the color attached to the icon image 022SH120b is, for example, a color (for example, yellow) indicating that the small winning RUSH mode is controlled.

FIG. 12-11 (C) shows a screen on which small winning symbols are derived and displayed during the small winning RUSH mode. Specifically, on the image display device 5, a decorative pattern 022SH100 and a second small pattern 022SH102 are stopped and displayed as a confirmed pattern "1, 3, 5" which is a combination indicating a small winning game. After (C), the small winning game state is controlled, and when the small winning game ends, the screen changes to the screen shown in (D).

(D) in Figure 12-11 shows the active display 022S during the small hit RUSH mode.
The screen when the variable display corresponding to H113 is started is shown. Specifically, (D) shows the screen when the highly anticipated pending display 022SH111 moves to the active display 022SH113 and variable display is started.

In (E) of FIG. 12-11, in the small hit RUSH mode, a decorative pattern 022SH100 indicating either a variable probability jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot A, 10R probability variable jackpot B) or a normal jackpot (10R normal jackpot) is displayed. The screen shown is shown below. In (E), when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, the screen changes to the screen shown in (F).

(F) of FIG. 12-11 shows a screen during the fanfare period in the jackpot game. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a jackpot notification image 022SH115 indicating that there is a possibility of either a probability variable jackpot or a normal jackpot.

(G) in Figure 12-11 shows the result of the suggestion performance performed in the fifth round.
Shows a screen showing success. Specifically, the type of jackpot being executed is 10R probability variable jackpot A.
In this case, a success effect image 127 is displayed as shown in (G). In addition, if the type of jackpot being executed is 10R certain variable jackpot B or 10R normal jackpot, in (G),
As shown in FIG. 12-7 (M), a failure effect image 022SH117 is displayed. Also,(
In G), two icon images 022SH120d and 120e indicating blank spaces are additionally displayed on the bonus rush icon 022SH120.

(H) in FIG. 12-11 shows a screen during the ending period in the jackpot game. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a small win RUSH continuation notification image 022SH128 indicating that the small win RUSH mode is continuously controlled, and a bonus rush icon 022SH1.
20 icon image 022SH120c (third from the bottom) is displayed in color. The color assigned to the icon image 022SH120c is a color (for example, red) that indicates that the jackpot (second jackpot) has been completed.

Note that the symbol fluctuation time in the fluctuation display of (A) to (C) in FIGS. 12-11 is, for example, 1 second. That is, the screen transitions (A) to (C) are performed in a short time. For this reason, (B)
The timing at which the icon image 022SH120b shown in FIG.

Also, the timing for adding color (yellow) to the icon image 022SH120b is as follows:
For example, the timing may be the timing when the pending memory corresponding to the pending display 022SH111 is stored, or the timing may be after the pending display 022SH111 is shifted to the active display 022SH113 and the variable display corresponding to the active display 022SH113 is started.

Moreover, before performing the effect of adding color to the icon image 022SH120b, an exciting effect may be performed. For example, the inciting effect includes an action effect that acts on the icon image 022SH120b. After this action rendering, a rendering of adding color to the icon image 022SH120b may be performed. Note that after the exciting effect, a so-called fake effect may be performed in which the icon image 022SH120b is not colored.

As explained above, in the embodiment described above, the bonus rush icon 022S
H120 can suggest that in a jackpot game, there are a plurality of states (second KT state and next jackpot game) in which gaming value can be given as a state after the jackpot game. For example, in the current jackpot game, after the current jackpot game, there are at least two or more states that are advantageous to the player, including the second KT state and the next jackpot game (in this embodiment, after the current jackpot game) It can be suggested that there are three states: a game, a second KT state, and the next jackpot game. Therefore, in the current jackpot game, it can be made clear that a situation advantageous to the player may occur thereafter, so that the player can be further excited during the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the jackpot.

(Modification example 1 of characteristic part 022SH)
Next, a first modification of the characteristic portion 022SH will be described. In the embodiment related to the feature section 022SH described above, the timing for adding the icon images 022SH120d and 120e indicating two blank fields to the bonus rush icon 022SH120 is during the round game in 10R probability variable jackpot A. Instead of or in addition to such a configuration, in Modification 1, the timing of adding the icon images 022SH120d and 120e indicating two blank spaces to the bonus rush icon 022SH120 is changed to a variable display. A case will be explained in which the result (jackpot symbol) is displayed before it is derived and displayed.

To be more specific, when it is determined that it is a jackpot by the pre-reading judgment, and this pending memory is determined to be a jackpot that causes a transition to the second KT state after the jackpot, the performance execution means related to the feature part 022SH, Before the variable display of the reserved memory is started, a blank icon image is added to the bonus rush icon. In addition, the performance execution means may add a blank icon image to the bonus rush icon during the variable display, if the current variable display is a jackpot and is a jackpot that moves to the second KT state after the jackpot. .

Next, the transition of the effect screen according to Modification 1 will be explained. Figure 12-12 shows the bonus
FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of transition of the production screen according to Modification 1 when changing the display mode of the rush icon. (A) of FIG. 12-12 shows the screen when the variable display corresponding to the active display 022SH110 is started during the small winning RUSH mode. Also,(
In A), a pending display 022SH111 indicating the second pending storage is displayed. The pending display 022SH111 shown in (A) is a display mode in which the expectation of a jackpot is high. Pending display 022
The pending memory corresponding to SH111 is a pending memory that has been determined to be a 10R probability variable jackpot A based on the pre-read determination.

(B) of FIG. 12-12 shows a screen during variable display corresponding to the active display 022SH110 similar to (A). In (B), bonus rush icon 022SH12
0, two icon images 022SH120d and 120e indicating a blank space are additionally displayed. As a result, from then on, the jackpot game will be controlled to 10R guaranteed variable jackpot A,
It is possible to suggest to the player that the small win RUSH mode continues.

(C) of FIG. 12-12 shows a screen on which small winning symbols are derived and displayed during the small winning RUSH mode.

In (D) of Figure 12-12, the high expectation pending display 022SH111 is the active display 02
2SH113 and the screen when variable display is started is shown. In (D), when the variable display period has elapsed, the screen changes to the screen shown in (E).

(E) of FIG. 12-12 shows the screen when the decorative pattern 022SH100 indicating 10R probability variable jackpot A is derived and displayed in the small hit RUSH mode. In (E), when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, the screen changes to the screen shown in (F).

(F) of FIG. 12-12 shows a screen during the fanfare period in the jackpot game of 10R probability variable jackpot A. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a jackpot notification image 022SH105 indicating a 10R probability variable jackpot A, and an image in which the icon image 022SH120b (second from the bottom) of the bonus rush icon 022SH120 is colored. ing. The color attached to the icon image 022SH120b is a color (for example, yellow) indicating that the small hit RUSH mode is controlled.

FIG. 12-12 (G) shows the screen during the 5th round of 10R probability variable jackpot A. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a round notification image 022SH106 that notifies that it is the 5th round of the 10R probability variable jackpot A.

(H) of FIG. 12-12 shows the screen of the ending period in the jackpot game of 10R probability variable jackpot A. Specifically, the image display device 5 includes a small win RUSH continuation notification image 022SH128 indicating that the small win RUSH mode is continuously controlled, and an icon image 022SH120c (the third one from the bottom) of the bonus rush icon 022SH120. ) is displayed with colored images. The color assigned to the icon image 022SH120c is a color (for example, red) that indicates that the jackpot has been completed.

The symbol fluctuation time in the fluctuation display of (A) to (C) in FIGS. 12-12 is, for example, 1 second. That is, the screen transitions (A) to (C) are performed in a short time. For this reason, (B)
The timing for adding the two icon images 022SH120d and 120e shown in (A) may be approximately the same as the start of the variable display, that is, the timing at which the screen shown in (A) is displayed.

Further, the timing for adding the two icon images 022SH120d and 120e may be, for example, the timing at which the pending memory corresponding to the pending display 022SH111 is stored, or the timing when the pending display 022SH111 is shifted to the active display 022SH113 and The timing may be after the start of the variable display corresponding to the active display 022SH113.

Also, before adding the two icon images 022SH120d and 120e,
You may also perform a provocative performance. For example, the inciting effect is the bonus rush icon 022SH
120. After this effect, two icon images 022SH
An effect of adding 120d and 120e may be performed. Note that after the inciting effect, a so-called fake effect may be performed in which the two icon images 022SH120d and 120e are not added.

(Modification example 2 of characteristic part 022SH)
Next, a second modification of the characteristic portion 022SH will be described. In the embodiment related to the feature section 022SH described above, a configuration in which the feature section 022 is applied to the so-called one-type pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described. Instead of such a configuration, it is also possible to apply the feature section 022SH to a so-called mixed type pachinko game machine. It should be noted that since the pachinko game machine of one type and two types is shown in the first modification of the characteristic part 020SH described above, detailed explanation will be omitted and only the necessary points will be described.

In a game machine of one type and two types, the probability of a small win is, for example, about 1/100 in the judgment based on winnings in the first starting winning hole. In addition, even if a small winning game is executed based on a winning in the first starting winning opening, the game ball almost never wins in the special variable winning ball device 17, and even if it does win, a specific It almost never passes through the area (V area). That is, it is almost impossible to expect that a gaming value will be awarded by a small winning game based on a winning in the first starting winning opening.

On the other hand, in the judgment based on winning in the second starting prize opening, the small winning probability is, for example, about 1.
/7 (≒14/100). In addition, when a small winning game is executed based on a winning in the second starting winning opening, the game ball almost enters the special variable winning ball device 17 and almost passes through a specific area (V area). . For this reason, by performing a small winning game based on winnings in the second starting winning opening, the control is almost made into a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, in pachinko gaming machines that mix one type and two types, depending on the type of jackpot (with a predetermined probability), a special state (for example, time saving state: main (a state in which variable display of the second special figure game is performed) is controlled. In the second modification, for example, the time saving state is controlled until the variable display is performed seven times in the jackpot game. Then, in the second special figure game in the special state, a small winning game is performed, thereby controlling to a jackpot gaming state again. In the jackpot game state, if the second pending memory that has been pre-read and determined to be a small hit is stored, then a number of jackpot games will be played according to the number of second pending memories that have been pre-read and determined to be a small hit. It turns out.

Here, even in a type of game that is a mixture of one type and two types, the small hit probability is regardless of the setting value.
constant (first starting port: approximately 1/100, second starting port: approximately 1/7). On the other hand, the jackpot probability differs depending on the setting value. Here, an example of the jackpot probability for each setting value based on winnings in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole is shown below.

When the setting value is "1", it is approximately 1/100.
When the setting value is "2", it is approximately 1/95.
When the setting value is "3", it is approximately 1/90.
When the setting value is "4", it is approximately 1/85.
When the setting value is "5", it is approximately 1/80.
When the setting value is "6", it is approximately 1/75.

Therefore, with regard to the so-called first hit (jackpot in the normal gaming state: jackpot based on the variable display of the first special symbol), the difference according to the set value can be increased. On the other hand, for consecutive jackpots (jackpots during time-saving games: jackpots via small winning games based on the variable display of the second special symbol), the difference according to the set value can be reduced. That is, during a time-saving game, the difference in continuation rate depending on the set value can be reduced.

In the second modification, in the jackpot gaming state, a specific display corresponding to the existence of a plurality of jackpot gaming states can be displayed as a state after being controlled to the jackpot gaming state. The specific display referred to here is a specific display (referred to as a "bonus icon") indicating that a jackpot game will be played thereafter. For example, at the start of a jackpot game, if the second pending memory number that was pre-read and determined to be a small hit is "2", the current jackpot and the second pending memory number that was pre-read and determined to be a small hit are "2".
There will be three jackpots, including the two jackpots corresponding to ``. For this reason,
A bonus icon consisting of three icon images indicating that three jackpots will be won is displayed. The timing for displaying the bonus icon may be, for example, the fanfare period of the jackpot game.

When the first jackpot game ends, a color (for example, red) indicating that the current jackpot has been completed may be added to the icon image indicating the first blank among the bonus icons. Further, when the second jackpot game ends, a color (for example, red) indicating that the second jackpot has been completed may be added to the icon image indicating the second blank among the bonus icons. Incidentally, if the second pending storage number that is pre-read and determined to be a small win is newly stored at the start of the second jackpot game, a bonus icon indicating a blank space corresponding to that number may be added.

In this way, even in the game machine of the one type and two types combination type, in the jackpot game state, a bonus icon (specific display) corresponding to the existence of a plurality of jackpots can be displayed thereafter.

In the second modification, a case has been described in which a blank space for the bonus icon is displayed in accordance with the second pending storage number that is determined to be a small hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the number of times the jackpot is expected to occur based on the variable display number controlled by the special state (time saving state), the number of blank spaces for the bonus icons corresponding to the number of times the jackpot will occur is displayed. Good too. For example, if the small hit probability based on the variable display of the second special symbol is close to 100%, the number of variable displays controlled by the special state (time saving state) and the number of jackpots that can be expected to occur are approximately the same. Since they are equal, blank spaces for bonus icons may be displayed for the number of variable displays controlled by the special state (the number of times a jackpot occurs). Specifically, if the special state is controlled by 3 variations after the jackpot game, at the start of the jackpot game, the current jackpot and the 3 jackpots corresponding to the 3 variable displays in the special state are added, 4
It is sufficient to display a bonus icon showing four blank fields indicating that the jackpot will be won twice.
Then, during the ending period of the current jackpot, the blank space corresponding to the current jackpot may be colored to indicate that the current jackpot has been completed.

Note that the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification of the characteristic part 022SH can be expressed as follows. A gaming machine capable of playing games (a pachinko gaming machine of one kind and two types mixed type), comprising a gaming state control means for controlling a gaming state and a production execution means, the gaming state control means comprising: An advantageous state that is advantageous for the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), a special state that is different from the advantageous state (for example, a small win gaming state), and a special state in which gaming value is more likely to be awarded due to the special state (for example, a time-saving state), is controllable to the special state after being controlled to the advantageous state, and is controllable to the advantageous state after being controlled to the special state, and the effect execution means: When controlled to the advantageous state, a state in which a gaming value can be given as a state after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state)
It is possible to display a specific display (for example, a bonus icon) corresponding to the presence of a plurality of.

According to the second modification, during a jackpot game, a bonus icon is displayed corresponding to the fact that there are a plurality of states in which a gaming value can be awarded as a subsequent state during the jackpot game. Thereby, for example, in the first jackpot game, it can be suggested that there are at least two or more conditions advantageous to the player after the jackpot game, including the current jackpot and the next jackpot game. Therefore, in the first jackpot game, it is possible to make it clear to the player that a jackpot may occur thereafter, so that the player can be further excited during the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the jackpot in the one-two type gaming machine.

(Modification example 3 of characteristic part 022SH)
Next, a third modification of the characteristic portion 022SH will be described. In the embodiment related to the feature section 022SH described above, the configuration for displaying a specific display (bonus rush icon) on the image display device 5 has been described. In place of or in addition to such a configuration, in modification 3, a configuration will be described in which a specific display is displayed in an area other than the image display device 5.

For example, it is also possible to display the specific display on a decorative LED or another display device (sub-liquid crystal) different from the image display device 5. First, a case where the specific display is represented by a decorative LED will be described.

When the specific display is represented by decorative LEDs, for example, a predetermined number of decorative LEDs are arranged on the game board 2. Specifically, for example, ten LEDs are arranged vertically on the game board 2. Then, when the jackpot game of 10R probability variable jackpot A is controlled, the three decorative LEDs from the bottom are lit in white in the jackpot game. The white lighting of the three decorative LEDs indicates that there is a state in which the game value is awarded three times: the current jackpot, the small win RUSH mode after the current jackpot, and the next jackpot. show.

Then, during the ending period of the first jackpot, the bottom LED of the three LEDs lit in white is lit in red. Thereby, it is possible to notify that the first jackpot has been completed. In addition, when the jackpot game state (second jackpot) is controlled in the small win RUSH mode, during the fanfare period of the jackpot, the second LED from the bottom
lights up yellow. Thereby, it is possible to notify that the small hit RUSH mode has been controlled.

Furthermore, during the ending period of the second jackpot, the third LED from the bottom is lit in red. Thereby, it is possible to notify that the second jackpot has been completed. In addition, if the second jackpot is 10R probability variable jackpot A, the jackpot game state (for example, in the 5th round)
In addition, the fourth and fifth two LEDs from the bottom may be lit in white. The white lighting of these two LEDs allows the small hit RUSH mode after the second jackpot and the 3
It is possible to notify that a new state has been added in which the game value is given for two times after the first jackpot.

Note that if the series continues, all 10 decorative LEDs may light up. In this case, it is assumed that the first round of lighting has ended, and the second round of lighting is started. Specifically, the display mode of the bottom LED may be changed and turned on. For example, the bottom LED may be lit in a color (for example, purple) that indicates the second round of lighting. Furthermore, even if the jackpot or small win RUSH mode is completed after the second round of lighting, the corresponding LEDs may be lit in a display mode different from that of the first round.

In this way, by representing the specific display with the decorative LED, it is possible to attract attention to the decorative LED, and the display area of the image display device 5 can be effectively utilized.

Next, a configuration that allows the bonus rush icon to be displayed on the sub-liquid crystal will be described. All of the bonus rush icons related to the feature section 022SH described above may be displayed on the sub-liquid crystal. Further, the bonus rush icon may be displayed in different display areas depending on the gaming state. For example, the bonus rush icon may be displayed on the image display device 5 in the jackpot game state, and may be displayed on the sub-liquid crystal in the small win RUSH mode. As a result, in the small win RUSH mode, the image display device 5 can draw attention to the prize balls in the small win game and the cumulative number of prize balls in a consecutive game, and in the jackpot game state, the bonus rush icon can draw attention to. Thereby, the image display device 5 and the sub-liquid crystal can be effectively utilized.

(Modification example 4 of characteristic part 022SH)
Next, a fourth modification of the characteristic portion 022SH will be described. In the embodiment related to the feature section 022SH described above, the display mode of the bonus rush icon indicating that the small win RUSH mode is controlled is set to one display mode (for example, yellow). In modification example 4, the small hit R
A case will be described in which a plurality of display modes are possible for the bonus rush icon indicating that the USH mode is controlled.

To be more specific, the performance execution means related to the feature section 022SH may display the bonus rush icon in a display manner according to the number of times the second KT state (small win RUSH mode) continues. For example, in the small hit RUSH mode, when a variable display of 50 fluctuations or more is executed and the control is made to the jackpot game state, the performance execution means (small win RUSH
When the degree of profit in the mode is high), the bonus rush icon is displayed in yellow.

Furthermore, in the small hit RUSH mode, when a variable display of less than 50 fluctuations is executed and the jackpot game state is controlled (when the degree of profit in the small hit RUSH mode is low), the performance execution means provides a bonus - Change the display mode of the rush icon to blue. Thereby, the number of continuations for each small win RUSH mode can be suggested to the player by the display mode of the bonus rush icon. Therefore, when the bonus rush icon is displayed in more yellow than in blue, the player can feel a sense of superiority and satisfaction, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

(Modification example 5 of characteristic part 022SH)
Next, a fifth modification of the characteristic portion 022SH will be described. In the embodiment related to the feature section 022SH described above, the display mode of the bonus rush icon when the jackpot game is completed is one display mode (for example, red). In modification 5, a case will be described in which the bonus rush icon can have a plurality of display modes when the jackpot game is completed.

To be more specific, the performance execution means related to the feature section 022SH may display the icon image of the bonus rush icon in a display manner depending on the type of jackpot.
For example, when a jackpot game of 10R variable jackpot A is played, the performance execution means changes the display mode of the bonus rush icon to red. Thereby, by displaying the bonus rush icon in a red display mode, it is possible to suggest continuation of the small win RUSH mode (continuation of consecutive wins). Further, the performance execution means displays the bonus rush icon in green when a jackpot game of 10R probability variable jackpot B or a jackpot game of 10R normal jackpot is performed. As a result, the bonus rush icon is displayed in green, thereby indicating the end of the small win RUSH mode (end of consecutive wins).

Further, in the embodiment related to the feature part 022SH, the jackpot type of the jackpot that can continue the small hit RUSH mode is one type of 10R probability variable jackpot A, but it may be multiple types. For example, the jackpot type of the jackpot that allows the small hit RUSH mode to continue may be a 5R probability variable jackpot in addition to the 10R probability variable jackpot A. In this case, when the jackpot game of 10R probability variable jackpot A is played, the production execution means is configured to provide a bonus
The display mode of the rush icon is set to a red display mode. In addition, when a jackpot game of 5R probability-variable jackpot is performed, the performance execution means displays the bonus rush icon in orange. As a result, the awarded gaming value can be indicated by the display mode of the bonus rush icon. Therefore, when the bonus rush icon is displayed more in red than orange, the player can feel a sense of superiority and satisfaction, which can improve the interest of the game.

(Variation example 6 of characteristic part 022SH)
Next, a sixth modification of the characteristic portion 022SH will be described. In the embodiment related to the feature section 022SH described above, as shown in FIG. 2 icon images from the bottom
The second icon image is 022SH120b. Instead of or in addition to such a configuration, in modification 6, an icon whose display mode is to be changed before the start of the jackpot game (before the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed) The image may be the third icon image 022SH120c from the bottom (see FIG. 12-11).

Specifically, in the embodiment related to the feature section 022SH described above, before the start of the jackpot game, the second icon image 022SH120b from the bottom of the bonus rush icon,
A case has been described in which a display mode is provided with a color (yellow) indicating that the small winning RUSH mode is controlled. In modification example 6, before the start of the jackpot game (before the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed), the third icon image 022 from the bottom of the bonus rush icon
The SH 120c (see FIG. 12-11) may be displayed in a colored manner to indicate that a jackpot has been executed.

Specifically, if there is a pending memory that has been determined to be a jackpot by the pre-read determination, an effect may be performed in which the three eye icon images 022SH120c from the bottom are colored red. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suggest that the next jackpot will be executed before the jackpot starts.

Further, the display mode after the change of the three eye icon images 022SH120c from the bottom is not limited to the display mode in which red is added, but may be a display mode according to the jackpot type. Specifically, for example, if the jackpot type obtained by look-ahead determination for the pending memory corresponding to the pending display 022SH111 is 10R probability variable jackpot A, the icon image 022 of the three eyes from the bottom
The SH120c may be displayed in red, and in the case of 10R probability variable jackpot B or normal jackpot, it may be displayed in pink. As a result, the three eye icon images from the bottom 022SH
The display mode (color) of 120c can indicate the type of jackpot to be executed.

In addition to this, for example, if the jackpot type obtained by look-ahead judgment for the pending memory corresponding to the pending display 022SH111 is 10R probability variable jackpot A, the icon image 022SH120c of the three eyes from the bottom is changed to the flashing speed. It may be possible to make it easier to blink quickly. Further, in the case of 10R probability variable jackpot B or normal jackpot, the icon images 022SH120c of the three eyes from the bottom may be set to a lighting mode with a slow blinking speed. Thereby, the type of jackpot that is likely to be executed can be suggested by the display mode (flashing mode) of the three eye icon images 022SH120c from the bottom.

(Modification example 7 of characteristic part 022SH)
Next, a seventh modification of the characteristic portion 022SH will be described. In the embodiment related to the feature section 022SH described above, the bonus rush icon can be displayed from the start of the jackpot that triggers the start of the small win RUSH mode until the end of the jackpot that ends the small win RUSH mode. And so. In place of or in addition to such a configuration, in Modification Example 7, even if the small winning RUSH mode ends and the transition to the chance time mode (first KT state) occurs (falls), the bonus A case where the rush icon can be continuously displayed will be explained.

In the small hit RUSH mode, when a jackpot game of 10R probability variable jackpot B or 10R normal jackpot is executed, the game is controlled to chance time mode (first KT state: high probability/high base state or low probability/high base state). Here, it is quite possible that a jackpot will occur even during the chance time mode. Therefore, in the seventh modification, the bonus rush icon can be continuously displayed even during the chance time mode.

For example, in the chance time mode, all icon images of bonus rush icons are displayed in a colored state. Further, the timing for erasing the bonus rush icon may be at the time of transition from the chance time mode to the normal mode. In addition, if a jackpot game of 10R probability variable jackpot A is played in the chance time mode, that is, if a jackpot game that moves to the small hit RUSH mode is played, a blank space will be displayed in the bonus rush icon being displayed. All you have to do is add and display the icon image.

Further, the bonus rush icon may be continuously displayed only in the chance time mode in the high probability/high base state. When controlled to a high probability/high base state, at least
It is confirmed that another jackpot will be held. For this reason, during the execution of the jackpot game (10R guaranteed variable jackpot B) that transitions (falls) from the small hit RUSH mode to the chance time mode,
An effect may be performed in which one blank icon image is added to the bonus rush icon. As a result, even if the player falls into the chance time mode, the player plays the game with the hope that at least one more jackpot that is guaranteed to occur will become the 10R probability variable jackpot A (transition to the small hit RUSH mode). be able to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest during the game time mode.

In addition, whether the chance time mode is controlled in a high probability/high base state or in a low probability/high base state,
This is a production mode that does not allow the player to determine whether the control is in a high base state. Here, in the chance time mode, if a bonus rush icon with one blank icon image added is displayed, it would be possible for the player to determine that it is being controlled in a high probability/high base state. Become. For this reason, when displaying the bonus rush icon while being controlled in a high probability/high base state, instead of controlling the chance time mode, a separate It may also be controlled to be in production mode.

Also, when controlled to a high probability/high base state, a performance judgment is made as to whether or not to continue displaying the bonus rush icon, and depending on the result of the performance judgment, the bonus rush icon continues to be displayed. It may also be displayed. Specifically, if a positive determination result is obtained by the performance determination, a bonus rush icon to which one blank icon image is added may be displayed in the high probability/high base state. As a result, even if the bonus rush icon is not displayed, there is a possibility that it is being controlled in a high probability/high base state, so the player can play in the hope that it is being controlled in a high probability/high base state. can do.

Note that in Modification 7 as well, when adding a blank icon image, a suggestive effect (for example, see FIGS. 12-8 (L) and (M)) may be performed. Also, as a suggestive performance,
Prepare effects that have a high possibility that two blank icon images will be added, effects that have a high possibility that one image will be added, effects that have a high possibility that no icon images will be added, and select one of them based on the judgment. You can even try to execute the performance. Thereby, the interest of the suggestive performance can be improved.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 022SH)
In relation to the above-mentioned feature section 022SH, there are known pachinko gaming machines that are controlled to a special state in which the small winning gaming state is controlled more frequently than the normal state (for example, JP-A-2015-
156952). Furthermore, pachinko gaming machines are known that display a preview image corresponding to the fact that the gaming state after the jackpot will be a high probability state and a high base state during a round game in a jackpot gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011 -135166). However, simply notifying the player of the gaming status after the end of the jackpot does not provide the player with a clear understanding of the status in which gaming value can be awarded afterward, resulting in insufficient interest.

(Means E1)
Therefore, the gaming machine of the means E1 according to the characteristic part 022SH is a gaming machine that can play games (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 that can play games), and has a gaming state control that controls the gaming state. A means (for example, a part that executes steps S120 to S128 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) shown in FIG. 6) and a performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120). , the gaming state control means provides an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small winning gaming state), and a gaming value is provided by the special state. It is possible to control the special state (for example, the second KT state) in which it is easy to be defeated, and to control to the special state after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the current jackpot game state: 10R probability variable jackpot A),
After being controlled to the special state, the next jackpot game state using the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol in FIG. 12-2: 10R probability variable jackpot A, 10R probability variable jackpot B, and 10R normal When the performance execution means is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the current jackpot game state: 10R probability variable jackpot A), the production execution means is capable of controlling the effect to the advantageous state after being controlled to the advantageous state. A state in which gaming value can be given as a state (for example,
A specific display corresponding to the existence of multiple states (second KT state and next jackpot game state) (Figure 1
2-6 (C) bonus rush icon 022SH120) can be displayed (for example, the process performed by the performance control CPU 120 shown in step 022SHS15 of FIG. 12-3).

According to such a configuration, the specific display can suggest that, in an advantageous state, there are a plurality of states in which gaming value can be awarded as states after the advantageous state. Thereby, it is possible to clarify the state in which a gaming value can be given later depending on the advantageous state.
Therefore, for example, it is possible to increase the player's sense of satisfaction in an advantageous situation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in an advantageous state.

(Means E2)
Further, in the gaming machine of the means E2 according to the characteristic part 022SH, in the gaming machine described in the means E1, the performance execution means is configured to control the advantageous state (for example, the current jackpot game state: 10R probability variable jackpot A) and the game machine according to the means E1. Corresponds to a controlled state (for example, current jackpot gaming state: 10R probability variable jackpot A) among states that include a plurality of states that can be given value (for example, the second KT state and the next jackpot gaming state) The display mode of the specific display can be changed by changing the display mode of the specific display (a bonus rush icon 022SH120 is added to the red display mode indicating that the jackpot has been completed, as shown in step 022SHS52 of FIG. 12-5 and FIG. 12-6 (E)). (The display mode can be changed.)

According to such a configuration, the display mode of the specific display can be changed according to the progress of the game. This makes it possible to clarify the state in which gaming value has already been awarded. Therefore, the player can easily grasp the progress status of the game with respect to the state in which the game value is given, depending on the display mode of the specific display. This allows the player to feel satisfied because the game value has already been awarded. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in an advantageous state.

(Means E3)
Further, in the gaming machine of the means E3 according to the characteristic part 022SH, in the gaming machine described in the means E1 or the means E2, the specific display may include a plurality of different display modes (for example, a red display mode and a yellow display mode). ), and the production execution means selects the advantageous state (for example, the current jackpot game state: 10R probability variable jackpot A) and a plurality of states in which the gaming value can be awarded (for example, the second KT state and the next jackpot A display mode corresponding to a controlled state (for example, step 022SHS52 in FIG. 12-5 or FIG. 12-6 (E
), the red display mode corresponding to the completion of the jackpot game and step 022 in FIG. 12-3
It is possible to display a specific display such as the SHS 16 or the yellow display mode shown in FIG. 12-6 (E) indicating that the control is in the second KT state.

According to such a configuration, the type of state in which gaming value has already been given can be clarified by the display mode of the specific display. Thereby, the player can easily understand the type of state in which gaming value is given. Therefore, the player can obtain a feeling of satisfaction that corresponds to the type of state in which the game value has already been awarded. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Means E4)
Further, in the gaming machine of the means E4 according to the characteristic part 022SH, in the gaming machine according to any one of the means E1 to the means E3, the performance execution means may perform a specific mode corresponding to the controlled advantageous state (for example, 12-6(E), a red display mode corresponding to the completion of the jackpot game) and a specific display mode of a predetermined mode corresponding to the existence of multiple states in which the gaming value can be awarded (for example, Bonus rush icon 022SH12 in Figure 12-8 (M)
Blank icon images 022SH120d, 120e) shown in 0 can be displayed.

According to such a configuration, depending on the display mode of the specific display, it is possible to clarify a state in which a gaming value has already been provided and a state in which a gaming value may be provided thereafter. Thereby, the player can easily grasp the state in which a gaming value has been awarded and the state in which a gaming value can be awarded in the future. Therefore, the player can feel a sense of satisfaction because the game value has already been awarded, and a sense of expectation that there will be a situation in which the game value can be awarded later. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Means E5)
Further, in the gaming machine of the means E5 according to the characteristic part 022SH, in the gaming machine described in any one of the means E1 to the means E4, the performance execution means is configured to control the advantageous state (for example, the current jackpot game state) and the The specific display can be displayed over a plurality of states (e.g., FIG. 12- As shown in 6(E) and (F), the bonus rush icon 022SH120 can be displayed from the jackpot gaming state to the second KT state.

According to such a configuration, even if the state changes from an advantageous state to a state where gaming value can be awarded, it is possible to continuously show the player the state where gaming value can be awarded. This results in
Even if the state changes, the player can continue to feel satisfied because the game value has already been awarded and expect that there will be a state where the game value can be awarded later. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest in the game.

(Means E6)
Further, in the gaming machine of the means E6 according to the characteristic part 022SH, in the gaming machine described in any one of the means E1 to the means E5, the performance execution means is in the advantageous state (for example, the current jackpot game state: 10R The gaming value given in the probability variable jackpot A jackpot) (for example,
The total award pitch count display 022SH130 in Figure 12-6(E) and the special state (for example, the 2nd K
For example, the total prize ball number display 022 in Figure 12-6 (H)
SH130) can be displayed across the advantageous state (for example, the first jackpot game state) and the special state.

According to such a configuration, even if the state changes, the gaming value given in the advantageous state and the special state can be clearly shown. Thereby, the player can continue to grasp the awarded gaming value even if the situation changes. Therefore, for example, if the awarded gaming value is large, the player will feel satisfied, and if the awarded gaming value is less than the player expected, the player's motivation to play will increase. can stir up. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Means E7)
Further, in the gaming machine of the means E7 according to the characteristic part 022SH, in the gaming machine described in any one of the means E1 to the means E6, the performance execution means is in an advantageous state after being controlled to the special state (for example, , the next jackpot game state), a suggestive effect (for example, the suggestive effect image in FIG. 12-8(L)) that suggests that the special state will be controlled after the latter advantageous state is controlled. 022SH116), and the effect of the above-mentioned suggestion effect (for example, Fig. 12-
8(M), a predetermined mode (for example, FIG. 12 -4 step 022SHS36 or the blank display mode shown in the bonus rush icon 022SH120 in FIG. 12-8(M)) can be displayed.

According to such a configuration, in a later advantageous state, it is possible to determine whether there are multiple states in which gaming value can be given afterward (specifically, whether or not consecutive games will continue). . Therefore, even in the later advantageous state, the interest in the advantageous state can be improved in the same way as in the previous advantageous state.

(Means E8)
Further, as the gaming machine of the means E8 according to the characteristic part 022SH, in the gaming machine described in any one of the means E1 to the means E7, an advantageous state before being controlled to the special state (for example, the current jackpot game state) : A common number of times (for example, 10 rounds) in the 10R probability variable jackpot A) and the advantageous state after being controlled to the special state (for example, the next jackpot game state)
A round game is executed, and the performance execution means displays a common display mode (for example, FIG. 12-6 ( E)
The display mode of the bottom icon image 022SH120a shown in FIG. 12-7 (N) and the display mode of the top icon image 022SH120c shown in FIG. 12-7 (N) can display a specific display in a common display mode.

According to such a configuration, the gaming value given in each advantageous state can be made equal, so that the specific display corresponding to the advantageous state can be made into a common display mode. Specifically, the display mode (for example, a blank field) of a specific display corresponding to an advantageous state that can be given is set to be a common display mode (for example, a blank field with the same shape) for the earlier advantageous state and the later advantageous state. It can be done. Further, the display mode (for example, red) of the specific display corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can also be made the same display mode for the previous advantageous state and the subsequent advantageous state. Therefore, for example, the player can easily grasp the estimated gaming value that can be awarded or the estimated gaming value that has been awarded, based on the number of specific displays. Therefore, the interest of specific display can be improved.

(Means E9)
Further, as the gaming machine of the means E9 according to the characteristic part 022SH, in the gaming machine described in any one of the means E1 to the means E8, a variable display of the first identification information (for example, a first special symbol) and a second The apparatus further includes variable display execution means (for example, the process executed by the CPU 103 shown in FIGS. 10-17 and 10-21) that can execute the variable display of the identification information (for example, the second special symbol) in parallel. , the game state control means selects a specific display result (
For example, when a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed, it can be controlled to the advantageous state, and the variable display of the second identification information is more advantageous for the player than the variable display of the first identification information (
For example, as shown in the jackpot type determination tables in Figures 12-2 (A) and (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol has a higher percentage of 10R probability variable jackpot A. (in addition, a jackpot with a large number of rounds is selected), the effect execution means controls to the advantageous state based on the specific display result being derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information. 12-3, the specific display is erased (for example, step 0 in Figure 12-3).
22SHS13: YES → Step 022SHS17: YES → Step 022SHS1
8), which is performed by the production control CPU 120).

To be more specific, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature section 022SH is capable of simultaneously and parallelly performing a variable display of the first identification information and a variable display of the second identification information, and a variable display of the second identification information. A specific display can be displayed when the vehicle is controlled to be in an advantageous state based on. Furthermore, since the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature section 022SH has a lower advantage for the player in the variable display of the first identification information than in the variable display of the second identification information, the specific display in the variable display of the first identification information is Due to the result being derived and displayed, the state in which gaming value can be awarded may disappear. Here, if the specific display is displayed even though the state in which a gaming value can be awarded has disappeared, the interest in the game will decrease. For this reason, the gaming machine of means E9 erases the specific display when being controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display of the first identification information. According to such a configuration, by being controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display of the first identification information,
It is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

(Means E10)
Further, in the gaming machine of the means E10 according to the characteristic part 022SH, in the gaming machine described in any one of the means E1 to the means E9, the gaming state control means may control a specific display result (for example, The effect execution means can be controlled to the advantageous state when a jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed, and the effect execution means is configured to perform control before the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display (for example, during execution of the variable display). ), the specific display can be displayed (for example, in Figure 12-
12(B) blank icon images 022SH120d and 120e can be added).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase variations in the timing of displaying the specific display and the timing of changing the display mode of the specific display. Therefore, it is possible to improve not only the interest in the special state but also the interest in the game during the variable display.

(Means E11)
Further, in the gaming machine of the means E11 according to the characteristic part 022SH, in the gaming machine described in the means E10, regarding the variable display that has not yet started, a display result indicating that the display result of the variable display is controlled to the advantageous state. The performance execution means can display the specific display based on the determination result of the pre-start determination means (for example, in FIG. 12). As shown in -11(B), the icon image 022S
The display mode of H120b can be changed to a yellow display mode indicating that the control is in the second KT state).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase variations in the timing of displaying the specific display and the timing of changing the display mode of the specific display. Therefore, it is possible to improve not only the interest in the special state but also the interest in the game during the hold storage before the variable display.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 026SH)
Next, the gaming machine related to the feature section 026SH will be explained. The gaming machine related to the feature section 026SH is a gaming machine that can play games. In this embodiment, a pachinko game machine 1 that can play games will be explained as an example.

The gaming machine according to the feature section 026SH includes a gaming state control means (state control means) and a performance execution means. The game state control means is realized, for example, by the CPU 103 of the main board 11. The performance execution means is realized, for example, by the performance control CPU 120 of the performance control board 12. In addition to the above, the gaming machine according to the feature section 026SH includes, for example, variable display execution means, pre-start determination means, suspension storage means, and setting means. The variable display execution means, the pre-start determination means, the hold storage means, and the setting means are, for example, the CP of the main board 11.
This is realized by U103.

The gaming state control means controls the gaming state. The game state control means is capable of controlling an advantageous state, a special state, a special state, and a non-special state. The advantageous state is an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and is, for example, a jackpot game state. The special state is a gaming state different from the advantageous state, and is, for example, a small winning gaming state.

The special state is a state in which gaming value is easily given due to the special state, for example, the second KT
state (high probability/low base state). The second KT state is a gaming state where a small hit is likely to occur, and a gaming state where a game ball is likely to enter the special prize opening. Note that the first KT state (high probability/high base state or low probability/high base state) is a gaming state in which small wins are likely to occur, but it is also a gaming state in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the special prize opening. . That is,
The first KT state is a state in which almost no gaming value is awarded due to the special state.

In the gaming machine according to characteristic part 026SH, it is possible to control to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state, and it is possible to control to an advantageous state after being controlled to a special state. The advantageous game mentioned here is a jackpot that causes the player to move to the second KT state after the jackpot game state ends. The gaming state control means can control to the second KT state after controlling to the jackpot gaming state, and can control to the jackpot gaming state again after controlling to the second KT state.

The performance execution means executes various performances depending on the situation. For example, a meter performance or a character performance is executed. Details will be described later.

(Regarding the movable body of the gaming machine related to characteristic part 026SH)
FIG. 13-1 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of a portion of the game board 2 (near the image display device 5) of the game machine related to the feature section 026SH. For example, the gaming machine according to the feature part 026SH is shown in FIG.
As shown in 3-1(A), a movable body 026SH32, which is an accessory, is provided near the image display device 5. The movable body 026SH32 follows the control of the production control board 12 as shown in FIG. 13-1(B).
As shown in (C), it operates between a first state (initial state) and a second state (tilted state). For example, the movable body 026SH32 operates from the first state to the second state to the first state,
It operates as follows: first state → second state → first state → second state → first state, first state → state between the first state and second state (temporarily stopped) → second state → second state It may operate in one state, or it may operate in the order of the first state -> a state between the first state and the second state (temporarily stopped) -> the first state.

(Regarding the meter display of gaming machines related to feature section 026SH)
FIG. 13-2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the meter performance executed in the gaming machine related to the feature section 026SH. The gaming machine related to the feature part 026SH is shown in FIG. 13-2 during variable display.
Execute the meter production as shown in . Figures 13-2 (A) to (D) show the production control board 1
2 shows each scene in which the meter effect is executed according to the control of 2.

In FIG. 13-2(A), the meter gauge section 026SHMTG on the left side informs which of four levels ("1" to "4") the meter value is. Figure 13-2
In (A), the meter gauge section 026SHMTG reports that the meter value is "1", which is the first stage (initial stage). In FIG. 13-2(A), the level display 026SHLV above the meter gauge section 026SHMTG is
The level corresponding to the meter value notified by SHMTG is notified. Figure 1
In 3-2(A), the level is at the first stage (initial stage) according to the level display 026SHLV.
It is reported that the level is "LEVEL 1". In other words, in FIG. 13-2(A), the meter value is "1" which is the first stage (initial stage), and the level is "1", which is the first stage (initial stage), according to the meter gauge section 026SHMTG and the level display 026SHLV. This is a scene where it is announced that the current level is "LEVEL 1". Note that a first small pattern 026SH101 corresponding to a decorative pattern is displayed at the lower left. Note that in the following description, the meter value may be referred to as the number of meters.

Figure 13-2 (B) shows the meter gauge section 026SHMTG and the level display 026S.
This is a scene in which the HLV informs that the meter value is "2", which is the second stage, and the level is "LEVEL 2", which is the second stage. FIG. 13-2 (C) shows that the meter value is "3", which is the third stage, and the level is "LEVEL 3", which is the third stage, according to the meter gauge section 026SHMTG and the level display 026SHLV. This is the scene where the information is being reported. Figure 13-2 (D) shows the meter gauge section 026SHMTG,
And a scene where the level display 026SHLV informs that the meter value is "4", which is the fourth stage (final stage), and the level is "LEVEL 4", which is the fourth stage (final stage). It is.

In the gaming machine related to the characteristic part 026SH, when the meter value reaches the final stage of "4" in the meter performance, the movable body 026SH32 may operate (when the accessory performance is executed) (Figure 13-6 (See (D)). In addition, in the gaming machine related to the feature part 026SH, when the meter value reaches the final stage of "4" in the meter performance, it becomes a super reach (SP) (see Fig. 13-5 (A) etc.) .

FIG. 13-3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating various timings. Specifically, Figure 13-3 (
A) is the meter performance and role performance (movable body 026SH) in the non-KT state (normal state).
32 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the execution timing of the effect of operating 32. FIG. 13-3(B) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the execution timing of the accessory performance in the second KT state (during small hit RUSH). Note that FIG. 13-3(B) will be described later.

Specifically, Figure 13-3 (A) shows the execution timing of the meter performance and the character performance when the meter performance and the character performance are executed in a variable display that becomes super reach. This is an example. In FIG. 13-3(A), Ta0 to Ta10 are periods during variable display. Ta10 to Ta11 are periods during which the display is stopped. Ta0～Ta
1 is the period before reach. Ta1 to Ta9 are normal reach periods. Ta9
~Ta10 is the period of super reach.

In FIG. 13-3(A), Ta2 to Ta8 are the execution periods of the meter performance. Ta
2 to Ta8, Ta2 to Ta3 are scenes where the meter value is notifying that the meter value is "1" as shown in FIG. 13-2(A). Ta3 to Ta4 are scenes where the meter value is notifying that it is "2" as shown in FIG. 13-2(B). Ta4 to Ta7 are scenes where the meter value is notifying that it is "3" as shown in FIG. 13-2(C). Ta7 to Ta8 are shown in Figure 1.
This is a scene like 3-D (C) where the meter value is notifying that it is "4". In other words, Ta3 is the timing at which the meter value is updated (added) from "1" to "2" in the meter performance. Ta4 is the timing at which the meter value is updated (added) from "2" to "3" in the meter performance. In Ta7, the meter value is "
This is the timing at which the value is updated (added) from ``3'' to ``4''.

There are multiple types of meter performance execution modes (meter performance patterns) (Figure 13-5
(A)), FIG. 13-3(A) shows an example of meter performance according to one execution mode (specifically, meter performance pattern "MEP5").

In FIG. 13-3(A), Ta5 to Ta6 are the execution period of the accessory performance. Ta5 is the timing when the movable body 026SH32 first starts moving from the initial position. Ta6 is the timing at which the movable body 026SH32 finally stops at the initial position. For example, movable body 02
When 6SH32 operates from the first state → second state → first state, the first state (Ta5) →
The second state→first state (Ta6). For example, the movable body 026SH32 is in the first state →
When operating in the order of second state → first state → second state → first state, the sequence is first state (Ta5) → second state → first state → second state → first state (Ta6).

FIG. 13-4 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern (variation time) of special symbols and decorative symbols in the gaming machine according to the feature section 026SH. Specifically, FIG. 13-4 is an example of the first special symbol variation pattern table for non-KT. In the gaming machine related to the feature part 026SH, when the non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state), the first special symbol variation pattern table for non-KT times shown in FIG. 10-7(A) is used. 13-4 for non-KT time.
A special symbol variation pattern table is selected and a variation pattern is determined. That is, in the gaming machine according to the feature part 026SH, when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the non-KT state, any one of the first variable patterns #101 to #109 shown in FIG. 13-4 is executed. A variation pattern is determined.

Note that the first variation pattern #104 is a variation pattern in which the super reach is off, and is a variation pattern that develops from the normal reach to the super reach A and finally becomes out of reach.
The first variation pattern #105 is a variation pattern in which the super reach is out of reach, and is a variation pattern that develops from the normal reach to super reach B and ultimately becomes out of reach. The first variation pattern #108 is a variation pattern of a super reach jackpot, and is a variation pattern that develops from a normal reach to a super reach A and finally becomes a jackpot. The first variation pattern #109 is a variation pattern of a super reach jackpot, and is a variation pattern that develops from a normal reach to a super reach B and finally becomes a jackpot. The reliability of the jackpot is super reach B > super reach A.

FIGS. 13-5 and 13-6 are explanatory diagrams for explaining meter effects and the like. Specifically, Figure 13-5 (A) shows the contents of the meter performance pattern (mode of increase in meter value, etc.)
It shows. FIG. 13-5(B) is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not to perform the meter effect.
FIG. 13-6(A) is an example of the determination ratio of the meter effect pattern when the set value is "1" or "2". FIG. 13-6(B) is an example of the determination ratio of the meter performance pattern when the set value is "3" and "4". FIG. 13-6(C) is an example of the determination ratio of the meter performance pattern when the set value is "5" or "6". FIG. 13-6(D) is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the accessory effect (the effect of moving the movable body 026SH32) when the meter value is "4".

As shown in FIG. 13-5(A), the meter effect pattern "MEP1" is a meter effect pattern in which the meter value increases 0 times. In other words, in the meter performance based on the meter performance pattern "MEP1", the meter value is "1" shown in Figure 13-2 (A).
(initial stage). In the meter production pattern "MEP2", the number of times the meter value increases is once, and the meter value reaches "2" (reaches "2") (that is, "
3" or "4") is a meter production pattern. In other words, in the meter performance based on the meter performance pattern "MEP2", the meter value is "
1 (initial stage)" to "2 (second stage)" shown in FIG. 13-2(B). The meter performance pattern "MEP3" is a meter performance pattern in which the meter value increases twice, and the meter value reaches "3" (reaches "3") (that is, does not reach "4"). be. In other words, in the meter performance using the meter performance pattern "MEP3", the meter value changes from "1 (initial stage)" shown in Figure 13-2 (A) to "2 (second stage)" shown in Figure 13-2 (B). stage)" and further increases to "3 (third stage)" shown in FIG. 13-2(C). The meter performance pattern "MEP4" is a meter performance pattern in which the meter value increases once, and the meter value reaches "3" (that is, does not reach "4"). In other words, in the meter performance using the meter performance pattern "MEP4", the meter value changes from "1 (initial stage)" shown in Figure 13-2 (A) to "2 (initial stage)" shown in Figure 13-2 (B). 2 (stage 2)", the stage increases to "3 (third stage)" shown in FIG. 13-2(C). The meter effect pattern "MEP5" is a meter effect pattern in which the meter value increases three times and the meter value reaches "4" (reaches up to "4"). In other words, in the meter performance based on the meter performance pattern "MEP5", the meter value is
It increases from "1 (initial stage)" shown in A) to "2 (second stage)" shown in Figure 13-2 (B), and further increases to "3 (second stage)" shown in Figure 13-2 (C). Figure 13-2
It increases to "4 (final stage)" shown in (D).

The meter effect patterns "MEP6" and "MEP7" are meter effect patterns in which the meter value increases twice, and the meter value reaches "4". Specifically, in the meter performance using the meter performance pattern “MEP6”, the meter value is as shown in Figure 13-
From “1 (initial stage)” shown in Figure 13-2 (A) to “2 (second stage)” shown in Figure 13-2 (B)
13-2 (C) without going through "3 (third stage)" shown in Figure 13-2 (C).
Increase to "4 (final stage)" shown in D). In addition, meter production pattern "MEP7"
In the meter production, the meter value is "1 (initial stage)" shown in Figure 13-2 (A).
, it increases to "3 (third stage)" shown in Figure 13-2 (C) without passing through "2 (second stage)" shown in Figure 13-2 (B), and furthermore, Increase to "4 (final stage)" shown in 13-2 (D). The meter effect pattern "MEP8" is a meter effect pattern in which the meter value increases once and the meter value reaches "4". In other words, in the meter performance using the meter performance pattern "MEP8", the meter value changes from "1 (initial stage)" shown in Figure 13-2 (A) to "2 (initial stage)" shown in Figure 13-2 (B). 2 stages)” and Figure 13-
It increases to "4 (final stage)" shown in FIG. 13-2 (D) without going through "3 (third stage)" shown in FIG. 13-2 (C).

In the gaming machine according to the feature section 026SH, as shown in FIG. 13-5(B), whether or not to perform the meter performance is determined based on the set value and the fluctuation pattern. According to the example shown in Figure 13-5 (B), if the setting value is "1" or "2", the unreachable result will occur (first fluctuation pattern #101, #102 in Figure 13-4). The decision ratio of execution is 0%, and when the normal reach is off (first fluctuation pattern #103 in Figure 13-4), the decision ratio of execution is 8%, and the super reach is off (Figure 13-4). 4 first fluctuation pattern #104, #10
5), the determination ratio of execution is 24%, and in the case of a small hit (variation pattern #106 in Figure 13-4), the determination ratio of execution is 0%, and normal reach jackpot ( In the case of the first fluctuation pattern #107 in Figure 13-4), the decision ratio of execution is 16%, and in the case of a super reach jackpot (first fluctuation pattern #108, #109 in Figure 13-4) The decision rate for execution is 40%.

In addition, when the setting value is "3" or "4", the decision ratio of execution is 0% when the non-reach is off, and the decision ratio of execution is 10% when the normal reach is off. , If the super reach is a miss, the percentage of decisions to be executed is 30%, if it is a small hit, the percentage of decisions to be made is 0%, and if it is a normal reach jackpot, the percentage of decisions to be made is 30%. is 20%, and in the case of a super reach jackpot, the percentage of decisions to execute is 50%.
%. In addition, when the setting value is "5" or "6", the decision ratio of execution is 0% when the non-reach is off, and the decision ratio of execution is 12 when the normal reach is off.
%, if the super reach is off, the decision percentage of execution is 36%, if it is a small hit, the decision percentage of execution is 0%, and if it is a normal reach jackpot, the decision percentage of execution is 36%. The decision ratio is 24%, and in the case of a super reach jackpot, the decision ratio of execution is 60%.

In the example shown in Figure 13-5 (B), when the out-of-reach result or the small hit occurs, it does not depend on the setting value (even if the setting value is between "1" and "6"). ), no meter display is performed. In addition, when the normal reach is off, when the super reach is off, when the normal reach is a jackpot, or when the super reach is a jackpot, the execution rate of the meter effect depends on the setting value, and the setting value is "5" or " It is most likely to be executed when the setting value is ``6'', and the least likely to be executed when the setting value is ``1'' or ``2''.

In the gaming machine related to the feature section 026SH, the meter performance pattern is determined based on the set value and the fluctuation pattern, as shown in FIGS. 13-6(A) to 13-6(C). As an example, if the setting value is "1" and the normal reach is off, the determination ratio of the meter effect pattern "MEP1" is 50%, as shown in Figure 13-6 (A), and the meter effect pattern is 50%. The determination ratio of the pattern "MEP2" is 40%, and the determination ratio of the meter production pattern "MEP3" is 40%.
” is 8%, the meter production pattern “MEP4” is 2%, and each of the meter production patterns “MEP5” to “MEP8” is 0%. As another example, if the setting value is "3" and the super reach is off, see Figure 13-6.
As shown in (B), the determination ratio of the meter performance pattern "MEP1" is 0%, the determination ratio of the meter performance pattern "MEP2" is 0%, and the determination ratio of the meter performance pattern "MEP1" is 0%.
The determination ratio for "P3" is 20%, and the determination ratio for meter production pattern "MEP4" is 20%.
%, the determination ratio of the meter production pattern "MEP5" is 45%, the determination ratio of the meter production pattern "MEP6" is 10%, the determination ratio of the meter production pattern "MEP7" is 5%, and the determination ratio of the meter production pattern "MEP7" is 5%. The determination rate of the production pattern “MEP8” is 0%.

In the examples shown in Figures 13-6(A) to 13-6(C), regardless of the setting value (the setting value is
” to “6”), in the case of normal reach, it is possible to determine a meter production pattern (“MEP1” or “MEP2”) in which the meter value does not reach “3”, but in the case of super reach, is a meter production pattern (“MEP1”) in which the meter value does not reach “3”.
” or “MEP2”). In other words, in the gaming machine according to the feature part 026SH, regardless of the setting value, if the meter value does not reach "3" in the meter performance, the super reach will not develop.

In addition, in the examples shown in Figures 13-6 (A) to 13-6 (C), regardless of the setting value (regardless of whether the setting value is "1" to "6"), the super reach In this case, the meter value is "4"
However, in the case of normal reach, the meter performance pattern ("MEP5") that reaches "4" can be determined.
” to “MEP8”) are not determined. That is, in the gaming machine according to the feature part 026SH, regardless of the setting value, when the meter value reaches "4" in the meter performance, the game always develops into a super reach.

In addition, in the examples shown in Figures 13-6(A) to 13-6(C), the setting value is "1" or "2".
”, the setting value is “3” or “4”, and the setting value is “5” or “6”.
The determination ratio of the meter performance pattern (specifically, "MEP3" to "MEP7") when the super reach is off is made different. Specifically, the setting value is “1”.
” or “2”, the meter production pattern (“MEP3” or “MEP4”) where the meter value stops at “3” is determined at a determination rate of 46% (23% + 23%), whereas the meter value is determined at a determination rate of 46% (23% + 23%) 54% of meter production patterns (“MEP5” to “MEP8”) reach “4”
It is determined at a determination ratio of (42% + 8% + 4%). If the setting value is "3" or "4", the meter production pattern where the meter value stops at "3" is determined at a determination ratio of 40% (20% + 20%), but when the meter value stops at "4". The meter performance pattern reached is 60% (4
5%+10%+5%). When the setting value is "5" or "6", the meter production pattern where the meter value stops at "3" is determined at a determination rate of 34% (17% + 17%), but when the meter value stops at "4". The meter production pattern reached is 66% (48
%+12%+6%).

In addition, in the examples shown in Figures 13-6 (A) to 13-6 (C), the super reach jackpot is achieved regardless of the setting value (regardless of whether the setting value is "1" to "6"). In this case, the meter performance pattern "MEP8" can be determined, but in other cases, the meter performance pattern "MEP8" can be determined.
do not decide. That is, in the gaming machine according to the feature section 026SH, the meter performance pattern "MEP8" is a meter performance pattern that ensures a jackpot (super reach jackpot) regardless of the set value. In addition, in the gaming machine related to feature part 026SH, the determination ratio of the meter production pattern "MEP8" when a super reach jackpot occurs is fixed (5%) regardless of the setting value.
I have to.

In the gaming machine related to the feature section 026SH, when the meter value becomes "4" in the meter performance, an accessory performance (a performance in which the movable body 026SH32 is operated) may be performed.
In the gaming machine according to the feature section 026SH, as shown in FIG. 13-6(D), based on the meter effect pattern, whether or not to execute the accessory effect when the meter value becomes "4" is determined. Figure 1
According to the example shown in 3-6(D), when the meter performance pattern is "MEP5", the determination ratio of execution is 50%, and when the meter performance pattern is "MEP6", the determination ratio of execution is 50%. is 70%, and when the meter performance pattern is "MEP7", the determination ratio of execution is 80%, and when the meter performance pattern is "MEP8", the determination ratio of execution is 100%.

In other words, when the meter production pattern is "MEP5", the meter value changes (increases) from "1" to "2" to "3" to "4" as shown in Figure 13-5 (A). However, when the meter value changes from "3" to "4", the accessory effect is executed at a rate of 50%. When the meter production pattern is "MEP6", the meter value changes (increases) from "1" to "2" to "4", but when the meter value changes from "2" to "4", the rate is 70%. A role performance is performed. When the meter production pattern is “MEP7”, the meter value is “1”.
”→“3”→“4”, but when the meter value changes from “3” to “4”, the accessory effect is executed at a rate of 80%. When the meter production pattern is "MEP8", the meter value changes (increases) from "1" to "4", but the meter value changes from "1" to "4".
When this happens, the accessory performance is executed at a rate of 100%.

In addition, in the gaming machine related to feature part 026SH, the meter value is "4" in the meter performance.
When this is not the case, the performance of the accessory is not performed (the determination ratio of execution is 0%). When the meter value does not reach "4" in the meter performance, there are times when the meter value does not reach "4" in the meter performance pattern ("MEP1" to "MEP4"), or when the meter value does not reach "4".
Although the meter effect pattern reaches "4"("MEP5" to "MEP7"), when the meter value does not reach "4" (in "MEP5", the meter value changes from "1" to "2"
” or when the meter value changes from “2” to “3”, the meter value changes from “1” to “MEP6”.
(when the meter value changes from “1” to “3” in “MEP7”).

FIG. 13-7 is a flowchart showing an example of the performance determination process (performance determination process that determines meter performance, character performance, etc.) executed in the variable display start setting process of S171 in the performance control process shown in FIG. be. It is assumed that at the start of the flowchart of FIG. 13-7, the gaming state is a normal state (mainly a non-KT state in which the first special symbol changes).

In the effect determination process shown in FIG. 13-7, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the meter effect based on the set value and the fluctuation pattern (step 026 SHS100).
. For example, when the set value is "1" and the variation pattern is out of normal reach (first variation pattern #103), the production control CPU 120 determines whether to execute at a determination rate of 8%, and the set value is "4". ” and the fluctuation pattern is a super reach jackpot (first fluctuation pattern #108, #109), the decision to execute is determined at a 50% determination rate (Figure 13-5
(See (B)).

Following step 026SHS100, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been determined that the meter performance is to be executed (step 026SHS101). If it is not determined that the meter effect is to be executed (step 026 SHS101; NO), the effect determination process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the meter performance is to be executed (step 026SHS101; Y
ES), the performance control CPU 120 determines a meter performance pattern based on the set value and the fluctuation pattern (step 026 SHS102). For example, when the setting value is "1" and the variation pattern is out of normal reach (first variation pattern #103), "M
50% of "EP1", 40% of "MEP2", 8% of "MEP3", 2% of "MEP4",
The ratio of "MEP5" to 0%, "MEP6" to 0%, "MEP7" to 0%, and "MEP8" to 0% is determined (see FIG. 13-6(A)). Also, when the setting value is “4” and the fluctuation pattern is super reach jackpot (first fluctuation pattern #108, #109), “M
"EP1" 0%, "MEP2" 0%, "MEP3" 5%, "MEP4" 15%, "
45% of ``MEP5'', 15% of ``MEP6'', 15% of ``MEP7'', 5% of ``MEP8''
% (see Figure 13-6(B)).

Following step 026SHS102, the production control CPU 120 performs step 026SHS102.
Set the meter production pattern determined by HS102 (step 026 SHS103
).

Following step 026 SHS103, the production control CPU 120 determines that the meter value is "4".
” (Step 02)
6SHS104). That is, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether any one of "MEP5" to "MEP8" has been determined (set). If the meter effect pattern in which the meter value reaches "4" has not been determined (set) (step 026 SHS104; NO), the effect determination process is ended. In other words, decide (set) one of "MEP1" to "MEP4"
If so, the performance determination process is ended.

On the other hand, if you decide (set) a meter production pattern that will cause the meter value to reach "4" (
Step 026SHS104; YES), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the accessory performance when the meter value becomes "4" based on the meter performance pattern (Step 026SHS105). Specifically, when the meter effect pattern is "MEP5", the performance control CPU 120 determines whether to execute at a 50% decision rate, and when the meter effect pattern is "MEP6", determines whether to execute at a 70% rate. When the meter effect pattern is "MEP7", execution is determined at a determination rate of 80%, and when the meter effect pattern is "MEP6", execution is determined at a determination rate of 100% (Fig. 13
-6 (D)).

Following step 026SHS105, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been determined that the accessory performance is to be executed (step 026SHS106). If it is not determined that the performance of the accessory is to be performed (step 026 SHS106; NO), the performance determination process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the role performance is to be performed (step 026SHS106; YES
), the performance control CPU 120 sets whether to execute the accessory performance (specifically, a flag indicating that the accessory performance is to be executed, information for controlling the execution of the accessory performance, etc.) (step 026 SHS107).
, the performance determination process ends.

FIG. 13-8 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation related to the feature section 026SH. Specifically, Figure 1
3-8 is the meter performance (meter performance pattern is "
FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating an example of the production operation of the MEP 5'') and the role performance. In FIG. 13-8, the display on the screen of the image display device 5 is in the order of FIG. 13-8 (A) → FIG. 13-8 (B) → FIG. 13-8 (C) → FIG. 13-8 (D). Transition.

FIG. 13-8(A) shows a scene where the meter value is "3" in the meter performance (specifically, a scene between Ta4 and Ta5 in FIG. 13-3(A)). In FIG. 13-8(A), the meter gauge section 026SHMTG and the level display 026SHLV notify the meter value "3" and the level "LEVEL3". In addition, Figure 13-8(A) is
Since this is a scene before the execution of the accessory performance, the movable body 026SH32 is in the first state (initial state).

Figure 13-8 (B) shows a scene in which the movable body 026SH32 moves as a performance effect and is in the second state (tilted state) (specifically, Ta5 and Ta6 in Figure 13-3 (A) scene between)
It is. In Figure 13-8(B), the oval image 026SH32E is used as the effect of the role production.
F01 is displayed.

Figure 13-8 (C) is a scene where the meter value changes from "3" to "4" in the meter performance (specifically, the scene between Ta7 and Ta8 in Figure 13-3 (A)). . Figure 13-8
In (C), the meter gauge section 026SHMTG and the level display 026SHLV are as follows:
The meter value "4" and the level "LEVEL4" are reported. In Figure 13-8 (C), the star image 026SHMTMAXE is the effect of the meter value reaching MAX.
F is displayed. In addition, as part of the meter production, the star image 026SHMTMAXEF
You may also display the star image 026SHMTMA as other effects related to the meter effect.
XEF may be displayed. Note that since FIG. 13-8(C) is a scene after the execution of the accessory performance, the movable body 026SH32 is in the first state (initial state).

Figure 13-8 (D) shows a scene that develops into super reach (specifically, Figure 13-3 (A)
(a scene between Ta8 and Ta9, a scene at Ta9, or a scene slightly after Ta9). In FIG. 13-8(D), an SP development notification image 026SHSP is displayed that notifies the type of super reach to be developed (super reach A in the example of FIG. 13-8(D)) and reliability.

Note that when the meter value reaches MAX, the development destinations (super reach A, super reach B) and the reliability of the development destination may be suggested or notified. In the example shown in FIGS. 13-8(C) and (D), the aspect of star image 026SHMTMAXEF in FIG. 13-8(C) (FIG. 13-8(
In example C), the number of stars (3 stars) is the reliability of the development destination Super Reach A (Figure 13-8 (D)
In the example, the number of stars suggests 3).

(About the accessory performance in the second KT state of the gaming machine related to the characteristic part 026SH)
The gaming machine related to the feature section 026SH can perform the accessory performance (the performance of operating the movable body 026SH32) even when in the second KT state (during small hit RUSH). Figure 13-3 (
B) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the execution timing of the accessory production in the second KT state (during small hit RUSH), as described above.

In FIG. 13-3(B), Tb0 to Tb1 are periods during variable display. Tb1～Tb
2 is a period during which the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed (the small winning symbol corresponding to the small winning is stopped and displayed). Tb
3 to Tb8 is the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 17 that is opened in response to a small winning (opening period depending on the small winning game state). Tb4 is the timing of the small winning prize (the timing when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning hole of the special variable winning ball device 17). Tb
5 to Tb6 is the execution period of the accessory performance. Tb5 is the timing when the movable body 026SH32 first starts moving from the initial position. Tb6 is the timing at which the movable body 026SH32 finally stops at the initial position. Tb7 is the timing to update the total number of prize balls.

FIG. 13-9 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation related to the feature section 026SH. Specifically, Figure 1
3-9 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation of the accessory performance in the second KT state (during small win RUSH) and an example of the performance operation when the jackpot game state is reached. In FIG. 13-9, the display on the screen of the image display device 5 is as follows: FIG. 13-9 (A) → FIG. 13-9 (B) → FIG. 13-9 (C) → FIG. 13-9
Transition occurs in the order of (D) → Figure 13-9 (E) → Figure 13-9 (F) → Figure 13-9 (G) → Figure 13-9 (H).

FIG. 13-9(A) shows a scene (eg, the scene between Tb1 and Tb2 in FIG. 13-3(B)) where the small winning symbol (for example, "135") is stopped and displayed. In Figure 13-9(A),
A mode display 026SHMD including the words "small hit rush mode" is displayed in the upper left, a right-handed hitting notification image 026SHMG including the words "right-handed hitting" in the upper right, and a total prize pitch number display 026SH130 that notifies the total number of prize balls. is displayed, and the second small pattern 026S corresponding to the decorative pattern is displayed at the bottom right.
H102 is displayed. Note that since FIG. 13-9(A) is a scene before the performance of the accessory, the movable body 026SH32 is in the first state (initial state).

Figure 13-9 (B) shows a scene where the movable body 026SH32 operates as a performance effect and is in the second state (tilted state) (specifically, Tb5 and Tb6 in Figure 13-3 (B) scene between)
It is. In Figure 13-9 (B), a small hit is won (in Figure 13-9 (B), two game balls are won)
Alternatively, a small hit notification image 026SHKN is displayed that informs the player of the number of pitches obtained by winning a small hit. In addition, if we summarize the relationship between the small hit prize, the small hit prize notification image 026SHKN, and the accessory performance, as the performance corresponding to the small hit prize, the small hit prize notification image 026SH
It may be interpreted that KN is displayed and the accessory effect is executed. Furthermore, it may be interpreted that a role-playing effect is executed as the effect corresponding to winning a small hit, and the winning notification image 026SHKN is displayed in response to the execution of the role-playing effect (for example, as an effect of the role-playing effect). . In addition,
When displayed in response to the execution of the accessory performance, the name of the winning notification image 026SHKN may be a corresponding name (for example, star image 026SHMTMAXEF2, etc.).

In Figure 13-9 (C), the small hit prize notification image 026SHKN is erased and the total prize ball number display is 0.
This is a scene (for example, scene Tb7 in FIG. 13-3(B)) in which 26SH130 is updated (the number of acquired balls reported by small hit notification image 026SHKN is added). Figure 13
-9(C), the total prize pitch number update effect is executed using the total prize pitch number update image 026SHKSEF. In addition, the total award pitch number update image 026SHKSEF is the total award pitch number display 026SH13
Although this is a part of the total award ball number update effect that affects 0, the total award ball number update image 026SHKSEF can also be taken as an effect of a role play effect.

Figure 13-9 (D) corresponds to the next hold and is displayed variably (for example, Figure 13-3
This is the scene immediately after Tb8 in (B)). Figure 13-9 (E) shows the jackpot symbol (for example, “7
77'') is displayed in a stopped state. Figure 13-9 (F) shows the total number of balls that are announced at the end of the second KT state in a relatively large manner, the current total number of prize balls and the number of balls won by winning small hits out of the total number of prize balls. This is a scene where the prize ball number display 026SH130D is displayed. Figure 1
3-9 (G) is a scene where a fanfare performance is being performed. Figure 13-9 (H) shows a scene in the first round.

In Figure 13-9 (G), the number of balls awarded this time is displayed in the upper left corner 026SH14 to notify the number of balls awarded this time.
0 and 026SHOAZ to notify the jackpot symbol are displayed, right-handed hitting notification image 026SHMG including the words "right-handed hitting" in the upper right corner, and total prize pitch number display 026SH13 to notify the total number of prize balls.
0 is displayed, and the round number display 02 at the bottom right notifies you of what round the current round is.
6SH106 is displayed.

(Regarding the background effect of gaming machines related to feature section 026SH)
The gaming machine according to the feature section 026SH can execute a background effect that changes the background image.
In addition, the gaming machine related to the feature part 026SH has a background effect as well as an accessory effect (movable body 026S).
It is possible to execute the effect that causes H32 to operate.

FIG. 13-10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating various timings. Specifically, Figure 13-1
0(A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the execution timing of background effects and accessory effects. Figure 13-1
0(B) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the execution timing of active display effects and accessory effects by active display. Note that FIG. 13-10(B) will be described later.

In FIG. 13-10(A), Tc0 to Tc10 are periods during variable display. Tc10
-Tc11 is a period during stop display. Tc0 to Tc1 is the period before reach. Tc
1 to Tc2 is the normal reach period. Tc2 to Tc10 are the super reach periods.

In FIG. 13-10(A), Tc3 to Tc10 are the execution periods of the background effect. Tc
3 to Tc10, Tc3 to Tc6 are scenes in which the background image is in a first special mode (for example, yellow) that is different from the normal mode (for example, blue). Tc6 to Tc9 are scenes in which the background image is in a second special mode (for example, green) that is different from the normal mode. Tc9～
Tc10 is a scene in which the background image is in a third special mode (for example, red) that is different from the normal mode. In other words, in Tc3, the background effect is started and the background image is in the normal mode (blue).
This is the timing at which the color changes from to the first special mode (yellow). Tc6, in the background production,
This is the timing at which the background image changes from the first special mode (yellow) to the second special mode (green). Tc9 is the timing at which the background image changes from the second special mode (green) to the third special mode (red) in the background effect.

There are multiple types of background effect execution modes (background effect patterns) (Figure 13-11 (A)
), Figure 13-10(A) shows one execution mode (specifically, the background production pattern "MEP
3) shows an example of the background effect.

In FIG. 13-10(A), Tc4 to Tc5 are the execution periods of the accessory production. Tc4
is the timing when the movable body 026SH32 first starts moving from the initial position. Tc5 is
This is the timing when the movable body 026SH32 finally stops at the initial position. Tc7 to Tc8 are the execution period of the accessory performance. Tc7 is the timing when the movable body 026SH32 first starts moving from the initial position. Tc8 is the timing at which the movable body 026SH32 finally stops at the initial position.

FIG. 13-11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating background effects and the like. Specifically, Figure 13-1
1(A) shows the contents of the background effect pattern (the mode of change of the background image, etc.). Figure 13
-11(B) is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not to perform the background effect. Figure 13-11(C) is
This is an example of a determination ratio of a background effect pattern. FIG. 13-11(D) is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the accessory effect when the background image is in the second special mode (green). Figure 13-11 (
E) is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the accessory effect when the background image is in the third special mode (red).

As shown in Figure 13-11(A), in the background effect pattern "HEP1", the number of times the background image changes is one, and the background image reaches the first special mode (yellow) (reaches "yellow"). ) (that is, it does not turn "green" or "red"). In other words, in the background effect using the background effect pattern "HEP1", the background image changes from the normal mode (blue) to the first mode.
Changes to a special mode (yellow). The background effect pattern "HEP2" is a background effect pattern in which the background image changes twice, and the background image reaches the second special mode (green) (reaches "green"). In other words, in the background effect using the scenic effect pattern "HEP2," the background image changes from the normal mode (blue) to the first special mode (yellow), and further changes from the first special mode (yellow) to the second special mode (green). ). The background effect pattern "HEP3" is a background effect pattern in which the background image changes three times and the background image reaches the third special mode (red) (reaches "red"). In other words, in the background effect using the scenic effect pattern "HEP3," the background image changes from the normal mode (blue) to the first special mode (yellow), and further changes from the first special mode (yellow) to the second special mode (green). ), and further changes from the second special mode (green) to the third special mode (red). The background effect pattern "HEP4" is a background effect pattern in which the background image changes twice and the background image reaches the third special mode (red) (reaches "red"). Specifically, in the background effect using the scenic effect pattern "HEP4," the background image changes from the normal mode (blue) to the first special mode (yellow), and then changes without passing through the second special mode (green). , changes from the first special mode (yellow) to the third special mode (red).

In the gaming machine related to the feature section 026SH, as shown in FIG. 13-11(B), whether or not to perform the background effect is determined based on the variation pattern. According to the example shown in Figure 13-5(B),
When the super reach is off (first variation patterns #104 and #105 in FIG. 13-4), the determination ratio of execution is 25%. In the case of a super reach jackpot (first variation pattern #108, #109 in FIG. 13-4), the determination ratio of execution is 50%. On the other hand, there are cases where the non-reach is off (first variation patterns #101 and #102 in Figure 13-4), cases where the normal reach is off (first variation pattern #103 in Figure 13-4), and cases where there is a small hit (the first variation pattern #103 in Figure 13-4). 13-4 fluctuation pattern #106) or a normal reach jackpot (first fluctuation pattern #107 in Figure 13-4), the determination ratio of execution is 0%. It is. In other words, in the gaming machine according to the characteristic part 026SH, the background effect is not executed when the game does not develop into a super reach.

In the gaming machine according to the feature section 026SH, the background effect pattern is determined based on the variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 13-11(C). According to the example shown in Figure 13-11(C),
If the super reach is off (first variation pattern #104, #105 in Figure 13-4), the background image will change to the background effect pattern (“HEP1”) where the background image stops at “first special mode (yellow)”.
is determined at a determination rate of 70%, the background effect pattern ("HEP2") where the background image stops at "second special mode (green)" is determined at a determination rate of 20%, and the background image is determined at a determination rate of "third special mode". (
The background effect pattern (“HEP3” or “HEP4”) that reaches “Red)” is 10% (8%
+2%). In addition, in the case of a super reach jackpot (first variation pattern #108, #109 in Figure 13-4), the background effect pattern ("HEP1") where the background image stops at "first special mode (yellow)" It is determined with a determination rate of 10%, and the background image is
The background effect pattern (``HEP2'') that stops at the ``second special mode (green)'' is determined at a determination rate of 20%, and the background effect pattern (``HEP2'') in which the background image reaches the "third special mode (red)"
P3" or "HEP4") is determined at a determination rate of 70% (50%+20%).

In the gaming machine related to the feature section 026SH, when the background image is in the "second special mode (green)", an accessory effect (effect that moves the movable body 026SH32) may be executed. In the gaming machine related to the characteristic part 026SH, as shown in FIG. 13-11(D), it is determined whether or not to execute the accessory effect when the background image becomes the "second special mode (green)" based on the background effect pattern. It is determined. According to the example shown in FIG. 13-11(D), when the background effect pattern is "HEP2", the determination ratio of execution is 40%, and when the background effect pattern is "HEP3", the determination rate of execution is 40%. The percentage is 60%.

Further, in the gaming machine related to the feature section 026SH, even when the background image is in the "third special mode (red)", the accessory effect (the effect of moving the movable body 026SH32) may be performed. In the gaming machine related to the characteristic part 026SH, as shown in FIG. 13-11(E), it is determined whether or not to execute the accessory effect when the background image becomes the "third special mode (red)" based on the background effect pattern. It is determined. According to the example shown in Figure 13-11(E), the background effect pattern is "HEP3".
When this is the case, the determination ratio of execution is 80%, and when the background effect pattern is "HEP4", the determination ratio of execution is 100%.

In other words, when the background effect pattern is "HEP2", the background image changes from "normal mode (blue)" to "first special mode (yellow)" to "second mode" as shown in Figure 13-11(A). However, when changing from "first special mode (yellow)" to "second special mode (green)", the role effect is executed at a rate of 40% (Figure 13- 11(D)). When the background effect pattern is "HEP3", the background image changes from "normal mode (blue)" to "first special mode (yellow)" to "second special mode" as shown in Figure 13-11(A). (green)”→
It changes from "3rd special mode (red)" to "1st special mode (yellow)" → "2nd special mode (
When the character changes to "green)", the role effect is performed at a rate of 60% (see Figure 13-11 (D)), and changes from "second special mode (green)" to "third special mode (red)". 80% when
The role performance is executed at a rate of (see FIG. 13-11(E)). The background production pattern is “HE
P4", the background image changes from "normal mode (blue)" to "first special mode (yellow)" to "third special mode (red)" as shown in Figure 13-11(A). However, when changing from "first special mode (yellow)" to "third special mode (red)", the accessory effect is executed at a rate of 100% (see FIG. 13-11(E)).

(Regarding the active display effect of gaming machines related to feature section 026SH)
The gaming machine according to the feature section 026SH is capable of performing an active display effect using active display. Furthermore, the gaming machine related to the feature section 026SH is capable of performing an active display performance as well as an accessory performance (a performance that causes the movable body 026SH32 to operate).

In FIG. 13-10(B), Td0 to Td9 are periods during variable display. Td9～T
d10 is a period during which the display is stopped. Td0 to Td1 is the period before reach. Td1～
Td5 is the normal reach period. Td5 to Td9 is the super reach period.

In FIG. 13-10(B), Td0 to Td10 are the execution period of the active display effect (
In other words, this is the period during which the active display is displayed as a response to the change. Td0
- Td10, Td0 to Td4 are scenes in which the active display is in a normal mode (for example, gray). Td4 to Td8 are scenes in which the active display is in a first special mode (for example, green) that is different from the normal mode. Td8 to Td9 are scenes in which the active display is in a second special mode (for example, red) different from the normal mode. In other words,
Td4 is the timing at which the active display changes from the normal mode (gray) to the first special mode (green) in the active display effect. Td8 is active display performance,
This is the timing at which the active display changes from the first special mode (green) to the second special mode (red).

Although there are multiple types of execution modes (active display effect patterns) for active display effects (see Figure 13-12 (A)), one execution mode (specifically, active display effect patterns) is shown in Figure 13-10 (B). An example of an active display effect using the display effect pattern "AEP3" is shown.

In FIG. 13-10(B), Td2 to Td3 are the execution period of the accessory performance. Td2
is the timing when the movable body 026SH32 first starts moving from the initial position. Td3 is
This is the timing when the movable body 026SH32 finally stops at the initial position. Td6 to Td7 is an execution period of the accessory performance. Td6 is the timing when the movable body 026SH32 first starts moving from the initial position. Td7 is the timing at which the movable body 026SH32 finally stops at the initial position.

FIG. 13-12 is an explanatory diagram illustrating active display effects and the like. in particular,
FIG. 13-12(A) shows the contents of the active display performance pattern (presence or absence of change in active display, mode of change, etc.). FIG. 13-12(B) is an example of the determination ratio of the active display effect pattern. FIG. 13-12(C) is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the accessory production during the first operation period (Td2 to Td3 in FIG. 13-10(B)). Figure 13-12 (
D) is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the accessory production during the second operation period (Td6 to Td7 in FIG. 13-10(B)).

As shown in FIG. 13-12(A), the active display effect pattern "AEP1" is an active display effect pattern in which the number of active display changes is 0 times. In other words,
The active display changes even at the first change timing (Td4 in Figure 13-10(B)).
This is an active display performance pattern that does not change in the normal mode (gray) even at the change timing (Td8 in FIG. 13-10(B)). Active display performance pattern “AEP2”
is an active display effect pattern in which the active display changes once, and the active display reaches the first special mode (green) (reaches "green") (that is, does not become "red"). . Specifically, the active display changes from the normal mode (gray) to the first special mode (green) at the first change timing, and remains unchanged in the first special mode (green) at the second change timing. This is a pattern of performance. The active display effect pattern "AEP3" is an active display effect pattern in which the active display changes twice, and the active display reaches the second special mode (red) (reaches "red"). Specifically, the active display changes to the normal mode (gray) at the first change timing.
to the first special mode (green), and at the second change timing, the first special mode (green)
This is a pattern of an active display effect that changes from the first to the second special mode (red). The active display performance pattern "AEP4" is an active display performance pattern in which the number of times the active display changes is one, and the active display reaches the second special mode (red) (reaches "red"). Specifically, the active display does not change in the normal mode (gray) at the first change timing, and changes from the normal mode (gray) to the second special mode (green) without passing through the first special mode (green) at the second change timing. This is an active display effect pattern that changes to a special mode (red).

In the gaming machine related to the feature section 026SH, as shown in FIG. 13-12(B), the active display effect is determined based on the variation pattern. According to the example shown in FIG. 13-12(B), when the non-reach is out of reach (first fluctuation patterns #101 and #102 in FIG. 13-4), the active display performance pattern ("AEP1") is set to 100. Determined by percentage. That is, in the gaming machine according to the characteristic part 026SH, the active display remains in the normal mode (gray) and does not change in the case of non-reach.

Also, according to the example shown in Figure 13-12 (B), there are cases where the non-reach is off (first fluctuation patterns #101 and #102 in Figure 13-4), and there are cases where the normal reach is off (the first variation pattern in Figure 13-4). 1 variation pattern #103) or a small hit (variation pattern #106 in Figure 13-4)
, or in the case of a normal reach jackpot (first variation pattern #107 in Figure 13-4), the active display effect pattern (“HEP3” or "HEP4") is not determined. In other words, in the gaming machine according to the characteristic part 026SH, if the game becomes a reach but does not develop into a super reach, the active display does not become the "second special mode (red)".

In the gaming machine related to the characteristic part 026SH, the first operation period (Td2 to T in FIG. 13-10(B))
In d3), an accessory performance (a performance that moves the movable body 026SH32) may be performed. In the gaming machine according to the feature section 026SH, as shown in FIG. 13-12(C), it is determined whether or not to perform the accessory presentation in the first operation period based on the active display presentation pattern.
According to the example shown in FIG. 13-12(C), when the active display performance pattern is "AEP1", the determination ratio of execution is 10%, and the active display performance pattern is "AEP1".
2", the determination ratio of execution is 30%, and the active display performance pattern is "
When the active display effect pattern is "AEP3", the determination ratio of execution is 80%, and when the active display effect pattern is "AEP4", the determination ratio of execution is 10%.

Note that when the active display performance pattern is "AEP1", the first operation period (T
d2 to Td3), the accessory effect is executed at an execution rate of 10%, but at the subsequent first change timing (Td4), the active display remains in the normal mode (gray) and does not change. In other words, the 10% is based on the fake performance of the character (in which the active display does not change after the performance of the character). It is also the execution rate of the role-playing effect (in which the active display does not change afterward). The same applies when the active display effect pattern is "AEP4".

In the gaming machine related to the characteristic part 026SH, the second operation period (Td6 to T in FIG. 13-10(B))
In d7), an accessory performance may be performed. In the gaming machine related to feature part 026SH,
As shown in FIG. 13-12(D), it is determined whether or not to perform the accessory performance in the second operation period based on the active display performance pattern. According to the example shown in FIG. 13-12(D), when the active display performance pattern is "AEP1", the determination ratio of execution is 0%, and when the active display performance pattern is "AEP2", the determination ratio of execution is 0%. The decision ratio is 10%
When the active display performance pattern is "AEP3", the determination ratio of execution is 80%, and when the active display performance pattern is "AEP4", the determination ratio of execution is 100%.

Note that when the active display performance pattern is "AEP2", the second operation period (T
From d6 to Td7), the accessory effect is executed at a 10% execution rate, but at the subsequent second change timing (Td8), the active display remains in the first special mode (green and does not change. In other words, the 10% , which is also the execution rate of fake character effects (character effects whose active display does not change later).

FIG. 13-13(A) shows an example of the production determination process (production determination process for determining background production, character production, etc.) executed in the variable display start setting process of S171 in the production control process shown in FIG. FIG. Note that at the start of the flowchart in FIG. 13-13(A), the gaming state is the normal state (mainly the non-KT state where the first special symbol changes).
shall be.

In the effect determination process shown in FIG. 13-13(A), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the background effect based on the variation pattern (step 026 SHS200). For example, when the variation pattern is out of normal reach (first variation pattern #103), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute at a determination rate of 0% (see FIG. 13-11(B)). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 determines execution at a determination rate of 25% when the fluctuation pattern is a super reach hit (first fluctuation pattern #104, #105), and the fluctuation pattern is a super reach jackpot (first fluctuation pattern #104, #105). Patterns #108 and #109), execution is determined at a determination rate of 50% (see FIG. 13-11(B)).

Following step 026SHS200, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the background effect has been determined to be executed (step 026SHS201). If it is not determined that the background effect is to be executed (step 026 SHS201; NO), the effect determination process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the background effect is to be executed (step 026SHS201; YES
), the effect control CPU 120 determines the background effect pattern based on the variation pattern (
Step 026 SHS202). Specifically, when the variation pattern is out of super reach (first variation pattern #104, #105), the performance control CPU 120
"EP1" is determined to be 70%, "HEP2" to 20%, "HEP3" to 8%, and "MEP4" to 2% (see Figure 13-11(C)). In addition, when the variation pattern is a super reach jackpot (first variation pattern #108, #109), the performance control CPU 120 sets "HEP1" to 10%, "HEP2" to 20%, "HEP3" to 50%, "MEP4"
is determined at a rate of 20% (see Figure 13-11(C)).

Following step 026SHS202, the production control CPU 120 performs step 026SHS202.
The background effect pattern determined in HS202 is set (step 026 SHS203).

Following step 026SHS203, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the accessory performance based on the background performance pattern (step 026SHS205). Specifically, when the background effect pattern is "HEP2", the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the role performance when the background image is in the "second special mode (green)" at a rate of 40%. (See Figure 13-11(D)). In addition, when the background effect pattern is "HEP3", the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the role effect effect when the background image is in the "second special mode (green)" at a determination rate of 60% ( (See Figure 13-11 (D)), and when the background image is in the "third special mode (red)", whether or not to perform the accessory production is determined at a determination rate of 80% (See Figure 13-11 (E)) ). In addition, when the background effect pattern is "HEP4", the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the accessory effect when the background image is in the "third special mode (red)" at a determination rate of 100% ( (See Figure 13-11(E)).

Following step 026SHS205, the performance control CPU 120 sets whether or not to execute the accessory production (specifically, a flag indicating whether or not to perform the accessory production, information for controlling the execution of the accessory production, etc.) (step 026SHS207). , the performance determination process ends.

FIG. 13-13(B) is an example of the performance determination process (performance determination process that determines active display performance, character performance, etc.) executed in the variable display start setting process of S171 in the performance control process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows. It is assumed that at the start of the flowchart of FIG. 13-13(B), the gaming state is a normal state (mainly a non-KT state in which the first special symbol changes).

In the performance determination process shown in FIG. 13-13(B), the performance control CPU 120 determines an active display performance pattern based on the fluctuation pattern (step 026SHS302
). For example, when the variation pattern is out of super reach (first variation pattern #104, #105), the production control CPU 120 increases "AEP1" by 10% and "AEP2" by 10%.
is determined at a ratio of 80%, "AEP3" to 8%, and "AEP4" to 2% (Figure 13-12 (
See B). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 has a variation pattern of super reach jackpot (
1st fluctuation pattern #108, #109), “AEP1” is set to 10% and “AE
P2” is determined at a ratio of 30%, “AEP3” is determined at 30%, and “AEP4” is determined at a ratio of 30% (Figure 1
(See 3-12(B)).

Following step 026SHS202, the production control CPU 120 performs step 026SHS202.
Set the active display effect pattern determined in HS202 (step 026SHS
303).

Following step 026SHS303, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the accessory performance based on the active display performance pattern (step 026SHS305).
Specifically, when the active display performance pattern is "AEP1", the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the accessory performance in the first operation period at a determination rate of 10% (FIG. 13-12(C)). (see FIG. 13-12(D)), whether or not to perform the accessory performance in the second action period is determined at a determination rate of 0% (see FIG. 13-12(D)). Furthermore, when the active display performance pattern is "AEP2", the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the accessory performance during the first operation period at a determination rate of 30% (see FIG. 13-12(C)); Whether or not to perform the accessory production in the second action period is determined at a determination rate of 10% (see FIG. 13-12(D)). In addition, when the active display performance pattern is "AEP3", the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the accessory performance during the first operation period at a determination rate of 80% (
(See FIG. 13-12(C)), and whether or not to perform the accessory production in the second action period is determined at a determination rate of 80% (see FIG. 13-12(D)). Further, when the active display performance pattern is "AEP4", the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the accessory performance during the first operation period at a determination rate of 10% (see FIG. 13-12(C)), Whether or not to perform the accessory performance in the second action period is determined at a determination rate of 100% (see FIG. 13-12(D)).

Following step 026SHS305, the performance control CPU 120 sets whether or not to execute the accessory production (specifically, a flag indicating whether or not to perform the accessory production, information for controlling the execution of the accessory production, etc.) (step 026SHS307). , the performance determination process ends.

FIGS. 13-14 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation related to the feature section 026SH. Specifically, the left side of Figure 13-14 ((A1) → (B1) → (C1) transition) is a non-KT state (normal state).
It is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation of the background performance (the background performance pattern is "HEP3") and the character performance in . In addition, the right side of Figure 13-14 ((A2) → (B2) → (C2) → (D2) transition) shows the active display performance (the active display performance pattern is "AEP3") in the non-KT state (normal state). ) and a diagram illustrating an example of the performance operation of the role performance.

On the left side of Figure 13-14, Figure 13-14 (A1) is a scene where the background image is in the "first special mode (yellow)" in the background effect (specifically, Figure 13-10 (A) Tc3 of
and Tc4). In addition, in Figure 13-14 (A1), the code 026SHH
KY indicates the background image of the first special mode (yellow). It is also the scene where the battle begins as part of the Super Reach production.

On the left side of FIG. 13-14, FIG. 13-14 (B1) shows a movable body 026 as a role performance.
A scene where SH32 operates and is in the second state (tilted state) (specifically, Figure 13-10
This is the scene between Tc4 and Tc5 in (A). It is also a scene where a battle is taking place as part of Super Reach's production.

On the left side of Figure 13-14, Figure 13-14 (C1) shows a scene (specifically teeth,
This is the scene between Tc6 and Tc7 in FIG. 13-10(A). In addition, Figure 13-14 (C1)
, the code 026SHHK-G indicates the background image of the second special mode (green).
It is also the scene where the battle (second time) begins as part of the Super Reach performance.

On the right side of FIG. 13-14, FIG. 13-14 (A2) shows a scene where the active display 026SH110 is displayed in "normal mode (gray)" in the active display effect (specifically, FIG. 13-10 (B ) is the scene between Td1 and Td2 of ). Figure 13-14 (A2)
, the white circle of the active display 026SH110 indicates the normal mode (gray) active display 026SH110. In the example of FIG. 13-14 (A2), the display mode of the active display 026SH110 is the same as the pending display (symbol A in the figure) indicating the first pending storage.

On the right side of FIG. 13-14, FIG. 13-14 (B2) shows a movable object 026 as a role performance.
A scene where SH32 operates and is in the second state (tilted state) (specifically, Figure 13-10
This is the scene between Td2 and Td3 in (B).

On the right side of FIG. 13-14, FIG. 13-14 (C2) shows the active display 026SH1
This is a scene (specifically, a scene immediately before Td4 in FIG. 13-10(B)) in which an action effect for 10 (effect by character image 026SHSY) is being performed.

On the right side of Figure 13-14, Figure 13-14 (D2) shows a scene where the active display changes from the normal mode (gray) to the "first special mode (green)" in the active display effect (specifically, the 13-10 (B) between Td4 and Td5). Figure 13-14 (D2
), the diagonally lined circle of the active display 026SH110 indicates the active display 026SH110 in the first special mode (green).

(Regarding the performance of accessories during the interval period of gaming machines related to characteristic part 026SH)
The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 026SH performs the role production (movable body 02) during the interval period.
6SH32) can be executed.

FIGS. 13-15 are explanatory diagrams explaining various timings. Specifically, Figure 13-1
5(A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the execution timing of the accessory performance during the interval period of the jackpot game state. FIG. 13-15(B) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the execution timing of the accessory performance before the jackpot (suddenly certain). Note that FIG. 13-15(B) will be described later.

In FIG. 13-15(A), Te1 to Te5 are the interval periods of the jackpot gaming state. Among Te1 to Te5, Te2 to Te3 are the execution periods of the accessory production. Te2 is the timing when the movable body 026SH32 first starts moving from the initial position. Te3 is the timing at which the movable body 026SH32 finally stops at the initial position. Te4 is the timing to update the round number display 026SH106 (update the round number display 026SH106 to the number corresponding to the round game to be played after the end of the interval period).

(About the performance when a sudden jackpot occurs in a gaming machine related to feature part 026SH)
The gaming machine according to characteristic part 026SH, when it becomes "2R definite strange jackpot (sudden definite jackpot)",
It is possible to perform a role performance (a performance that moves the movable body 026SH32). Furthermore, Figure 10-
In the example shown in 5(A), if the variable symbol is the first special symbol, the 2R probability variable jackpot will not occur, but in the following explanation regarding the gaming machine related to feature section 026SH, the variable symbol is the first special symbol. Even in the case of symbols, it will be a 2R probability-variable jackpot.

In FIG. 13-15(B), Tf0 to Tf3 are periods during variable display. Tf3～T
f4 is a period in which the display is stopped (for example, a special symbol corresponding to a sudden jackpot is stopped and displayed). Tf1 to Tf2 are the execution period of the accessory performance. Tf1 is the movable body 026SH3
2 is the timing when the robot first starts moving from the initial position. Tf2 is the timing at which the movable body 026SH32 finally stops at the initial position. Tf5 is the timing when the special variable winning ball device 7 starts to open.

FIGS. 13-16 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation related to the feature section 026SH. Specifically, the left side of FIG. 13-16 (transition from (A3) to (B3) to (C3) to (D3)) is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation of the accessory performance in the jackpot game state. Also, the right side of Figure 13-16 ((A4)
→ (B4) → (C4) → (D4) transition) is a diagram showing an example of the production operation of the accessory production in the non-KT state (normal state).

On the left side of FIG. 13-16, FIG. 13-16 (A3) shows a scene where the 5th round is being played as a round game (for example, the interval period in FIG. 13-15 (A) is the 5th round and the 6th round). Figure 13-15 (
This is a scene a little before Te1 in A). In Figure 13-16 (A3), the current prize ball number display 026SH140 that informs the current prize ball number in the upper left, and 026SHOAZ that informs the jackpot symbol.
is displayed, and the right-handed batting notification image 026SHMG containing the words "Right-handed batting" is displayed in the upper right corner, and the total prize pitch number display 026SH130 that informs the total number of prize pitches is displayed, and in the lower right corner, what round is the current round? A round number display 026SH106 is displayed to inform you of the number of rounds.

On the left side of FIG. 13-16, FIG. 13-16 (B3) shows that in the interval period,
A scene in which the movable body 026SH32 moves as a performance effect and is in the second state (tilted state) (for example, the interval period in Figure 13-15 (A) is the interval period between the 5th round and the 6th round). In this case, the scene is between Te2 and Te3 in FIG. 13-15(A). In FIG. 13-16 (B3), a round number display update effect using the star image 026SH32EF02 is being executed. Note that the star image 026SH32EF02 is part of the round number display update effect that acts on the round number display 026SH106, but the star image 026SH32EF02 can also be regarded as an effect of the accessory effect.

On the left side of FIG. 13-16, FIG. 13-16 (C3) shows that during the interval period,
Scene after the round number display 026SH106 is updated (for example, if the interval period in FIG. 13-15(A) indicates the interval period between the 5th round and the 6th round, the scene in FIG. 13-15(A) ) is the scene between Te4 and Te5 of ).

On the left side of FIG. 13-16, FIG. 13-16 (D3) shows a scene where the 6th round is being played as a round game (for example, the interval period in FIG. 13-15 (A) is the 5th round and the 6th round). Figure 13-15 (
This is the scene a little after Te5 in A).

On the right side of FIG. 13-16, FIG. 13-16 (A4) shows a scene where a variable display with sudden certainty (2 round probability variable jackpot) is performed (specifically, Tf0 and Tf0 in FIG. 13-15 (B)). Tf
1). In addition, Figure 13-16 (B4) is a special symbol (for example, "123").
) is a scene in which a temporary stop is displayed (specifically, a scene slightly before Tf1 in FIG. 13-15(B)).

On the right side of FIG. 13-16, FIG. 13-16 (C4) shows a movable body 026 as a role performance.
A scene where the SH32 operates and is in the second state (tilted state) (for example, in Figure 13-15 (B)
) is the scene between Tf1 and Tf2 of ). In FIG. 13-16 (C4), an oval image 026SH32EF03 is displayed as an effect of the accessory production.

On the right side of Fig. 13-16, Fig. 13-16 (D4) shows that based on the fact that the jackpot (2 rounds of variable jackpot) has been achieved, the battle mode (high probability mode) is activated after the jackpot (game state of 2 rounds). This is a screen on which a mode transition image 026SHMDIK is displayed to notify that the mode will enter (transition) to. Although not shown, Figure 13-16 (C4) and Figure 13-1
6 (D4), the temporary stop display of the special symbol (for example, "123") is released,
It is notified that the stop of the special symbol has been confirmed (stop display).

(Regarding the modification regarding the gaming machine related to the characteristic part 026SH)
Next, modifications in FIGS. 13-1 to 13-16 will be described.

(Modification example 1 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above explanation, the setting value is "1" or "2", the setting value is "3" or "4", and the setting value is "5".
or "6", the ratio of determining whether or not to execute the meter effect is different, but the division of the setting values that affect the ratio of determining whether or not to perform the meter effect is the same as above (setting value "1"). ” or “2”, setting value “3” or “4”, setting value “5” or “6”). For example, setting value "1", setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", setting value "5", setting value "
The determination ratio of whether or not to perform the meter production may be set differently for each of the settings ``6'', or the setting value ``1'' may be set differently.
, "2" or "3" and the set value "4", "5" or "6", the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the meter effect may be made different, or the set value "1", "3" ” or “5” and the setting value “2”,
The determination ratio of whether or not to perform the meter effect may be made different between "4" and "6". The same applies to the determination ratio of meter performance patterns.

(Modification example 2 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above explanation, the rate of determining whether to execute the meter effect is different depending on the setting value, but similar to the rate of determining whether to execute the background effect and the rate of determining whether to execute the active display effect, the setting value may be common. good.

(Modification example 3 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above explanation, the execution rate of the role performance when the meter value reaches "4 (MAX)" in the meter performance is different for each meter performance pattern (Figure 13-8 (D)). It may be common regardless of the situation.

(Modification example 4 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above description, the execution rate of the accessory performance when the meter value becomes "4 (MAX)" in the meter performance is the same as the set value, but it may be changed depending on the set value. For example, based on the meter performance pattern and the set value, the meter value in the meter performance is “4 (
The execution rate of the role-playing effect when the meter value reaches ``4 (MAX)'' may be varied, or simply based on the set value, the execution rate of the role-playing effect when the meter value reaches ``4 (MAX)'' in the meter performance. may be different.

(Modification example 5 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above explanation, even if the meter value was "4 (MAX)", there were cases where the role performance was not performed (Figure 13-8 (D)), but in the meter performance, the meter value was "4 (MAX)". 4(
MAX)", the accessory performance may be always performed.

(Variation example 6 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above explanation, the role performance can be executed when the meter value is “4”.
(MAX)" (Figure 13-8 (D)), but the meter value was "4 (MAX)".
” In place of or in addition to the case where the meter value is “2” or the meter value is “3”
In this case, a role-playing effect may be performed.

(Modification example 7 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above explanation, the meter value always changes (updates) in the meter performance when the role performance is performed (Figure 13-8 (D)), but even when the role performance is performed, the meter value is always changed (updated). Similar to the case where the active display does not change in display effects (Figure 13-12 (C)
, FIG. 13-12(D)), the meter value may not change in the meter performance even when the accessory performance is performed.

(Modification example 8 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above explanation, the ratio of determining whether or not to execute the background effect is the same as the setting value (Figure 13-11
(B)), the determination ratio of whether or not to perform the meter effect (FIG. 13-5 (B)) may be changed depending on the set value. The same applies to the determination ratio of the background effect pattern.

(Modification example 9 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above explanation, the execution rate of the accessory effect when the background image becomes the second special mode (green) is the same as the setting value (Figure 13-11 (D)), but it can also be changed depending on the setting value. good. Similarly,
The execution rate of the accessory effect when the background image becomes the third special mode (red) is the same as the set value (FIG. 13-11(E)), but may be changed depending on the set value. For example, the execution rate of the accessory effect may be varied based on the background effect pattern and the set value, or the execution rate of the accessory effect may be varied simply based on the set value.

(Modification example 10 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above explanation, the role effects can be executed in the background effect when the background image becomes the second special mode (green) and when the background image becomes the third special mode (red). Figure 1
3-11(D), FIG. 13-11(E)), instead of or in addition to the above, it is also possible to perform the accessory effect even when the background image becomes the first special mode (yellow). good.

(Modification example 11 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above explanation, even if the background image becomes the second special mode (green) in the background effect, there are cases where the role effect is not performed (Figure 13-11 (D)). When the image is in the second special mode (green), the accessory effect may always be performed.
In addition, in the above explanation, even if the background image becomes the third special mode (red) in the background effect, there are cases where the role effect is not performed (Figure 13-11 (E)). In the case where the background image is in the third special mode (red), the accessory effect may always be performed.

(Modification example 12 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above explanation, the background image always changes in the background effect when the role effect is performed (Figure 13-11 (D), Figure 13-11 (E)); Similarly, the active display may not change even if the active display is performed (Figure 13-1
2(C), FIG. 13-12(D)), the background image may not change in the background effect even when the accessory effect is performed.

(Modification example 13 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above explanation, the determination ratio of the active display effect pattern is the same as the setting value (Fig. 1
3-12 (B)), meter performance pattern determination ratio (Figure 13-6 (A), Figure 13-6 (
B) and FIG. 13-6(C)), it may be changed depending on the set value.

(Modification example 14 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above explanation, the execution rate of the role performance during the first operation period is the same as the set value (Fig. 1
3-12(C)), it may be changed depending on the setting value. Similarly, although the execution rate of the accessory production during the second operation period is the same as the set value (FIG. 13-12(D)), it may be varied depending on the set value. For example, the execution rate of the accessory effect may be varied based on the active display effect pattern and the set value, or the execution rate of the accessory effect may be varied simply based on the set value.

(Modification example 15 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above, an example was explained in which the role effect is executed and the active display changes (Figure 13-1
0 (B), Figure 13-12, Figure 13-13 (B)), instead of or in addition to the execution of the accessory production and the change of the active display, the execution of the accessory production and the change of the pending display. You can also do this.

(Modification example 16 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above, regarding the relationship (execution timing) between the character performance and the meter performance, the character performance starts (the timing when the movable body 026SH32 first moves from the initial position) → the character performance ends (
Although the explanation has been made as follows (timing when the movable body 026SH32 finally stops at the initial position) → meter value update (change) (FIG. 13-3(A)), the execution timing is not limited to this. For example, the sequence may be as follows: start of accessory performance → meter value update (when the meter value becomes one of "2", "3", or "4") → end of accessory performance. Also, update the meter value (for example, the meter value is "4")
)→Start of role play→End of role play.

(Modification example 17 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above, regarding the relationship (execution timing) between the role production and the production during small hit RUSH,
Although the explanation has been made as follows: start of the role play → end of the role play → update of the total number of prize balls due to the winning of the small hit during the small hit RUSH (FIG. 13-3 (B)), the execution timing is not limited to this. For example, the sequence may be as follows: start of the accessory performance → update of the total number of prize balls due to small winnings during the small winning RUSH → end of the accessory performance. Alternatively, the total number of prize balls may be updated by winning a small prize during the small winning RUSH (for example, when the total number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number) → the start of the accessory performance → the end of the accessory performance.

(Modification example 18 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above, regarding the relationship (execution timing) between the role production and the background production, the role production starts →
Although the explanation has been made as follows: end of character production → background image update (change) (FIG. 13-10(A)), the execution timing is not limited to this. For example, start of role production → background image update (when the background image becomes one of the first special mode (yellow), second special mode (green), or third special mode (red))
→ You can also say that the role performance is over. Alternatively, the background image may be updated (for example, when the background image becomes the third special mode (red)) → the start of the accessory performance → the end of the accessory performance.

(Modification example 19 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above, the relationship (execution timing) between the role play and the active display display was explained as follows: start of role play → end of role play → active display update (change) (Figure 13-10)
B)), the execution timing is not limited to this. For example, the sequence may be as follows: start of accessory production → update of active display (for example, when active display changes to the second special mode (red)) → end of accessory production. Alternatively, the active display may be updated (for example, when the active display changes to the second special mode (red)) → the start of the accessory performance → the end of the accessory performance.

(Modification example 20 of characteristic part 026SH)
Above, regarding the relationship (execution timing) between the role production and the performance during the interval period, we explained that the role production begins → the role production ends → the number of rounds during the interval is updated (
13-15(A)), the execution timing is not limited to this. For example, start producing a role →
Update the number of rounds during the interval period (for example, when the actual jackpot is 10 rounds, but it appears to be a 6th round jackpot, when it moves to the 7th round. In other words, when the round is promoted) → It may be said that the role performance is over. Alternatively, the number of rounds during the interval period may be updated → Accessory performance start → Accessory performance end.

(Modification example 21 of characteristic part 026SH)
Above, regarding the relationship (execution timing) between the role play and the sudden jackpot, we explained that the role play starts → the role play ends → the special symbol temporary stop (Figure 13-15 (B)), but the execution The timing is not limited to this. For example, the sequence may be as follows: start of accessory performance → special symbol temporary stop → end of accessory performance. Alternatively, the sequence may be as follows: temporary stop of special symbol → start of accessory performance → end of accessory performance.

(Modification example 22 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above, it has been explained that the movable body 026SH32 operates between the first state (initial state) and the second state (tilted state) in the role performance, but the role excitement production (which is different from the role play) The movable body 026SH32 may be operated as another performance similar to the accessory performance, another performance partially common to the accessory performance, etc.). An example of a role-playing performance is a performance in which the movable body 026SH32 moves a little from the first state to the second state and returns to the first state;
This is an effect in which the movable body 026SH32 begins to vibrate in the first state and pretends to move in the direction of the second state, but the vibration ends without actually moving in the direction of the second state. Note that the role-playing inciting performance may not be a different performance from the role-playing performance, but may be a mode of the role-playing performance.

(Modification example 23 of characteristic part 026SH)
The accessory in the accessory performance in the above explanation is the movable body 026SH32 shown in Figure 13-1.
However, the accessory in the accessory performance is not limited to the movable body 026SH32. Movable body 02
Instead of or in addition to the 6SH32, one or more other accessories may be used to perform the accessory effect.

(Modification example 24 of characteristic part 026SH)
For example, in FIG. 13-8, two objects (meter gauge part 026
Figure 13 shows an example in which the SHMTG meter value and level display (026SHLV) are updated.
9 shows an example in which one object (total prize ball number display 026SH130) is updated by executing the accessory effect, but three or more objects may be updated by executing the accessory effect.

(Modification example 25 of characteristic part 026SH)
In Figure 13-8, multiple targets (meter gauge part 026SHMT
Although an example has been shown in which all of the G meter value and level display (026SHLV) are updated, a part of a plurality of objects may be updated due to execution of accessory production. For example, if the meter value in a meter performance is set to 10 levels ("1" to "10"), the range of meter values "1" to "3" is LEVEL1, and the range of meter values "4" to "6" is LEVEL2.
, the range of meter values "7" and "8" may be set as LEVEL 3, and the range of meter values "9" and "10" may be set as LEVEL 4. In this example, for example, if the meter value changes from "7" to "8" and you execute the accessory effect, the meter value will be updated from "7" to "8", but the level will be changed to "LEVEL 3". If the meter value changes from "7" to "9" and you perform a role production, the meter value will be updated from "7" to "9" and the level will also change to "LE".
The level will be updated as follows: ``VEL3'' → ``LEVEL4''.

(Modification example 26 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above example, in the relationship between role production and meter production, the value (specifically, the meter value) increases as an update corresponding to the execution of the role production. The value may decrease. For example, a countdown performance may be performed, and the remaining number may decrease in the countdown performance in response to the execution of the accessory performance. For example, it may be as follows: count "3" → count "2" → count "1" → start of accessory performance → end of accessory performance → count "0". Furthermore, in a battle performance (for example, a performance in which an ally character wins when the enemy character's physical strength value reaches "0" and is notified of a guaranteed jackpot, etc.), the physical strength value of the enemy character may be reduced. For example, the physical strength value of the enemy character may be "100" → the physical strength value of the enemy character "1" → the start of the performance of the accessory → the end of the performance of the accessory → the physical strength value of the enemy character may be "0".

(Modification example 27 of characteristic part 026SH)
In the above, an example was explained in which the effect (type of effect, presentation mode) of the role production differs depending on the scene (situation) (for example, the oval image 026SH32EF0 in
1. The total prize ball count update image 026SHKSEF in Figure 13-9 (C), the star image 026SH32EF02 in Figure 13-16 (B3)), the effect of the role production may be the same regardless of the scene (situation). . For example, in Figure 13-9(C), the total award pitch count update image 026SHKSE
Instead of F, the oval image 026SH32EF01 of FIG. 13-8(B) may be displayed. For example, the oval image 026SH32EF01 in Figure 13-8(B) and the oval image 026SH32EF01 in Figure 13-16(C
The effect is common to the oval image 026SH32EF03 of 4).

(Modification example 28 of characteristic part 026SH)
In place of or in addition to the performance of characters, images (including cases where they are not displayed such as blackout), sounds,
Effects using light, vibration, a light guide plate, wind (blow), etc. may also be used. That is, in the above example, the role performance and various updates (for example, update of meter value, level, background image, active display, round number display, etc.) were explained, but for example, images, sounds, Effects using one or more of light, vibration, a light guide plate, wind (air blowing), etc. may correspond to various updates.

(Application to other devices)
In addition, although the example applied to a pachinko game machine was described above, it is also applicable to a pachislot machine. For example, a meter effect is executed in a certain state (for example, during a normal game), a background effect is executed in another state (for example, a chance zone where expectations for ART and AT are higher than during a normal game, etc.), In the meter performance and background performance, for example, a character performance is performed using a movable body provided around the liquid crystal display of the pachislot machine, and a meter value in the meter performance is updated in accordance with the execution of the character performance. The background image in the background effect may be updated. Alternatively, for example, during the add-on game during ART, an accessory effect may be executed to update the remaining games, the number of remaining sets, etc. In addition, instead of or in addition to the performance using movable bodies, performances using one or more of images, sounds, lights, vibrations, light guide plates, wind (blowers), etc., or performances using reels (
A so-called reel lock effect) may also be performed.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 026SH)
(Means F1)
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1, a slot machine, etc.) capable of playing a game, comprising a performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing a performance, and the performance execution means is , a change effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-8) that changes the display mode of a predetermined display (for example, the meter value of the meter gauge section 026SHMTG, background image, active display, etc.) in the first situation (for example, reach fluctuation, etc.) The display mode of the predetermined display is a specific mode (for example, when the meter value is "4 (MAX)", the background image changes to red, the active display changes to red, etc.), the first content advantageous to the player (for example, development to super reach, etc.) is notified. and a specific display that is different from the predetermined display (for example, the overall Award pitch count display 0
26SH130, round number display 026SH106, etc.) (for example, adding the number of prize balls resulting from the small hit, adding 1 to the number of rounds, etc.) to create a first content that is different from the first content and is advantageous for the player. 2 (for example, the total number of awarded pitches (or increase in the total number of awarded pitches), progression to the next round, etc.) (for example, the total number of awarded pitches update image 026SHKSEF shown in Figure 13-9 etc. 026SH32E shown in Figure 13-16, etc.
(F02 round number display update effect, etc.), and when the change effect (for example, meter effect, etc.) is executed, and when the predetermined effect (for example, total prize pitch update effect, etc.) is executed.
A specific performance (for example, FIG. 13
-8(B), a game machine characterized in that a role-playing effect for operating a movable body 026SH32 shown in FIG. 13-9(B) is executed.

According to the gaming machine described above, in different situations, a specific performance having at least a part of the performance mode in common is executed, and contents advantageous to the player are notified, so that the player's interest can be improved.

(Means F2)
The gaming machine of the means F1 is easily controlled into an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state, etc.), a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small winning gaming state, etc.), and the special state. A state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) capable of controlling the game state in the special state (for example, the second KT state, etc.)
The second situation is that the game medium passes through a predetermined area in response to being controlled to the special state in the special state (for example, winning a small win during a small win RUSH). As the predetermined effect, the performance execution means displays the specific display (
For example, the display mode of the total prize ball number display 026SH130, etc.) is changed (for example, the number of prize balls due to the winning of the small hit is added) to notify the second content (for example, the total number of prize balls). There may be.

According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to improve interest in a gaming machine that can control an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, a special state different from the advantageous state, and a special state that is easily controlled by the special state.

(Means F3)
In the gaming machine of means F1 or means F2, the specific performance is performed using a movable body for performance (for example,
It may be an effect that moves a movable body 026SH32, etc.).

According to the gaming machine described above, interest can be improved by using the movable body for presentation.

(Means F4)
In the gaming machines of means F1 to F3, the performance execution means is capable of executing an effect performance that enhances the performance effect of the specific performance in response to the execution of the specific performance, and is capable of executing an effect performance that enhances the performance effect of the specific performance, and The effect production that is executed in response to the execution of , and the effect production that is executed in response to the execution of the specific production in the second situation may have a common production mode. As mentioned above, for example, in FIG. 13-9(C), the total award pitch count update image 0
Instead of 26SHKSEF, the oval image 026SH32EF01 of FIG. 13-8(B) may be displayed.

According to the gaming machine described above, there is no confusion due to different performance modes, so it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

(Means F5)
In the gaming machines of means F1 to F3, the performance execution means is capable of executing an effect performance that enhances the performance effect of the specific performance in response to the execution of the specific performance, and is capable of executing an effect performance that enhances the performance effect of the specific performance, and The effect production that is executed in response to the execution of the specific production and the effect production that is executed in response to the execution of the specific production in the second situation are different in at least a part of the production mode. Good too. For example, the oval image 026SH32EF0 in Figure 13-8(B)
1 and the total prize pitch count update image 026SHKSEF of FIG. 13-9(C) are different in at least a part of the presentation mode.

According to the gaming machine described above, since there are various performance modes, it is possible to improve the interest.

(Means F6)
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1, a slot machine, etc.) capable of playing a game, comprising a performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing a performance, and the performance execution means is , a change effect that changes the display mode of a predetermined display (for example, the meter value of the meter gauge section 026SHMTG, a background image, an active display, etc.) (for example, the meter effect shown in FIG. 13-8, etc., FIG. 13-14 (left side)) (the background effect shown in Figure 13-14 (right side), the active display effect shown in Figure 13-14 (right side)), and the display mode of the predetermined display is a specific mode (for example, the meter value is "4 (MAX)" and the background image is red). a special effect that notifies the player of the first content that is advantageous to the player (for example, development of super reach, etc.) in response to a change in the active display to red, etc.), and a special effect that is different from the predetermined display. Display (for example, total prize pitch display 02
6SH130, round number display 026SH106, etc.) (for example, adding the number of prize balls resulting from the small hit winnings, adding 1 to the number of rounds, etc.) to create a first content that is different from the first content and is advantageous to the player. 2 (for example, small winning prize during small winning RUSH, interval period of jackpot game state, etc.) (for example, total prize ball number update image 026SHKSEF shown in Figure 13-9 etc.) Number update effect, 026 shown in Figure 13-16 etc.
SH32EF02's round number display update effect, etc.) can be executed, and when the change effect (for example, meter effect, etc.) is executed, the predetermined effect (for example, total award ball count update effect, etc.) is executed. A specific performance that has at least some performance aspects in common (for example, an accessory performance that moves the movable body 026SH32 shown in FIGS. 13-8(B) and 13-9(B), etc.) A game machine characterized in that the following is executed.

According to the gaming machine described above, since a specific performance is executed and content advantageous to the player is notified, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

(Means F7)
It is a gaming machine capable of playing games, and is equipped with performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120, etc.) that can execute a changing performance in response to the execution of a specific performance, and the changing performance is displayed in a predetermined display ( For example, a first change effect that changes the display mode of the meter value of the meter gauge section 026SHMTG, background image, active display, etc. (for example, the meter effect shown in FIG. 13-8, etc., the meter effect shown in FIG. background effects, active display effects shown in Figure 13-14 (right side), and specific displays different from the predetermined displays (for example, total prize pitch count display 026SH).
130, round number display 026SH106, etc.) A second change effect that changes the display mode (for example, the total award ball number update effect using the total award ball number update image 026SHKSEF shown in Figure 13-9, etc., and the total award ball number update effect shown in Figure 13-16, etc. Round number display update effect using 026SH32EF02, etc.)
The effect execution means changes the display mode of the predetermined display to a specific mode (for example, the meter value changes to "4 (MAX)", the background image changes to red, by executing the first change effect,
In response to the active display changing to red, etc., a special effect is executed to inform the player of a first content advantageous to the player (e.g., development of super reach, etc.), and the second change effect is executed. By changing the display mode of the specific display, a second content that is different from the first content and that is advantageous to the player (for example, a total number of prize balls (or an increase in the total number of prize balls), A game machine characterized by notifying the progress of the game, etc.

According to the gaming machine described above, since a specific performance is executed and content advantageous to the player is notified, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

The embodiment of the gaming machine related to the feature section 026SH has been described above using drawings, etc.
Various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention. Also, all of the parts described as the embodiments are not necessarily essential configurations, and can be omitted as appropriate.

1... Pachinko game machine 2... Game board 3... Game machine frame 4A, 4B... Special symbol display device 5... Image display device 6A... Winning ball device 6B... Variable winning ball device 7... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R... Speaker 9 … Frame LED
10...General winning opening 11...Main board 12...Production control board 13...Audio control board 14...LED control board 15...Relay board 17...Special variable winning ball device 20...Normal symbol display 21...Gate switch 22A, 22B...Start Mouth switch 23...First count switch 24...Second count switch 30...Ball operating handle 31A...Stick controller 31B...Push button 32...Movable body 41...Passing gate 100...Microcomputer for game control 101, 121...ROM
102, 122...RAM
103...CPU
104, 124... Random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120... CPU for production control
123...Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing games,
comprising a performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance and a changing performance corresponding to the specific performance,
The change effect includes a first change effect that changes the display mode of a predetermined display, and a second change effect that changes the display mode of a specific display different from the predetermined display,
The display mode of the predetermined display includes a first predetermined mode, a second predetermined mode, and a specific mode that are different from each other,
The performance execution means executes a special performance that notifies a first content advantageous to the player in response to the fact that the display mode of the predetermined display changes to the specific mode by executing the first change performance. death,
changing the display mode of the specific display by executing the second change effect to notify the player of a second content that is different from the first content and is advantageous to the player;
When the special effect is executed in response to the display mode of the predetermined display changing from the first predetermined mode to the specific mode due to the first change effect; When the special effect is executed in response to the display mode changing from the second predetermined mode to the specific mode, the effect period of the first change effect is the same, and the effect period is the same as when the special effect is executed in response to the change of the display mode from the second predetermined mode to the specific mode, and The degree of advantage of the first content is different,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images